2017 Nissan Rogue | Owner's Manual And Maintenance Information USA

User Manual: 2017-rogue

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 529

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

46325 2c Cover Tweddle Group • PDF Supplied 8/10/2016

GRACOL PROOF on PRODUCTION PAPER

Black + PMS 200

2017 NISSAN ROGUE

2017

ROGUE

OWNER’S MANUAL
and MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

Back Cover

T32-D

Printing : August 2016 (08)
Publication No.: OM0E
0L32U2
OM17EA
0T32U0
Printed in U.S.A.
T00UM-JM03D

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

Front Cover

FOREWORD
Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN
owners. This vehicle is delivered to you with
confidence. It was produced using the latest
techniques and strict quality control.
This manual was prepared to help you understand the operation and maintenance of your
vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles (kilometers) of driving pleasure. Please read through this
manual before operating your vehicle.
A separate Warranty Information Booklet
explains details about the warranties covering your vehicle. The “Maintenance and
schedules” section of this manual explains
details about maintaining and servicing
your vehicle. Additionally, a separate Customer Care/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only)
will explain how to resolve any concerns
you may have with your vehicle, and clarify
your rights under your state’s lemon law.
When you require any service or have any questions, a NISSAN dealer will be glad to assist you
with the extensive resources available to them.
In addition to factory-installed options, your vehicle may also be equipped with additional accessories installed prior to delivery. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for details
concerning the particular accessories with which
your vehicle is equipped. It is important that you
familiarize yourself with all disclosures, warnings,

READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY
cautions and instructions concerning proper use
of such accessories prior to operating the vehicle
and/or accessory. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for details concerning the
particular accessories with which your vehicle is
equipped.

Before driving your vehicle, please read this
Owner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure familiarity with controls and maintenance requirements, assisting you in the safe operation of your
vehicle.

WARNING
IMPORTANT SAFETY
REMINDERS!

INFORMATION

Follow these important driving rules to
help ensure a safe and comfortable trip
for you and your passengers!
● NEVER drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs.
● ALWAYS observe posted speed limits
and never drive too fast for conditions.
● ALWAYS give your full attention to driving
and avoid using vehicle features or taking
other actions that could distract you.
● ALWAYS use your seat belts and appropriate child restraint systems. Pre-teen
children should be seated in the rear seat.
● ALWAYS provide information about the
proper use of vehicle safety features to
all occupants of the vehicle.
● ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual
for important safety information.

For descriptions specified for all-wheel drive
models, an AWD mark is placed at the beginning
of the applicable sections/items.
As with other vehicles with features for
off-road use, failure to operate all-wheel
drive models correctly may result in loss of
control or an accident. For additional information, refer to “Driving safety precautions” in the “Starting and driving” section
of this manual.
ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD DRIVING
This vehicle will handle and maneuver
differently from an ordinary passenger
car because it has a higher center of
gravity for off-road use. As with other
vehicles with features of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may
result in loss of control or an accident.
For additional information, refer to “Onpavement and off-road driving
precautions”, “Avoiding collision and
rollover” and “Driving safety precautions” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE
This vehicle should not be modified.
Modification
could
affect
its
performance, safety or durability and may
even violate governmental regulations. In
addition, damage or performance problems resulting from modifications may
not be covered under NISSAN warranties.

WARNING
Installing an aftermarket On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) plug-in device that uses the
port during normal driving, for example
remote insurance company monitoring,
remote vehicle diagnostics, telematics or
engine reprogramming, may cause interference or damage to vehicle systems. We
do not recommend or endorse the use of
any aftermarket OBD plug-in devices, unless specifically approved by NISSAN. The
vehicle warranty may not cover damage
caused by any aftermarket plug-in device.

WHEN READING THE MANUAL
This manual includes information for all features
and equipment available on this model. Features
and equipment in your vehicle may vary depending on model, trim level, options selected, order,
date of production, region or availability. Therefore, you may find information about features or
equipment that are not included or installed on
your vehicle.
All information, specifications and illustrations in
this manual are those in effect at the time of
printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change
specifications, performance, design or component suppliers without notice and without obligation. From time to time, NISSAN may update or
revise this manual to provide Owners with the
most accurate information currently available.
Please carefully read and retain with this manual
all revision updates sent to you by NISSAN to
ensure you have access to accurate and up-todate information regarding your vehicle. Current
versions of vehicle Owner’s Manuals and any
updates can also be found in the Owner section
of
the
NISSAN
website
at
https://owners.nissanusa.com/nowners/
navigation/manualsGuide. If you have questions concerning any information in your Owner’s
Manual, contact NISSAN Consumer Affairs. For
contact information, refer to the NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM page in this Owner’s
Manual.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT
THIS MANUAL
You will see various symbols in this manual. They
are used in the following ways:

WARNING
This is used to indicate the presence of a
hazard that could cause death or serious
personal injury. To avoid or reduce the
risk, the procedures must be followed
precisely.

CAUTION
This is used to indicate the presence of a
hazard that could cause minor or moderate personal injury or damage to your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures must be followed carefully.

APD1005

If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do this”
or “Do not let this happen.”

If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustration,
it means the arrow points to the front of the vehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these
indicate movement or action.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these
call attention to an item in the illustration.

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING
WARNING
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,
and certain vehicle components contain or
emit chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles
and certain products of component wear
contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE
ADVISORY
Some vehicle parts, such as lithium batteries, may contain perchlorate material. The
following advisory is provided: “Perchlorate Material – special handling may apply.
For additional information, refer to
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/”.

BLUETOOTH® is a
trademark owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
and licensed to
Visteon and Bosch.
SiriusXM® services
require a subscription
after trial period and
are sold separately or
as a package. The
satellite service is
available only in the
48 contiguous USA
and DC. SiriusXM®
satellite service is
also available in
Canada; see
www.siriusxm.ca.

© 2016 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA, INC.
All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’s
Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval
system, or transmitted in any form, or by any
means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying,
recording or otherwise, without the prior written
permission of Nissan North America, Inc.

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM
NISSAN CARES . . .
Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are
our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.
However, if there is something that your NISSAN
dealer cannot assist you with or you would like to
provide NISSAN directly with comments or
questions, please contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department using our toll-free
number:
For U.S. customers
1-800-NISSAN-1
(1-800-647-7261)
For Canadian customers
1-800-387-0122

The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for the
following information:
– Your name, address, and telephone number
– Vehicle identification number (attached to the
top of the instrument panel on the driver’s
side)
– Date of purchase
– Current odometer reading
– Your NISSAN dealer’s name
– Your comments or questions
OR

You can write to NISSAN with the information at:
For U.S. customers
Nissan North America, Inc.
Consumer Affairs Department
P.O. Box 685003
Franklin, TN 37068-5003
or via e-mail at:
nnaconsumeraffairs@nissan-usa.com
For Canadian customers
Nissan Canada Inc.
5290 Orbitor Drive
Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5
or via e-mail at:
information.centre@nissancanada.com
If you prefer, visit us at:
www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers) or
www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers)

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

Table of Contents
Illustrated table of contents

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Appearance and care

Do-it-yourself

Maintenance and schedules

Technical and consumer information

Index

0 Illustrated table of contents

Air bags, seat belts and child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-2
Exterior front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-3
Exterior rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-4
Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-5

Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-6
Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-8
Warning and indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-9

AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD
RESTRAINTS
1.
2.

Supplemental air bags (P. 1-47)
Occupant classification sensor (weight
sensor) (P. 1-47)
3. Front Seat belt with pretensioner(s) and
shoulder heights adjuster (P. 1-15,
1-47)
4. Head restraints/headrests (P. 1-10)
5. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bag (P. 1-47)
6. 2nd row center position top tether strap
(located on ceiling) (P. 1-25)
7. Folding 3rd row bench (if so equipped)
(P. 1-2)
8. 2nd row outboard seat top tether strap
anchor (located on bottom of seatback)
(P. 1-25)
9. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) (P. 1-25)
10. Folding 2nd row bench (P. 1-2)
11. Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag (P. 1-47)
12. Seats (P. 1-2)
Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

LII2305

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

EXTERIOR FRONT
1.

Front view camera (if so equipped)
(P. 4-17)
2. Engine hood (P. 3-26)
3. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-36)
Wiper blades (P. 8-16)
4. Windshield (P. 8-16)
Windshield-washer fluid (P. 8-10)
5. Power windows (P. 2-57)
6. Door locks (P. 3-5)
NISSAN Intelligent Key®
(if so equipped) (P. 3-11)
NISSAN Jackknife key (if so equipped)
(P. 3-7)
Keys (P. 3-2)
7. Mirrors (P. 3-39)
Side view camera (if so equipped)
(P. 4-17)
8. Tire pressure (P. 8-29)
Flat tire (P. 6-3)
Tire chains (P. 8-29)
9. Fog light switch (if so equipped)
(P. 2-39)
Daytime running light system (P. 2-39)
10. Headlight and turn signal switch
(P. 2-39)
Replacing bulbs (P. 8-26)
LII2493

Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

EXTERIOR REAR
1.
2.
3.
4.

5.
6.
7.

Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-36)
Antenna (P. 4-43)
Child safety rear door lock (P. 3-5)
Fuel-filler door (P. 3-34)
Fuel-filler cap (P. 3-34)
Fuel recommendation (P. 10-2)
Replacing bulbs (P. 8-26)
Rearview camera (P. 4-11, 4-17)
Liftgate release (P. 3-27)

Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

LII2494

0-4 Illustrated table of contents

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
1. Glove box (P. 2-49)
2. Map lights (P. 2-62)
3. Power panoramic moonroof
(if so equipped) (P. 2-59)
4. Console box (P. 2-49)
5. Luggage hooks (P. 2-49)
6. Center armrest (2nd row) (P. 1-2)
7. Cup holders (P. 2-49)
8. Sun visors (P. 3-37)
Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

LII2515

Illustrated table of contents 0-5

INSTRUMENT PANEL
1.
2.
3.

4.
5.

6.
7.

8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
LII2516

0-6 Illustrated table of contents

Vent (P. 4-32)
Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn
signal switch (P. 2-39)
Meters and gauges (P. 2-4)
Warning and indicator lights (P. 2-10)
Vehicle information display (P. 2-19)
Wiper and washer switch, rear wiper
washer switch (P. 2-36)
Ignition switch (if so equipped)
(P. 5-13)
Push-button ignition switch
(if so equipped) (P. 5-16)
Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 6-2)
Radio (P. 4-43)
Navigation system* (if so equipped)
(P. 4-4)
Front passenger supplemental air bag
(P. 1-47)
Glove box (P. 2-49)
Heater and air conditioning controls
(P. 4-33)
Power outlet (P. 2-46)
Shift lever (P. 5-21)
Auxiliary jack (P. 4-64)
USB port (P. 4-64)
Front passenger air bag status light
(P. 1-47)

15.

16.
17.
18.
19.
20.

21.

Cruise control main/set switches
(if so equipped) (P. 5-44)
Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)
switches (if so equipped) (P. 5-46)
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
(P. 4-82, 4-95)
Driver supplemental air bag (P. 1-47)
Horn (P. 2-43)
Tilt and telescopic steering (P. 3-37)
Control panel and vehicle information
display switches (P. 2-19)
Hood release (P. 3-26)
Fuel door release (P. 3-34)
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF
switch (P. 2-45)
SPORT mode switch (P. 5-25)
ECO mode switch (P. 5-26)
Power liftgate switch (if so equipped)
(P. 3-27)
Power liftgate main switch
(if so equipped) (P. 3-27)
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) lock switch
(if so equipped) (P. 2-46)
Instrument brightness control (P. 2-39)
Twin trip odometer reset switch (P. 2-4)

*: Refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual (if so equipped).
Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

Illustrated table of contents 0-7

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS
QR25DE engine

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.

Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-4)
Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-6)
Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-9)
Battery (P. 8-10)
Air cleaner (P. 8-15)
Fuse/Fusible link box (P. 8-19)
Radiator cap (P. 8-4)
Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-6)
Drive belt location (P. 8-13)
Windshield-washer fluid reservoir
(P. 8-10)

Engine cover removed for clarity.
Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

LDI2809

0-8 Illustrated table of contents

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

Warning
light

Name

Page

Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS) warning light

2-11

Brake warning light

Warning
light

Name

Page

Forward Emergency
Braking (FEB) system warning light (if
so equipped)

2-12

Forward Emergency
Braking (FEB) with
pedestrian detection
system warning light
(if so equipped)

2-12

Page
2-16

2-14

2-16

2-14

Front fog light indicator light (if so
equipped)

2-16

Power steering
warning light

2-15

Front passenger air
bag status light

2-15

High beam assist
indicator light
(green) (if so
equipped)

2-16

Seat belt warning
light and chime
Supplemental air
bag warning light

2-15

High beam indicator
light (blue)

2-16

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

2-16

Security indicator
light

2-17

2-12

Low windshieldwasher fluid warning
light (if so equipped)
Master warning light
or

2-12

Name
All-Wheel Drive
(AWD) LOCK indicator light (if so
equipped)

Low tire pressure
warning light

2-11

Charge warning
light

Indicator
light

Illustrated table of contents 0-9

Indicator
light

Name

Page

Side light and headlight indicator light
(green)

2-18

Slip indicator light

2-17

SPORT mode indicator light

2-18

Turn signal/hazard
indicator lights

2-18

Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC) OFF
indicator light

2-18

0-10 Illustrated table of contents

1 Safety—Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Front manual seat adjustment
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Front power seat adjustment
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
2nd row bench seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Flexible seating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Head restraints/headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Adjustable head restraint/headrest
components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Non-adjustable head restraint/headrest
components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Precautions on seat belt usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Injured persons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Three-point type seat belt with retractor . . . . . . . . . . 1-18

Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Infants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Small children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Rear-facing child restraint installation using
LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
Rear-facing child restraint installation using
the seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
Forward-facing child restraint installation
using LATCH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
Forward-facing child restraint installation
using the seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-47
Precautions on SRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-47
Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-65
Supplemental air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-65

SEATS
● Do not leave children unattended inside
the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls or make the
vehicle move. Unattended children
could become involved in serious
accidents.

ARS1152

WARNING
● Do not ride in a moving vehicle when
the seatback is reclined. This can be
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not
be against your body. In an accident,
you could be thrown into it and receive
neck or other serious injuries. You
could also slide under the lap belt and
receive serious internal injuries.

● For the most effective protection when
the vehicle is in motion, the seat should
be upright. Always sit well back and
upright in the seat with both feet on the
floor and adjust the seat properly. For
additional information, refer to “Precautions on seat belt usage” in this
section.
● After adjustment, gently rock in the seat
to make sure it is securely locked.

1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

● To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave
children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in
your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm
day can quickly become high enough to
cause a significant risk of injury or
death to people and pets.
● Do not adjust the driver’s seat while
driving so full attention may be given to
vehicle operation. The seat may move
suddenly and could cause loss of control of the vehicle.
● The seatback should not be reclined
any more than needed for comfort. Seat
belts are most effective when the passenger sits well back and straight up in
the seat. If the seatback is reclined, the
risk of sliding under the lap belt and
being injured is increased.

CAUTION
When adjusting the seat positions, be
sure not to contact any moving parts to
avoid possible injuries and/or damage.

FRONT MANUAL SEAT
ADJUSTMENT (if so equipped)
Your vehicle seats can be adjusted manually. For
additional information about adjusting the seats,
refer to the steps outlined in this section.

LRS2160

LRS2161

Forward and backward

Reclining

Pull the center of the bar up and hold it while you
slide the seat forward or backward to the desired
position. Release the bar to lock the seat in
position.

To recline the seatback, pull the lever up and lean
back. To bring the seatback forward, pull the lever
up and lean your body forward. Release the lever
to lock the seatback in position.
The reclining feature allows adjustment of the
seatback for occupants of different sizes for
added comfort and to help obtain proper seat
belt fit. For additional information, refer to “Precautions on seat belt usage” in this section. Also,
the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants
to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the shift
lever is in the P (Park) position.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

LRS2202

Seat lifter (driver’s seat)
Pull up or push down the adjusting lever to adjust
the seat height until the desired position is
achieved.

LRS2662

FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT
(if so equipped)
Operating tips
● The power seat motor has an auto-reset
overload protection circuit. If the motor
stops during operation, wait 30 seconds
then reactivate the switch.
● Do not operate the power seat switch for a
long period of time when the engine is off.
This will discharge the battery.

1-4 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Forward and backward
Moving the switch forward or backward will slide
the seat forward or backward to the desired
position.

Reclining
Move the recline switch backward until the desired angle is obtained. To bring the seatback
forward again, move the switch forward and
move your body forward. The seatback will move
forward.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of the
seatback for occupants of different sizes for
added comfort and to help obtain proper seat
belt fit. For additional information, refer to “Precautions on seat belt usage” in this section. Also,
the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants
to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the shift
lever is in P (Park).

LRS2784

LRS2270

Seat lifter (driver’s seat)

Lumbar support (driver’s seat)

Push the switch up or down to achieve desired
seat height.

The lumbar support feature provides adjustable
lower back support to the driver. Move the switch
forward or backward to adjust the seatback lumbar area.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5

The recline feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for added
comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit. For
additional information, refer to “Precautions on
seat belt usage” in this section. Also, the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants to rest
when the vehicle is stopped and the shift lever is
in P (Park).

WARNING
● After adjustment, gently rock in the seat
to make sure it is securely locked.
LRS2717

Outboard seats

2ND ROW BENCH SEAT
ADJUSTMENT
Forward and backward
1 up and hold it while
Pull the center of the bar 䊊
you slide the seat forward or backward to the
desired position. Release the bar to lock the seat
in position.

Reclining
2
To recline the seatback, pull up on the lever 䊊
and lean back. To bring the seatback forward, pull
2 up and lean your body forward.
the lever 䊊
Release the lever to lock the seatback in position.

1-6 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS2713

ARMRESTS
The 2nd row center armrest is locked in the up
position. To lower the armrest, pull on the armrest
strap that is located in the armrest pivot area.
To return the armrest to the up position, pull up on
the armrest until it is locked in the up position.

FLEXIBLE SEATING
WARNING
● Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo
area or on the rear seats when they are
in the fold-down position. In a collision,
people riding in these areas without
proper restraints are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed.
● Do not allow people to ride in any area
of your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone
in your vehicle is in a seat and using a
seat belt properly.
● Do not allow more than one person to
use the same seat belt.
● Do not fold down the rear seats when
occupants are in the rear seat area or
any luggage is on the rear seats.
– Make sure that the seat path is clear
before moving the seat.
– Be careful not to allow hands or feet
to get caught or pinched in the seat.

● Head restraints/headrests should be
adjusted properly as they may provide
significant protection against injury in
an accident. Always replace and adjust
them properly if they have been removed for any reason.
● If the head restraints/headrests are removed for any reason, they should be
securely stored to prevent them from
causing injury to passengers or damage
to the vehicle in case of sudden braking
or an accident.
● When returning the seatbacks to the
upright position, be certain they are
completely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured,
passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop.
● Properly secure all cargo to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not
place cargo higher than the seatbacks.
In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured
cargo could cause personal injury.

LRS2752

Accessing the 3rd row seats (if so
equipped)
The 3rd row can be accessed from outside the
vehicle by using the seatback release lever located on the 2nd row seatback. To access the
3rd row from outside the vehicle:
1. Lower or remove the 2nd row head
restraints/headrests and store them properly so they are not loose in the vehicle. For
additional
information
about
head
restraint/headrest removal and adjustment,
refer to “Head restraints/headrests” in this
section.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7

2. Stow the 2nd row seat belts in the seat belt
hooks found on the sides of the vehicle.

3. To return the 2nd row bench seats to a
seating position, push up on the seatback
until it latches in place.

A
3. Lift up on the seatback release lever 䊊
located on the 2nd row seatback and push
the seatback forward. The seatback will stop
at a 45° angle and the slide lock will disengage. This allows the entire seat to slide
forward and an occupant to enter/exit the
3rd row.

4. To return the 2nd row bench seats to a
seating position, push up on the seatback
until it latches in place.
LRS2753

Folding the 2nd row bench seat (for
vehicles equipped with 3rd row seats)
To fold the 2nd row bench seat flat for maximum
cargo hauling in vehicles equipped with a 3rd row
seat:
1. Follow steps 1–3 in “Accessing the 3rd row
seats” in this section to begin folding the
seat.
B on the lower side of the
2. Pull the strap 䊊
outboard seats to fold the 2nd row seats
completely flat.

1-8 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

2. Stow the 2nd row seat belts in the seat belt
hooks found on the sides of the vehicle.
A on
3. Lift up on the seatback release lever 䊊
the top of the outboard seats to fold the
seatbacks flat.

4. To return the 2nd row bench seats to a
seating position, push up on the seatback
until it latches in place.

LRS2754

Folding the 2nd row bench seat (for
vehicles not equipped with 3rd row
seats)
To fold the 2nd row bench seat flat for maximum
cargo hauling in vehicles not equipped with 3rd
row seats:
1. Lower or remove the 2nd row head
restraints/headrests and store them properly so they are not loose in the vehicle. For
additional
information
about
head
restraint/headrest removal and adjustment,
refer to “Head restraints/headrests” in this
section.

LRS2348

Folding the 3rd row seats (if so
equipped)
To fold the 3rd row seats flat for maximum cargo
capacity:
1. Make sure the head restraints/headrests are
all the way down.
1 to release the seat.
2. Pull the strap 䊊

3. Once released, push the seatback forward
2 .
䊊

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9

HEAD RESTRAINTS/HEADRESTS
To return the 3rd row seats to a seating position:
1 to raise each seat1. Use the pull straps 䊊
back. Pull back until the seatback latches
into position. Make sure to properly raise
each seatback to an upright and secured position.

WARNING
When the seat is returned to the normal
seating
position,
the
head
restraints/headrests must be returned to
the upright position to properly protect
vehicle occupants.

WARNING
Head restraints/headrests supplement
the other vehicle safety systems. They may
provide additional protection against injury in certain rear end collisions. Adjustable head restraints/headrests must be
adjusted properly, as specified in this section. Check the adjustment after someone
else uses the seat. Do not attach anything
to the head restraint/headrest stalks or
remove the head restraint/headrest. Do
not use the seat if the head
restraint/headrest has been removed. If
the head restraint/headrest was removed,
reinstall and properly adjust the head
restraint/headrest before an occupant
uses the seating position. Failure to follow these instructions can reduce the effectiveness
of
the
head
restraints/headrests. This may increase
the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision.

LRS2403

2nd row seating
The illustration shows the seating positions
equipped with head restraints/headrests.
䉱 Indicates the seating position is equipped with
a head restraint.
䡲 Indicates the seating position is equipped with
a headrest.
+ Indicates the seating position is not equipped
with a head restraint or headrest (if applicable).
● Your vehicle is equipped with a head
restraint/headrest that may be integrated,
adjustable or non-adjustable.

1-10 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

– If your ear position is still higher than the
recommended alignment, place the head
restraint/headrest at the highest position.
● If the head restraint/headrest has been removed, ensure that it is reinstalled and
locked in place before riding in that designated seating position.

LRS2308

3rd row seating (if so equipped)
● Adjustable head restraints/headrests have
multiple notches along the stalk(s) to lock
them in a desired adjustment position.
● The
non-adjustable
head
restraints/headrests have a single locking
notch to secure them to the seat frame.
● Proper Adjustment:

LRS2300

ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT/
HEADREST COMPONENTS
1. Removable head restraint/headrest
2. Multiple notches
3. Lock knob
4. Stalks

– For the adjustable type, align the head
restraint/headrest so the center of your
ear is approximately level with the center
of the head restraint/headrest.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11

5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head
restraint/headrest before an occupant uses
the seating position.

LRS2299

NON-ADJUSTABLE HEAD
RESTRAINT/HEADREST
COMPONENTS
1. Removable head restraint/headrest

LRS2302

REMOVE
Use the following procedure to remove the head
restraint/headrest:

2. Single notch

1. Pull the head restraint/headrest up to the
highest position.

3. Lock knob

2. Push and hold the lock knob.

4. Stalks

3. Remove the head restraint/headrest from
the seat.
4. Store the head restraint/headrest properly in
a secure place so it is not loose in the
vehicle.

1-12 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS2303

INSTALL
1. Align the head restraint/headrest stalks with
the holes in the seat. Make sure that the
head restraint/headrest is facing the correct
direction. The stalk with the notch (notches)
1 must be installed in the hole with the lock
䊊
2 .
knob 䊊

WRS0134

LRS2351

ADJUST

For non-adjustable head restraint/headrest

For adjustable head restraint/headrest

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is positioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch
before riding in that designated seating position.

Adjust the head restraint/headrest so the center
is level with the center of your ears. If your ear
position is still higher than the recommended
alignment, place the head restraint/headrest at
the highest position.

2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the
head restraint/headrest down.
3. Properly adjust the head restraint/headrest
before an occupant uses the seating position.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13

LRS2305

LRS2306

Raise

Lower

To raise the head restraint/headrest, pull it up.

To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push
the head restraint/headrest down.

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is positioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch
before riding in that designated seating position.

1-14 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SEAT BELTS

SSS0136

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT
USAGE
If you are wearing your seat belt properly adjusted and you are sitting upright and well back in
your seat with both feet on the floor, your chances
of being injured or killed in a collision and/or the
severity of injury may be greatly reduced.
NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your
passengers to buckle up every time you drive,
even if your seating position includes a supplemental air bag.
Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories specify that seat belts be worn at
all times when a vehicle is being driven.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15

SSS0134

WARNING
● Every person who drives or rides in this
vehicle should use a seat belt at all
times. Children should be in the rear
seats and in an appropriate restraint.

1-16 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0016

WARNING
● The seat belt should be properly adjusted to a snug fit. Failure to do so may
reduce the effectiveness of the entire
restraint system and increase the
chance or severity of injury in an accident. Serious injury or death can occur if
the seat belt is not worn properly.

● Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely
fastened to the proper buckle.
● Do not wear the seat belt inside out or
twisted. Doing so may reduce its
effectiveness.
● Do not allow more than one person to
use the same seat belt.
● Never carry more people in the vehicle
than there are seat belts.

SSS0014

WARNING
● Always route the shoulder belt over
your shoulder and across your chest.
Never put the belt behind your back,
under your arm or across your neck. The
belt should be away from your face and
neck, but not falling off your shoulder.
● Position the lap belt as low and snug as
possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE
WAIST. A lap belt worn too high could
increase the risk of internal injuries in
an accident.

● If the seat belt warning light glows continuously while the ignition is placed in
the ON position with all doors closed
and all seat belts fastened, it may indicate a malfunction in the system. Have
the system checked. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
● No changes should be made to the seat
belt system. For example, do not modify
the seat belt, add material, or install
devices that may change the seat belt
routing or tension. Doing so may affect
the operation of the seat belt system.
Modifying or tampering with the seat
belt system may result in serious personal injury.

● Once seat belt pretensioner(s) have activated, they cannot be reused and must
be replaced together with the retractor.
It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
● All seat belt assemblies, including retractors and attaching hardware, should
be inspected after any collision. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service. NISSAN recommends that all seat belt assemblies in
use during a collision be replaced unless the collision was minor and the
belts show no damage and continue to
operate properly. Seat belt assemblies
not in use during a collision should also
be inspected and replaced if either
damage or improper operation is noted.
● All child restraints and attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision. Always follow the restraint
manufacturer’s inspection instructions
and replacement recommendations.
The child restraints should be replaced
if they are damaged.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17

PREGNANT WOMEN
NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use
seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug and
always position the lap belt as low as possible
around the hips, not the waist. Place the shoulder
belt over your shoulder and across your chest.
Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your abdominal area. Contact your doctor for specific
recommendations.

INJURED PERSONS
LRS0786

SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT
Both the driver’s and passenger’s front seats are
equipped with a seat belt warning light. The
warning light, located on the instrument panel,
will show the status of the driver and passenger
seat belt.
NOTE:
The front passenger seat belt warning light
will not light up if the seat is not occupied.

NISSAN recommends that injured persons use
seat belts. Check with your doctor for specific
recommendations.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT
WITH RETRACTOR
WARNING
● Every person who drives or rides in this
vehicle should use a seat belt at all
times. Children should be in the rear
seats and in an appropriate restraint.

For additional information, refer to “Warning
lights, indicator lights and audible reminders” in
the “Instruments and controls” section of this
manual.

1-18 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

● Do not ride in a moving vehicle when
the seatback is reclined. This can be
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not
be against your body. In an accident,
you could be thrown into it and receive
neck or other serious injuries. You
could also slide under the lap belt and
receive serious internal injuries.
● For the most effective protection when
the vehicle is in motion, the seat should
be upright. Always sit well back and
upright in the seat with both feet on the
floor and adjust the seat belt properly.
● Do not allow children to play with the
seat belts. Most seating positions are
equipped with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat
belt becomes wrapped around a child’s
neck with the ALR mode activated, the
child can be seriously injured or killed if
the seat belt retracts and becomes
tight. This can occur even if the vehicle
is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to
release the child. If the seat belt cannot
be unbuckled or is already unbuckled,
release the child by cutting the seat belt
with a suitable tool (such as a knife or
scissors) to release the seat belt.

LRS2160

Manual front seat shown (if so equipped)

LRS2662

Power front seat shown (if so equipped)

Fastening the seat belts
1. Adjust the seat. For additional information,
refer to “Seats” in this section.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19

freedom of movement in the seat. The ELR locks
the seat belt when the vehicle slows down rapidly
or during certain impacts.
The ALR mode (child restraint mode) locks the
seat belt for child restraint installation.
When the ALR mode is activated, the seat belt
cannot be extended again until the seat belt
tongue is detached from the buckle and fully
retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode
after the seat belt fully retracts. For additional
information, refer to “Child restraints” in this section.
LRS2674

LRS2675

2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor
A until
and insert the tongue into the buckle 䊊
you hear and feel the latch engage.

3. Position the lap belt portion low and snug
B as shown.
on the hips 䊊

● The retractor is designed to lock during a sudden stop or on impact. A
slow pulling motion permits the seat
belt to move and allows you some
freedom of movement in the seat.
● If the seat belt cannot be pulled from
its fully retracted position, firmly pull
the belt and release it. Then
smoothly pull the belt out of the retractor.

4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the
C . Be sure
retractor to take up extra slack 䊊
the shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder and across your chest.
The front passenger seat and the rear seating
positions’ three-point seat belts have two modes
of operation:
● Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
● Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
The ELR mode allows the seat belt to extend and
retract to allow the driver and passengers some

1-20 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

The ALR mode should be used only for
child restraint installation. During normal
seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR mode
should not be activated. If it is activated, it
may cause uncomfortable seat belt tension. It can also change the operation of
the front passenger air bag. For additional
information, refer to “Front passenger air
bag and status light” in this section.

WARNING
When fastening the seat belts, be certain
that the seatbacks are completely secured
in the latched position. If they are not
completely secured, passengers may be
injured in an accident or sudden stop.

To increase your confidence in the seat belts,
check the operation as follows:
● Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward
quickly. The retractor should lock and restrict further belt movement.
If the retractor does not lock during this check,
get the system checked. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service or to
learn more about seat belt operation.

WRS0139

Unfastening the seat belts
To unfasten the seat belt, press the button on the
1 . The seat belt automatically retracts.
buckle 䊊

Checking seat belt operation
Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt
movement by two separate methods:
● When the seat belt is pulled quickly from the
retractor
● When the vehicle slows down rapidly

LRS0242

Shoulder belt height adjustment (front
seats)
The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best for you. For additional
information, refer to “Precautions on seat belt
usage” in this section. To adjust, pull out the
1 and move the shoulder belt
adjustment button 䊊
2 , so the belt
anchor to the desired position 䊊
passes over the center of the shoulder. The belt
should be away from your face and neck, but not
falling off your shoulder. Release the adjustment
button to lock the shoulder belt anchor into position.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21

● 2nd and 3rd row seating position

WARNING

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for assistance with purchasing an extender if an
extender is required.

● After adjustment, release the adjustment button and try to move the shoulder belt anchor up and down to make
sure it is securely fixed in position.

WARNING

● The shoulder belt anchor height should
be adjusted to the position best for you.
Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire restraint system
and increase the chance or severity of
injury in an accident.

● Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, made
by the same company which made the
original equipment seat belts, should
be used with NISSAN seat belts.

LRS2157

3rd row shown; 2nd row similar

Seat belt hook
When the seat belt is not in use and when folding
down the rear seats, hook the rear seat belts on
the seat belt hooks.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS
If, because of body size or driving position, it is
not possible to properly fit the lap/shoulder belt
and fasten it, an extender that is compatible with
the installed seat belts is available for purchase.
The extender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm)
of length and are available for the:
● Driver and front passenger seating position

1-22 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

● Adults and children who can use the
standard seat belt should not use an
extender. Such unnecessary use could
result in serious personal injury in the
event of an accident.
● Never use seat belt extenders to install
child restraints. If the child restraint is
not secured properly, the child could be
seriously injured or killed in a collision
or a sudden stop.

CHILD SAFETY
SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE
● To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a
mild soap solution or any solution recommended for cleaning upholstery or carpet.
Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat
belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow the
seat belts to retract until they are completely
dry.
● If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt
guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat
belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder
belt guide with a clean, dry cloth.
● Periodically check to see that the seat
belt and the metal components, such as
buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires
and anchors, work properly. If loose parts,
deterioration, cuts or other damage on the
webbing is found, the entire seat belt assembly should be replaced.

WARNING
Do not allow children to play with the seat
belts. Most seating positions are
equipped with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat belt
becomes wrapped around a child’s neck
with the ALR mode activated, the child can
be seriously injured or killed if the seat
belt retracts and becomes tight. This can
occur even if the vehicle is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to release the child. If
the seat belt cannot be unbuckled or is
already unbuckled, release the child by
cutting the seat belt with a suitable tool
(such as a knife or scissors) to release the
seat belt.
Children need adults to help protect them.
They need to be properly restrained.
In addition to the general information in this
manual, child safety information is available from
many other sources, including doctors, teachers,
government traffic safety offices, and community
organizations. Every child is different, so be sure
to learn the best way to transport your child.

● Forward-facing child restraints
● Booster seats
The proper restraint depends on the child’s size.
Generally, infants up to about 1 year and less
than 20 lbs (9 kg) should be placed in rear-facing
child restraints. Forward-facing child restraints
are available for children who outgrow rearfacing child restraints and are at least 1 year old.
Booster seats are used to help position a vehicle
lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no longer
use a forward-facing child restraint.

WARNING
Infants and children need special protection. The vehicle’s seat belts may not fit
them properly. The shoulder belt may
come too close to the face or neck. The lap
belt may not fit over their small hip bones.
In an accident, an improperly fitting seat
belt could cause serious or fatal injury.
Always use appropriate child restraints.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories require the use of approved child restraints
for infants and small children. For additional information, refer to “Child restraints” in this section.

There are three basic types of child restraint
systems:
● Rear-facing child restraints

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23

A child restraint may be secured in the vehicle by
using either the LATCH (Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren) system or with the vehicle
seat belt. For additional information, refer to
“Child restraints” in this section.
NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens
and children be restrained in the rear seat.
Studies show that children are safer when
properly restrained in the rear seat than in
the front seat.
This is especially important because your
vehicle has a supplemental restraint system (air bag system) for the front passenger. For additional information, refer to
“Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)” in
this section.

INFANTS
Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed
in a rear-facing child restraint. NISSAN recommends that infants be placed in child restraints
that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards. You should choose a child restraint
that fits your vehicle and always follow the manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use.

SMALL CHILDREN
Children that are over 1 year old and weigh at least
20 lbs (9 kg) should remain in a rear-facing child
restraint as long as possible up to the height or
weight limit of the child restraint. Children who
outgrow the height or weight limit of the rear-facing
child restraint and are at least 1 year old should be
secured in a forward-facing child restraint with a
harness. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions
for minimum and maximum weight and height recommendations. NISSAN recommends that small
children be placed in child restraints that comply
with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. You
should choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle
and always follow the manufacturer’s instructions
for installation and use.

LARGER CHILDREN
Children should remain in a forward-facing child
restraint with a harness until they reach the maximum height or weight limit allowed by the child
restraint manufacturer.
Once a child outgrows the height or weight limit
of the harness-equipped forward-facing child restraint, NISSAN recommends that the child be
placed in a commercially available booster seat to
obtain proper seat belt fit. For a seat belt to fit
properly, the booster seat should raise the child

1-24 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

so that the shoulder belt is properly positioned
across the chest and the top, middle portion of
the shoulder. The shoulder belt should not cross
the neck or face and should not fall off the shoulder. The lap belt should lie snugly across the
lower hips or upper thighs, not the abdomen. A
booster seat can only be used in seating positions that have a three-point type seat belt. The
booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and have
a label certifying that it complies with Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
A booster seat should be used until the child can
pass the seat belt fit test below:
● Are the child’s back and hips against the
vehicle seatback?
● Is the child able to sit without slouching?
● Do the child’s knees bend easily over the
front edge of the seat with feet flat on the
floor?
● Can the child safely wear the seat belt (lap
belt low and snug across the hips and shoulder belt across mid-chest and shoulder)?
● Is the child able to use the properly adjusted
head restraint/headrest?
● Will the child be able to stay in position for
the entire ride?

CHILD RESTRAINTS

WARNING
Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat
and do not allow a child in the cargo area.
The child could be seriously injured or
killed in a sudden stop or collision.

LRS2690

If you answered no to any of these questions, the
child should remain in a booster seat using a
three-point type seat belt.
NOTE:
Laws in some communities may follow different guidelines. Check local and state
regulations to confirm your child is using
the correct restraint system before traveling.

ARS1098

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD
RESTRAINTS
WARNING
● Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use and installation of child restraints could result in
serious injury or death of a child or
other passengers in a sudden stop or
collision:
– The child restraint must be used and
installed properly. Always follow all
of the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for installation and use.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25

– NISSAN recommends that all child
restraints be installed in the rear
seat. Studies show that children are
safer when properly restrained in the
rear seat than in the front seat. If you
must install a forward-facing child
restraint in the front seat, refer to
“Forward-facing child restraint installation using the seat belts” in this
section.

WRS0256

– Infants and children should never be
held on anyone’s lap. Even the strongest adult cannot resist the forces of
a collision.
– Do not put a seat belt around both a
child and another passenger.

– Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System, never install a rearfacing child restraint in the front seat.
An inflating air bag could seriously
injure or kill a child. A rear-facing
child restraint must only be used in
the rear seat.
– Be sure to purchase a child restraint
that will fit the child and vehicle.
Some child restraints may not fit
properly in your vehicle.

– Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads
imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are
they to be used to attach adult seat
belts, or other items or equipment to
the vehicle. Doing so could damage
the child restraint anchorages. The
child restraint will not be properly
installed using the damaged anchorage, and a child could be seriously
injured or killed in a collision.
– Never use the anchor points for adult
seat belts or harnesses.
– A child restraint with a top tether
strap should not be used in the front
passenger seat.
– Keep seatbacks as upright as possible after fitting the child restraint.
– Infants and children should always
be placed in an appropriate child restraint while in the vehicle.
● When the child restraint is not in use,
keep it secured with the LATCH system
or a seat belt. In a sudden stop or collision, loose objects can injure occupants
or damage the vehicle.

1-26 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

CAUTION
A child restraint in a closed vehicle can
become very hot. Check the seating surface and buckles before placing a child in
the child restraint.
This vehicle is equipped with a universal child
restraint anchor system, referred to as the LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system. Some child restraints include rigid or
webbing-mounted attachments that can be connected to these anchors. For additional information, refer to “LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system” in this section.
If you do not have a LATCH compatible child
restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used.
Several manufacturers offer child restraints for
infants and children of various sizes. When selecting any child restraint, keep the following
points in mind:
● Choose only a restraint with a label certifying
that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
● Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be
sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat
and seat belt system.

● If the child restraint is compatible with your
vehicle, place your child in the child restraint
and check the various adjustments to be
sure the child restraint is compatible with
your child. Choose a child restraint that is
designed for your child’s height and weight.
Always follow all recommended procedures.
● If the combined weight of the child and child
restraint is less than 65 lbs (29.5 kg), you
may use either the LATCH anchors or the
seat belt to install the child restraint (not both
at the same time).
● If the combined weight of the child and child
restraint is greater than 65 lbs (29.5 kg), use
the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint.

LATCH system lower anchor locations bench seat

● Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for installation.

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren) SYSTEM

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require that infants and small
children be restrained in an approved child
restraint at all times while the vehicle is
being operated. Canadian law requires the
top tether strap on forward-facing child restraints be secured to the designated anchor point on the vehicle.

LRS2137

Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor
points that are used with LATCH system compatible child restraints. This system may also be
referred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible
system. With this system, you do not have to use
a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint
unless the combined weight of the child and child
restraint exceeds 65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and child restraint is
greater than 65 lbs (29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s
seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27

child restraint. Be sure to follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions for installation.
The LATCH lower anchor points are provided to
install child restraints in the following positions
only:
● 2nd row bench seat – outboard seating
positions

LATCH lower anchor
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use and installation of
child restraints could result in serious injury or death of a child or other passengers in a sudden stop or collision:
– Attach LATCH system compatible
child restraints only at the locations
shown in the illustration.

– Inspect the lower anchors by inserting your fingers into the lower anchor
area. Feel to make sure there are no
obstructions over the anchors such
as seat belt webbing or seat cushion
material. The child restraint will not
be secured properly if the lower anchors are obstructed.
– Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads
imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are
they to be used to attach adult seat
belts, or other items or equipment to
the vehicle. Doing so could damage
the child restraint anchorages. The
child restraint will not be properly
installed using the damaged anchorages, and a child could be seriously
injured or killed in a collision.

– Do not secure a child restraint in the
2nd row center position using the
LATCH system anchors. The child restraint will not be secured properly.

1-28 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WRS0700

LATCH lower anchor location

LATCH lower anchor locations
The LATCH lower anchors are located at the rear
of the seat cushion near the seatback. A label is
attached to the seatback to help you locate the
LATCH lower anchors.

LRS2718

LATCH label locations 2nd row bench

LRS0661

LATCH webbing-mounted attachment

Installing child restraint LATCH lower
anchor attachments

LRS0662

LATCH rigid-mounted attachment
When installing a child restraint, carefully read
and follow the instructions in this manual and
those supplied with the child restraint.

LATCH compatible child restraints include two
rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can
be connected to two anchors located at certain
seating positions in your vehicle. With this system, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to
secure the child restraint. Check your child restraint for a label stating that it is compatible with
LATCH. This information may also be in the instructions provided by the child restraint manufacturer.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29

A child restraint with a top tether strap should
only be placed in the center position of the 2nd
row if there are no 3rd row occupants.

Top tether anchor
WARNING
● Do not allow cargo to contact the top
tether strap when it is attached to the
top tether anchor. Properly secure the
cargo so it does not contact the top
tether strap. Cargo that is not properly
secured or cargo that contacts the top
tether strap may damage it during a
collision. A child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision if the top
tether strap is damaged.
● Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads
imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are
they to be used to attach adult seat
belts, or other items or equipment to
the vehicle. Doing so could damage the
child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorages, and a
child could be seriously injured or killed
in a collision.

Rearward adjustment of the 2nd row bench seat
will result in loosening of the top tether strap for
the center position of the 2nd row. Avoid moving
the 2nd row bench seat or retighten the top
tether strap following rearward movement of the
2nd row bench seat.
If you have any questions when installing a top
tether strap, it is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
LRS2714
1
䊊
2
䊊

2nd row bench seat
Top tether strap
Anchor point

Top tether anchor point locations
Anchor points are located in the following locations:
● 2nd row bench on the bottom of the seatback in the seating positions shown.
● Roof above the rear cargo area.
The top tether anchor located in the roof is only to
be used for a child restraint located in the center
position of the 2nd row.

1-30 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
INSTALLATION USING LATCH
For additional information, refer to all Warnings
and Cautions in the “Child safety” and “Child
restraints” sections of this manual before installing a child restraint.
Do not use the lower anchors if the combined
weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds
65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the
child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the
lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be
sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child
restraint in the 2nd row seats using the LATCH
system:
1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

WRS0801

Rear-facing webbing-mounted – step 2

WRS0802

Rear-facing rigid-mounted – step 2
2. Secure the child restraint anchor attachments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check
to make sure the LATCH attachment is properly attached to the lower anchors.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31

5. Check to make sure the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
child restraint is loose, repeat steps 1
through 4.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT
BELTS
WARNING

LRS0673

Rear-facing – step 3
3. For child restraints that are equipped with
webbing-mounted attachments, remove any
additional slack from the anchor attachments. Press downward and rearward firmly
in the center of the child restraint with your
hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion
and seatback while tightening the webbing
of the anchor attachments.

LRS0674

Rear-facing – step 4
4. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side
to side while holding the child restraint near
the LATCH attachment path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch
(25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it
forward and check to see if the LATCH attachment holds the restraint in place. If the
restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH
attachment as necessary, or put the restraint
in another seat and test it again. You may
need to try a different child restraint or try
installing by using the vehicle seat belt (if
applicable). Not all child restraints fit in all
types of vehicles.

1-32 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

The three-point seat belt with Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used
when installing a child restraint. Failure to
use the ALR mode will result in the child
restraint not being properly secured. The
restraint could tip over or be loose and
cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or
collision.
For additional information, refer to all Warnings
and Cautions in the “Child safety” and “Child
restraints” sections of this manual before installing a child restraint.
Do not use the lower anchors if the combined
weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds
65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the
child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the
lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be

sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for installation.
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child
restraint using the vehicle seat belts in the rear
seats:

WRS0256

Rear-facing – step 1
1. Child restraints for infants must be
used in the rear-facing direction and
therefore must not be used in the front
seat. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

WRS0761

Rear-facing – step 2
2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child
restraint and insert it into the buckle until you
hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to
follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for belt routing.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33

LRS2395

Rear-facing – step 3
3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully
extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor
is in the ALR mode (child restraint mode). It
reverts to the ELR mode when the seat belt
is fully retracted.

LRS2396

Rear-facing – step 4
4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the
shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

1-34 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WRS0762

Rear-facing – step 5
5. Remove any additional slack from the seat
belt; press downward and rearward firmly in
the center of the child restraint to compress
the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while
pulling up on the seat belt.

7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 1
through 6.
After the child restraint is removed and the seat
belt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint
mode) is canceled.

Follow these steps to install a forward-facing
child restraint in the 2nd row seats using the
LATCH system:
1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

FORWARD-FACING CHILD
RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING
LATCH
LRS2397

Rear-facing – step 6
6. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side
to side while holding the child restraint near
the seat belt path. The child restraint should
not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from
side to side. Try to tug it forward and check
to see if the belt holds the restraint in place.
If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat
belt as necessary, or put the restraint in
another seat and test it again. You may need
to try a different child restraint. Not all child
restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

For additional information, refer to all Warnings
and Cautions in the “Child safety” and “Child
restraints” sections of this manual before installing a child restraint.
Do not use the lower anchors if the combined
weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds
65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the
child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the
lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be
sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for installation.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35

If the seating position does not have an
adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is
interfering with the proper child restraint fit,
try another seating position or a different
child restraint.

LRS2398

Forward-facing webbing-mounted – step 2
2. Secure the child restraint anchor attachments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check
to make sure the LATCH attachment is properly attached to the lower anchors.
If the child restraint is equipped with a top
tether strap, route the top tether strap and
secure the tether strap to the tether anchor
point. For additional information, refer to “Installing top tether strap” in this section.
Do not install child restraints that require the
use of a top tether strap in seating positions
that do not have a top tether anchor.

LRS2399

Forward-facing rigid-mounted – step 2
3. The back of the child restraint should be
secured against the vehicle seatback.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head
restraint/headrest to obtain the correct child
restraint fit. If the head restraint/headrest is
removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure
to reinstall the head restraint/headrest
when the child restraint is removed. For
additional
information
about
head
restraint/headrest adjustment, refer to
“Head restraints/headrests” in this section.

1-36 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

7. Check to make sure the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
child restraint is loose, repeat steps 1
through 6.

LRS0671

Forward-facing – step 4
4. For child restraints that are equipped with
webbing-mounted attachments, remove any
additional slack from the anchor attachments. Press downward and rearward firmly
in the center of the child restraint with your
knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion
and seatback while tightening the webbing
of the anchor attachments.
5. Tighten the tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions to remove any
slack.

WRS0697

Forward-facing – step 6
6. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side
to side while holding the child restraint near
the LATCH attachment path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch
(25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it
forward and check to see if the LATCH attachment holds the restraint in place. If the
restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH
attachment as necessary, or put the restraint
in another seat and test it again. You may
need to try a different child restraint. Not all
child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37

2nd row bench seat
OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS
1. Remove the head restraint/headrest and
store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall
the head restraint/headrest when the child
restraint is removed. For additional information about head restraint/headrest adjustment, removal and installation, refer to
“Head restraints/headrests” in this section.
1 over the
2. Position the top tether strap 䊊
seatback.
LRS2714
1
䊊
2
䊊

2nd row bench seat
Top tether strap
Anchor point

Installing top tether strap
The child restraint top tether strap must be used
when installing the child restraint with the LATCH
lower anchor attachments.
First, secure the child restraint with the LATCH
lower anchors (2nd row bench outboard seating
positions only).

3. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor
2 on the bottom of the seatback
point 䊊
behind the child restraint.
4. Tighten the tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions to remove any
slack.
CENTER SEATING POSITION
1. Remove the head restraint/headrest and
store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall
the head restraint/headrest when the child
restraint is removed. For additional information about head restraint/headrest adjustment, removal and installation, refer to
“Head restraints/headrests” in this section.

1-38 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

2 cover lo2. Open the top tether anchor 䊊
cated on the ceiling.
1 to the tether
3. Secure the tether strap 䊊
2 on the ceiling behind the
anchor point 䊊
child restraint.

4. Tighten the tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions to remove any
slack. Make sure the head restraint/headrest
does not contact the top tether strap.
If you have any questions when installing a
top tether strap, it is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING
Child restraint anchorages are designed
to withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used to attach adult seat belts, or other items or
equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could
damage the child restraint anchorages.
The child restraint will not be properly
installed using the damaged anchorage,
and a child could be seriously injured or
killed in a collision.

Follow these steps to install a forward-facing
child restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the
rear seats or in the front passenger seat:

FORWARD-FACING CHILD
RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING
THE SEAT BELTS

1. If you must install a child restraint in
the front seat, it should be placed in a
forward-facing direction only. Move
the seat to the rearmost position. Child
restraints for infants must be used in
the rear-facing direction and, therefore, must not be used in the front seat.

WARNING
The three-point seat belt with Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used
when installing a child restraint. Failure to
use the ALR mode will result in the child
restraint not being properly secured. The
restraint could tip over or be loose and
cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or
collision. Also, it can change the operation
of the front passenger air bag. For additional information, refer to “Front passenger air bag and status light” in this section.

2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
WRS0699

Forward-facing (front passenger seat) –
step 1
For additional information, refer to all Warnings
and Cautions in the “Child safety” and “Child
restraints” sections of this manual before installing a child restraint.
Do not use the lower anchors if the combined
weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds
65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the
child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the
lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be
sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for installation.

The back of the child restraint should be
secured against the vehicle seatback.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head
restraint/headrest to obtain the correct child
restraint fit. If the head restraint/headrest is
removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure
to reinstall the head restraint/headrest
when the child restraint is removed. For
additional
information
about
head
restraint/headrest adjustment, removal and
installation,
refer
to
“Head
restraints/headrests” in this section.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39

If the seating position does not have an
adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is
interfering with the proper child restraint fit,
try another seating position or a different
child restraint.

Do not install child restraints that require the
use of a top tether strap in seating positions
that do not have a top tether anchor.

WRS0680

Forward-facing – step 3
3. Route the seat belt tongue through the child
restraint and insert it into the buckle until you
hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to
follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for belt routing.
If the child restraint is equipped with a top
tether strap, route the top tether strap and
secure the tether strap to the tether anchor
point (2nd row installation only). For additional information, refer to “Installing top
tether strap” in this section.

1-40 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS2394

Forward-facing – step 4
4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully
extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor
is in the ALR mode (child restraint mode). It
reverts to ELR mode when the seat belt is
fully retracted.

LRS0668

Forward-facing – step 5
5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the
shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

WRS0681

Forward-facing – step 6
6. Remove any additional slack from the seat
belt; press downward and rearward firmly in
the center of the child restraint with your
knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion
and seatback while pulling up on the seat
belt.
7. Tighten the tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions to remove any
slack.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41

9. Check to make sure the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 2
through 8.

WRS0698

Forward-facing – step 8
8. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side
to side while holding the child restraint near
the seat belt path. The child restraint should
not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from
side to side. Try to tug it forward and check
to see if the belt holds the restraint in place.
If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat
belt as necessary, or put the restraint in
another seat and test it again. You may need
to try a different child restraint. Not all child
restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

1-42 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WRS0475

Forward-facing – step 10
10. If the child restraint is installed in the front
passenger seat, place the ignition switch in
the ON position. The front passenger air bag
should illuminate. If this
status light
light is not illuminated, refer to “Front passenger air bag and status light” in this section. Move the child restraint to another
seating position. Have the system
checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
After the child restraint is removed and the seat
belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint mode) is canceled.

2nd row bench seat
Top tether strap
Anchor point

Installing top tether strap
The child restraint top tether strap must be used
when installing the child restraint with seat belts.
First, secure the child restraint with the seat belt.

2 cover lo2. Open the top tether anchor 䊊
cated on the ceiling.
1 to the tether
3. Secure the tether strap 䊊
2 on the ceiling behind the
anchor point 䊊
child restraint.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43

BOOSTER SEATS
For additional information on installing a booster
seat in your vehicle, follow the instructions outlined in this section.

Precautions on booster seats
WARNING
If a booster seat and seat belt are not used
properly, the risk of a child being injured
or killed in a sudden stop or collision
greatly increases:
– Make sure the shoulder portion of
the belt is away from the child’s face
and neck and the lap portion of the
belt does not cross the stomach.

LRS2479

Low back booster seat

High back booster seat

– Make sure the shoulder belt is not
behind the child or under the child’s
arm.
– A booster seat must only be installed
in a seating position that has a
lap/shoulder belt.

1-44 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS0453

Booster seats of various sizes are offered by
several manufacturers. When selecting any
booster seat, keep the following points in mind:
● Choose only a booster seat with a label
certifying that it complies with Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
● Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be
sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat
and seat belt system.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require that infants and small
children be restrained in an approved child
restraint at all times while the vehicle is
being operated.
The instructions in this section apply to booster
seat installation in the rear seats or the front
passenger seat.

Booster seat installation
WARNING
LRS0464

● Make sure the child’s head will be properly
supported by the booster seat or vehicle
seat. The seatback must be at or above the
center of the child’s ears. For example, if a
low back booster seat is chosen, the vehicle
seatback must be at or above the center of
the child’s ears. If the seatback is lower than
the center of the child’s ears, a high back
booster seat should be used.

To avoid injury to child, do not use the
lap/shoulder belt in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode when using a
booster seat with the seat belts.
For additional information, refer to all Warnings
and Cautions in the “Child safety,” “Child restraints” and “Booster seats” sections of this
manual before installing a child restraint.
Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the
2nd or 3rd rows or in the front passenger seat:

WRS0699

1. If you must install a booster seat in the
front seat, move the seat to the rearmost position.
2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only
place it in a front-facing direction. Always
follow the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions.

● If the booster seat is compatible with your
vehicle, place the child in the booster seat
and check the various adjustments to be
sure the booster seat is compatible with the
child. Always follow all recommended procedures.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45

If the seating position does not have an
adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is
interfering with the proper booster seat fit,
try another seating position or a different
booster seat.
4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low
and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure to
follow the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the seat belt routing.

LRS0454

Front passenger position
3. The booster seat should be positioned on
the vehicle seat so that it is stable.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head
restraint/headrest to obtain the correct
booster
seat
fit.
If
the
head
restraint/headrest is removed, store it in a
secure place. Be sure to reinstall the
head restraint/headrest when the
booster seat is removed. For additional
information about head restraint/headrest
adjustment, removal and installation, refer to
“Head restraints/headrests” in this section.

5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt
toward the retractor to take up extra slack.
Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned
across the top, middle portion of the child’s
shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat
manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the
seat belt routing.
6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instructions for properly fastening a seat belt
shown in “Three-point type seat belt with
retractor” in this section.

1-46 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WRS0475

7. If the booster seat is installed in the front
passenger seat, place the ignition switch in
the ON position. The front passenger air bag
may or may not illuminate,
status light
depending on the size of the child and the
type of booster seat being used. For additional information, refer to “Front passenger
air bag and status light” in this section.

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM (SRS)
PRECAUTIONS ON SRS
This SRS section contains important information
concerning the following systems:
● Driver and front passenger supplemental
front-impact air bag (NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System)
● Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag
● Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag
● Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front seats)
Supplemental front-impact air bag system
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can help
cushion the impact force to the head and chest of
the driver and front passenger in certain frontal
collisions.

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bag system
This system can help cushion the impact force to
the head of occupants in front and rear outboard
seating positions in certain side-impact collisions. The curtain air bags are designed to inflate
on the side where the vehicle is impacted. In a
rollover, the curtain air bags are designed to
inflate and remain inflated for a short time.
The SRS is designed to supplement the crash
protection provided by the driver and front passenger seat belts and is not a substitute for
them. Seat belts should always be correctly worn
and the occupant seated a suitable distance
away from the steering wheel, instrument panel
and door finishers. For additional information
about instructions and precautions on seat belt
usage, refer to “Seat belts” in this section.

Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag system

The supplemental air bags operate only
when the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position.

This system can help cushion the impact force to
the chest area of the driver and front passenger in
certain side-impact collisions. The side air bags
are designed to inflate on the side where the
vehicle is impacted.

After placing the ignition switch in the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47

WRS0031

WARNING
● The front air bags ordinarily will not
inflate in the event of a side impact, rear
impact, rollover, or lower severity frontal collision. Always wear your seat
belts to help reduce the risk or severity
of injury in various kinds of accidents
● The front passenger air bag will not
inflate if the passenger air bag status
light is lit. For additional information,
refer to “Front passenger air bag and
status light” in this section.

1-48 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

● The seat belts and the front air bags are
most effective when you are sitting well
back and upright in the seat. The front
air bags inflate with great force. Even
with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, if you are unrestrained, leaning
forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you are at greater risk of
injury or death in a crash. You may also
receive serious or fatal injuries from the
front air bag if you are up against it
when it inflates. Always sit back against
the seatback and as far away as practical from the steering wheel or instrument panel. Always properly use the
seat belts.
● The driver and front passenger seat belt
buckles are equipped with sensors that
detect if the seat belts are fastened. The
NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System
monitors the severity of a collision and
seat belt usage, then inflates the air
bags as needed. Failure to properly
wear seat belts can increase the risk or
severity of injury in an accident.

● The front passenger seat is equipped
with an occupant classification sensor
(weight sensor) that turns the front passenger air bag OFF under some conditions. This sensor is only used in this
seat. Failure to be properly seated and
wearing the seat belt can increase the
risk or severity of injury in an accident.
For additional information, refer to
“Front passenger air bag and status
light” in this section.
● Keep hands on the outside of the steering wheel. Placing them inside the
steering wheel rim could increase the
risk that they are injured when the front
air bag inflates.

ARS1133

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49

ARS1041

ARS1042

● Never let children ride unrestrained or
extend their hands or face out of the
window. Do not attempt to hold them in
your lap or arms. Some examples of
dangerous riding positions are shown
in the illustrations.

● Children may be severely injured or
killed when the front air bags, side air
bags or curtain air bags inflate if they
are not properly restrained. Pre-teens
and children should be properly restrained in the rear seat, if possible.

WARNING

1-50 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ARS1043

ARS1044

ARS1045

ARS1046

WARNING
● Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System, never install a rear-facing
child restraint in the front seat. An inflating front air bag could seriously injure or kill your child. For additional
information, refer to “Child restraints”
in this section.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51

WARNING

WRS0431

WARNING

● The seat belts, the side air bags and
curtain air bags are most effective when
you are sitting well back and upright in
the seat with both feet on the floor. The
side air bag and curtain air bag inflate
with great force. Do not allow anyone to
place their hand, leg or face near the
side air bag on the side of the seatback
of the front seat or near the side roof
rails. Do not allow anyone sitting in the
front seats or rear outboard seats to
extend their hand out of the window or
lean against the door. Some examples
of dangerous riding positions are
shown in the previous illustrations.

Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bags and roof-mounted curtain
side-impact and rollover supplemental air
bags:
● The side air bags and curtain air bags
ordinarily will not inflate in the event of
a frontal impact, rear impact, or lower
severity side collision. Always wear
your seat belts to help reduce the risk or
severity of injury in various kinds of
accidents.

1-52 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WRS0032

WARNING
● When sitting in the rear seat, do not
hold onto the seatback of the front seat.
If the side air bag inflates, you may be
seriously injured. Be especially careful
with children, who should always be
properly restrained. Some examples of
dangerous riding positions are shown
in the illustrations.
● Do not use seat covers on the front
seatbacks. They may interfere with side
air bag inflation.

SSS0162

SSS0159

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53

NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System
(front seats)
1. Supplemental front-impact air bag modules
2. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)
3. Occupant classification sensor
(weight sensor)
4. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag modules
5. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bags
6. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bag inflators
7. Satellite sensors
8. Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front seats)
9. Pressure sensors in door (driver’s side
shown; front passenger side similar)
10. Crash zone sensor

LRS2815

1-54 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING
To ensure proper operation of the passenger’s NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System,
please observe the following items.
● Do not allow a passenger in the rear
bench seats to push or pull on the seatback pocket.
● Do not place heavy loads heavier than
2.2 lb (1 kg) on the seatback, head
restraint/headrest or in the seatback
pocket.
● Make sure that there is nothing pressing against the rear of the seatback,
such as a child restraint installed in the
rear seat or an object stored on the
floor.
● Make sure that there is no object placed
under the front passenger seat.
● Make sure that there is no object placed
between the seat cushion and center
console or between the seat cushion
and the door.

● If a forward-facing child restraint is installed in the front passenger seat, do
not position the front passenger seat so
the child restraint contacts the instrument panel. If the child restraint does
contact the instrument panel, the system may determine the seat is occupied
and the passenger air bag may deploy
in a collision. Also the front passenger
air bag status light may not illuminate.
For additional information about installing and using child restraints, refer
to “Child restraints” in this section.
● Confirm the operating condition with
the front passenger air bag status light.
● If you notice that the front passenger air
bag status light is not operating as described in this section, get the occupant
classification system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
● Until you have confirmed with a dealer
that your passenger seat occupant classification system is working properly,
position the occupants in the rear seating positions.

● Do not position the front passenger
seat so it contacts the rear seat. If the
front seat does contact the rear seat,
the air bag system may determine a
sensor malfunction has occurred and
the front passenger air bag status light
may illuminate and the supplemental
air bag warning light may flash.
This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System for the driver and front
passenger seats. This system is designed to
meet certification requirements under U.S. regulations. It is also permitted in Canada. However,
all of the information, cautions and warnings in this manual still apply and must be
followed.
The driver supplemental front-impact air bag is
located in the center of the steering wheel. The
front passenger supplemental front-impact air
bag is mounted in the dashboard above the glove
box. The front air bags are designed to inflate in
higher severity frontal collisions, although they
may inflate if the forces in another type of collision
are similar to those of a higher severity frontal
impact. They may not inflate in certain frontal
collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not
always an indication of proper front air bag system operation.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System monitors
information from the crash zone sensor, the Air
bag Control Unit (ACU), seat belt buckle sensors
and occupation classification sensor (weight
sensor). Inflator operation is based on the severity of a collision and seat belt usage for the driver.
For the front passenger, the occupant classification sensor is also monitored. Based on information from the sensor, only one front air bag may
inflate in a crash, depending on the crash severity
and whether the front occupants are belted or
unbelted. Additionally, the front passenger air
bag may be automatically turned off under some
conditions, depending on the weight detected on
the front passenger seat and how the seat belt is
used. If the front passenger air bag is OFF, the
front passenger air bag status light will be illuminated. For additional information, refer to “Front
passenger air bag and status light” in this section.
One front air bag inflating does not indicate improper performance of the system.
If you have any questions about your air bag
system, it is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer to obtain information about the
system. If you are considering modification of
your vehicle due to a disability, you may also
contact NISSAN. Contact information is contained in the front of this Owner’s Manual.

When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise
may be heard, followed by the release of smoke.
This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a
fire. Care should be taken to not inhale it, as it may
cause irritation and choking. Those with a history
of a breathing condition should get fresh air
promptly.
Front air bags, along with the use of seat belts,
help to cushion the impact force on the face and
chest of the front occupants. They can help save
lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an
inflating front air bag may cause facial abrasions
or other injuries. Front air bags do not provide
restraint to the lower body.
Even with NISSAN Advanced Air Bags, seat
belts should be correctly worn and the driver and
front passenger seated upright as far as practical
away from the steering wheel or instrument
panel. The front air bags inflate quickly in order to
help protect the front occupants. Because of this,
the force of the front air bag inflating can increase
the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or
is against, the front air bag module during inflation.
The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision.

1-56 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

The front air bags operate only when the
ignition switch is in the ON position.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.

Front passenger air bag and status light

WARNING
The front passenger air bag is designed to
automatically turn OFF under some conditions. Read this section carefully to learn
how it operates. Proper use of the seat,
seat belt and child restraints is necessary
for most effective protection. Failure to
follow all instructions in this manual concerning the use of seats, seat belts and
child restraints can increase the risk or
severity of injury in an accident.
WRS0475

CONDITION

DESCRIPTION

Empty

Empty front passenger seat
Bag or Child or Child Restraint or Small
Adult in front passenger seat
Adult in the front passenger seat

Nobody/Somebody
Adult

PASSENGER AIR BAG INDICATOR LIGHT (
)
ON (illuminated)

Status light
The front passenger seat is equipped with an
occupant classification sensor (weight sensor)
that turns the front passenger air bag on or off
depending on the weight applied to the front
passenger seat. The status of the front passenger air bag (ON or OFF) is indicated by the front
which is lopassenger air bag status light
cated on the instrument panel.
After the ignition switch is placed in the ⬙ON⬙
position, the front passenger air bag status light
on the instrument panel illuminates for about
7 seconds and then turns off or remains illuminated depending on the front passenger seat
occupied status. The light operates as follows:
FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG STATUS
INHIBITED

ON (illuminated)

INHIBITED

OFF (dark)

ACTIVATED

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-57

In addition to the above, certain objects placed
on the front passenger seat may also cause the
light to operate as described above depending
on their weight.
For additional information related to the normal
operation and troubleshooting of this occupant
classification sensor system, please refer to
“Normal operation” and “Troubleshooting” in this
section.
Front passenger air bag
The front passenger air bag is designed to automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is operated
under some conditions as described below in
accordance with U.S. regulations. If the front
passenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate in a
crash. The driver air bag and other air bags in your
vehicle are not part of this system.
The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce
the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag
to certain front passenger seat occupants, such
as children, by requiring the air bag to be automatically turned OFF. Certain sensors are used to
meet the requirements.
The occupant classification sensor in this vehicle
is a weight sensor. It is designed to detect an
occupant and objects on the seat by weight. For
example, if a child is in the front passenger seat,
the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System is de-

signed to turn the front passenger air bag OFF in
accordance with the regulations. Also, if a child
restraint of the type specified in the regulations is
on the seat, its weight and the child’s weight can
be detected and cause the air bag to turn OFF.
Front passenger seat adult occupants who are
properly seated and using the seat belt as outlined in this manual should not cause the front
passenger air bag to be automatically turned
OFF. For small adults it may be turned OFF,
however if the occupant takes his/her weight off
the seat cushion (for example, by not sitting upright, by sitting on an edge of the seat, or by
otherwise being out of position), this could cause
the sensor to turn the air bag OFF. Always be
sure to be seated and wearing the seat belt
properly for the most effective protection by the
seat belt and supplemental air bag.
NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and children be properly restrained in a rear seat.
NISSAN also recommends that appropriate child
restraints and booster seats be properly installed
in a rear seat. If this is not possible, the occupant
classification sensor is designed to operate as
described above to turn the front passenger air
bag OFF for specified child restraints as required
by the regulations. Failing to properly secure
child restraints and to use the ALR mode may
allow the restraint to tip or move in a collision or
sudden stop. This can also result in the passen-

1-58 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ger air bag inflating in a crash instead of being
OFF. For additional information about proper use
and installation, refer to “Child restraints” in this
section.
If the front passenger seat is not occupied, the
front passenger air bag is designed not to inflate
in a crash. However, heavy objects placed on the
seat could result in air bag inflation, because of
the object’s weight detected by the occupant
classification sensor. Other conditions could also
result in air bag inflation, such as if a child is
standing on the seat, or if two children are on the
seat, contrary to the instructions in this manual.
Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants
are seated and restrained properly.
Using the front passenger air bag status light, you
can monitor when the front passenger air bag is
automatically turned OFF.
If an adult occupant is in the seat but the front
passenger air bag status light is illuminated (indicating that the air bag is OFF), it could be that the
person is a small adult, or is not sitting on the seat
properly or not using the seat belt properly.
If a child restraint must be used in the front seat,
the front passenger air bag status light may or
may not be illuminated, depending on the size of
the child and the type of child restraint being
used. If the air bag status light is not illuminated
(indicating that the air bag might inflate in a

crash), it could be that the child restraint or seat
belt is not being used properly. Make sure that
the child restraint is installed properly, the seat
belt is used properly and the occupant is positioned properly. If the air bag status light is still not
illuminated, reposition the occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.
If the front passenger air bag status light will not
illuminate even though you believe that the child
restraint, the seat belts and the occupant are
properly positioned, it is recommended that you
take your vehicle to a NISSAN dealer. A NISSAN
dealer can check system status by using a special tool. However, until you have confirmed with
a dealer that your air bag is working properly,
reposition the occupant or child restraint in a rear
seat.
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System and front
passenger air bag status light will take a few
seconds to register a change in the front passenger seat status. For example, if a large adult who
is sitting in the front passenger seat exits the
vehicle, the front passenger air bag status light
will go from OFF to ON for a few seconds and
then to OFF. This is normal system operation and
does not indicate a malfunction.

If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air
bag system, the supplemental air bag warning
, located in the meter and gauges area
light
of the instrument panel, will be illuminated (blinking or steadily lit). Have the system checked. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
Normal operation
In order for the occupant classification sensor
system to classify the front passenger based on
weight, please follow the precautions and steps
outlined below:
Precautions
● Make sure that there are no objects weighing over 2.2 lbs (1 kg) hanging on the seat or
placed in the seatback pocket.
● Make sure that a child restraint or other
object is not pressing against the rear of the
seatback.
● Make sure that a rear passenger is not pushing or pulling on the back of the front passenger seat.

Steps
1. Adjust the seat as outlined in the “Seats”
section of this manual. Sit upright, leaning
against the seatback, and centered on the
seat cushion with your feet comfortably extended to the floor.
2. Make sure there are no objects on your lap.
3. Fasten the seat belt as outlined in the “Seat
belts” section of this manual. Front passenger seat belt buckle status is monitored by
the occupant classification system, and is
used as an input to determine occupancy
status. So, it is highly recommended that the
front passenger fasten their seat belt.
4. Remain in this position for 30 seconds allowing the system to classify the front passenger before the vehicle is put into motion.
5. Ensure proper classification by checking the
front passenger air bag status light.

● Make sure that the front passenger seat or
seatback is not forced back against an object on the seat or floor behind it.
● Make sure that there is no object placed
under the front passenger seat.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-59

NOTE:
This vehicle’s occupant classification sensor system generally keeps the classification locked during driving, so it is important
that you confirm that the front passenger is
properly classified prior to driving. However, the occupant classification sensor
may recalculate the weight of the occupant
under some conditions (both while driving
and when stopped), so front passenger
seat occupants should continue to remain
seated as outlined above.
Troubleshooting
If you think the front passenger air bag status light
is incorrect:
1. If the light is ON with an adult occupying the
front passenger seat:
● Occupant is a small adult — the air bag light
is functioning as intended. The front passenger air bag is suppressed.
However, if the occupant is not a small adult, then
this may be due to the following conditions that
may be interfering with the weight sensors:
● Occupant is not sitting upright, leaning
against the seatback, and centered on the
seat cushion with his/her feet comfortably
extended to the floor.

● A child restraint or other object pressing
against the rear of the seatback.
● A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the
back of the front passenger seat.
● Forcing the front seat or seatback against an
object on the seat or floor behind it.
● An object placed under the front passenger
seat.
● An object placed between the seat cushion
and center console or between the seat
cushion and the door.
If the vehicle is moving, please come to a stop
when it is safe to do so. Check and correct any of
the above conditions. Restart the vehicle and
wait 1 minute.
NOTE:
A system check will be performed during
which the front passenger air bag status
light will remain lit for about 7 seconds
initially.
If the light is still ON after this, the person should
be advised not to ride in the front passenger seat
and the vehicle should be checked as soon as
possible. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.

1-60 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

2. If the light is OFF with a small adult, child or
child restraint occupying the front passenger seat.
This may be due to the following conditions
that may be interfering with the weight sensors:
● Small adult or child is not sitting upright,
leaning against the seatback, and centered
on the seat cushion with his/her feet comfortably extended to the floor.
● The child restraint is not properly installed,
as outlined in the “Child restraints” section of
this manual.
● An object weighing over 2.2 lbs (1 kg) hanging on the seat or placed in the seatback
pocket.
● A child restraint or other object pressing
against the rear of the seatback.
● A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the
back of the front passenger seat.
● Forcing the front seat or seatback against an
object on the seat or floor behind it.
● An object placed under the front passenger
seat.
● An object placed between the seat cushion
and center console.

If the vehicle is moving, please come to a stop
when it is safe to do so. Check and correct any of
the above conditions. Restart the vehicle and
wait 1 minute.
NOTE:
A system check will be performed during
which the front passenger air bag status
light will remain lit for about 7 seconds
initially.
If the light is still OFF after this, the small adult,
child or child restraint should be repositioned in
the rear seat and the vehicle should be checked
as soon as possible. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
3. If the light is OFF with no front passenger
and no objects on the front passenger seat,
the vehicle should be checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer as
soon as possible.

Other supplemental front-impact air bag
precautions

WARNING
● Do not place any objects on the steering
wheel pad or on the instrument panel.
Also, do not place any objects between
any occupant and the steering wheel or
instrument panel. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause
injury if the front air bags inflate.
● Immediately after inflation, several
front air bag system components will be
hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself.
● No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the supplemental air bag system. This is
to prevent accidental inflation of the
supplemental air bag or damage to the
supplemental air bag system.
● Do not make unauthorized changes to
your vehicle’s electrical system, suspension system or front end structure.
This could affect proper operation of
the front air bag system.

● Tampering with the front air bag system
may result in serious personal injury.
Tampering includes changes to the
steering wheel and the instrument
panel assembly by placing material
over the steering wheel pad and above
the instrument panel or by installing
additional trim material around the air
bag system.
● Removing or modifying the front passenger seat may affect the function of
the air bag system and result in serious
personal injury.
● Modifying or tampering with the front
passenger seat may result in serious
personal injury. For example, do not
change the front seats by placing material on the seat cushion or by installing
additional trim material, such as seat
covers, on the seat that are not specifically designed to assure proper air bag
operation. Additionally, do not stow any
objects under the front passenger seat
or the seat cushion and seatback. Such
objects may interfere with the proper
operation of the occupant classification
sensor (weight sensor).

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-61

flate on the side where the vehicle is impacted.
They may not inflate in certain side collisions.

● No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the seat belt system. This may affect the
front air bag system. Tampering with
the seat belt system may result in serious personal injury.
● It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for work on and around
the front air bag. It is also recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for installation of electrical equipment.
The Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) wiring harnesses* should not be
modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the
air bag system.
● A cracked windshield should be replaced immediately by a qualified repair
facility. A cracked windshield could affect the function of the supplemental air
bag system.
*The SRS wiring harness connectors are
yellow and orange for easy identification.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you
inform the buyer about the front air bag system
and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections
in this Owner’s Manual.

Curtain air bags are also designed to inflate in
certain types of rollover collisions or near rollovers. As a result, certain vehicle movements (for
example, during severe off-roading) may cause
the curtain air bags to inflate.
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an
indication of proper side air bag and curtain air
bag operation.

WRS0381

Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag and roofmounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bag systems
The side air bags are located in the outside of the
seatback of the front seats. The curtain air bags
are located in the side roof rails in all three rows.
All of the information, cautions and warnings in this manual apply and must be followed. The side air bags and curtain air bags are
designed to inflate in higher severity side collisions, although they may inflate if the forces in
another type of collision are similar to those of a
higher severity impact. They are designed to in-

1-62 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

When the side air bags and curtain air bags
inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed
by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful
and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken
not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and
choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly.
Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts,
help to cushion the impact force on the chest of
the front occupants. Curtain air bags help to
cushion the impact force to the head of occupants in the front and rear outboard seating positions in all rows. They can help save lives and
reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating
side air bag or curtain air bag may cause abrasions or other injuries. Side air bags and curtain
air bags do not provide restraint to the lower
body.

The seat belts should be correctly worn and the
driver and front passenger seated upright as far
as practical away from the side air bag. Rear seat
passengers should be seated as far away as
practical from the door finishers and side roof
rails. The side air bags and curtain air bags inflate
quickly in order to help protect the occupants.
Because of this, the force of the side air bags and
curtain air bags inflating can increase the risk of
injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against,
these air bag modules during inflation. The side
air bag will deflate quickly after the collision is
over.

WARNING
● Do not place any objects near the seatback of the front seats. Also, do not
place any objects (an umbrella, bag,
etc.) between the front door finisher
and the front seat. Such objects may
become dangerous projectiles and
cause injury if a side air bag inflates.
● Right after inflation, several side air bag
and curtain air bag system components
will be hot. Do not touch them; you may
severely burn yourself.

The side air bags and curtain air bags operate only when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position.

● No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the side air bag and curtain air bag
systems. This is to prevent damage to or
accidental inflation of the side air bag
and curtain air bag systems.

● Do not make unauthorized changes to
your vehicle’s electrical system, suspension system or side panel. This
could affect proper operation of the curtain air bag systems.

The curtain air bag will remain inflated for a short
time.

● Tampering with the side air bag system
may result in serious personal injury.
For example, do not change the front
seats by placing material near the seatbacks or by installing additional trim
material, such as seat covers, around
the side air bag.
● It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for work on and around
the side air bag and curtain air bag. It is
also recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for installation of electrical equipment. The SRS wiring harnesses* should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test
equipment and probing devices should
not be used on the side air bag or curtain air bag systems.
*The SRS wiring harness or connectors are
yellow or orange for easy identification.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you
inform the buyer about the side air bags and
curtain air bag system and guide the buyer to the
appropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-63

Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front
seats)
WARNING
● The pretensioner(s) cannot be reused
after activation. They must be replaced
together with the retractor and buckle
as a unit.
● If the vehicle becomes involved in a
collision but pretensioner(s) are not activated, be sure to have the pretensioner system checked and, if necessary, replaced. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
● No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the pretensioner system. This is to prevent damage to or accidental activation
of the pretensioner(s). Tampering with
the pretensioner system may result in
serious personal injury.

● It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for work on and around
the pretensioner system. It is also recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for installation of electrical
equipment. Unauthorized electrical test
equipment and probing devices should
not be used on the pretensioner system.
● If you need to dispose of the pretensioner(s) or scrap the vehicle, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal
injury.
The pretensioner system may activate with the
supplemental air bag system in certain types of
collisions. Working with the seat belt retractor,
the pretensioner(s) help tighten the seat belt
when the vehicle becomes involved in certain
types of collisions, helping to restrain front seat
occupants.
The pretensioner(s) are encased within the seat
belt retractor and to the seat belt anchor affixed
to the floor of the vehicle. These seat belts are
used the same way as conventional seat belts.

1-64 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

When pretensioner(s) activate, smoke is released and a loud noise may be heard. This
smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire.
Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may
cause irritation and choking. Those with a history
of a breathing condition should get fresh air
promptly.
After the pretensioner(s’) activation, load limiters
allow the seat belt to release webbing (if necessary) to reduce forces against the chest.
is
The supplemental air bag warning light
used to indicate malfunctions in the pretensioner
system. For additional information, refer to
⬙Supplemental air bag warning light⬙ in this section. If the operation of the supplemental air bag
warning light indicates there is a malfunction,
have the system checked. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you
inform the buyer about the pretensioner system
and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections
in this Owner’s Manual.

WARNING
Do not use a rear-facing child restraint on
a seat protected by an air bag in front of it.
If the air bag deploys, it may cause serious
injury or death.

WRS0885

1. SRS Air Bag Warning Labels
The warning labels are located on the surface of the sun visor.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG
WARNING LABELS
Warning labels about the supplemental frontimpact air bag system are placed in the vehicle as
shown in the illustration.

LRS0100

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG
WARNING LIGHT
The supplemental air bag warning light,
displaying
in the instrument panel, monitors the circuits for the air bag systems, pretensioner(s) and all related wiring.
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning light
illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns
off. This means the system is operational.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-65

If any of the following conditions occur, the front
air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag and pretensioner systems need servicing:
● The supplemental air bag warning light remains on after approximately 7 seconds.
● The supplemental air bag warning light
flashes intermittently.
● The supplemental air bag warning light does
not come on at all.
Under these conditions, the front air bag, side air
bag, curtain air bag or pretensioner systems may
not operate properly. They must be checked and
repaired. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning light
is on, it could mean that the front air bag,
side air bag, curtain air bag and/or pretensioner systems will not operate in an accident. To help avoid injury to yourself or
others, have your vehicle checked as soon
as possible. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Repair and replacement procedure
The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air bags
and pretensioner(s) are designed to inflate on a
one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless it is
damaged, the supplemental air bag warning light
remains illuminated after inflation has occurred.
These systems should be repaired and/or replaced as soon as possible. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
When maintenance work is required on the vehicle, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain air
bags, pretensioner(s) and related parts should be
pointed out to the person performing the maintenance. The ignition switch should always be
placed in the LOCK position when working under
the hood or inside the vehicle.

WARNING
● Once a front air bag, side air bag, or
curtain air bag has inflated, the air bag
module will not function again and
must be replaced. Additionally, the activated pretensioner(s) must also be replaced. The air bag module and pretensioner(s) should be replaced. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service. However, the air
bag module and pretensioner(s) cannot
be repaired.

1-66 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

● The front air bag, side air bag, curtain
air bag systems and the pretensioner
system should be inspected if there is
any damage to the front end or side
portion of the vehicle. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
● If you need to dispose of the supplemental air bag or pretensioner systems
or scrap the vehicle, it is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer. Incorrect
disposal procedures could cause personal injury.
● If there is an impact to your vehicle from
any direction, your Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) should be checked to
verify it is still functioning correctly. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service. The OCS should
be checked even if no air bags deploy as
a result of the impact. Failure to verify
proper OCS function may result in an
improper air bag deployment resulting
in injury or death.

MEMO

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-67

2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Compass (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Compass display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Warning lights, indicator lights and audible
reminders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Checking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Vehicle information display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
How to use the vehicle information display . . . . . . . 2-19
Startup display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Resetting the trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Vehicle information display warnings and
indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Security systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Vehicle security system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33

NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Rear switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped)
defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Headlight control switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Daytime running light system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Fog light switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Heated seat switches (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Heated steering wheel switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . 2-45
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off switch . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
All-wheel drive (AWD) lock switch (if so equipped) . . . 2-46
E-call (SOS) switch (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Power outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
12v outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Extended storage switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Seatback pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49

Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
Sunglasses holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
Cargo area storage bin (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Divide-n-hide® adjustable floor
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Luggage hooks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
Cargo cover (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
Roof rack (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
Power moonroof (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62
Console light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62
Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63
Personal Lights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63
Room light (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63
Luggage compartment light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64

INSTRUMENT PANEL
1.
2.
3.

4.
5.

6.
7.

8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
LII2516

2-2 Instruments and controls

15.

16.
17.
18.
19.
20.

21.

Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

*: Refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual (if so equipped).

Instruments and controls 2-3

METERS AND GAUGES

LIC2255

Speedometer
The speedometer indicates vehicle speed.

LIC2627

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Tachometer
Warning and indicator lights
Vehicle information display
Speedometer
Fuel gauge
Engine coolant temperature gauge

2-4 Instruments and controls

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER
This vehicle is equipped with a speedometer and
odometer. The speedometer is located on the
right side of the meter cluster. The odometer is
located within the vehicle information display.

Changing the display
3 switch on the instruPush the TRIP RESET 䊊
ment panel to change the display as follows:

Trip

→ Trip

Resetting the trip odometer
3 for 1 second
Pushing the TRIP RESET switch 䊊
resets the currently displayed trip odometer to
zero.

LIC3350

LIC2219

Odometer/Twin trip odometer

TACHOMETER

1 and the twin trip odometer 䊊
2
The odometer 䊊
are displayed below the vehicle information display when the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position.

The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev engine into
1 .
the red zone 䊊

The odometer records the total distance the vehicle has been driven.
The twin trip odometer records the distance of
individual trips.

CAUTION
When engine speed approaches the red
zone, reduce engine speed. Operating the
engine in the red zone may cause serious
engine damage.

Instruments and controls 2-5

CAUTION
If the gauge indicates coolant temperature near the hot (H) end of the normal
range, reduce vehicle speed to decrease
temperature. If the gauge is over the normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as
safely possible. If the engine is overheated, continued operation of the vehicle
may seriously damage the engine. For additional information, refer to “If your vehicle overheats” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual for
immediate action required.
LIC2220

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
GAUGE
The gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature. The engine coolant temperature is within the
1 when the gauge needle points
normal range 䊊
within the zone shown in the illustration.
The engine coolant temperature varies with the
outside air temperature and driving conditions.

LIC2222

FUEL GAUGE
The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level
in the tank.
The gauge may move slightly during braking,
turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.
The gauge needle returns to 0 (Empty) after the
ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.
The low fuel warning message appears in the
vehicle information display when the amount of
fuel in the tank is getting low.
Refill the fuel tank before the gauge registers 0 (Empty).

2-6 Instruments and controls

COMPASS (if so equipped)
The
indicates that the fuel-filler door is
located on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.

CAUTION
● If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may
come on. Refuel as soon as possible.
light
After a few driving trips. the
should turn off. If the light remains on
after a few driving trips, have the vehicle
inspected. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
● For additional information, refer to
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in
this section.

This unit measures terrestrial magnetism and indicates the heading direction of the vehicle.
With the ignition switch in the ON position, press
button as described in the charts bethe
low to activate various features of the automatic
anti-glare rearview mirror.
Push and hold
the
button for about:
1 second
8 seconds
10 seconds

Feature:
(Push button again for about 1 second to change settings)
Compass display toggles on/off
Compass zone can be changed to
correct false compass readings
Compass enters calibration mode

For additional information about the automatic
anti-glare feature, refer to “Automatic anti-glare
rearview mirror” in the “Pre-driving checks and
adjustments” section of this manual.

LIC1487

COMPASS DISPLAY
Press the
button for about one second
when the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position to toggle the compass direction display
1 on or off. The display will indicate the direction
䊊
that the vehicle is heading.
N: North
E: East
S: South
W: West
If the display reads “C”, calibrate the compass by
driving the vehicle in three complete circles at
less than 5 mph (8 km/h).

Instruments and controls 2-7

You can also calibrate the compass by driving
your vehicle on your everyday route. The compass will be calibrated once it has tracked three
complete circles.

WIC0355

2-8 Instruments and controls

Zone variation change procedure
The difference between magnetic north and geographical north is known as variance. In some
areas, this difference can sometimes be great
enough to cause false compass readings. Follow
these instructions to set the variance for your
particular location if this happens:
button for about
1. Press and hold the
8 seconds. The current zone number will
appear in the display. Release the button.
2. Find your current location on the zone map.
Refer to the illustration.
button repeatedly to toggle
3. Press the
through the zone numbers until the desired
number appears in the display. Once you
have selected a zone number, the display
will show a compass direction within a few
seconds.

2. Calibrate the compass by driving the vehicle
in three complete circles at a maximum
speed of 5 mph (8 km/h).
3. After completing the circles, the display
should return to normal.

CAUTION
● Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc.,
which are attached to the vehicle by
means of a magnet. They affect the operation of the compass.
● When cleaning the mirror, use a paper
towel or similar material dampened
with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass
cleaner directly on the mirror as it may
cause the liquid cleaner to enter the
mirror housing.

Inaccurate compass direction
The compass display is equipped with automatic
correction function. If the correct direction is not
shown, follow this procedure.
1. With the display turned on, press and hold
for about 10 seconds. The “C”
the
icon in the compass display will illuminate.

Instruments and controls 2-9

WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR
LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)
warning light

Power steering warning light

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

Brake warning light

Seat belt warning light and chime

Security indicator light

Charge warning light

Supplemental air bag warning light

Side light and headlight indicator light (green)

Forward Emergency Braking (FEB) system
warning light (if so equipped)

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) LOCK indicator light
(if so equipped)

Slip indicator light

Forward Emergency Braking (FEB) with pedestrian detection system warning light (if so
equipped)

Front fog light indicator light (if so equipped)

SPORT mode indicator light

Low tire pressure warning light

Front passenger air bag status light

Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

Low windshield-washer fluid warning light
(if so equipped)

High beam assist indicator light (green)
(if so equipped)

Master warning light

High beam indicator light (blue)

2-10 Instruments and controls

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indicator
light

CHECKING LIGHTS

WARNING LIGHTS

Low brake fluid warning light

With all doors closed, apply the parking brake,
fasten the seat belts and place the ignition switch
in the ON position without starting the engine.
The following lights (if so equipped) will come on:

For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in this section.

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the light warns of a low brake fluid level.
If the light comes on while the engine is running,
with the parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle and perform the following:

,
or
,
,
The following lights (if so equipped) come on
briefly and then go off:
or

,
,
If any light fails to come on or operate in a way
other than described, it may indicate a burnedout bulb and/or a system malfunction. Have the
system checked. It is recommended that you visit
a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Some indicators and warnings are also displayed
on the vehicle information display between the
speedometer and tachometer. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in
this section.

Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS)
warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the ABS warning light illuminates and
then turns off. This indicates the ABS is operational.
If the ABS warning light illuminates while the
engine is running or while driving, it may indicate
the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the
system checked. It is recommended that you visit
a NISSAN dealer for this service.
If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock function is turned off. The brake system then operates
normally but without anti-lock assistance. For
additional information, refer to “Brake system” in
the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

Brake warning light

This light functions for both the parking brake and
the foot brake systems.

1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid
as necessary. For additional information, refer to “Brake fluid” in the “Do-it-yourself”
section of this manual.
2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the
warning system checked. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING
● Your brake system may not be working
properly if the warning light is on. Driving could be dangerous. If you judge it
to be safe, drive carefully to the nearest
service station for repairs. Otherwise,
have your vehicle towed because driving it could be dangerous.
● Pressing the brake pedal with the engine stopped and/or a low brake fluid
level may increase your stopping distance and braking will require greater
pedal effort as well as pedal travel.

Instruments and controls 2-11

● If the brake fluid level is below the
MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake
fluid reservoir, do not drive until the
brake system has been checked. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning
indicator
When the parking brake is released and the
brake fluid level is sufficient, if both the brake
warning light and the ABS warning light illuminate, it may indicate the ABS is not functioning
properly. Have the brake system checked and, if
necessary, repaired. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Avoid
high-speed driving and abrupt braking. For additional information, refer to “Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light” in this section.

Charge warning light
If this light comes on while the engine is running,
it may indicate the charging system is not functioning properly. Turn the engine off and check
the generator belt. If the belt is loose, broken,
missing, or if the light remains on, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.

2-12 Instruments and controls

CAUTION
● Do not ground electrical accessories directly to the battery terminal. Doing so
will bypass the variable voltage control
system and the vehicle battery may not
charge completely. For additional information, refer to “Variable voltage control system” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.
● Do not continue driving if the generator
belt is loose, broken or missing.

Forward Emergency Braking
(FEB) system warning light (if
so equipped)
This light illuminates when the Forward Emergency Braking system is set to OFF on the meter
display.
If the light illuminates when the Forward Emergency Braking system is ON, it may indicate that
the system is unavailable. For additional information, refer to “Forward Emergency Braking (FEB)”
in the “Starting and driving” section of this
manual.

Forward Emergency Braking
(FEB) with Pedestrian
Detection system warning light
(if so equipped)
This light comes on when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position. It turns off after the
engine is started.
This light illuminates when the FEB system is set
to OFF in the vehicle information display.
If the light illuminates when the FEB system is on,
it may indicate that the system is unavailable. For
additional information, refer to “Forward Emergency Braking (FEB) with Pedestrian Detection
system” in the “Starting and driving” section of
this manual.

Low tire pressure warning light
Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tire
pressure of all tires except the spare.
The low tire pressure warning light warns of low
tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not
functioning properly.
After the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, this light illuminates for about 1 second
and turns off.

Low tire pressure warning

TPMS malfunction

If the vehicle is being driven with low tire
pressure, the warning light will illuminate.
A “Tire Pressure Low Add Air” warning also
appears in the vehicle information display.

If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the low
tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position. The light will remain on
after 1 minute. Have the system checked. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service. The ⬙Tire Pressure Low — Add Air⬙
warning does not appear if the low tire pressure
warning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS malfunction.

When the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates, you should stop and adjust the
tire pressure of all four tires to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the
Tire and Loading Information label located
in the driver’s door opening. The low tire
pressure warning light does not automatically turn off when the tire pressure is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the recommended pressure, the vehicle must be
driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h) to
activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire
pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure
gauge to check the tire pressure.
The “Tire Pressure Low Add Air” warning appears each time the ignition switch is placed in
the ON position as long as the low tire pressure
warning light remains illuminated.
For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in this section and “Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and
driving” section and in the “In case of emergency”
section of this manual.

For additional information, refer to “Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and
driving” section and “Tire pressure” in the “Do-ityourself” section of this manual.

WARNING
● Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those who
use a pacemaker should contact the
electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before
use.
● If the light does not illuminate with the
ignition switch placed in the ON position, have the vehicle checked as soon
as possible. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

● If the light illuminates while driving,
avoid sudden steering maneuvers or
abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed,
pull off the road to a safe location and
stop the vehicle as soon as possible.
Driving with under-inflated tires may
permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and
may lead to an accident and could result
in serious personal injury or death.
Check the tire pressure for all four tires.
Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on
the Tire and Loading Information label
located in the driver’s door opening to
turn the low tire pressure warning light
off. If the light still illuminates while
driving after adjusting the tire pressure,
a tire may be flat or the TPMS may be
malfunctioning. If you have a flat tire,
replace it with a spare tire as soon as
possible. If no tire is flat and all tires are
properly inflated, have the vehicle
checked. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Instruments and controls 2-13

● Since the spare tire is not equipped with
TPMS, when a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel is replaced the TPMS will not
function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately
1 minute. The light will remain on after
1 minute. Have your tires replaced
and/or TPMS system reset as soon as
possible. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for these services.
● Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by NISSAN could affect the
proper operation of the TPMS.

CAUTION
● The TPMS is not a substitute for the
regular tire pressure check. Be sure to
check the tire pressure regularly.

as necessary. For additional information, refer to
“Windshield-washer fluid” in the “Do-it-yourself”
section of this manual.

Master warning light
When the ignition is in the ON position, the
master warning light illuminates if any of the following are displayed on the vehicle information
display.
● All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Tire Size Incorrect
See Owner’s Manual
● All-Wheel Drive (AWD) High Temp. Stop
vehicle
● All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Error See Owner’s
Manual

illuminate. For additional information, refer to “AllWheel Drive (AWD)” in the “Starting and driving”
section of this manual.
● If the warning light comes on while driving
there may be a malfunction in the AWD
system. Reduce the vehicle speed and have
your vehicle checked as soon as possible. It
is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

CAUTION
● If the master warning light was illuminated while driving:
—AWD High Temp Stop vehicle

● If the vehicle is being driven at speeds
of less than 16 mph (25 km/h), the
TPMS may not operate correctly.

● Low fuel warning

Pull off the road in a safe area and idle the
engine. The driving mode will change to
2WD to prevent the AWD system from
malfunctioning. If the warning light turns
off, you can drive again.

● Low windshield-washer fluid warning

—Tire Size Incorrect See Owner’s Manual

● Be sure to install the specified size of
tires to the four wheels correctly.

● Parking brake release warning

Pull off the road in a safe area and idle the
engine. Check that all tire sizes are the
same, tire pressure is correct and tires are
not worn.

Low windshield-washer fluid
warning light (if so equipped)
This light comes on when the windshield-washer
fluid is at a low level. Add windshield-washer fluid

2-14 Instruments and controls

● No key warning

● Door/liftgate open warning
● Loose fuel cap warning
If the All-Wheel Drive (AWD) system malfunctions, or the diameter of the front and the rear
wheels are different, the master warning light will

● If the warning light is still on after the
above operations, have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

Power steering warning light
WARNING
● If the engine is not running or is turned
off while driving, the power assist for
the steering will not work. Steering will
be harder to operate.
● When the power steering warning light
illuminates with the engine running,
there will be no power assist for the
steering. You will still have control of
the vehicle, but the steering will be
harder to operate. Have the power
steering system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the power steering warning light illuminates. After starting the engine, the power steering warning light turns off. This indicates the
power steering is operational.

If the power steering warning light illuminates
while the engine is running, it may indicate the
power steering is not functioning properly and
may need servicing. Have the power steering
checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.

7 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in
the ON position, the system does not activate the
warning light for the front passenger.
For additional information, refer to “Seat belts” in
the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental
restraint system” section of this manual.

When the power steering warning light illuminates with the engine running, there will be no
power assist for the steering, but you will still
have control of the vehicle. At this time, greater
steering effort is required to operate the steering
wheel, especially in sharp turns and at low
speeds.

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON or
START position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then
turns off. This means the system is operational.

For additional information, refer to “Power steering” in the “Starting and driving” section of this
manual.

If any of the following conditions occur, the front
air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, and pretensioner seat belt systems need servicing:

Seat belt warning light and
chime

Supplemental air bag warning
light

● The supplemental air bag warning light remains on after approximately 7 seconds.
● The supplemental air bag warning light
flashes intermittently.

The light and chime remind you to fasten your
seat belts. The light illuminates whenever the
ignition switch is placed in the ON or START
position and remains illuminated until the driver’s
seat belt is fastened. At the same time, the chime
sounds for about 6 seconds unless the driver’s
seat belt is securely fastened.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for these services.

The seat belt warning light may also illuminate if
the front passenger’s seat belt is not fastened
when the front passenger’s seat is occupied. For

Unless checked and repaired, the supplemental
restraint system (air bag system) and/or the pretensioner(s) may not function properly. For addi-

● The supplemental air bag warning light does
not come on at all.

Instruments and controls 2-15

tional information, refer to “Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)” in the “Safety—Seats, seat
belts and supplemental restraint system” section
of this manual.

INDICATOR LIGHTS
For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in this section.

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) LOCK
indicator light (if so equipped)
When the ignition switch is in the ON position,
the All-Wheel Drive (AWD) LOCK indicator light
illuminates and then turns off.
When selecting AWD LOCK mode while the
engine is running, the AWD LOCK indicator light
illuminates.

2-16 Instruments and controls

CAUTION
Do not drive on dry hard surface roads in
the LOCK mode.

Front fog light indicator light (if
so equipped)
The front fog light indicator light illuminates when
the front fog lights are on. For additional information, refer to “Fog light switch” in this section.

Front passenger air bag status
light
The front passenger air bag status light will be lit
and the passenger front air bag will be off depending on how the front passenger seat is being
used.
For additional information, refer to “Front passenger air bag and status light” in the “Safety —
Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section of this manual.

High beam assist indicator light
(green) (if so equipped)
This indicator light illuminates when the headlights come on while the headlight switch is in the
AUTO position with the high beams selected.
This indicates that the high beam assist is operational.

For additional information, refer to “Headlight and
turn signal switch” in this section.

High beam indicator light
(blue)
This blue light comes on when the headlight high
beams are on and goes out when the low beams
are selected.
The high beam indicator light also comes on
when the passing signal is activated.

Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)
If this indicator light comes on steady or blinks
while the engine is running, it may indicate a
potential emission control malfunction.
The MIL may also come on steady if the fuel-filler
cap is loose or missing, or if the vehicle runs out
of fuel. Check to make sure the fuel-filler cap is
installed and closed tightly, and that the vehicle
has at least 3 gallons (11.4 liters) of fuel in the
fuel tank.
light should
After a few driving trips, the
turn off if no other potential emission control
system malfunction exists.

If this indicator light comes on steady for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds when the
engine is not running, it indicates that the vehicle
is not ready for an emission control system
inspection/maintenance test. For additional information,
refer
to
“Readiness
for
inspection/maintenance (I/M) test” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this
manual.
Operation
The MIL will come on in one of two ways:
● MIL on steady — An emission control system
malfunction has been detected. Check the
fuel-filler cap if the LOOSE FUEL CAP
warning appears in the vehicle information
display. If the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, tighten or install the cap and continue to
light should turn
drive the vehicle. The
off after a few driving trips. If the
light
does not turn off after a few driving trips,
have the vehicle inspected. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service. You do not need to have your
vehicle towed to the dealer.

● MIL blinking — An engine misfire has been
detected which may damage the emission
control system. To reduce or avoid emission
control system damage:
– do not drive at speeds above 45 mph
(72 km/h).
– avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.
– avoid steep uphill grades.
– if possible, reduce the amount of cargo
being hauled or towed.
The MIL may stop blinking and come on steady.
Have the vehicle inspected. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the
dealer.

CAUTION
Continued vehicle operation without having the emission control system checked
and repaired as necessary could lead to
poor driveability, reduced fuel economy,
and possible damage to the emission control system.

Security indicator light
This light blinks when the ignition switch is
placed in the OFF or LOCK position.
The blinking security indicator light indicates that
the security systems equipped on the vehicle are
operational.
For additional information, refer to “Security systems” in this section.

Side light and headlight
indicator light (green)
The side light and headlight indicator light illuminates when the side light or headlight position is
selected. For additional information, refer to
“Headlight and turn signal switch” in this section.

Slip indicator light
This indicator will blink when the VDC system is
operating, thus alerting the driver to the fact that
the road surface is slippery and the vehicle is
nearing its traction limits.
You may feel or hear the system working; this is
normal.
The light will blink for a few seconds after the
VDC system stops limiting wheel spin.

Instruments and controls 2-17

The
indicator light also comes on when
you place the ignition switch in the ON position.
The light will turn off after approximately 2 seconds if the system is operational. If the light does
not come on have the system checked. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.

SPORT mode indicator light
This light illuminates and then turns off when the
ignition switch is placed in the ON position, and
when the SPORT mode is selected.
For additional information, refer to “Continuously
Variable Transmission (CVT)” in the “Starting and
driving” section of this manual.

Turn signal/hazard indicator
lights
The appropriate light flashes when the turn signal
switch is activated.
Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turned
on.

Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) OFF indicator light
This indicator light comes on when the VDC OFF
switch is pushed to off. This indicates the VDC
system has been turned off.

2-18 Instruments and controls

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the
engine and the system will operate normally. For
additional information, refer to “Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC) system” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.
The VDC indicator light also comes on when you
place the ignition switch in the ON position. The
light will turn off after about 2 seconds if the
system is operational. If the light stays on or
indicator light
comes on along with the
while you are driving, have the VDC system
checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
While the VDC system is operating, you might
feel a slight vibration or hear the system working
when starting the vehicle or accelerating, but this
is normal.

Key reminder chime
A chime sounds if the driver’s door is opened while
the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position or
placed in the OFF or LOCK position with the key
left in the vehicle. Make sure the ignition switch is
placed in the LOCK position, and take the key with
you when leaving the vehicle.

Light reminder chime
With the ignition switch placed in the OFF position, a chime sounds when the driver’s door is
opened if the headlights or parking lights are on.
Turn the headlight control switch off before leaving the vehicle.

NISSAN Intelligent Key® door buzzer
(if so equipped)

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

The Intelligent Key door buzzer sounds if any one
of the following improper operations is found.

Brake pad wear warning

● The Intelligent Key is left inside the vehicle
when locking the doors.

The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings.
When a disc brake pad requires replacement, it
makes a high pitched scraping sound when the
vehicle is in motion, whether or not the brake
pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as
soon as possible if the warning sound is heard.

● Any doors are not closed securely when
locking the doors.
When the buzzer sounds, be sure to check both
the vehicle and the Intelligent Key. For additional
information, refer to “NISSAN Intelligent Key®” in
the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section
of this manual.

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY

The OK,
and
buttons also
control audio and control panel functions in some
conditions. Most screens and menus offer instruction prompts of the steering switch buttons
to indicate how to control the vehicle information
display. Dots on the left side of the vehicle information display will appear if there is more than
one page of menu items. The OK button changes
buttons
the audio source and the
also control voice recognition manual mode. For
additional information, refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.
LIC2630

The vehicle information display is located to the
left of the speedometer. It displays such items as:
● Vehicle settings
● Trip computer information
● Drive system warnings and settings
● Cruise control system information
● NISSAN Intelligent Key® operation information
● Chassis Control
● Indicators and warnings
● Tire Pressure information

LIC3566

HOW TO USE THE VEHICLE
INFORMATION DISPLAY
The vehicle information display can be changed
,
, and
using the
OK buttons located on the steering wheel.
1
䊊

2
䊊

䊊
3

- Use these buttons to navigate the vehicle information display.
OK - Change or select an item in the vehicle
information display.
— Returns to the previous menu.

STARTUP DISPLAY
When the vehicle is placed in the ON position,
the vehicle information display may display the
following screens:
● Home
● Range
● Average speed
● Trip
● Fuel Economy
● Compass
● Audio
● Driving Aids
● Tire Pressure

Instruments and controls 2-19

● 4x4–i

2. Press the OK button.

SETTINGS

● Chassis Control

3. Select one of the following items:

● Warnings

● “Cancel” — returns to the previous screen
without resetting the trip computer.

The setting mode allows you to change the information displayed in the vehicle information display:

● Settings
Warnings will only display if there are any present. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle
information display warnings and indicators” in
this section.
To control which items display in the vehicle
information display, refer to “Meter settings” in
this section.

RESETTING THE TRIP COMPUTER
1. Press the
or
buttons
until you reach the desired trip computer
mode.
NOTE:
Once you have a trip computer displayed,
and
butyou can use the
tons to display the Average Speed and Fuel
Economy screens.

2-20 Instruments and controls

● “Distance” — resets the current trip computer distance and time of the selected trip
computer.
● “All” — resets all linked values for the selected drive computer. This includes distance and time, average fuel economy and
average speed information for the selected
drive computer.

● Driver Assistance
● Clock
● Meter Settings
● Vehicle Settings
● Maintenance
● Alarm
● Tire Pressures

NOTE:

● Unit

Trip computer 2 will automatically reset
each time the ignition is placed in the OFF
position.

● Language
● Factory Reset

Driver Assistance
The driver assistance menu allows the user to
change the settings for driving, parking, and braking aids.
Menu item
Driving Aids (if so equipped)
Cruise Control
Steering Assist
Blind Spot
Warning
Emergency Brake
Forward (FCW)
Parking Aids (if so equipped)
Moving Object
Cross Traffic
Front Sensor
Rear Sensor
Display
Volume
Range
Chassis Control
Trace Control
Engine Brake

Result
Displays available driving aids
Displays available cruise control options
Allows user to turn the steering assist feature on or off
Displays available blind spot options
Allows user to turn Blind Spot Warning (BSW) on or off. For additional information, refer to “Blind Spot Warning (BSW)” in the
“Starting and driving” section of this manual.
Allows user to turn the emergency brake feature on or off. For additional information, refer to “Forward Emergency Braking
(FEB)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.
Allows user to turn the forward collision warning on or off.
Displays available parking aids
Allows user to turn the Moving Object Detection (MOD) feature on or off For additional information, refer to “Around View®
Monitor” in the “Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems” section of this manual.
Allows user to turn the Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) feature on or off
Allows user to turn the front sensor on or off
Allows user to turn the rear sensor on or off
Allows user to turn the display on or off
Allows user to select sensor volume (High, Mid. or Low)
Allows user to select the sensor range (Far, Mid. or Near)
Displays available chassis controls options
Allows user to turn the trace control feature on or off. For additional information, refer to “Active trace control” in the “Starting and
driving” section of this manual.
Allows user to turn the engine brake feature on or off. For additional information, refer to “Active engine brake” in the “Starting
and driving” section of this manual.

Instruments and controls 2-21

Clock
Menu item
Clock

Result
When selected, the following message appears:
Models with Navigation: “Set clock in NAVI”. For additional information, refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.
Models without Navigation: “Set clock in Audio”. For additional information, refer to “Audio system” in the “Monitor,
climate, audio, phone and voice recognition system” in this manual.

Meter Settings
The meter settings allow the user to change the
settings for the vehicle information display
Menu item
Main Menu Selection
Home
Range
Average Speed
Trip
Fuel Economy
Navigation (if so equipped)
Audio
Driving Aids (if so equipped)
Tire Pressures
Chassis Control
Body Color

2-22 Instruments and controls

Result
Displays the available options
Allows user to turn the home screen on or off in the vehicle information display
Allows user to turn the range display on or off in the vehicle information display
Allows user to turn the average speed screen on or off in the vehicle information display
Allows user to turn the trip display on or off in the vehicle information display
Allows user to turn the fuel economy display on or off in the vehicle information display
Allows user to turn the navigation display on or off in the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to the
separate “Navigation Owner’s Manual”.
Allows user to turn the audio screen on or off in the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to “Audio
system” in the “Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems” section of this manual,
Allows user to turn the driving aids display on or off in the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to
“Driver Assistance” in this section.
Allows user to turn the tire pressure display on or off in the vehicle information display
Allows user to turn the chassis control display on or off in the vehicle information display
Allows user to select the color of the vehicle displayed in the vehicle information display

Menu item
ECO Mode Settings
ECO Indicator
DISP Mode
Pedal
Inst.FE
ECO Drive Report
Display
View History
Welcome Effect
Dial Effect
Display Effect

Result
Displays the available options for ECO mode settings
Allows the user to turn the ECO indicator on or off in the vehicle information display
Allows user to select how the ECO mode in displayed
Select to have the ECO mode shown as a pedal display
Select to have the ECO mode shown as instant fuel economy
Displays the available options for the ECO drive report
Allows user to turn the ECO drive report on or off
Allows user to view and reset ECO drive report history
Displays the available options for the welcome effect
Allows user to turn the dial effect on or off
Allows user to turn the display effect on or off

Instruments and controls 2-23

Vehicle Settings
The vehicle settings allow the user to change the
settings for lights, wipers, locking, keys, and
other vehicle settings.
Menu item
Lighting
Welcome Light
Auto Room Lamp
Light Sensitivity
Light Off Delay
Turn indicator
3 Flash Pass
Locking
I-Key Door Lock
Selective Unlock

Warning
Answer Bk. Horn
Wipers
Speed Dependent
Reverse Link (if so equipped)
Drip Wipe
Remote Start (if so equipped)

2-24 Instruments and controls

Result
Displays the available lighting options
Allows user to turn the welcome light on or off
Allows user to turn the auto room lamp on or off
Allows user to change when the lights illuminate based on the brightness outside the vehicle
Allows user to change the duration of time that the automatic headlights stay on after the vehicle is shut off
Displays the available turn indicator options
Allows user to turn the 3 flash pass feature on or off
Displays the available locking options
Allows user to turn I-Key door lock on or off. When turned on, the request switch on the door is activated
Allows user to turn selective unlock on or off. When turned on, only the driver’s door is unlocked after the door unlock
operation. When the door handle request switch on the driver’s or front passenger’s side door is pushed to be unlocked,
only the corresponding door is unlocked first. All the doors can be unlocked if the door unlock operation is performed again
within 1 minute. When this item is turned off, all the doors will be unlocked after the door unlock operation is performed
once.
Allows the user to turn the warning feature on or off
Allows user to turn answer back horn on or off. When turned on, the horn will chirp and the hazard indicators will flash once
when locking the vehicle with the Intelligent Key.
Displays the available wiper options
Allows user to turn wiper with speed on or off
Allows user to turn the reverse link feature on or off
Allows user to turn the drip wipe feature on or off
Allows user to turn the remote start on or off. When turned on, the engine can be restarted remotely. For additional
information, refer to “Remote engine start” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section of this manual.

Menu item
Battery Saver
Driving Position (if so equipped)
Exit Seat Slide

Exit Steering Up

Result
Allows user to turn the battery saver on or off. When turned on, the battery saver automatically turns off the ignition after a
period of time when the ignition switch is left in the ON position.
Displays the available driving position options
Allows the user to turn the exit seat slide on or off. When turned on, this feature will move the driver’s seat backward for an
easy exit when the ignition is turned off and the driver’s door is opened. After getting into the vehicle and placing the ignition switch in the ON position, the driver’s seat will move to the previous set position. For additional information, refer to
“Automatic drive positioner” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section of this manual.
Allows the user to turn the exit steering up feature on or off. When turned on, this feature will move the steering wheel upward for an easy exit when the ignition is turned off and the driver’s door is opened. After getting into the vehicle and placing the ignition switch in the ON position, the steering wheel moves to the previous position. For additional information, refer to “Automatic drive positioner” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section of this manual.

Instruments and controls 2-25

Maintenance
The maintenance menu allows the user to set
reminders for various vehicle maintenance items.

Menu item
Maintenance
Oil and Filter
Tire
Other

2-26 Instruments and controls

WARNING
The tire replacement indicator is not a
substitute for regular tire checks, including tire pressure checks. For additional
information, refer to “Changing wheels
and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of
this manual. Many factors including tire
inflation, alignment, driving habits and
road conditions affect tire wear and when
tires should be replaced. Setting the tire
replacement indicator for a certain driving
distance does not mean your tires will last
that long. Use the tire replacement indicator as a guide only and always perform
regular tire checks. Failure to perform
regular tire checks, including tire pressure
checks could result in tire failure. Serious
vehicle damage could occur and may lead
to a collision, which could result in serious
personal injury or death.
Result
Displays various maintenance reminder options
Allows user to set a reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one
Allows user to set a reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one
Allows user to set a reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one

Alarm
The alarm menu allows the user to set specific
alarms for various items on the vehicle.
Menu item
Outside Temp.
Timer Alert
Navigation (if so equipped)
Phone
Mail

Result
Allows user to turn the outside temp. alarm on or off
Allows user to set the timer alert alarm
Allows user to turn the navigation alarm on or off
Allows user to turn the phone alarm on or off
Allows user to turn the mail alarm on or off

Tire Pressures
The tire pressure menu allows the user to change
the units for the tire pressure display.
Menu item

Result

Tire Pressure Unit

Displays available units for tire pressure display

Unit
The unit menu allows the user to customize the
information that appears in the vehicle information display.
Menu item
Mileage
Tire Pressures
Temperature

Result
Displays available mileage options shown in the vehicle information display
Displays available tire pressures options shown in the vehicle information display
Displays available temperature options shown in the vehicle information display

Instruments and controls 2-27

Language
The language menu allows the user to change the
languages displayed in the vehicle information
display.
Menu item
Language

Result
Displays available language options for the vehicle information display

Factory Reset
The factory reset menu allows the user to restore
the vehicle information display settings to factory
status.
Menu item
Factory Reset

2-28 Instruments and controls

Result
Allows user to reset the vehicle information display settings to the original factory settings. Once selected, the user can
confirm or deny the reset.

LIC3665

Instruments and controls 2-29

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY
WARNINGS AND INDICATORS
1. Engine start operation
2. No Key Detected (if so equipped)
3. Shift to Park
4. Key Battery Low (if so equipped)

17. AWD High Temp. Stop vehicle (if so
equipped)
18. Tire Size Incorrect: See Owner’s Manual (if
so equipped)

Engine start operation
This indicator appears when the shift lever is in
the P (Park) position.

20. Shipping Mode On Push Storage Fuse

This indicator means that the engine will start by
pushing the ignition switch with the brake pedal
depressed. You can start the engine from any
position of the ignition switch.

19. Battery Voltage Low Charge Battery

21. Power will turn off to save the battery

5. Engine start operation for Intelligent Key system (if I-Key battery level is low) (if so
equipped)

No Key Detected (if so equipped)

22. Power turned off to save the battery

6. Key ID Incorrect (if so equipped)

24. Timer Alert — Time for a driver break?

This warning appears when the Intelligent Key is
left outside the vehicle with the ignition switch in
the ON position. Make sure the Intelligent Key is
inside the vehicle.

7. Release Parking Brake

25. Low Outside Temperature

8. Low Fuel

26. Chassis Control System Error: See Owner’s
Manual

For additional information about the Intelligent
Key, refer to “NISSAN Intelligent Key®” in the
“Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section of
this manual.

10. Door/liftgate Open

27. Cruise control indicator (if so equipped)

Shift to Park

11. I-Key System Error: See Owner’s Manual (if
so equipped)

28. Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) indicators (if
so equipped)

12. Loose Fuel Cap

29. Transmission Shift Position Indicator

This warning illuminates when the ignition switch
is in the OFF position and the shift lever is not in
the P (Park) position. Also, a chime sounds when
the ignition switch is in the OFF position.

13. Tire Pressure Low — Add Air

30. CVT Error: See Owner’s Manual

14. Flat Tire — Visit Dealer (if so equipped)

31. Malfunction: See Owner’s Manual

If this warning illuminates, move the shift lever to
the P (Park) position and start the engine.

15. Low Oil Pressure Stop Vehicle

32. ECO mode

Key Battery Low (if so equipped)

9. Low Washer Fluid (if so equipped)

16. AWD Error: See Owner’s Manual (if so
equipped)

2-30 Instruments and controls

23. Reminder: Turn OFF headlights

This indicator illuminates when the Intelligent Key
battery is running out of power.

If this indicator illuminates, replace the battery
with a new one. For additional information, refer
to “Battery replacement” in the “Do-it-yourself”
section of this manual.
Engine start operation for Intelligent Key
system (if I-Key battery is low) (if so
equipped)
This indicator appears when the battery of the
Intelligent Key is low and when the Intelligent Key
system and the vehicle are not communicating
normally.
If this appears, touch the ignition switch with the
Intelligent Key while depressing the brake pedal.
For additional information, refer to “NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery discharge” in the “Starting
and driving” section of this manual.
Key ID Incorrect (if so equipped)
This warning appears when the ignition switch is
placed from the OFF position and the Intelligent
Key is not recognized by the system. You cannot
start the engine with an unregistered key.
For additional information, refer to “NISSAN Intelligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks and
adjustments” section of this manual.

Release Parking Brake
This warning illuminates in the message area of
the vehicle information display when the parking
brake is set and the vehicle is driven.
Low Fuel
This warning illuminates when the fuel level in the
fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is
convenient, preferably before the fuel gauge
reaches 0 (Empty). There will be a small reserve of fuel in the tank when the fuel
gauge needle reaches 0 (Empty).
Low Washer Fluid (if so equipped)
This warning illuminates when the windshieldwasher fluid is at a low level. Add windshieldwasher fluid as necessary. For additional information, refer to “Windshield-washer fluid” in the
“Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.
Door/liftgate Open
This warning illuminates when a door has been
opened when the engine is running.
Key System Error: See Owner’s Manual (if
so equipped)
After the ignition switch is pushed to the ON
position, this light comes on for about 2 seconds
and then turns off.

The Key System Error message warns of a malfunction with the Intelligent Key system. If the light
comes on while the engine is stopped, it may be
impossible to start the engine.
If the light comes on while the engine is running,
you can drive the vehicle. However in these
cases, contact a NISSAN dealer for repair as
soon as possible.
Loose Fuel Cap
This warning appears when the fuel-filler cap is
not tightened correctly after the vehicle has been
refueled. For additional information, refer to
“Fuel-filler cap” in the “Pre-driving checks and
adjustments” section of this manual.
Tire Pressure Low - Add Air
This warning appears when the low tire pressure
warning light in the meter illuminates and low tire
pressure is detected. The warning appears each
time the ignition switch is placed in the ON position
as long as the low tire pressure warning light remains illuminated. If this warning appears, stop the
vehicle and adjust the tire pressures of all four tires
to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown
on the Tire and Loading Information label. For additional information, refer to “Low tire pressure
warning light” in this section and “Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and
driving” section of this manual.

Instruments and controls 2-31

Flat Tire – Visit Dealer (if so equipped)
This warning appears when the low tire pressure
warning light in the meter illuminates and one or
more flat tires are detected while driving. A chime
also sounds for approximately 10 seconds.
Low Oil Pressure Stop Vehicle
This warning appears in the message area of the
vehicle information display if low oil pressure is
detected. This gauge is not designed to indicate
low oil level. The low oil pressure warning is
not designed to indicate a low oil level. Use
the dipstick to check the oil level. For additional
information, refer to “Engine oil” in the “Do-ityourself” section of this manual.
AWD Error: See Owner’s Manual (if so
equipped)
This warning appears when the all-wheel drive
system is not functioning properly while the engine is running.
AWD High Temp. Stop vehicle (if so
equipped)
This warning may appear while trying to free a
stuck vehicle due to increased oil temperature.
The driving mode may change to 2-Wheel Drive
(2WD). If this warning is displayed, stop the

2-32 Instruments and controls

vehicle with the engine idling, as soon as it is safe
to do so. Then if the warning turns off, you can
continue driving.

Power turned off to save the battery

Tire Size Incorrect: See Owner’s Manual
(if so equipped)

Reminder: Turn OFF headlights

This warning may appear if there is a large difference between the diameters of the front and rear
wheels. Pull off the road in a safe area, with the
engine idling. Check that all the tire sizes are the
same, that the tire pressure is correct and that the
tires are not excessively worn.

This warning appears after the ignition switch is
automatically turned off to save the battery.
This warning appears when the headlights are
left in the ON position when exiting the vehicle.
Place the headlight switch in the OFF or AUTO
position. For additional information, refer to
“Headlight and turn signal switch” in this section.
Timer Alert – Time for a driver break?

This warning appears when the battery is low and
needs to be charged.

This indicator appears when the set time is
reached. The time can be set up to six hours. For
additional information on setting the timer, refer
to “Alarm” in this section.

Shipping Mode On Push Storage Fuse

Low Outside Temperature

This warning may appear if the extended storage
switch is not pushed in. When this warning appears, push in the extended storage switch to
turn off the warning. For additional information,
refer to “Extended storage switch” in this section.

This warning appears if the outside temperature
is below 37°F (3°C). The temperature can be
changed to display in Celsius or Fahrenheit. For
additional information, refer to “Unit” in this section.

Battery Voltage Low Charge Battery

Power will turn off to save the battery
This warning appears in the message area of the
vehicle information display after a period of time if
the shift lever has not moved from the P (Park)
position.

SECURITY SYSTEMS
Chassis Control System Error: See Owner’s Manual
This warning appears if the Integrated Dynamicscontrol Module detects an error in the Active
Trace Control, Active Engine Brake, or the Active
Ride Control systems. Have the system checked.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service. For additional information, refer to
“Chassis control” in the “Starting and driving”
section of this manual.
Cruise control indicator (if so equipped)
This indicator shows the cruise control system
status.
For additional information, refer to “Cruise control” in the “Starting and driving” section of this
manual.
Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) indicators
(if so equipped)
These indicators show the Intelligent Cruise
Control (ICC) system status. The status is shown
by color. For additional information, refer to “Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)” in the “Starting
and driving” section of this manual.
Transmission Shift Position Indicator

CVT Error: See Owner’s Manual
This warning illuminates when there is a problem
with the CVT system. If this warning comes on,
have the system checked. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Malfunction: See Owner’s Manual
This warning appears when the Forward Emergency Braking (FEB) system is not functioning
properly.
ECO mode indicator
This indicator shows when the ECO mode is
engaged.
For additional information, refer to “ECO mode
switch” in the “Starting and driving” section of this
manual.

LIC2385

Your vehicle may have two types of security systems:
● Vehicle security system
● NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM
The vehicle security system provides visual and
audible alarm signals if someone opens the doors
or liftgate when the system is armed. It is not,
however, a motion detection type system that
activates when a vehicle is moved or when a
vibration occurs.

This indicator shows the transmission shift position.

Instruments and controls 2-33

The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot
prevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior or
exterior vehicle components in all situations. Always secure your vehicle even if parking for a
brief period. Never leave your keys in the vehicle,
and always lock the vehicle when unattended. Be
aware of your surroundings, and park in secure,
well-lit areas whenever possible.
Many devices offering additional protection, such
as component locks, identification markers, and
tracking systems, are available at auto supply
stores and specialty shops. A NISSAN dealer
may also offer such equipment. Check with your
insurance company to see if you may be eligible
for discounts for various theft protection features.

How to arm the vehicle security
system
1. Close all windows. (The system can be
armed even if the windows are open.)
2. Remove the keys from the vehicle.
3. Close all doors and liftgate. Lock all doors.
The doors can be locked with the key fob (if
so equipped), Intelligent Key (if so
equipped), door handle request switch, or
mechanical key.

security indicator
4. Confirm that the
light stays on for about 30 seconds. The
vehicle security system is now pre-armed.
The vehicle security system will automatically shift into the armed phase. The
security light begins to flash once every
three seconds. If during the pre-armed
phase one of the following occurs, the system will not arm:
● Any door is unlocked with the key fob (if so
equipped), the Intelligent Key (if so
equipped), mechanical key, or door request
switch.
● Ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
● Even when the driver and/or passengers are in the vehicle, the system will
activate with all the doors, hood and
liftgate locked with the ignition switch
placed in the LOCK position. When
placing the ignition switch in the ON
position, the system will be released.

Vehicle security system activation
The vehicle security system will give the following
alarm:
● The headlights blink and the horn sounds
intermittently but synchronously.

2-34 Instruments and controls

● The alarm automatically turns off after a period of time. However, the alarm reactivates if
the vehicle is tampered with again.
The alarm is activated by:
● opening any door or the liftgate without using the key or Intelligent Key (even if the door
is unlocked by releasing the door inside lock
knob).

How to stop an activated alarm
The alarm stops only by unlocking a door or the
liftgate with the mechanical key the key fob (if so
button on the Inequipped), pressing the
telligent Key (if so equipped), or pushing the
request switch on the driver’s or passenger’s
door with the Intelligent Key (if so equipped) in
range of the door handle.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM
The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not
allow the engine to start without the use of a
registered key.
Never leave these keys in the vehicle.

FCC Notice:

If the light still remains on and/or the engine will not start, seek service for the
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System service as soon as possible. Please bring all
registered keys that you have. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.

For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may
not cause harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For Canada:
This device complies with Industry Canada
license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation
of the device.

LIC0474

Security indicator light
The security indicator light blinks whenever the
ignition switch is placed in the OFF or LOCK
position.
This function indicates the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is operational.
If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is malfunctioning, the light will remain on while the
ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

Instruments and controls 2-35

WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH

CAUTION
● Do not operate the washer continuously
for more than 30 seconds.
● Do not operate the washer if the
windshield-washer fluid reservoir is
empty.

LIC2661

SWITCH OPERATION
WARNING
In freezing temperatures the washer solution may freeze on the windshield and
obscure your vision which may lead to an
accident. Warm the windshield with the
defroster before you wash the windshield.

2-36 Instruments and controls

● Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid
reservoir with windshield-washer fluid
concentrates at full strength. Some
methyl alcohol based windshieldwasher fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while
filling the windshield-washer fluid
reservoir.
● Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturer’s recommended levels before pouring the fluid into the windshield-washer
fluid reservoir. Do not use the
windshield-washer fluid reservoir to
mix the windshield-washer fluid concentrate and water.

NOTE:
If the windshield wiper operation is interrupted by snow or ice, the wiper may stop
moving to protect its motor. If this occurs,
turn the wiper switch to the OFF position
and remove the snow or ice that is on and
around the wiper arms. In approximately
1 minute, turn the switch on again to operate the wiper.
The windshield wiper and washer operates when
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the
following speed:
1
䊊

2
䊊
3
䊊

Intermittent (INT) — intermittent operation
can be adjusted by turning the knob toward
A (Slower) or 䊊
B (Faster). Also, the inter䊊
mittent operation speed varies in accordance with the vehicle speed. (For example,
when the vehicle speed is high, the intermittent operation speed will be faster.)
Low (LO) — continuous low speed operation
High (HI) — continuous high speed operation

4 to have one sweep operation
Lift the lever up 䊊
(MIST) of the wiper.

CAUTION
● Do not operate the washer continuously
for more than 30 seconds.

5 to operate the
Pull the lever toward you 䊊
washer. The wiper will also operate several times.

● Do not operate the washer if the
windshield-washer fluid reservoir is
empty.

After a short delay the drip wipe function will
operate the wiper once more to clear remaining
windshield-washer fluid from the windshield.
NOTE:
The Speed Dependent feature and Drip
Wipe feature may be disabled. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in this section.

LIC2662

REAR SWITCH OPERATION
WARNING
In freezing temperatures the washer solution may freeze on the window and obscure your vision. Warm the rear window
with the defroster before you wash the
rear window.

Instruments and controls 2-37

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE
MIRROR (if so equipped)
DEFROSTER SWITCH
NOTE:

NOTE:

If the rear window wiper operation is interrupted by snow, etc., the wiper may stop
moving to protect its motor. If this occurs,
turn the wiper switch to OFF and remove
the snow, etc. on and around the wiper
arms. After about 1 minute, turn the switch
ON again to operate the wiper.

The top and bottom few rows of wires on
the rear window are not part of the rear
window defroster system. These wires
make up the antenna for the audio system.

The rear window wiper and washer operate when
the ignition switch is in the ON position. Turn the
switch clockwise from the OFF position to operate the wiper.
1
䊊
2
䊊

Intermittent (INT) — intermittent operation
(not adjustable)
Low (ON) — continuous low speed operation

3 to operate the
Push the switch forward 䊊
washer. The wiper will also operate several times.

NOTE:
The Reverse Link feature may be disabled.
For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in this section.

LIC2614

To defrost the rear window glass and outside
mirrors (if so equipped), start the engine and
push the rear window defroster switch on. The
rear window defroster indicator light on the
switch comes on. Push the switch again to turn
the defroster off.
The rear window defroster automatically turns off
after approximately 15 minutes.

CAUTION
When cleaning the inner side of the rear
window, be careful not to scratch or damage the rear window defroster.

2-38 Instruments and controls

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL
SWITCH

LIC2634

Type A (if so equipped)

HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH
Lighting

䊊
1

2
䊊

Rotate the switch to the
position, and
the front parking, tail, license plate, and instrument panel lights will come on.
Rotate the switch to the
position, and
the headlights will come on and all the other
lights remain on.

LIC2635

Type B (if so equipped)

CAUTION
Use the headlights with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle
battery.

LIC2636

Autolight system (if so equipped)
The autolight system allows the headlights to turn
on and off automatically. The autolight system
can:
● Turn on the headlights, front parking, tail,
license plate and instrument panel lights automatically when it is dark.
● Turn off all the lights when it is light.
● Keep all the lights on for a period of time after
you place the ignition switch in the OFF
position and all doors are closed.

Instruments and controls 2-39

NOTE:
Autolight activation sensitivity and the time
delay for autolight shutoff can be adjusted.
For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in this section.
To turn on the autolight system:
1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO posi1 .
tion 䊊
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON.
3. The autolight system automatically turns the
headlights on and off.
Initially, if the ignition switch is turned OFF and a
door is opened and left open, the headlights
remain ON for a period of time. If another door is
opened while the headlights are on, then the
timer is reset.
To turn the autolight system off, turn the switch to
, or
position.
the OFF,

2-40 Instruments and controls

LIC3051

Be sure you do not put anything on top of
the autolight sensor located in the top side
1 of the instrument panel. The autolight
䊊
sensor controls the autolight; if it is covered, the autolight sensor reacts as if it is
dark out and the headlights will illuminate.
If this occurs while parked with the engine
off and the ignition switch placed in the ON
position, your vehicle’s battery could become discharged.

LIC2637

Headlight beam select
1
䊊

2
䊊
3
䊊

To select the high beam function, push the
lever forward. The high beam lights come on
light illuminates.
and the
Pull the lever back to select the low beam.
Pulling and releasing the lever flashes the
headlight high beams on and off.

Select the switch position by referring to the
following sample.

Battery saver system
The battery saver system automatically turns off
the ignition after a period of time when the ignition switch is left in the ON position.
The battery saver system automatically turns off
the following lights after a period of time when the
ignition switch is placed in the OFF position and
the doors are closed:
● Headlights, when the headlight switch is in
or
position
the
● Interior lights, when left in the ON position

CAUTION
Even though the battery saver feature automatically turns off the headlights after a
period of time, you should turn the headlight switch to the OFF position when the
engine is not running to avoid discharging
the vehicle battery.

Automatic headlight aiming control (if
so equipped)
Vehicles with LED headlights may be equipped
with an automatic levelling system. The headlight
axis is controlled automatically.
NISSAN recommends that you should consult
the local regulations on the use of lights.

LIC0662

Manual headlight aiming control (if so
equipped)
Depending on the number of occupants in the
vehicle and the load it is carrying, the headlight
axis may be higher than desired. If the vehicle is
traveling on a hilly road, the headlights may directly hit the rearview mirror of the vehicle ahead
or the windshield of the oncoming vehicle. The
light axis can be lowered with the operation of the
switch.
The larger the number designated on the switch,
the lower the axis.
When traveling without a heavy load or on a flat
road, select position 0.

Vehicle Load

Switch
Position

Driver only or Driver/front passenger

Driver/front seat passenger/rear
seat passengers

Driver/front seat passenger/rear
seat passengers/cargo or driver/
cargo/no trailer

Fully loaded/no trailer

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM
The daytime running lights automatically illuminate when the engine is started with the parking
brake released. The daytime running lights operate with the headlight switch in the OFF position
position. Turn the headlight switch
or in the
position for full illumination when
to the
driving at night.
If the parking brake is applied before the engine is
started, the daytime running lights do not illuminate. The daytime running lights illuminate when
the parking brake is released. The daytime running lights will remain on until the ignition switch
is placed in the OFF position.

Instruments and controls 2-41

WARNING
When the daytime running light system is
active, tail lights on your vehicle are not
on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on your
headlights. Failure to do so could cause
an accident injuring yourself and others.

LIC2624

INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL
A to decrease the brightPress the “-” button 䊊
ness of instrument panel lights.
B to increase the brightPress the “+” button 䊊
ness of instrument panel lights.

2-42 Instruments and controls

LIC2638

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
Turn signal
1
䊊

Move the lever up or down to signal the
turning direction. When the turn is completed, the turn signal cancels automatically.

HORN
Lane change signal
2
䊊

Move the lever up or down until the turn
signal begins to flash, but the lever does not
latch, to signal a lane change. Hold the lever
until the lane change is completed.
Move the lever up or down until the turn
signal begins to flash, but the lever does not
latch, and release the lever. The turn signal
will automatically flash three times.

Choose the appropriate method to signal a lane
change based on road and traffic conditions.
For additional information on disabling the 3 flash
pass turn indicator, refer to “Vehicle information
display” in this section.

LIC2639

LIC3568

FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped)

To sound the horn, push near the horn icon on the
steering wheel.

To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight switch
to the
position, then turn the fog light
switch to the
position.
To turn the fog lights on with the headlight switch
in the AUTO position, the headlights must be on,
then turn the fog light switch to the
position.
To turn the fog lights off, turn the fog light switch
to the OFF position.

WARNING
Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so
could affect proper operation of the
supplemental front air bag system. Tampering with the supplemental front air bag
system may result in serious personal
injury.

The headlights must be on and the low beams
selected for the fog lights to operate. The fog
lights automatically turn off when the high beam
headlights are selected.

Instruments and controls 2-43

HEATED SEAT SWITCHES (if so
equipped)
WARNING
Do not use or allow occupants to use the
seat heater if you or the occupants cannot
monitor elevated seat temperatures or
have an inability to feel pain in body parts
that contact the seat. Use of the seat
heater by such people could result in serious injury.

● When cleaning the seat, never use
gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any similar materials.
● If any malfunctions are found or the
heated seat does not operate, turn the
switch off and have the system checked.
It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.

CAUTION
● The battery could run down if the seat
heater is operated while the engine is
not running.
● Do not use the seat heater for extended
periods or when no one is using the
seat.
● Do not put anything on the seat which
insulates heat, such as a blanket, cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat
may become overheated.
● Do not place anything hard or heavy on
the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar
object. This may result in damage to the
heater.
● Any liquid spilled on the heated seat
should be removed immediately with a
dry cloth.

2-44 Instruments and controls

LIC3475

The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters.
1. Start the engine.
2. Push the LO or HI position of the switch, as
desired. The indicator light in the switch will
illuminate.
The heater is controlled by a thermostat,
automatically turning the heater on and off.
The indicator light will remain on as long as
the switch is on.
3. When the seat is warmed or before you
leave the vehicle, be sure to push the switch
to turn it off.

HEATED STEERING WHEEL SWITCH
(if so equipped)

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
OFF SWITCH
NOTE:
If the surface temperature of the steering
wheel is above 68°F (20°C) when the switch
is turned on, the system will not heat the
steering wheel. This is not a malfunction.

LIC3476

LIC3344

The heated steering wheel system is designed to
operate only when the surface temperature of the
steering wheel is below 68°F (20°C).

The vehicle should be driven with the VDC system on for most driving conditions.
If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC
system reduces the engine output to reduce
wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced
even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. If
maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck
vehicle, turn the VDC system off.

Push the heated steering wheel switch to warm
the steering wheel after the engine starts. The
indicator light will come on.
If the surface temperature of the steering wheel is
below 68°F (20°C), the system will heat the
steering wheel and cycle off and on to maintain a
temperature above 68°F (20°C). The indicator
light will remain on as long as the system is on.
Push the switch again to turn the heated steering
wheel system off manually. The indicator light will
go off.

To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFF
indicator will come on.
switch. The
Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the
engine to turn on the system. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)
system” in the “Starting and driving” section of
this manual.

Instruments and controls 2-45

ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) LOCK
SWITCH (if so equipped)

LIC2645

The all-wheel drive (AWD) lock switch is located
on the instrument panel. The AWD LOCK indicator light will illuminate when the switch is turned
on. For additional information, refer to “Warning
lights, indicator lights and audible reminders” in
this section and “AWD Lock Switch Operations”
in the “Starting and driving” section of this
manual.
Each time you push the switch, the AWD mode
will switch: AUTO →LOCK → AUTO.

2-46 Instruments and controls

E-CALL (SOS) SWITCH (if so
equipped)

POWER OUTLETS

LIC2615

LIC3357

Instrument Panel

The E-call (SOS) system switch is used in combination with a NissanConnectSM Services subscription to call for assistance in case of an
emergency.

12V OUTLETS

Pushing the switch will (with a paid subscription)
reach a Response Specialist that will provide
assistance based on the situation described by
the vehicle’s occupant. For additional information, or to enroll your vehicle, refer to
www.NissanUSA.com/connect,
www.Nissan.ca/NissanConnect, or
www.Nissan.ca/NissanConnect/fr or call
855–426–6628.

The front and center console power outlets are
powered only when the ignition switch is in the
ON position, or while the accessory power is
active.

The power outlets are for powering electrical
accessories such as cellular telephones. They
are rated at 12 volt, 120W (10A) maximum.

NOTE:
● When the ignition is in the OFF position, the
front and center console power outlets stop
delivering power one minute after the door is
opened and stays open.
● If the door remains closed after the ignition is
placed in the OFF position, the front and
center console power outlets continue to
deliver power until the accessory power
timer has elapsed.
● The cargo area power outlet(s) continues to
deliver power normally.
LIC2616

Center Console

CAUTION
● The outlet and plug may be hot during
or immediately after use.
● Only certain power outlets are designed
for use with a cigarette lighter unit. Do
not use any other power outlet for an
accessory lighter. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for additional information.
● Do not use with accessories that exceed
a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.

LIC2617

Cargo Area
● Do not use double adapters or more
than one electrical accessory.
● Use power outlets with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle
battery.
● Avoid using power outlets when the air
conditioner, headlights or rear window
defroster is on.
● Before inserting or disconnecting a
plug, be sure the electrical accessory
being used is turned OFF.

Instruments and controls 2-47

EXTENDED STORAGE SWITCH
● Push the plug in as far as it will go. If
good contact is not made, the plug may
overheat or the internal temperature
fuse may open.
● When not in use, be sure to close the
cap. Do not allow water or any other
liquid to contact the outlet.

LIC3266

LIC3359

OFF position

2-48 Instruments and controls

STORAGE

WARNING
To ensure proper operation of the passenger’s advanced air bag system, please observe the following items:
● Do not allow a passenger in the 2nd row
to push or pull on the seatback pocket.
● Do not place heavy loads heavier than
2.2 lbs. (1 kg) on the seatback, head
restraint/headrest or in the seatback
pocket.

LIC3268

ON position
The extended storage switch is used when shipping the vehicle. It is located in the fuse panel on
the driver’s side of the instrument panel. If any
electrical equipment does not operate, ensure
the extended storage switch is pushed fully in
place, as shown.

LIC2618

SEATBACK POCKETS
There is a pocket located on the back of the driver
and passenger seats. These pockets can be
used to store maps.

To inspect the extended storage switch, ensure
the ignition switch and headlight switch are off,
A using a suitable
remove the fuse box cover 䊊
tool in combination with a cloth to avoid damaging the trim.

Instruments and controls 2-49

LIC2890

GLOVE BOX

WIC1504

CONSOLE BOX

Open the glove box by pulling the handle.

WARNING
Keep glove box lid closed while driving to
help prevent injury in an accident or a
sudden stop.

2-50 Instruments and controls

1
To open the console box, press in on the lever 䊊
2 .
and raise the lid 䊊

LIC2312

SUNGLASSES HOLDER
To open the sunglasses holder, push and release.
Only store one pair of sunglasses in the holder.

To close, push the lid down until the lock latches.

WARNING
Keep the sunglasses holder closed while
driving to avoid obstructing the driver’s
view and to help prevent an accident.

CAUTION
● Do not use for anything other than
sunglasses.
● Do not leave sunglasses in the sunglasses holder while parking in direct
sunlight. The heat may damage the
sunglasses.

LIC2619

Front console

CUP HOLDERS

LIC2620

2nd row

CAUTION
Do not recline the rear seatback when you
use the cup holders on the rear armrest.
Doing so may cause the beverages to spill
over, and if they are hot, they may scald
the passengers.

Instruments and controls 2-51

CAUTION
● Avoid abrupt starting and braking when
the cup holder is being used to prevent
spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it
can scald you or your passenger.
● Use only soft cups in the cup holder.
Hard objects can injure you in an
accident.

LIC2622

Bottle holder — front

2-52 Instruments and controls

LIC2623

Bottle holder — rear

LIC2837

Bottle holder — 3rd row (if so equipped)

CAUTION
● Do not use bottle holder for any other
objects that could be thrown about in
the vehicle and possibly injure people
during sudden braking or an accident.
● Do not use bottle holder for open liquid
containers.

LIC2625

CARGO AREA STORAGE BIN (if so
equipped)
WARNING
If your vehicle is equipped with 3rd row
seating, do not attempt to store/place a
spare tire in the cargo area storage area.
In a collision a spare tire could become
loose and strike a person resulting in severe injury or death.
To access the floor storage area, pull up on the
handle to lift the luggage board.

LIC2646

DIVIDE-N-HIDE® ADJUSTABLE
FLOOR (if so equipped)
WARNING
Do not put objects heavier than 165 lbs
(75 kg) on the Divide-N-Hide® while in the
mid position. In the upper position, objects should not weigh more than 30 lbs
(14 kg).
There are multiple positions for the adjustable floor. The upper position allows for
additional storage below the adjustable
floor.

Instruments and controls 2-53

LIC2647

To move the adjustable floor from the
lower position to the upper position:
1. Use the handle to lift the adjustable floor.
2. Move the adjustable floor to the upper guide
track and ensure it is secure in place.

LIC2629

LUGGAGE HOOKS
When securing items using luggage hooks located on the back of the seat or side finisher do
not apply a load over more than 6.5 lbs (29 N) to
a single hook.
The luggage hooks that are located on the floor
should have loads less than 110 lbs (490 N) to a
single hook.
The luggage hooks can be used to secure cargo
with ropes or other types of straps.

2-54 Instruments and controls

● Never allow anyone to ride in the luggage area. It is extremely dangerous to
ride in a cargo area inside of a vehicle.
In a collision, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
● Do not allow people to ride in any area
of your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and seat belts.
● The child restraint top tether strap may
be damaged by contact with items in
the cargo area. Secure any items in the
cargo area. Your child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision if
the top tether strap is damaged.
● Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a seat belt properly.

CARGO COVER (if so equipped)
WARNING
● Never put anything on the cargo cover,
no matter how small. Any object on it
could cause an injury in an accident or
sudden stop.
● Do not put objects heavier than 44 lbs
(20 kg) on the cargo cover for long periods of time.
● Do not leave the cargo cover in the
vehicle with it disengaged from the
holder.
● Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding or
shifting. Do not place cargo higher than
the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause
personal injury.
● Your child could be seriously injured or
killed in a collision if the child restraint
top tether strap is damaged.

– If the cargo cover contacts the top
tether strap when it is attached to the
top tether anchor, remove the cargo
cover from the vehicle or secure it on
the cargo floor below its attachment
location. If the cargo cover is not removed, it may damage the top tether
strap during a collision.
– Do not allow cargo to contact the top
tether strap when it is attached to the
top tether anchor. Properly secure
the cargo so it does not contact the
top tether strap. Cargo that is not
properly secured or that contacts the
top tether strap may damage the top
tether strap during a collision.

WIC1003

The cargo cover keeps the luggage compartment
contents hidden from the outside.
Only attach the hook and loop fastener on the
cargo cover privacy cloth to the area on the rear
seatback where it is supposed to be attached.
Otherwise, the seat surface could be damaged.

Instruments and controls 2-55

To remove the cargo cover:

䊊
2
䊊
1

3
䊊

Do not apply any load directly to the roof side
rails. Cross bars must be installed before applying load/cargo/luggage to the roof of the vehicle.

Remove the straps from the rear hatch.
Remove the edge of the cargo cover privacy
cloth from the rear seatback.

Be careful that your vehicle does not exceed the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or its
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR front and
rear). The GVWR and GAWR are located on the
F.M.V.S.S. or C.V.M.S.S. certification label (located on the driver’s door pillar). For additional
information regarding GVWR and GAWR, refer
to “Vehicle loading information” in the “Technical
and consumer information” section of this
manual.

Remove the cargo cover holders from the
rear pillar.

LIC2386

ROOF RACK (if so equipped)
Genuine NISSAN accessory cross bars are available through a NISSAN dealer. Contact a
NISSAN dealer for crossbar or other equipment
information.
Always distribute the luggage evenly on the cross
bars. Do not load more than 150 lb (68 kg) on the
cross bars. Observe the maximum load limit
shown on the cross bars or roof carriers when
you attach them on the roof cross bars. Contact a
NISSAN dealer for crossbar or other equipment
information.

2-56 Instruments and controls

WARNING
● Drive extra carefully when the vehicle is
loaded at or near the cargo carrying
capacity, especially if the significant
portion of that load is carried on the
cross bars.
● Heavy loading of the cross bars has the
potential to affect the vehicle stability
and handling during sudden or unusual
handling maneuvers.
● Roof rack cross bars should be evenly
distributed.
● Do not exceed maximum roof rack cross
bars load.

WINDOWS
● Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding or
shifting. In a sudden stop or collision,
unsecured cargo could cause personal
injury.

CAUTION
Always install the cross bars onto the roof
side rails before loading cargo of any kind.
Loading cargo directly onto the roof side
rails or the vehicle’s roof may cause vehicle damage.

POWER WINDOWS
WARNING
● Make sure that all passengers have
their hands, etc. inside the vehicle while
it is in motion and before closing the
windows. Use the window lock switch to
prevent unexpected use of the power
windows.
● To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and/or its systems, including
entrapment in windows or inadvertent
door lock activation, do not leave children, people who require the assistance
of others or pets unattended in your
vehicle. Additionally, the temperature
inside a closed vehicle on a warm day
can quickly become high enough to
cause a significant risk of injury or
death to people and pets.
The power windows operate when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position, or for a
period of time after the ignition switch is placed in
the OFF position. If the driver’s or passenger’s
door is opened during this period of time, the
power to the windows is canceled.

LIC3208

Driver’s side power window switches
1. Window lock button
2. Power door lock switch
3. Front passenger side switch
4. Right rear passenger side switch
5. Left rear passenger side switch
6. Driver side automatic switch

Instruments and controls 2-57

The driver’s side control panel is equipped with
switches to open or close all of the windows.
To open a window, push the switch to the first
detent and continue to hold down until the desired window position is reached. To close a
window, pull the switch to the first detent and
continue to hold up until the desired window
position is reached.

Locking passengers’ windows
When the window lock switch is depressed, only
the driver’s side window can be opened or
closed. Push it again to cancel the window lock
function.

LIC2309

Front passenger’s power window
switch
The passenger’s window switch operates only
the corresponding passenger’s window. To open
1
the window partially, push the switch down 䊊
lightly until the desired window position is
reached. To close the window partially, pull the
2 until the desired window position is
switch up 䊊
reached.

2-58 Instruments and controls

LIC2663

Rear power window switch
The rear power window switches open or close
only the corresponding windows. To open the
1 . To
window, push the switch and hold it down 䊊
2 .
close the window, pull the switch up 䊊

POWER MOONROOF (if so equipped)
Auto-reverse function
The auto-reverse function can be activated when
a window is closed by automatic operation.
Depending on the environment or driving
conditions, the auto-reverse function may
be activated if an impact or load similar to
something being caught in the window occurs.

WARNING

LIC0410

Automatic operation
To fully open a window equipped with automatic
operation, press the window switch down to the
second detent and release it; it need not be held.
The window automatically opens all the way. To
stop the window, lift the switch up while the
window is opening.
To fully close a window equipped with automatic
operation, pull the switch up to the second detent
and release it; it need not be held. To stop the
window, press the switch down while the window
is closing.

There are some small distances immediately before the closed position which
cannot be detected. Make sure that all
passengers have their hands, etc., inside
the vehicle before closing the window.
If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected, replaced,
or jump started, the power window auto-reverse
function may not operate properly. If this occurs,
please contact the dealer to re-initialize the
power window auto-reverse system.
If the control unit detects something caught in a
window equipped with automatic operation, as it
is closing, the window will be immediately lowered.

LIC3477

The moonroof will only operate when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position. The moonroof is operational for a period of time, even if the
ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. If the
driver’s door or the front passenger’s door is
opened during this period of time, the power to
the moonroof is canceled.
When operating the power moonroof or panoramic sunshade, the switch need not be held
continuously. To stop the moonroof or sunshade
at any point while it is opening or closing, slide
the switch momentarily.

Instruments and controls 2-59

Sliding the moonroof
To fully open the moonroof, slide the switch to1 position to the second detent
ward the open 䊊
and release it. If the switch is slid to the first
detent and released while the sunshade is closed
only the sunshade will open.
To fully close the moonroof, slide the switch to2 position to the second detent
ward the close 䊊
and release it. If the switch is slid to the first
detent and released, the moonroof will close but
the sunshade will remain open.

Tilting the moonroof
To tilt the moonroof up, push and release the tilt
3 . If the moonroof is open, it will autoswitch 䊊
matically close and then tilt up.

Auto-reverse function (when closing or
tilting down the moonroof)
The auto-reverse function can be activated when
the moonroof is closed or tilted down by automatic operation when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position or for a period of time
after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position.
Depending on the environment or driving
conditions, the auto-reverse function may
be activated if an impact or load similar to
something being caught in the moonroof
occurs.

WARNING

To tilt the moonroof down but keep the sunshade
3 or slide
open, push and release the tilt switch 䊊
2 to the
the switch toward the close position 䊊
first detent.

There are some small distances immediately before the closed position which
cannot be detected. Make sure that all
passengers have their hands, etc., inside
the vehicle before closing the moonroof.

To tilt the moonroof down and close the sunshade at the same time, slide the switch toward
2 to the second detent.
the close position 䊊

When closing
If the control unit detects something caught in the
moonroof as it moves to the front, the moonroof
will immediately open backward.

When tilting down
If the control unit detects something caught in the
moonroof as it tilts down, the moonroof will immediately tilt up.
If the auto-reverse function malfunctions and repeats opening or tilting up the moonroof, keep
pushing the tilt down switch within 5 seconds
after it happens; the moonroof will fully close
gradually. Make sure nothing is caught in the
moonroof.

WARNING
● In an accident you could be thrown from
the vehicle through an open moonroof.
Always use seat belts and child
restraints.
● Do not allow anyone to stand up or
extend any portion of their body out of
the moonroof opening while the vehicle
is in motion or while the moonroof is
closing.

CAUTION
● Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand
from the moonroof before opening.
● Do not place heavy objects on the
moonroof or surrounding area.

2-60 Instruments and controls

Panoramic sunshade

WARNING

The panoramic sunshade operates when the ignition switch is in the ON position. When opening
or closing the sunshade the switch need not be
held.

● To avoid personal injury, keep your
hands, fingers and head away from the
sunshade arm, the arm rail and sunshade inlet port.

To open the sunshade:

● Do not allow children near the rear sunshade system. They could be injured.

● To fully open the sunshade, slide the switch
1 toward the open position to the first
䊊
detent.
● To fully open the sunshade and the moon1 toward the
roof together, slide the switch 䊊
open position to the second detent.

● Do not place objects on or near the rear
sunshade. This could cause improper
operation or damage it.
● Do not pull or push the rear sunshade.
This could cause improper operation or
damage it.

To close the sunshade:
● To fully close the sunshade, slide the switch
2 toward the close position to the second
䊊
detent. If the moonroof is open, both the
moonroof and the sunshade will close automatically.
2 toward the close
● If the switch is slid 䊊
position to the first detent while the moonroof is open, only the moonroof with close,
the sunshade will remain open.

● Do not put any object into the sunshade
inlet port as this may result in improper
operation or damage the sunshade.
● Do not hang any object on the arm rail
as this may result in improper operation
or damage the sunshade.
● Do not forcefully pull the sunshade. Doing so may elongate the sunshade. Improper operation or damage to the sunshade may result.

If the moonroof does not close
Have your moonroof checked and repaired. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.

CAUTION
● Do not place objects (such as newspapers, handkerchiefs, etc.) on the sunshade inlet port. Doing so may entangle
these objects in the sunshade when it is
extending or retracting, causing improper operation or damage to the
sunshade.
● Do not push the sunshade arm with
your hands, etc., as this may deform it.
Improper operation or damage to the
sunshade may result.

Instruments and controls 2-61

INTERIOR LIGHTS
NOTE:
The footwell lights and step lights illuminate when the driver and passenger doors
are open regardless of the interior light
switch position. These lights will turn off
automatically after a period of time while
doors are open to prevent the battery from
becoming discharged.

CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could result
in a discharged battery.
LIC2302
1 is pressed, the footwell
When the ON switch 䊊
lights (if so equipped), step lights (if so
equipped), map lights and rear personal lights
will automatically turn on and stay on for a period
of time when:

● The doors are unlocked by the Intelligent
Key, a key or the request switch (if so
equipped) while all doors are closed and the
ignition switch is in the OFF position.
● When individually pushed.
2 is pushed, the interior
When the OFF switch 䊊
lights do not illuminate even when pushed. When
the DOOR/OFF switch is pressed and the ON
switch is pressed, all of the lights will come on.

2-62 Instruments and controls

LIC2303

CONSOLE LIGHT
The console light will turn on whenever the parking lights or headlights are illuminated.
The console light brightness can be adjusted
with the illumination brightness control.

LIC1083

LIC2304

Rear personal lights

MAP LIGHTS
Press the button to turn the map lights on. To turn
them off, press the button again.

CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could result
in a discharged battery.

PERSONAL LIGHTS (if so equipped)
To turn the rear personal lights on, push the
switch. To turn them off, push the switch again.

SIC2063A

ROOM LIGHT (if so equipped)
The room light on the overhead trim has a threeposition switch. To operate, push the switch to
the desired position.
1
䊊
2
䊊
3
䊊

ON: The light is illuminated, regardless of
door position.
DOOR: The light illuminates when a door or
the liftgate is opened. The light turns off
when the door or liftgate is closed.
OFF: The light does not illuminate.

The lights will turn off automatically after a period
of time while doors are open to prevent the battery from becoming discharged.

Instruments and controls 2-63

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT LIGHT

CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could result
in a discharged battery.

The light illuminates when the rear hatch is
opened. When the rear hatch is closed, the light
will turn off.
The light also illuminates with other interior lights
when the interior light switch is in the DOOR
position. For additional information, refer to “Interior lights” in this section.
The lights will turn off automatically after a period
of time while doors are open to prevent the battery from becoming discharged.

2-64 Instruments and controls

MEMO

Instruments and controls 2-65

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Remote keyless entry (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
NISSAN Intelligent Key® (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 3-3
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Locking with key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Locking with inside lock knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Locking with power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Automatic door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Remote keyless entry system (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . 3-7
How to use remote keyless entry system . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
NISSAN Intelligent Key® (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Operating range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Door locks/unlocks precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
NISSAN Intelligent Key® Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
How to use the remote keyless entry
function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Remote Engine Start (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Remote engine start operating range . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Remote starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

Extending engine run time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Canceling a remote start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Conditions the remote start will not work . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Operating the manual liftgate
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Operating the power liftgate (if so equipped) . . . . . 3-28
Motion-Activated Liftgate (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 3-31
Power liftgate main switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Liftgate release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Liftgate position setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Opener operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Fuel-filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Card holder (driver’s side only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Manual anti-glare rearview mirror
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39

Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Automatic drive positioner (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 3-41

Memory storage function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Entry/exit function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
System operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43

KEYS
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (if so
equipped)
CAUTION
Do not leave the ignition key inside the
vehicle when you leave the vehicle.

LPD2197

1.
2.
3.

Jackknife type key
Integrated door lock key fob with transponder chip
Key number plate

A key number plate is supplied with your keys.
Record the key number and keep it in a safe place
(such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you lose
your keys, it is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for duplicates by using the key
number. NISSAN does not record key numbers
so it is very important to keep track of your key
number plate.
A key number is only necessary when you have
lost all your keys. If you still have a key, it can be
duplicated without knowing the key number.

LPD2192

Storing remote keyless entry
To lock or unlock the vehicle using the key press
1 to unfold the key from the
the release button 䊊
fob.
1
When storing the key press the release button 䊊
2 to fold the key back into fob slot
and push key 䊊
3 .
䊊

Never leave keys in vehicle.

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

process requires erasing all memory in the Intelligent Key components when registering new
keys, be sure to take all Intelligent Keys that you
have to the NISSAN dealer.
A key number plate is supplied with your keys.
Record the key number and keep it in a safe place
(such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you lose
your keys, it is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for duplicates by using the key
number. NISSAN does not record key numbers
so it is very important to keep track of your key
number plate.
LPD2279

Type A (if so equipped)

1.
2.
3.

Intelligent Key (two sets)
Mechanical key
Key number plate (one plate)

LPD2052

Type B (if so equipped)

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® (if so
equipped)
Your vehicle can only be driven with the Intelligent
Keys which are registered to your vehicle’s Intelligent Key System components and NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System components.
Never leave these keys in the vehicle.
As many as four Intelligent Keys can be registered and used with one vehicle. The new keys
must be registered prior to use with the Intelligent
Key System and NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer
System of your vehicle. Since the registration

A key number is only necessary when you have
lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate
from. If you still have a key, it can be duplicated
without knowing the key number.

CAUTION
Listed below are conditions or occurrences which will damage the Intelligent
Key:
● Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which
contains electrical components, to
come into contact with water or salt
water. This could affect the system
function.
● Do not drop the Intelligent Key.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

● Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply
against another object.

CAUTION
Always carry the mechanical key installed
in the Intelligent Key slot.

● Do not change or modify the Intelligent
Key.

For additional information, refer to “Doors” in this
section.

● Wetting may damage the Intelligent
Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, immediately wipe until it is completely dry.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM KEYS

● Do not place the Intelligent Key for an
extended period in an area where temperatures exceed 60°C (140°F).

You can only drive your vehicle using the keys
which are registered to the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System components in your vehicle.

● Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a
key holder that contains a magnet.
● Do not place the Intelligent Key near
equipment that produces a magnetic
field, such as a TV, audio equipment and
personal computers.
If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN
recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelligent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent the
unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operate
the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing
procedure, it is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer.

3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

SPA1951

Mechanical key
The Intelligent Key contains the mechanical key.
To remove the mechanical key, release the lock
knob on the back of the Intelligent Key.
To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it into
the Intelligent Key until the lock knob returns to
the lock position.
Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock the
driver’s door.

A mechanical key can be used for all the locks.
Never leave the keys in the vehicle.
Additional or replacement keys:
If you still have a key, the key number is not
necessary when you need extra NISSAN Vehicle
Immobilizer System keys. Your existing key can
be duplicated without knowing the key number.
As many as four NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer
System keys can be used with one vehicle. You
should bring all NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys that you have to a NISSAN dealer for
registration. This is because the registration process will erase the memory of all key codes
previously registered into the NISSAN Vehicle
Immobilizer System. After the registration process, these components will only recognize keys

DOORS
coded into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System during registration. Any key that is not given
to the dealer at the time of registration will no
longer be able to start your vehicle.

CAUTION
Do not allow the immobilizer system key,
which contains an electrical transponder,
to come into contact with water or salt
water. This could affect system function.

When the doors are locked using one of the
following methods, the doors cannot be opened
using the inside or outside door handles. The
doors must be unlocked to open the doors.

WARNING
● Before opening any door, always look
for and avoid oncoming traffic.
● To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and or its systems, including
entrapment in windows or inadvertent
door lock activation, do not leave children, people who require the assistance
of others or pets unattended in your
vehicle. Additionally, the temperature
inside a closed vehicle on a warm day
can quickly become high enough to
cause a significant risk of injury or
death to people and pets.

LPD2129

Driver’s side

LOCKING WITH KEY
To lock or unlock the vehicle, turn the key as
shown.

Manual
To lock a door, turn the key toward the front of the
1 . To unlock, turn the key toward the rear
vehicle 䊊
2 .
䊊

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5

LPD0461

Driver’s side

Power
The power door lock system allows you to lock or
unlock all doors at the same time.
1 of the vehicle
Turning the key toward the front 䊊
locks all doors.
2 of the
Turning the key one time toward the rear 䊊
vehicle unlocks that door. From that position,
3 (where the key can
returning the key to neutral 䊊
only be removed and inserted) and turning it
4 within 5 seconds untoward the rear again 䊊
locks all doors.

3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

SPA2726

Inside lock

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK
KNOB
To lock the door without the key, move the inside
1 , then close the
lock knob to the lock position 䊊
door.
To unlock the door without the key, move the
2 .
inside lock knob to the unlock position 䊊

LPD2093

LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR
LOCK SWITCH
To lock all the doors without a key, push the door
lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s side) to
1 . When locking the door this
the lock position 䊊
way, be certain not to leave the key inside the
vehicle.
To unlock all the doors without a key, push the
door lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s
2 .
side) to the unlock position 䊊

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
(if so equipped)
Lockout protection

WARNING
● Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those who
use a pacemaker should contact the
electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before
use.

When the power door lock switch is moved to the
lock position with any door open and the Intelligent Key is left in the vehicle, all doors will unlock
automatically and a chime will sound after the
door is closed.
This function helps to prevent the Intelligent Key
from being accidentally locked inside the vehicle.

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS
● All doors lock automatically when the vehicle
speed reaches 15 mph (24 km/h).
● All doors unlock automatically when the ignition is placed in the OFF position (models
with Intelligent Key system) or when the key
is removed from the ignition switch (models
without Intelligent Key system).

LPD2374

CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK
Child safety locks help prevent the rear doors
from being opened accidentally, especially when
small children are in the vehicle.
The child safety lock levers are located on the
edge of the rear doors.
When the lever is in the LOCK position, the
door can be opened only from the outside.

● The remote keyless entry key fob transmits radio waves when the buttons are
pressed. The FAA advises radio waves
may affect aircraft navigation and communication systems. Do not operate the
remote keyless entry key fob while on
an airplane. Make sure the buttons are
not operated unintentionally when the
unit is stored for a flight.
It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, turn the
interior lights on, and activate the panic alarm by
using the key fob from outside the vehicle.
Be sure to remove the key from the vehicle
before locking the doors.
The key fob can operate at a distance of approximately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. The effective
distance depends on the conditions around the
vehicle.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7

As many as four key fobs can be used with one
vehicle. For information concerning the purchase
and use of additional key fobs, it is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer.
The key fob will not function when:
● the battery is discharged
● the distance between the vehicle and the
key fob is over 33 ft (10 m)
The panic alarm will not activate when the
key is in the ignition switch.

CAUTION
Listed below are conditions or occurrences which will damage the key fob:
● Do not allow the key fob, which contains electrical components, to come
into contact with water or salt water.
This could affect the system function.

● Do not place the key fob for an extended period in an area where temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C).
● Do not attach the key fob with a key
holder that contains a magnet.
● Do not place the key fob near equipment that produces a magnetic field,
such as a TV, audio equipment and personal computers.
If a key fob is lost or stolen, NISSAN recommends erasing the ID code of that key
fob. This will prevent the key fob from
unauthorized use to unlock the vehicle.
For information regarding the erasing
procedure, it is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer.

LPD2193

HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS
ENTRY SYSTEM
Locking doors
1. Remove the ignition key.

● Do not drop the key fob.

2. Close all the doors.

● Do not strike the key fob sharply
against another object.

3. Press the LOCK
fob.

● Do not change or modify the key fob.

● All the doors will lock.

● Wetting may damage the key fob. If the
key fob gets wet, immediately wipe until
it is completely dry.

● The hazard indicator flashes twice and the
horn beeps once.

3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

button on the key

NOTE:
An auto-relock function will operate after a
full or partial unlock, when no further user
action occurs. The relock will operate approximately one minute after full or partial
unlock. The auto-relock function is cancelled when any door is opened or the key
is inserted into the ignition.

LPD2194

Unlocking doors
● Press the UNLOCK
button on the key
fob to unlock the driver’s door.
● The hazard indicator lights flash once.
button again
● Press the UNLOCK
within five seconds to unlock all doors.

LPD2195

Using the panic alarm
If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,
you may activate the panic alarm to call attention
button on the
by pressing and holding the
key fob for longer than 0.5 seconds.
The panic alarm will stay on for a period of time.
The panic alarm stops when:
● it has run for a period of time, or
● any button is pressed on the key fob.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9

Using the interior lights

NOTE:

Press the
button on the key fob once to
turn on the interior lights.
For additional information, refer to “Interior lights”
in the “Instruments and controls” section of this
manual.

If you change the answer back horn and
light flash feature with the key fob, the
vehicle information display screen will
show the current mode after the ignition
switch has been cycled from the OFF to the
ON position. The vehicle information display screen can also be used to change the
answer back horn mode.

LPD2196

Answer back horn feature
If desired, the answer back horn feature can be
deactivated using the key fob. When deactivated
button is pressed the
and the LOCK
hazard indicator flashes twice and when the
button is pressed, neither the
UNLOCK
hazard indicator nor the horn operates.

3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

To deactivate: Press and hold the
and
buttons for at least two seconds.
The hazard indicator lights will flash three times to
confirm that the answer back horn feature has
been deactivated.
To activate: Press and hold the
and
buttons for at least two seconds
once more.
The hazard indicator lights will flash once and the
horn will sound once to confirm that the horn
beep feature has been reactivated.
Deactivating the horn beep feature does not silence the horn if the alarm is triggered.

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® (if so
equipped)
WARNING
● Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those who
use a pacemaker should contact the
electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before
use.
● The Intelligent Key transmits radio
waves when the buttons are pressed.
The FAA advises the radio waves may
affect aircraft navigation and communication systems. Do not operate the Intelligent Key while on an airplane. Make
sure the buttons are not operated unintentionally when the unit is stored for a
flight.

CAUTION
● Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with
you when operating the vehicle.
● Never leave the Intelligent Key in the
vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
The Intelligent Key is always communicating with
the vehicle as it receives radio waves. The Intelligent Key system transmits weak radio waves.
Environmental conditions may interfere with the
operation of the Intelligent Key system under the
following operating conditions:
● When operating near a location where
strong radio waves are transmitted, such as
a TV tower, power station and broadcasting
station.

The Intelligent Key system can operate all the
door locks using the remote control function or
pushing the request switch on the vehicle without
taking the key out from a pocket or purse. The
operating environment and/or conditions may affect the Intelligent Key system operation.

● When in possession of wireless equipment,
such as a cellular telephone, transceiver, or a
CB radio.

Be sure to read the following before using the
Intelligent Key system.

● When any type of radio wave remote control
is used nearby.

● When the Intelligent Key is in contact with or
covered by metallic materials.

● When the Intelligent Key is placed near an
electric appliance such as a personal computer.

● When the vehicle is parked near a parking
meter.
In such cases, correct the operating conditions
before using the Intelligent Key function or use
the mechanical key.
Although the life of the battery varies depending
on the operating conditions, the battery’s life is
approximately two years. If the battery is discharged, replace it with a new one.
When the Intelligent Key battery is low, an indicator illuminates in the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle
information display” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.
Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receiving
radio waves, if the key is left near equipment
which transmits strong radio waves, such as signals from a TV and personal computer, the battery life may become shorter.
For additional information, refer to “Battery replacement” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
As many as four Intelligent Keys can be registered and used with one vehicle. For information
about the purchase and use of additional Intelligent Keys, it is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN
recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelligent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent the
unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operate
the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing
procedure, it is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer.

● Do not drop the Intelligent Key.
● Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply
against another object.
● Do not change or modify the Intelligent
Key.
● Wetting may damage the Intelligent
Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, immediately wipe until it is completely dry.
● Do not place the Intelligent Key for an
extended period in an area where temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C).
● Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a
key holder that contains a magnet.
● Do not place the Intelligent Key near
equipment that produces a magnetic
field, such as a TV, audio equipment and
personal computers.

3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

LPD2180

OPERATING RANGE
The Intelligent Key functions can only be used
when the Intelligent Key is within the specified
1 .
operating range from the request switch 䊊

● To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left
inside the vehicle, make sure you carry the
Intelligent Key with you and then lock the
doors.

When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or
strong radio waves are present near the operating location, the Intelligent Key operating range
becomes narrower, and the Intelligent Key may
not function properly.

● Do not pull the door handle before pushing
the door handle request switch. The door
will be unlocked but will not open. Release
the door handle once and pull it again to
open the door.

The operating range is within 31.5 in (80 cm)
1 .
from each request switch 䊊
If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door glass,
handle or rear bumper, the request switches may
not function.
When the Intelligent Key is within the operating
range, it is possible for anyone, even someone
who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push the
request switch to lock/unlock the doors.

WPD0375

DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS
PRECAUTION
● Do not push the door handle request switch
with the Intelligent Key held in your hand as
illustrated. The close distance to the door
handle will cause the Intelligent Key system
to have difficulty recognizing that the Intelligent Key is outside the vehicle.
● After locking with the door handle request
switch, verify the doors are securely locked
by testing them.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13

LPD2181

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®
OPERATION
You can lock or unlock the doors without taking
the Intelligent Key out of your pocket or bag.
When you carry the Intelligent Key with you, you
can lock or unlock all doors by pushing the door
handle request switch within the range of operation.

LPD2509

Locking doors
1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position,
place the ignition switch in the LOCK position and make sure you carry the Intelligent
Key with you.
2. Close all doors.
3. Push any door handle request switch while
carrying the Intelligent Key with you.
4. All doors and the rear liftgate will lock.

3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

LPD2183

5. The hazard indicator lights flash twice and
the outside buzzer sounds twice, unless the
answer back feature is deactivated, then
only the hazard lights will flash. For additional information, refer to “Answer back
horn feature” in this section.

NOTE:
● Request switches for all doors and the
liftgate can be deactivated when the
I-Key Door Lock setting is turned off in
the Vehicle Settings of the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information
display” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.
● Doors lock with the door handle request switch while the ignition switch
is not in the LOCK position.
● Doors do not lock by pushing the door
handle request switch while any door is
open. However, doors lock with the
mechanical key even if any door is
open.
● Doors do not lock with the door handle
request switch with the Intelligent Key
inside the vehicle and a beep sounds to
warn you. However, when an Intelligent
Key is inside the vehicle, doors can be
locked with another Intelligent Key.

CAUTION
● After locking the doors using the request switch, make sure that the doors
have been securely locked by operating
the door handles or the rear liftgate
opener switch.

NOTE:
The doors may not lock when the Intelligent Key is in the same hand that is operating the request switch to lock the door.
Put the Intelligent Key in a purse, pocket or
your other hand.

● When locking the doors using the request switch, make sure to have the
Intelligent Key in your possession before operating the request switch to
prevent the Intelligent Key from being
left in the vehicle.

The lockout protection may not function
under the following conditions:

● The request switch is operational only
when the Intelligent Key has been detected by the Intelligent Key system.

● When the Intelligent Key is placed inside the glove box or a storage bin.

Lockout protection
To prevent the Intelligent Key from being accidentally locked in the vehicle, lockout protection
is equipped with the Intelligent Key system.

CAUTION

● When the Intelligent Key is placed on
top of the instrument panel.

● When the Intelligent Key is placed inside the door pockets.
● When the Intelligent Key is placed inside or near metallic materials.

When the driver’s side door is open, the doors
are locked, and then the Intelligent Key is put
inside the vehicle and all the doors are closed;
the lock will automatically unlock and the door
buzzer sounds.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15

If a door handle is pulled while unlocking the
doors, that door may not be unlocked. Returning
the door handle to its original position will unlock
the door. If the door does not unlock after returning the door handle, push the door handle request switch to unlock the door.
All doors will be locked automatically unless one
of the following operations is performed within
one minute after pushing the request switch.
● Opening any door.
● Pushing the ignition switch.
LPD2509

Unlocking doors

LPD2183

For power liftgate opening:

1. Carry the Intelligent Key.

2. Push the door handle request switch.

2. Press the power liftgate request switch (if so
equipped).

3. The hazard warning lights flash once and the
outside buzzer sounds once, unless the answer back feature is deactivated, then only
the hazard lights will flash. For additional
information, refer to “Answer back horn feature” in this section.
4. Push the door handle request switch again
within one minute to unlock all doors.

3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

The interior light timer illuminates for a period of
time when a door is unlocked and the room light
switch is in the DOOR position.
The interior light can be turned off without waiting
by performing one of the following operations:
● Placing the ignition switch in the ON position.

NOTE:

● Locking the doors with the remote control.

Request switches for all doors and liftgate
can be deactivated when the I-Key Door
Lock setting is turned off in the Vehicle
Settings of the vehicle information display.
For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.

● Switching the room light switch to the OFF
position.
● Switching the Auto Room Lamp to the OFF
position in Vehicle Settings of the vehicle
information display. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in
the “Instruments and controls” section.

HOW TO USE THE REMOTE
KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION

CAUTION
After locking the doors using the Intelligent Key, be sure that the doors have been
securely locked by operating the door
handles.

The remote keyless entry function can operate all
door locks using the remote keyless function of
the Intelligent Key. The remote keyless function
can operate at a distance of 33 ft (10 m) away
from the vehicle. The operating distance depends upon the conditions around the vehicle.
The remote keyless entry function will not function under the following conditions:
● When the Intelligent Key is not within the
operational range.
● When the doors or the rear liftgate are open
or not closed securely.
● When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged.

CAUTION
When locking the doors using the Intelligent Key, be sure not to leave the key in
the vehicle.

LPD2257

Locking doors
1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK position.
2. Close all doors.
3. Press the
Key.

button on the Intelligent

4. The hazard indicator lights flash twice and
the horn beeps once, unless the answer
back feature is deactivated, then only the
hazard lights will flash. For additional information, refer to “Answer back horn feature”
in this section.
5. All doors will be locked.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17

NOTE:
The unlocking operation can be changed in
Selective Unlock in the Vehicle Settings of
the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and
controls” section of this manual.
All doors will be locked automatically unless one
of the following operations is performed within
button:
one minute after pressing the
● Opening any doors.
LPD2258

Unlocking doors
1. Press the
Key.

button on the Intelligent

2. The driver’s door will unlock and the hazard
indicator lights flash once.
button again within five
3. Press the
seconds, the hazard indicator lights flash
once and the remaining doors unlock.

3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

● Pushing the ignition switch.
The interior light illuminates for a period of time
when a door is unlocked and the room light
switch is in the DOOR position.
The light can be turned off without waiting by
performing one of the following operations:
● Placing the ignition switch in the ON position.
● Locking the doors with the Intelligent Key.
● Switching the room light switch to the OFF
position.

● Switching the Auto Room Lamp to the OFF
position in Vehicle Settings of the vehicle
information display. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in
the “Instruments and controls” section of this
manual.

The panic alarm stops when:
● It has run for a period of time, or
● Any button is pressed on the Intelligent Key.
● The request switch on the driver or passenger door is pushed and the Intelligent Key is
in range of the door handle.

Using the interior lights

WPD0414

Releasing the rear liftgate (if so
equipped)
The rear liftgate can be opened and closed by
performing the following:
● Press the
button (if so equipped) for
longer than 0.5 seconds to open the rear
liftgate.

WPD0415

Press the
button on the key fob once to
turn on the interior lights.
For additional information, refer to “Interior lights”
in the “Instruments and controls” section of this
manual.

Using the panic alarm
If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,
you may activate the panic alarm to call attention
button on the
by pressing and holding the
Intelligent Key for longer than 0.5 seconds.
The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for a
period of time.

button (if so equipped)
● Press the
again for longer than 0.5 seconds to close
the rear liftgate.
button (if so equipped) is
When the
pressed during the open or close process the
liftgate will stop. When pressed again, the liftgate
will reverse and go in the opposite direction.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19

LPD2259

Answer back horn feature
If desired, the answer back horn feature can be
deactivated using the Intelligent Key. When it is
button is
deactivated and the LOCK
pressed, the hazard indicator lights flash twice.
button is pressed,
When the UNLOCK
neither the hazard indicator lights nor the horn
operates.

3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

NOTE:

WARNING SIGNALS

If you change the answer back horn and
light flash feature with the Intelligent Key,
the vehicle information display screen will
show the current mode after the ignition
switch has been cycled from the OFF to the
ON position. The vehicle information display screen can also be used to change the
answer back horn mode.

To help prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly by erroneous operation of the Intelligent
Key or to help prevent the vehicle from being
stolen, a chime or buzzer sounds from inside and
outside the vehicle and a warning is displayed in
the instrument panel.

To deactivate: Press and hold the
and
buttons for at least 2 seconds.
The hazard indicator lights will flash three times to
confirm that the answer back horn feature has
been deactivated.
To activate: Press and hold the
and
buttons for at least 2 seconds once
more.
The hazard indicator lights will flash once and the
horn will sound once to confirm that the horn
beep feature has been reactivated.
Deactivating the horn beep feature does not silence the horn if the alarm is triggered.

When a chime or beep sounds or a warning is
displayed, be sure to check the vehicle and the
Intelligent Key.
For additional information, refer to the “Troubleshooting guide” in this section and “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and controls”
section of this manual.

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Verify the location of all Intelligent Keys that are
programmed for the vehicle. If another Intelligent
Key is in range or inside the vehicle, the vehicle
system may respond differently than expected.
Symptom
The red Shift to Park warning appears on
When stopping the engine
the display and the inside warning chime
sounds continuously.
When shifting the shift lever to the P (Park) The Push ignition to OFF warning appears
position
on the display.
When opening the driver’s door to get out
The Door Open warning appears on the
of the vehicle
display.
The No Key Detected warning appears on
the display, the outside chime sounds three
times and the inside warning chime sounds
When closing the door after getting out of
for approximately three seconds.
the vehicle
The red Shift to Park warning appears on
the display and the inside side chime
sounds continuously.
When closing the door with the inside lock The outside chime sounds for approximately
knob turned to LOCK
three seconds and all the doors unlock.
When pushing the door handle request
The outside chime sounds for approximately
switch or the LOCK button on the Intellithree seconds.
gent Key to lock the door

Possible Cause

Remedy

The shift lever is not in the P (Park) position. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.
The ignition switch is in the ON position.
The ignition switch is in the ON position.

Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position.
Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position.

The ignition switch is in the ON position.

Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position.

The ignition switch is in the ON position
and the shift lever is not in the P (Park)
position.

Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position
and place the ignition switch in the OFF
position.

The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.

Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.

Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21

Symptom

When pushing the ignition switch to start
the engine

When pushing the ignition switch

Possible Cause

The Intelligent Key battery indicator appears
The battery charge is low.
on the display.
The yellow Key ID Incorrect warning appears on the display.
The Key System Error warning appears on
the display.

3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Remedy
Replace the battery with a new one. For
additional information, refer to “Battery replacement” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of
this manual.

The Intelligent Key is not in the vehicle.

Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

It warns of a malfunction with the Intelligent
Key system.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer.

REMOTE ENGINE START (if so
equipped)
require a person using remote start to have the
vehicle in view. Check local regulations for any
requirements.
Other conditions may affect the function of the
Remote Engine Start feature. For additional information, refer to “Conditions the remote start will
not work” in this section.
Other conditions can affect the performance of
the Intelligent Key transmitter. For additional information, refer to “NISSAN Intelligent Key®” in
this section.
LPD2293

Type A (if so equipped)

LPD2272

Type B (if so equipped)
The
button will be on the NISSAN Intelligent Key® if the vehicle has remote engine start.
This feature allows the engine to start from outside the vehicle.
The following features may be affected when the
remote start feature is used:
● Vehicles with an automatic climate control
system will default to either heating or cooling mode. For additional information, refer to
“Remote engine start logic” in the “Monitor,
climate, audio, phone and voice recognition
systems” section of this manual.

REMOTE ENGINE START
OPERATING RANGE
WARNING
To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the vehicle and or its systems, including entrapment in windows or inadvertent door lock
activation, do not leave children, people
who require the assistance of others or
pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become
high enough to cause a significant risk of
injury or death to people and pets.

Laws in some local communities may restrict the
use of remote starters. For example, some laws

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23

CAUTION
When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or other strong radio wave
sources are present near the operating
location, the Intelligent Key operating
range becomes narrower, and the Intelligent Key may not function properly.
The remote engine start function can only be
used when the Intelligent Key is within the specified operating range from the vehicle.
The remote engine start operating range is approximately 197 ft (60 m) from the vehicle.

REMOTE STARTING THE VEHICLE
To use the remote start feature to start the engine
perform the following:
1. Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle.
2. Press the
doors.

LOCK button to lock all

3. Within 5 seconds press and hold the
remote start button until the turn signal lights
flash and the tail lamps turn on. If the vehicle
is not within view press and hold the
remote start button for at least 2 seconds.

The following events will occur when the engine
starts:
● The parking lights will turn on and remain on
as long as the engine is running.
● The doors will be locked and the climate
control system may come on.
● The engine will continue to run for 10 minutes. Repeat the steps to extend the time for
an additional 10 minutes. For additional information, refer to “Extending engine run
time” in this section.
Depress and hold the brake then push the pushbutton ignition switch to the ON position before
driving. For additional information, refer to “Driving the vehicle” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

EXTENDING ENGINE RUN TIME
The remote start feature can be extended one
time by performing the steps listed in “Remote
starting the vehicle” in this section. Run time will
be calculated as follows:
● The first 10 minute run time will start when
the remote start function is performed.

● The second 10 minutes will start immediately when the remote start function is performed again. For example, if the engine has
been running for 5 minutes, and 10 minutes
are added, the engine will run for a total of
15 minutes.
● Extending engine run time will count towards
the two remote start limit.
A maximum of two remote starts, or a single start
with an extension, are allowed between ignition
cycles. The ignition switch must be cycled to the
ON position and then back to the OFF position
before the remote start procedure can be used
again.

CANCELING A REMOTE START
To cancel a remote start, perform one of the
following:
● Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle and
until the parking lights turn off.
press
● Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
● Cycle the ignition switch ON and then OFF.
● The extended engine run time has expired.
● The first 10 minute timer has expired.
● The engine hood has been opened.
● The shift lever is moved out of park.

3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

● The alarm sounds due to illegal entry into the
vehicle.

is not pressed
● The remote start button
and held for at least 2 seconds.

● The ignition switch is pushed without an
Intelligent Key in the vehicle.

is not pressed
● The remote start button
and held within 5 seconds of pressing the
lock button.

● The ignition switch is pushed with an Intelligent Key in the vehicle but the brake pedal is
not depressed.

CONDITIONS THE REMOTE START
WILL NOT WORK

● The brake is pressed.
● The doors are not closed and locked.
● The Intelligent Key warning message appears in the vehicle information display.

The remote start will not operate if any of the
following conditions are present:

● The alarm sounds due to illegal entry into the
vehicle.

● “Remote Engine Start” is turned off in the
“Locking” section of the Vehicle Settings
menu.

● Two remote vehicle starts, or a single remote
start with an extension, have already been
used.

● The ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

● The vehicle is not in P (Park).

● The hood is not securely closed.
● The hazard warning lights are on.
● The engine is still running. The engine must
be completely stopped. Wait at least 6 seconds if the engine goes from running to off.
This is not applicable when extending engine run time.

The remote engine start may display a warning or
indicator in the vehicle information display. For
additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and controls”
section of this manual.

● There is a detected registered key already
inside of the vehicle.
● The remote start function has been switched
to the OFF position in Vehicle Settings of the
vehicle information display. For additional
information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25

HOOD

WARNING
● Make sure the hood is completely
closed and latched before driving. Failure to do so could cause the hood to fly
open and result in an accident.
● If you see steam or smoke coming from
the engine compartment, to avoid injury
do not open the hood.

LPD2266
1 located
1. Pull the hood lock release handle 䊊
below the instrument panel until the hood
springs up slightly.
2 in between the hood and
2. Locate the lever 䊊
grille and push the lever sideways with your
fingertips.
3 .
3. Raise the hood 䊊

4 and insert it into
4. Remove the support rod 䊊
5 .
the slot 䊊

3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

A when removing or
Hold the coated parts 䊊
resetting the support rod. Avoid direct contact with the metal parts, as they may be
hot immediately after the engine has been
stopped.
When closing the hood, return the support rod to
its original position, lower the hood to approximately 12 in (30 cm) above the latch and release
it. This allows proper engagement of the hood
latch.

LIFTGATE

WARNING
● Always be sure the liftgate has been
closed securely to prevent it from opening while driving.

CAUTION
Do not use accessory carriers that attach
to the rear hatch. Doing so will cause damage to the vehicle.

● Do not drive with the liftgate open. This
could allow dangerous exhaust gases
to be drawn into the vehicle. For additional information, refer to “Exhaust
gas (carbon monoxide)” in the “Starting
and driving” section of this manual.
● To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and or its systems, including
entrapment in windows or inadvertent
door lock activation, do not leave children, people who require the assistance
of others or pets unattended in your
vehicle. Additionally, the temperature
inside a closed vehicle on a warm day
can quickly become high enough to
cause a significant risk of injury or
death to people and pets.
● Always be sure that hands and feet are
clear of the door frame to avoid injury
while closing the liftgate.

LPD2184

OPERATING THE MANUAL
LIFTGATE (if so equipped)
The power door lock system allows you to lock or
unlock all doors including the liftgate simultaneously.
To open the liftgate, press the liftgate opener
A and pull up on the handle.
switch 䊊
To close, lower and push the liftgate down securely.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27

OPERATING THE POWER LIFTGATE
(if so equipped)
WARNING
● Make sure that all passengers have
their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before closing the liftgate.
● To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and or its systems, including
entrapment in windows or inadvertent
door lock activation, do not leave children, people who require the assistance
of others or pets unattended in your
vehicle. Additionally, the temperature
inside a closed vehicle on a warm day
can quickly become high enough to
cause a significant risk of injury or
death to people and pets.

LPD2212

Instrument panel switch
NOTE:
To open, close or reverse the power liftgate,
the shift lever must be in P (Park). Also, the
power liftgate will not operate if battery
voltage is low.
Power Open:
The power liftgate automatically moves from the
fully closed position to the fully open position in
approximately five – eight seconds. The power
open feature can be activated by the button on
the key fob, the instrument panel switch or the
liftgate open switch. A chime sounds to indicate
the power open sequence has been started.

3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

LPD2209

Liftgate opener switch
● When the vehicle is locked, the liftgate can
be opened with the instrument panel switch
or key fob.
● The key fob button must be held for 0.5 second before the liftgate opens.
● The liftgate must be unlocked (or the key fob
must be within range) to open with the liftA.
gate open switch 䊊

A can only be used
● The liftgate open switch 䊊
to open the liftgate if the MAIN switch (located in Instrument Panel) is in the ON position.

A is activated
● If the liftgate open switch 䊊
while the cinching motor is engaged, the
cinching motor will disengage and release
the latch.

A warning chime will sound if the shift lever is
moved out of P (Park) during a power open
operation.

● The key fob button must be held for 0.5 second before the liftgate closes.
B can only be
● The liftgate close switch 䊊
used to close the liftgate if the power liftgate
main switch is in the ON position.

LPD2270

Power Close:
The power liftgate automatically moves from the
fully open position to the secondary position.
When the liftgate reaches the secondary position, the cinching motor engages and pulls the
liftgate to its primary latch position. Power close
takes approximately seven – ten seconds. The
power close feature can be activated by the
button on the key fob, the instrument panel
B . A chime
switch or the liftgate close switch 䊊
sounds to indicate the power close sequence
has been started.

Stop - Reverse:
During the open/close movement, the liftgate can
be stopped, if the Intelligent Key, instrument
A or 䊊
B ) is pressed. The
panel or liftgate switch (䊊
liftgate can be reversed in the Intelligent Key,
A or 䊊
B ) is
instrument panel or liftgate switch (䊊
pressed again.
Auto Reverse:
If an obstacle is detected during power open or
power close, a warning chime will sound and the
liftgate will reverse direction and return to the full
open or full close position. If a second obstacle is
detected, the liftgate motion will stop and the
liftgate will enter manual mode.
A pinch strip is mounted on each side of the
liftgate. If an obstacle is detected by a pinch strip
during power close, the liftgate will reverse direction and return to the full open position.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-29

NOTE:

To open the liftgate manually, press the liftgate
A and raise the liftgate.
open switch 䊊

If the pinch strip is damaged or removed,
the power close function will not operate.

To close, lower and push the liftgate down securely.

WARNING
There are some small distances immediately before the closed position which
cannot be detected. Make sure that all
passengers have their hands, etc., inside
the vehicle before closing the liftgate.

LPD2184

Manual Mode:
If power operation is not available, the liftgate
may be operated manually. Power operation may
not be available even if the power liftgate main
switch is in the ON position under the following
conditions:
● Multiple obstacles have been detected in a
single power cycle
● Battery voltage is low
A is pushed
If the power liftgate open switch 䊊
during power open or close, the power operation
will be canceled and the liftgate can be operated
manually.

3-30 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

CAUTION
Before performing the kicking motion,
steady your stance to prevent any loss of
balance. Also, while making the kicking
motion, take caution around hot exhaust
system parts. Otherwise, there may be
danger of injury.

LPD2484

LPD2507

MOTION-ACTIVATED LIFTGATE (if so
equipped)
The liftgate can be opened/closed using a foot
kicking motion when it is locked or unlocked. Two
sensors along the rear bumper (center area) can
B . The Intellidetect a forward kicking motion 䊊
gent Key must be present within 3 ft (1 m) of the
liftgate to allow using the hands free feature to
open/close the liftgate.

Example of a proper kick
NOTE:
To achieve proper motion activation, kick
A 2 ft (60 cm).
within the kicking zone 䊊
Improper kicking either from side to side
C or at angles 䊊
D will not open/close the
䊊
liftgate.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-31

CAUTION
Interference or malfunction can be caused
by parking in close proximity to radio or
satellite towers.

LPD2485

Proper kicking zone and method
While positioned at the rear of the vehicle (center) at arms’ length distance away, begin making
the forward kicking motion. Kick the foot under
the rear bumper then immediately return the foot
back to standing position. The kicking motion
should be straight, smooth and consistent. Your
leg does not need to touch the bumper surface
but be within 3/4 inch (2 cm) to 4 inches (10 cm)
of the bumper surface. After your kick motion is
completed step back to allow the liftgate to
open/close. The liftgate should begin moving
within 1–2 seconds after the kick. This time is
needed to verify the Intelligent Key and to validate

3-32 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

LPD2486

Improper kicking methods
the kick motion. Kicking again within this time
frame (1–2 seconds) could cause the liftgate to
reverse or stop.

WARNING
Prevent
unintentional
liftgate
opening/closing. There may be conditions
when opening/closing the liftgate is not
desired. Keep the Intelligent Key out of
the range of the liftgate (3 ft or 1 m), when
washing or working around the back of
the vehicle.

Motion-Activated Liftgate (if so equipped) will not
function when the power liftgate main switch is
pushed in the OFF position.

LIFTGATE RELEASE
WARNING
● Always be sure the liftgate has been
closed securely to prevent it from opening while driving.

POWER LIFTGATE MAIN SWITCH

The power liftgate operation can be turned on or
off by the power liftgate main switch on the
instrument panel.

● To avoid personal injury, do not attempt
to activate the power liftgate if one or
both of the liftgate struts are removed.

LPD2277

CAUTION
● If the power liftgate does not stay open
or if the liftgate unexpectedly closes at
any time while a continuous warning
chime sounds, do not operate the liftgate. There may be a pressure loss in
one or both of the liftgate struts. It is
recommended that you have the liftgate
inspected. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
● Do not activate the power liftgate if one
or both of the liftgate struts are removed. Damage to the liftgate or power
liftgate mechanisms may occur.
● Keep the power liftgate main switch in
the OFF position when washing or
working around the back of the vehicle
(with Intelligent Key) to prevent inadvertent opening/closing.

When the power liftgate main switch is pushed to
the OFF position, the power operation is not
available by the power liftgate switch on the
liftgate and liftgate opener switch.
Power operation is available when in the OFF
position by the instrument panel switch and the
key fob button.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-33

FUEL-FILLER DOOR
3. Push the liftgate up to open.
NOTE:
If you had to open the liftgate using this
lever, it is recommended that you have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

LIFTGATE POSITION SETTING
The liftgate can be set to open to a specific height
by performing the following:
LPD2375

Liftgate release (manual and power)
The liftgate release mechanism allows the liftgate
to be opened in the event of a discharged battery.
To release the liftgate from the inside of the
vehicle, perform the following operations:
1. Fold the rear seats down. For additional
information, refer to “Folding the 3rd row
seats” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system” section of
this manual.
2. Insert a suitable tool in the top access opening hole. Move the release lever to the right.
The liftgate will be unlatched.

3-34 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

1. Open the liftgate using the request switch or
the Intelligent Key.
2. Pull the liftgate down to the desired position
and hold the liftgate (the liftgate will have
some resistance when being manually adjusted).
3. While holding the liftgate in position, push
located
and hold the liftgate switch
on the liftgate for approximately 5 seconds
or until three beeps are heard.
The liftgate will open to the selected position
setting. To change the position of the liftgate,
repeat Steps 1-3 for setting the position of the
liftgate.

LPD2022

OPENER OPERATION
The fuel-filler door release is located below the
instrument panel. To open the fuel-filler door, pull
the release. To lock, close the fuel-filler door
securely.

FUEL-FILLER CAP
WARNING
● Gasoline is extremely flammable and
highly explosive under certain conditions. You could be burned or seriously
injured if it is misused or mishandled.
Always stop the engine and do not
smoke or allow open flames or sparks
near the vehicle when refueling.
● Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank
after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off
automatically. Continued refueling may
cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel
spray and possibly a fire.
● Use only an original equipment type
fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has a
built-in safety valve needed for proper
operation of the fuel system and emission control system. An incorrect cap
can result in a serious malfunction and
possible injury. It could also cause
Malfunction Indicator Light
the
(MIL) to come on.
● Never pour fuel into the throttle body to
attempt to start your vehicle.

● Do not fill a portable fuel container in
the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity
can cause an explosion of flammable
liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or
trailer. To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death when filling portable fuel
containers:
– Always place the container on the
ground when filling.
– Do not use electronic devices when
filling.
– Keep the pump nozzle in contact
with the container while you are filling it.
– Use only approved portable fuel containers for flammable liquid.

CAUTION
● Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your
vehicle. For additional information, refer to “Fuel recommendation” in the
“Technical and consumer information”
section of this manual.

● The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning message will be displayed/warning will appear if the fuel-filler cap is not properly
tightened. It may take a few driving trips
for the message to be displayed. Failure
to tighten the fuel-filler cap properly
after the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning
message is displayed/warning appears
Malfunction Indimay cause the
cator Light (MIL) to illuminate.
● Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap
Malfuncproperly may cause the
tion Indicator Light (MIL) to illuminate.
light illuminates because
If the
the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing,
tighten or install the cap and continue
light
to drive the vehicle. The
should turn off after a few driving trips.
light does not turn off after a
If the
few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
● For additional information, refer to
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in
the “Instruments and controls” section
of this manual.
● If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,
flush it away with water to avoid paint
damage.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-35

A on the steering
button 䊊
3. Press the
wheel for about one second to turn off the
B
LOOSE FUEL CAP warning message 䊊
after tightening the fuel-filler cap.

LPD2186

To remove the fuel-filler cap:
1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclockwise to
remove.
1
2. Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder 䊊
while refueling.

To install the fuel-filler cap:
1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the fuelfiller tube.
2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until a
single click is heard.

LPD2527

LOOSE FUEL CAP warning
The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning message appears in the vehicle information display when the
fuel-filler cap is not tightened correctly after the
vehicle has been refueled. It may take a few
driving trips for the message to be displayed. To
turn off the warning message, perform the following:
1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap as soon
as possible. For additional information, refer
to “Fuel-filler cap” in this section.
2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until a single click
is heard.

3-36 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

STEERING WHEEL

SUN VISORS

WARNING
● Do not adjust the steering wheel while
driving. You could lose control of your
vehicle and cause an accident.
● Do not adjust the steering wheel any
closer to you than is necessary for
proper steering operation and comfort.
The driver’s air bag inflates with great
force. If you are unrestrained, leaning
forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you are at greater risk of
injury or death in a crash. You may also
receive serious or fatal injuries from the
air bag if you are up against it when it
inflates. Always sit back against the
seatback and as far away as practical
from the steering wheel. Always use the
seat belts.

LPD2524

MANUAL OPERATION
Tilt and telescopic operation
1 down:
Pull the lock lever 䊊

● Adjust the steering wheel up or down in
2 to the desired position.
direction 䊊
● Adjust the steering wheel forward or back3 to the desired position.
ward in direction 䊊

1 up firmly to lock the
Push the lock lever 䊊
steering wheel in place.

WPD0344

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-37

1. To block glare from the front, swing down
1 .
the sun visor 䊊
2. To block glare from the side, remove the sun
visor from the center mount and swing the
2 .
visor to the side 䊊

3 in or out as
3. To extend the sun visor, slide 䊊
needed.

CAUTION
● Do not store the sun visor before returning the extension to its original
position.
● Do not pull the extension sun visor
forcedly downward.

3-38 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

LPD2067

LPD2120

VANITY MIRRORS

CARD HOLDER (driver’s side only)

To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun visor
down and flip open the mirror cover. Some vanity
mirrors will illuminate when the mirror cover is
open.

To access the card holder, slide card in the card
holder. Do not view information while operating
the vehicle.

MIRRORS
AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE
REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)
The inside mirror is designed so that it automatically dims during night time conditions and according to the intensity of the headlights of the
vehicle following you. The automatic anti-glare
feature is activated when the ignition switch is in
the ON position.
2 will illuminate when the
The indicator light 䊊
automatic anti-glare feature is operating.

NOTE:
WPD0126

MANUAL ANTI-GLARE REARVIEW
MIRROR (if so equipped)
1 to reduce glare from
Use the night position 䊊
the headlights of vehicles behind you at night.
2 when driving in daylight
Use the day position 䊊
hours.

WARNING
Use the night position only when necessary, because it reduces rear view clarity.

Do not hang any objects over the sensors
1 or apply glass cleaner to the sensors.
䊊
Doing so will reduce the sensitivity of the
sensors, resulting in improper operation.

WPD0446

Type A (if so equipped)
The indicator light will illuminate when the automatic anti-glare feature is operating.
With the ignition switch in the ON position, press
button as described:
the
● To turn off the anti-glare feature, press
button. The indicator light will turn
the
off.
● To turn on the anti-glare feature, press
button again. The indicator light
the
will turn on.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-39

WARNING
● Objects viewed in the outside mirror on
the passenger side are closer than they
appear. Be careful when moving to the
right. Using only this mirror could cause
an accident. Use the inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder to properly
judge distances to other objects.
● Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.
You could lose control of your vehicle
and cause an accident.
LPD2419

Type B (if so equipped)
3
For additional information about the compass 䊊
and compass features, refer to “Compass display” in the “Instruments and controls” section of
this manual.

3-40 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

LPD2452

OUTSIDE MIRRORS
The outside mirror remote control will operate
only when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
1 to select the left or right
Move the small switch 䊊
mirror. Adjust each mirror to the desired position
2 .
using the large switch 䊊

AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER (if
so equipped)
The automatic drive positioner system has two
features:
● Memory storage function
● Entry/exit function

LPD2084

LPD2531

Manual folding outside mirrors

MEMORY STORAGE FUNCTION

Pull the outside mirror toward the door to fold it.

Two positions for the driver’s seat and outside
mirrors can be stored in the automatic drive positioner memory. Follow these procedures to use
the memory system.

Heated mirrors (if so equipped)
Some outside mirrors can be heated to defrost,
defog, or de-ice for improved visibility. For additional information, refer to “Rear window and
outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch”
in the “Instruments and controls” section of this
manual.

1. Place the ignition in the ON or OFF position
(the vehicle should be stopped while setting
the memory).
2. Adjust the driver’s seat and outside mirrors
to the desired positions by manually operating each adjusting switch. For additional information, refer to “Seats” in the “Safety—
Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-41

system” section of this manual and “Outside
mirrors” in this section.
3. Push the SET switch and, within 5 seconds,
push the memory switch (1 or 2).
4. The indicator light for the pushed memory
switch will come ON and stay ON for approximately 5 seconds.
5. The chime will sound if the memory has been
stored.
NOTE:
If a NEW memory position is stored in the
same memory switch, the previous memory
position will be overwritten by the new
stored position.

Confirming memory storage
Push the SET switch.
● If a memory position has not been stored in
the switch (1 or 2) the indicator light for the
respective switch will come ON for approximately 0.5 seconds.

● If a memory position has been stored in the
switch (1 or 2) then the indicator light for the
respective switch will stay ON for approximately 5 seconds.

Linking a key fob to a stored memory
position
Each key fob can be linked to a stored memory
position (memory switch 1 or 2) with the following procedure.
1. Follow steps 1-3 in the “Memory Storage
Function” section for storing the memory
position.
2. The indicator light for the pushed memory
switch will come ON. While the indicator
light is ON for 5 seconds, press the
button on the key fob. The indicator light of
the linked memory switch will blink. After the
indicator light goes off, the key fob is linked
to that memory setting.
Once it is linked, when ignition switch is placed in
button on
the OFF position, pressing the
the key fob will move the driver’s seat and outside
mirrors to the linked memory switch position.

NOTE:
If a NEW memory position is stored in the
linked memory switch, then the key fob will
link the NEW position and overwrites the
previous position.

ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTION
This system is designed so that the driver’s seat
will automatically move when the shift lever is in
the P (Park) position. This allows the driver to get
into and out of the driver’s seat more easily.
The driver’s seat will slide backward:
● When the driver’s door is opened with the
ignition switch placed in the OFF position.
● When the ignition switch is changed from
ON to OFF with the driver’s door open.
The driver’s seat will return to the previous position:
● When the ignition switch is turned to ON
while the shift lever is in the P (Park) position.
The entry/exit function can be adjusted or canceled through the vehicle settings in the vehicle
information display by performing the following:
● Switch the Exit Seat Slide from ON to OFF.

3-42 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

SYSTEM OPERATION
The automatic drive positioner system will not
work or will stop operating under the following
conditions:
● When the vehicle speed is above 0 mph
(0 km/h) or 4 mph (7km/h) for some limited
functions such as linking a key fob to the
meter when the power source is turned on
from off or during the Exit function.
● When any of the memory switches are
pushed while the automatic drive positioner
is operating.
● When the adjusting switch for the driver’s
seat and steering column is turned on while
the automatic drive positioner is operating.
● When the seat has already been moved to
the memorized position.
● When no seat position is stored in the
memory switch.
● When the shift lever is moved from P (Park)
to any other position.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-43

MEMO

3-44 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice
recognition systems
Control panel buttons — color screen with
Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
How to use the touch-screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
BACK button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
How to use the
] button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
How to use the [
button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
How to use the POWER button/VOLUME
control knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
How to use the CAMERA button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
RearView Monitor (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
RearView Monitor system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
How to read the displayed lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Difference between predicted and actual
distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Adjusting the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
RearView Monitor system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Around View® Monitor (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Around View® Monitor system operation . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Difference between predicted and actual
distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
How to park with predicted course lines. . . . . . . . . . 4-23
How to switch the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24

Adjusting the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Around View® Monitor system limitations . . . . . . . . 4-25
System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Moving Object Detection (MOD) (if so equipped) . . . . 4-28
MOD system operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Turning MOD on and off (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 4-30
MOD system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Heater and Air Conditioner (manual)
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Air flow charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Heater and Air Conditioner (automatic)
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Operating tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43

FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Satellite radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Audio operation precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)
player (Type A) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)
player (Type B) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection Port
(models without Navigation System)
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection Port
(models with Navigation System)
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
iPod®* player operation without Navigation
System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68
iPod®* player operation with Navigation
System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70
Bluetooth® streaming audio without
Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73
Bluetooth® streaming audio with Navigation
System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
CD care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
Steering wheel switch for audio control . . . . . . . . . . 4-76

Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77
NissanConnectSM Mobile Apps (if so equipped) . . . . . 4-77
Registering with NissanConnectSM Mobile
Apps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77
Connect Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77
Application Download. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
NissanConnectSM Services (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 4-78
Siri® Eyes Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
Siri® Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
Operating Siri® Eyes Free. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
Changing Siri® Eyes Free Settings
(models without navigation system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System without
Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84
Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84
Control buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86
Connecting procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
Voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
Making a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89
Receiving a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90

During a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
Ending a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
Text messaging (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
Bluetooth® settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92
Manual control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with
Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95
Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96
Voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97
Connecting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97
Vehicle phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98
Making a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98
Receiving a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98
During a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98
Ending a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98

Text messaging (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99
Bluetooth® settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-101
Phone settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-102
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-103
NISSAN Voice Recognition System
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-104
Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-104
System features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-105
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-106
Navigation System voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . .4-107
Audio system voice commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-107
Information voice commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-107
My Apps Voice Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-107
Help voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-108
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-108

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS —
COLOR SCREEN WITH NAVIGATION
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
WARNING
● Positioning of the heating or air conditioning controls and display controls
should not be done while driving in order that full attention may be given to
the driving operation.
● Do not disassemble or modify this system. If you do, it may result in accidents,
fire, or electrical shock.
● Do not use this system if you notice any
abnormality, such as a frozen screen or
lack of sound. Continued use of the
system may result in accident, fire or
electric shock.
● In case you notice any foreign object in
the system hardware, spill liquid on it,
or notice smoke or smell coming from it,
stop using the system immediately. Ignoring such conditions may lead to accidents, fire or electrical shock. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for servicing.

LHA2900

1. MAP button*

(brightness control) button

2. Display screen

BACK button

button**

button

7. ENTER / AUDIO button / TUNE / SCROLL
knob
8. POWER button / VOLUME control knob

4-4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

9. CAMERA button
10. NAV button*
* For additional information, refer to the separate
Navigation System Owner’s Manual regarding
the Navigation system control buttons .
** For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation System” in this section regarding the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System control button.
When you use this system, make sure the engine
is running.
If you use the system with the engine not
running for a long time, it will discharge the
battery, and the engine will not start.
Reference symbols:
“Example” — Words marked in quotes refer to a
key shown only on the display. These keys can be
selected by touching the screen.

HOW TO USE THE TOUCHSCREEN
CAUTION
● The glass display screen may break if it
is hit with a hard or sharp object. If the
glass screen breaks, do not touch it.
Doing so could result in an injury.

WARNING
● ALWAYS give your full attention to
driving.
● Avoid using vehicle features that could
distract you. If distracted, you could
lose control of your vehicle and cause
an accident.

● To clean the display, never use a rough
cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or any
kind of solvent or paper towel with a
chemical cleaning agent. They will
scratch or deteriorate the panel.
● Do not splash any liquid such as water
or car fragrance on the display. Contact
with liquid will cause the system to
malfunction.
To help ensure safe driving, some functions cannot be operated while driving.
The on-screen functions that are not available
while driving will be “grayed out” or muted.
Park the vehicle in a safe location and then operate the navigation system.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5

LHA3712

Touch-screen operation
Menu Item
Selecting the item
Adjusting the item
Inputting characters
123/ABC
Space
Delete
OK

Result
Touch an item to select . To select the “Audio” key, touch the “Audio” key on the screen. Press the
BACK button to return to the previous screen.
Touch the “+” key or the “⫺” key to adjust the settings of an item. Touch the up arrow to scroll up the page one item at a time.
Touch the down arrow to scroll down the page one item at a time.
Touch the letter or number key. There are some options available when inputting characters.
Changes the available character set to numbers.
Inserts a space.
Deletes the last inputted character with one touch. Touch and hold the “Delete” key to delete all of the characters.
Completes the character input.

4-6 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Touch-screen maintenance
If you clean the display screen, use a dry, soft
cloth. If additional cleaning is necessary, use a
small amount of neutral detergent with a soft
cloth. Never spray the screen with water or detergent. Dampen the cloth first and then wipe the
screen.

HOW TO USE THE
BUTTON

BACK

Press the
BACK button to return to the
previous screen.
LHA3711

Type A (if so equipped)

HOW TO USE THE [

] BUTTON

For additional information, refer to the separate
Navigation System Owner’s Manual regarding
the “SiriusXM® Travel Link”, and “Traffic” features.
For additional information, refer to “NissanConnectSM Mobile Apps” in this section regarding
“My Apps” key.

LHA4360

Type B (if so equipped)
To select and/or adjust several functions, features and modes that are available for your vehicle:
1. Press the [

] button.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.
3. Touch the desired item.

For additional information, refer to “NISSAN
Voice Recognition System” in this section regarding the “Voice Commands” key.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-7

LHA3712
Menu item
Audio
Navigation
Phone & Bluetooth
System
Display
Brightness
Display Mode
Scroll Direction
Clock

Result
For additional information, refer to “Audio system” in this section.
For additional information, refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.
For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation System” in this section.
Touch this key to select and/or adjust various functions of this system. A screen with additional options will appear.
Touch this key to adjust the appearance of the display.
Adjusts the brightness of the display.
Adjusts to fit the level of lighting in the vehicle. Touch key to cycle through options. “Day” and “Night” modes are suited for the respective times of day while “Auto” controls the display automatically.
Adjusts the direction of the menu scroll. Choose to either move up or down.
Touch this key to adjust the time.

4-8 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Menu item
Time Format
Date Format
Clock Mode
Set Clock
Manually
Daylight Savings Time
Time Zone
Language
Camera
Display Mode
Brightness
Contrast
Color
Temperature Unit
Touchscreen click
System Beeps
Return to Factory Settings/
Clear Memory
Software Licenses
Traffic messages
SXM

Result
The clock can be set to 12 hours or 24 hours.
Select from five possible formats for displaying the day, month, and year.
Adjust the mode for the clock. “Auto” uses the system’s GPS to automatically maintain the time. “Manual” allows you to set the clock
using the “Set Clock Manually” key.
Adjust the clock manually, Touch the “+” or “-” keys to adjust the hours, minutes, day, month and year up or down. “Clock Mode” must
be set to manual for this option to be available.
Adjusts the daylight savings time on or off.
Choose the applicable time zone from the list.
Touch this key to change the language on the display.
Touch this key to change the camera settings.
Touch this key to select the touch-screen display mode (day, night, or automatic).
Adjust touch-screen brightness.
Adjust touch-screen contrast.
Adjust touch-screen color.
Touch this key to change the temperature unit being displayed (Fahrenheit or Celsius).
Toggles the touch-screen click feature on or off. When activated a click sound will be heard every time a key on the screen is touched.
Toggle the system beep tones feature on or off. When activated, a beep sound will be heard when a pop-up message appears on the
screen or a button on the unit (such as the
button) is pressed and held for 2 seconds.
Touch this key to return all settings to default and to clear the memory.
Touch this key to display software licensing information.
Touch this key to display traffic settings. For additional information, refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.
Touch this key to start SiriusXM® radio. For additional information, refer to “Audio system” regarding SXM setup in this section.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-9

BUTTON
To change the display brightness, press
the
button. Pressing the button again will
change the display to the day or the night display.
button for more than
Press and hold the
2 seconds to turn the display off. Press the button
again to turn the display on.

HOW TO USE THE POWER
BUTTON/VOLUME CONTROL KNOB
Press the POWER button to turn audio function
on and off. Turn the VOLUME control knob to
adjust audio volume.

HOW TO USE THE CAMERA
BUTTON
For additional information, refer to “Around
View® Monitor” in this section.

4-10 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

REARVIEW MONITOR (if so
equipped)

LHA4361

WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the RearView
Monitor system could result in serious injury or death.

● RearView Monitor is a convenience feature and is not a substitute for proper
backing. Always turn and look out the
windows and check mirrors to be sure
that it is safe to move before operating
the vehicle. Always back up slowly.

● The system is designed as an aid to the
driver in showing large stationary objects directly behind the vehicle, to help
avoid damaging the vehicle.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-11

● The distance guide line and the vehicle
width line should be used as a reference
only when the vehicle is on a level
paved surface. The distance viewed on
the monitor is for reference only and
may be different than the actual distance between the vehicle and displayed objects.

CAUTION
Do not scratch the camera lens when
cleaning dirt or snow from the front of the
camera.
The RearView Monitor system automatically
shows a rear view of the vehicle when the shift
lever is shifted into the R (Reverse) position. The
radio can still be heard while the RearView Monitor is active.

LHA3694

To display the rear view, the RearView Monitor
system uses a camera located just above the
1 .
vehicle’s license plate 䊊

LHA2944

HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED
LINES

REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
OPERATION

Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle width
and distances to objects with reference to the
A are displayed on the monitor.
vehicle body line 䊊

With the ignition switch in the ON position, move
the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position to
operate the RearView Monitor.

Distance guide lines
Indicate distances from the vehicle body.
1 : approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m)
● Red line 䊊

2 : approx. 3 ft (1 m)
● Yellow line 䊊
3 : approx. 7 ft (2 m)
● Green line 䊊

4 : approx. 10 ft (3 m)
● Green line 䊊

4-12 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

5
Vehicle width guide lines 䊊

Indicate the vehicle width when backing up.

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN
PREDICTED AND ACTUAL
DISTANCES
The displayed guidelines and their locations on
the ground are for approximate reference only.
Objects on uphill or downhill surfaces or projecting objects will be actually located at distances
different from those displayed in the monitor relative to the guidelines (refer to illustrations). When
in doubt, turn around and view the objects as you
are backing up, or park and exit the vehicle to
view the positioning of objects behind the vehicle.

LHA3695

LHA3696

Backing up on a steep uphill

Backing up on a steep downhill

When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide
lines are shown closer than the actual distance.
Note that any object on the hill is further than it
appears on the monitor.

When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the
distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide
lines are shown farther than the actual distance.
Note that any object on the hill is closer than it
appears on the monitor.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-13

A if the object projects over the
the position 䊊
actual backing up course.

LHA2946

LHA3697

Backing up near a projecting object

Backing up behind a projecting object

The vehicle may seem to nearly clear the object in
the display. However, the vehicle may hit the
object if it projects over the actual backing up
course.

C is shown farther than the position
The position 䊊
B in the display. However, the position 䊊
C is
䊊
A.
actually at the same distance as the position 䊊
The vehicle may hit the object when backing up to

4-14 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

NOTE:
Do not adjust any of the display settings of
the RearView Monitor while the vehicle is
moving. Make sure the parking brake is
firmly applied.

REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
LIMITATIONS
WARNING

LHA3639

ADJUSTING THE SCREEN
1. Firmly apply your foot to the brake and put
the vehicle into R (Reverse).
2. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.
3. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to highlight
the “Brightness” or “Contrast” option.
4. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.
5. Adjust the level using the TUNE/SCROLL
knob and then press the ENTER/SETTING
button to apply the adjustment.

Listed below are the system limitations for
RearView Monitor. Failure to operate the
vehicle in accordance with these system
limitations could result in serious injury or
death.
● The system cannot completely eliminate blind spots and may not show every object.
● Underneath the bumper and the corner
areas of the bumper cannot be viewed
on the RearView Monitor because of its
monitoring range limitation. The system
will not show small objects below the
bumper, and may not show objects
close to the bumper or on the ground.

● Objects in the RearView Monitor will
appear visually opposite compared to
when viewed in the rearview and outside mirrors.
● Use the displayed lines as a reference.
The lines are highly affected by the
number of occupants, fuel level, vehicle
position, road conditions and road
grade.
● Make sure that the liftgate is securely
closed when backing up.
● Do not put anything on the rearview
camera. The rearview camera is installed above the license plate.
● When washing the vehicle with high
pressure water, be sure not to spray it
around the camera. Otherwise, water
may enter the camera unit causing water condensation on the lens, a malfunction, fire or an electric shock.
● Do not strike the camera. It is a precision instrument. Otherwise, it may malfunction or cause damage resulting in a
fire or an electric shock.

● Objects viewed in the RearView Monitor differ from actual distance because
a wide-angle lens is used.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-15

The following are operating limitations and do not
represent a system malfunction:
● When the temperature is extremely high or
low, the screen may not clearly display objects.

● Do not use wax on the camera lens. Wipe off
any wax with a clean cloth dampened with a
diluted mild cleaning agent, then wipe with a
dry cloth.

● When strong light directly shines on the
camera, objects may not be displayed
clearly.
● Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the
screen. This is due to strong reflected light
from the bumper.
● The screen may flicker under fluorescent
light.
● The colors of objects on the RearView Monitor may differ somewhat from the actual
color of objects.

LHA3694

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
CAUTION

● Objects on the monitor may not be clear in a
dark environment.

● Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner
to clean the camera. This will cause
discoloration.

● There may be a delay when switching between views.

● Do not damage the camera as the monitor screen may be adversely affected.

● If dirt, rain or snow accumulate on the camera, the RearView Monitor may not display
objects clearly. Clean the camera.

1 , the RearView Monitor may not display ob䊊

4-16 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the camera

jects clearly. Clean the camera by wiping it with a
cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning
agent and then wiping it with a dry cloth.

AROUND VIEW® MONITOR (if so
equipped)

LHA4362

1. CAMERA button

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-17

WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for the proper use of the Around
View® Monitor system could result in serious injury or death
● The Around View® Monitor is a convenience feature and is not a substitute
for proper vehicle operation because it
has areas where objects cannot be
viewed. The four corners of the vehicle
in particular, are areas where objects do
not always appear in the bird’s-eye,
front, or rear views. Always check your
surroundings to be sure that it is safe to
move before operating the vehicle. Always operate the vehicle slowly.
● The driver is always responsible for
safety during parking and other
maneuvers.

The monitor displays various views of the position
of the vehicle in a split screen format. Not all
views are available at all times.
Available views:
● Front View
An approximately 150–degree view of the
front of the vehicle.
● Rear View
An approximately 150–degree view of the
rear of the vehicle.
● Bird’s-Eye View
The surrounding views of the vehicle from
above.
● Front-Side View
The view around and ahead of the front
passenger’s side wheel.

CAUTION
Do not scratch the camera lens when
cleaning dirt or snow from the front of the
camera.
The Around View® Monitor system is designed
as an aid to the driver in situations such as slot
parking or parallel parking.

4-18 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA3700

To display the multiple views, the Around View®
Monitor system uses cameras located in the front
grille, on the vehicle’s outside mirrors and one
1 .
just above the vehicle’s license plate 䊊

AROUND VIEW® MONITOR
SYSTEM OPERATION
With the ignition switch in the ON position, move
the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position or press
the CAMERA button to operate the Around
View® Monitor.

The screen displayed on the Around View®
Monitor will automatically return to the previous
screen 3 minutes after the CAMERA button has
been pressed with the shift lever in a position
other than the R (Reverse) position.

● When driving the vehicle up a hill, objects viewed in the monitor are further
than they appear. When driving the vehicle down a hill, objects viewed in the
monitor are closer than they appear.

Available views

● Objects in the rear view will appear visually opposite compared to when
viewed in the monitor and outside
mirrors.

WARNING
● The distance guide lines and the vehicle
width lines should be used as a reference only when the vehicle is on a
paved, level surface. The apparent distance viewed on the monitor may be
different than the actual distance between the vehicle and displayed
objects.
● Use the displayed lines and the bird’seye view as a reference. The lines and
the bird’s-eye view are greatly affected
by the number of occupants, cargo, fuel
level, vehicle position, road condition
and road grade.
● If the tires are replaced with different
sized tires, the predicted course lines
and the bird’s-eye view may be displayed incorrectly.

● Use the mirrors or actually look to properly judge distances to other objects.
● On a snow-covered or slippery road,
there may be a difference between the
predicted course lines and the actual
course line.
● The vehicle width and predicted course
lines are wider than the actual width
and course.
● The displayed lines will appear slightly
off to the right, because the rearview
camera is not installed in the rear center
of the vehicle.

SAA1840

Front view
Front and rear view
Guiding lines that indicate the approximate vehicle width and distance to objects with referA are displayed on
ence to the vehicle body line 䊊
the monitor.
Distance guide lines
Indicate distances from the vehicle body:
1 : approximately 1.5 ft (0.5 m)
● Red line 䊊
2 : approximately 3 ft (1 m)
● Yellow line 䊊
3 : approximately 7 ft (2 m)
● Green line 䊊

4 : approximately 10 ft (3 m)
● Green line 䊊

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-19

The front view will not be displayed when the
vehicle speed is above 6 mph (10 km/h).
NOTE:
When the monitor displays the front view
and the steering wheel turns about 90 degrees or less from the straight-ahead position, both the right and left predicted
6 are displayed. When the
course lines 䊊
steering wheel turns about 90 degrees or
more, a line is displayed only on the opposite side of the turn.
SAA1896

Rear view
5 :
Vehicle width guide lines 䊊
Indicate the approximate vehicle width when
backing up.
6 :
Predicted course lines 䊊

Indicate the predicted course when operating the
vehicle. The predicted course lines will be displayed on the monitor when the steering wheel is
turned. The predicted course lines will move depending on how much the steering wheel is
turned and will not be displayed while the steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position.

4-20 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA3802

Bird’s-eye view
The bird’s-eye view shows the overhead view of
the vehicle, which helps confirm the vehicle position and the predicted course to a parking
space.
1 shows the position of the
The vehicle icon 䊊
vehicle. Note that the apparent distance between
objects viewed in the bird’s-eye view may differ
somewhat from the actual distance to the vehicle.
2 are
The areas that the cameras cannot cover 䊊
indicated in black.

2 is highlighted in yellow
The non-viewable area 䊊
for several seconds after the bird’s-eye view is
displayed. It will be shown only the first time after
the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

WARNING
● Objects in the bird’s-eye view will appear further than the actual distance.
● Tall objects, such as a curb or vehicle,
may be misaligned or not displayed at
the seam of the views.
● Objects that are above the camera cannot be displayed.
● The view of the bird’s-eye view may be
misaligned when the camera position
alters.
● A line on the ground may be misaligned
and is not seen as being straight at the
seam of the views. The misalignment
will increase as the line proceeds away
from the vehicle.
● Tire angle display does not indicate the
actual tire angle.

LHA2652

Front-side view
Guiding lines
Guiding lines that indicate the approximate width
and the front end of the vehicle are displayed on
the monitor.
1 shows the front part
The front-of-vehicle line 䊊
of the vehicle.
2 shows the approxiThe side-of-vehicle line 䊊
mate vehicle width including the outside mirrors.
3 of both the front 䊊
1 and side
The extensions 䊊
2 lines are shown with a green dotted line.
䊊

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-21

LHA3695

LHA3696

Backing up on a steep uphill

Backing up on a steep downhill

4-22 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA1201

Backing up near a projecting object
A do not touch the
The predicted course lines 䊊
object in the display. However, the vehicle may hit
the object if it projects over the actual backing up
course.

A if the object projects over the
the position 䊊
actual backing up course.

HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTED
COURSE LINES
WARNING
● If the tires are replaced with different
sized tires, the predicted course lines
may be displayed incorrectly.
● On a snow-covered or slippery road,
there may be a difference between the
predicted course line and the actual
course line.
● If the battery is disconnected or becomes discharged, the predicted course
lines may be displayed incorrectly. If
this occurs, please perform the following procedures:
– Turn the steering wheel from lock to
lock while the engine is running.
LHA3697

Backing up behind a projecting object
C is shown farther than the position
The position 䊊
B in the display. However, the position 䊊
C is
䊊
A.
actually at the same distance as the position 䊊
The vehicle may hit the object when backing up to

– Drive the vehicle on a straight road
for more than 5 minutes.
● When the steering wheel is turned with
the ignition switch in the ON position,
the predicted course lines may be displayed incorrectly.

LHA1197

1. Visually check that the parking space is safe
before parking your vehicle.
2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed on
A when the shift lever is moved
the screen 䊊
to the R (Reverse) position.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-23

4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make the
D parallel to the
vehicle width guide lines 䊊
C while referring to the preparking space 䊊
dicted course lines.
5. When the vehicle is parked in the space
completely, move the shift lever to the P
(Park) position and apply the parking brake.

HOW TO SWITCH THE DISPLAY
With the ignition switch in the ON position, press
the CAMERA button or move the shift lever to the
R (Reverse) position to operate the Around
View® Monitor.
The Around View® Monitor displays different
split screen views depending on the position of
the shift lever. Press the CAMERA button to
switch between the available views.
If the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position, the
available views are:
● Rear view/bird’s-eye view split screen
LHA1198

● Rear view/front-side view split screen

3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting the
steering wheel so that the predicted course
B enter the parking space 䊊
C.
lines 䊊

4-24 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

If the shift lever is in the P (Park) position, the
available views are:
● Front view/bird’s-eye view split screen
● Front view/front-side view split screen
If the shift lever is in the D (Drive) position, the
only available view is front view/front-side view
split screen.
The display will switch from the Around View®
Monitor screen when:
● The shift lever is in the D (Drive) position and
the vehicle speed increases above approximately 6 mph (10 km/h)
● A different screen is selected.

NOTE:
Do not adjust any of the display settings of
the Around View® Monitor while the vehicle is moving. Make sure the parking
brake is firmly applied.

LHA3679

ADJUSTING THE SCREEN
1. Firmly apply the brake and place the shift
lever in R (reverse).
2. Press the

button on the control panel.

3. The screen will display the Night settings.
4. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to adjust the
setting up or down.
5. Press the
Auto settings.

button again to access the

LHA3750

AROUND VIEW® MONITOR
SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-25

WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for
Around View® Monitor. Failure to operate
the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
● Do not use the Around View® Monitor
with the outside mirrors in the stored
position, and make sure that the liftgate
is securely closed when operating the
vehicle using the Around View®
Monitor.
● The apparent distance between objects
viewed on the Around View® Monitor
differs from the actual distance.
● The cameras are installed on the front
grille, the outside mirrors and above the
rear license plate. Do not put anything
on the vehicle that covers the cameras.
● When washing the vehicle with high
pressure water, be sure not to spray it
around the cameras. Otherwise, water
may enter the camera unit causing water condensation on the lens, a malfunction, fire or an electric shock.

● Do not strike the cameras. They are
precision instruments. Doing so could
cause a malfunction or cause damage
resulting in a fire or an electric shock.
There are some areas where the system will not
show objects and the system does not warn of
moving objects. When in the front or rear view
display, an object below the bumper or on the
1 . When in the
ground may not be viewed 䊊
2 of
bird’s-eye view, a tall object near the seam 䊊
the camera viewing areas will not appear in the
monitor.
The following are operating limitations and do not
represent a system malfunction:
● There may be a delay when switching between views.
● When the temperature is extremely high or
low, the screen may not display objects
clearly.
● When strong light directly shines on the
camera, objects may not be displayed
clearly.
● The screen may flicker under fluorescent
light.
● The colors of objects on the Around View®
Monitor may differ somewhat from the actual
color of objects.

4-26 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

● Objects on the Around View® Monitor may
not be clear and the color of the object may
differ in a dark environment.
● There may be differences in sharpness between each camera view of the bird’s-eye
view.
● Do not use wax on the camera lens. Wipe off
any wax with a clean cloth that has been
dampened with a diluted mild cleaning
agent, then wipe with a dry cloth.

LHA3801

System temporarily unavailable
When the “!” icon is displayed on the screen,
there are abnormal conditions in the Around
View® Monitor. This will not hinder normal driving
operation but the system should be inspected. It
is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.

LHA3592

When the “[X]” icon is displayed on the screen,
the camera image may be receiving temporary
electronic disturbances from surrounding devices. This will not hinder normal driving operation but the system should be inspected if it
occurs frequently. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

LHA3700

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
CAUTION
● Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner
to clean the camera. This will cause
discoloration.
● Do not damage the cameras as the
monitor screen may be adversely
affected.
If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of the
1 , the Around View® Monitor may not
cameras 䊊
display objects clearly. Clean the camera by wiping with a cloth dampened with a diluted mild
cleaning agent and then wiping with a dry cloth.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-27

MOVING OBJECT DETECTION (MOD)
(if so equipped)

LHA4362

1. CAMERA button

4-28 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

WARNING

MOD SYSTEM OPERATION

Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the Moving Object
Detection (MOD) system could result in
serious injury or death

The MOD system will turn on automatically under
the following conditions:

● The MOD system is not a substitute for
proper vehicle operation and is not designed to prevent contact with objects
surrounding the vehicle. When maneuvering, always use the outside mirrors
and rearview mirror and turn and check
the surroundings to ensure it is safe to
maneuver.

● When the CAMERA button is pressed to
activate the camera view on the display.

● The system is deactivated at speeds
above 5 mph (8 km/h). It is reactivated
at lower speeds.
● The MOD system is not designed to
detect surrounding stationary objects.
The MOD system can inform the driver of moving
objects near the vehicle when backing out of
garages, maneuvering in parking lots and in other
such instances.
The MOD system detects moving objects by
using image processing technology on the image
shown in the display.

● When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse)
position.

● When vehicle speed decreases below approximately 6mph (10 km/h) and the camera
screen is displayed.
LHA4190

Front and bird’s-eye views
The MOD system operates in the following conditions when the camera view is displayed:
● When the shift lever is in the P (Park) or N
(Neutral) position and the vehicle is stopped,
the MOD system detects moving objects in
the bird’s-eye view. The MOD system will
not operate if the outside mirrors are moving
in or out, in the stowed position, or if either
front door is opened.
● When the shift lever is in the D (Drive) position and the vehicle speed is below approximately 6mph (10 km/h), the MOD system
detects moving objects in the front view.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-29

3 is displayed in the view
A blue MOD icon 䊊
where the MOD system is operative. A gray MOD
icon is displayed in the view where the MOD
system is not operative.
3
If the MOD system is turned off, the MOD icon 䊊
is not displayed.

TURNING MOD ON AND OFF (if so
equipped)
Some vehicles include the option to allow the
MOD system to be turned on or off.
To turn the MOD system on or off:
LHA4191

Rear and bird’s-eye views
● When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse)
position and the vehicle speed is below approximately 6mph (10 km/h), the MOD system detects moving objects in the rear view.
The MOD system will not operate if the
liftgate is open.
The MOD system does not detect moving objects in the front-side view. The MOD icon is not
displayed on the screen when in this view.
When the MOD system detects moving objects
near the vehicle, a chime will be heard when in
front or rear view and a yellow frame will be
displayed on the view where the objects are

LHA4193

1. Press the
steering wheel.

button on the

Rear and front-side views
detected. While the MOD system continues to
detect moving objects, the yellow frame continues to be displayed.

buttons, select “Driver As2. Using the
sistance” and press the OK button.

NOTE:

3. Select “Parking Aids”.

While the RCTA chime (if so equipped) is
beeping, the MOD system does not chime.

4. Toggle ON or OFF “Moving Object” using
the OK button.

1 is
In the bird’s-eye view, the yellow frame 䊊
displayed on each camera image (front, rear,
right, left) depending on where moving objects
are detected.
2 is displayed on each view in
The yellow frame 䊊
the front view and rear view modes.

4-30 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

MOD SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for
MOD. Failure to operate the vehicle in
accordance with these system limitations
could result in serious injury or death.
● Do not use the MOD system when towing a trailer. The system may not function properly.
● Excessive noise (for example, audio
system volume or open vehicle window)
will interfere with the chime sound, and
it may not be heard.
● The MOD system performance will be
limited according to environmental conditions and surrounding objects such
as:
– When there is low contrast between
background and the moving objects.
– When there is a blinking source of
light.
– When strong light such as another
vehicle’s headlight or sunlight is
present.

– When camera orientation is not in its
usual position, such as when a mirror
is folded.
– When there is dirt, water drops or
snow on the camera lens.
– When the position of the moving objects in the display is not changed.
● The MOD system might detect flowing
water droplets on the camera lens,
white smoke from the muffler, moving
shadows, etc.
● The MOD system may not function
properly depending on the speed, direction, distance or shape of the moving
objects.
● If your vehicle sustains damage to the
parts where the camera is installed,
leaving it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered and the MOD
system may not detect objects properly.
● When the temperature is extremely
high or low, the screen may not display
objects clearly. This is not a
malfunction.

LHA3700

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
CAUTION
● Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner
to clean the camera. This will cause
discoloration.
● Do not damage the camera as the monitor screen may be adversely affected.
If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of the
1 , the MOD system may not operate
cameras 䊊
properly. Clean the camera by wiping with a cloth
dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent and
then wiping with a dry cloth.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-31

VENTS

LHA4301

Side
Adjust air flow direction by moving the vent
slides.

LHA4302

Center

Open or close the vents by using the dial. Move
to open the vents or
the dial toward the
toward the
to close them.

4-32 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA1134

Rear

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
(manual) (if so equipped)
WARNING
● The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.
● Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assistance
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets
should also not be left alone. They
could accidentally injure themselves or
others through inadvertent operation of
the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,
temperatures in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to cause
severe or possibly fatal injuries to
people or animals.
● Do not use the recirculation mode for
long periods as it may cause the interior
air to become stale and the windows to
fog up.
NOTE:
LHA2243

Fan speed control / system OFF dial /
air conditioning (A/C) button

2. Air flow control buttons

Rear window and outside mirror (if so
equipped) defroster switch

Front windshield defrost button

● Odors from inside and outside the vehicle
can build up in the air conditioner unit. Odor
can enter the passenger compartment
through the vents.

3. Temperature control dial / MAX A/C button
4.

Air recirculation button

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-33

● When parking, set the heater and air conditioner controls to turn off air recirculation to
allow fresh air into the passenger compartment. This should help reduce odors inside
the vehicle.

Temperature control dial
The temperature control dial allows you to adjust
the temperature of the outlet air. To lower the
temperature, turn the dial to the left. To increase
the temperature, turn the dial to the right.

CONTROLS
Fan control dial
The
fan control dial turns the fan on and off,
and controls fan speed.

Air flow control buttons
The air flow control buttons allow you to select
the air flow outlets.

MAX — Air flows mainly from center and
A/C
side vents with maximum cooling
and
turns on.
— Air flows mainly from center and
side vents.
— Air flows mainly from center and
side vents and foot outlets.
— Air flows mainly from foot outlets
and partly from defroster.
— Air flows mainly from defroster outlets and foot outlets.
— Air flows mainly from defroster
outlets.

Air recirculation button
On position (Indicator light on):
Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle.
Press the

button to the ON position when:

The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.

Rear window and outside mirror (if so
equipped) defroster switch
For additional information, refer to “Rear window
and outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster
switch” in the “Instruments and controls” section
of this manual.

HEATER OPERATION

● driving on a dusty road.

Heating

● to prevent traffic fumes from entering passenger compartment.

This mode is used to direct heated air to the foot
outlets. Some air also flows from the defrost
outlets and the side vent outlets.

● for maximum cooling when using the air conditioner.
Off position (Indicator light off):
Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment and distributed through the selected outlet.
Use the off position for normal heater or air conditioner operation.

Air conditioner button
Start the engine, turn the
fan control dial to
the desired position and press the
button
to turn on the air conditioner. To turn off the air
button again.
conditioner, press the

4-34 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

button to change to fresh
1. Press the
indicator light
air intake mode. The
will turn off for normal heating.
2. Press the
3. Turn the
position.

air flow control button.
fan control dial to the desired

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position between the middle and the
hot position.

Ventilation
This mode directs outside air to the side and
center vents.
button to change to fresh
1. Press the
indicator light
air intake mode. The
will turn off.
2. Press the
3. Turn the
position.

air flow control button.
fan control dial to the desired

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position.

Defrosting or defogging
This mode directs the air to the defrost outlets to
defrost/defog the windows.
1. Press the
2. Turn the
position.

defroster button.
fan control dial to the desired

3. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position between the middle and the
hot position.
● To quickly remove ice or fog from the windows, turn the fan control dial to the highest
setting and the temperature control to the
full HOT position.

position is selected, the air
● When the
conditioner automatically turns on if the outside temperature is more than 36°F (2°C).
This dehumidifies the air which helps defog
indicator autothe windshield. The
matically turns off, allowing outside air to be
drawn into the passenger compartment to
further improve the defogging performance.
The recirculation mode cannot be activated
position.
in the

Bi-level heating
The bi-level mode directs warmed air to the side
and center vents and to the front and rear floor
outlets.
button to change to fresh
1. Press the
will turn off.
air intake mode. The
2. Press the
3. Turn the
position.

air flow control button.
fan control dial to the desired

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position.

Heating and defogging
This mode heats the interior and defogs the windshield.
1. Press the

2. Turn the
position.

fan control dial to the desired

3. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position between the middle and the
hot position.
position is selected, the air
● When the
conditioner automatically turns on if the outside temperature is more than 36°F (2°C).
This dehumidifies the air which helps defog
indicator autothe windshield. The
matically turns off, allowing outside air to be
drawn into the passenger compartment to
further improve the defogging performance.

Operating tips
Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades
and air inlet in front of the windshield. This
improves heater operation.

AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION
Start the engine, turn the
fan control dial to
button
the desired position, and press the
to activate the air conditioner. When the air conditioner is on, cooling and dehumidifying functions are added to the heater operation.
The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.

air flow control button.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-35

Cooling
This mode is used to cool and dehumidify the air.
1. Press the
2. Turn the
position.

air flow control button.
fan control dial to the desired

5. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position.

Dehumidified defogging
This mode is used to defog the windows and
dehumidify the air.
1. Press the

3. Press the

button.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position.
● For quick cooling, press the MAX A/C button. When the MAX A/C button is pressed, it
mode. The amount of
will activate the
air coming through the vents is the highest it
can go when in MAX A/C mode regardless
of the position of the FAN dial.

Dehumidified heating
This mode is used to heat and dehumidify the air.
1. Press the

button to the OFF position.

2. Press the

air flow control button.

3. Turn the
position.

front defrost button.

fan control dial to the desired

4. Press the A/C button. The indicator light
comes on.

2. Turn the
position.

fan control dial to the desired

or
are selected, the
● When the
air conditioner automatically turns on if the
outside temperature is more than 36°F
(2°C). This dehumidifies the air which helps
mode audefog the windshield. The
tomatically turns off, allowing outside air to
be drawn into the passenger compartment
to further improve the defogging performance.
● The air conditioner is always on in
or
mode, regardless of whether the
indicator light is on or off.
3. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position.

Operating tips
● Keep the windows and moonroof closed
while the air conditioner is in operation.

4-36 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

● After parking in the sun, drive for 2 or 3 minutes with the windows open to vent hot air
from the passenger compartment. Then,
close the windows. This allows the air conditioner to cool the interior more quickly.
● The air conditioning system should be
operated for approximately 10 minutes
at least once a month. This helps prevent damage to the system due to lack
of lubrication.
● A visible mist may be seen coming from the
ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air
is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a
malfunction.
● If the engine coolant temperature
gauge indicates engine coolant temperature over the normal range, turn
the air conditioner off. For additional
information, refer to “If your vehicle
overheats” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual.
● If the engine coolant temperature becomes
will be activated and the
too high,
indicator light will come on automatically.
● When the ignition is OFF, button characters
will not illuminate.

AIR FLOW CHARTS
The following charts show the button and dial
positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK heating,
cooling or defrosting. The air recirculation indicator should always be in the OFF position for heating and defrosting.

LHA4364

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-37

LHA4365

4-38 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA4366

LHA4367

LHA4368

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-39

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
(automatic) (if so equipped)
8.
Fresh air intake button
9. AUTO (automatic mode) button
10.
Fan speed control buttons
11.
Air recirculation button
WARNING
● The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.
● Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assistance
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets
should also not be left alone. They
could accidentally injure themselves or
others through inadvertent operation of
the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,
temperatures in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to cause
severe or possibly fatal injuries to
people or animals.

LHA2875

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Front defroster button
Temperature control dial (driver’s side) /
ON-OFF button
MODE (manual air flow control) button
Display screen
A/C (air conditioner) button

Temperature control dial (passenger’s
side)/DUAL (passenger’s side temperature control) button
Rear window and outside mirror
(if so equipped) defroster switch

4-40 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

● Do not use the recirculation mode for
long periods as it may cause the interior
air to become stale and the windows to
fog up.

NOTE:
● Odors from inside and outside the vehicle
can build up in the air conditioner unit. Odor
can enter the passenger compartment
through the vents.
● When parking, set the heater and air conditioner controls to turn off air recirculation to
allow fresh air into the passenger compartment. This should help reduce odors inside
the vehicle.

AUTOMATIC OPERATION
Cooling and/or dehumidified heating
(AUTO)
This mode may be used all year round as the
system automatically works to keep a constant
temperature. Air flow distribution and fan speed
are also controlled automatically.
1. Press the AUTO button on. The indicator on
the button will illuminate.
2. Turn the temperature control dial to the left
or right to set the desired temperature.
● The temperature of the passenger compartment will be maintained automatically. Air
flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically.

● A visible mist may be seen coming from the
vents in hot, humid conditions as the air is
cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a malfunction.
3. You can individually set driver’s and front
passenger’s side temperature using each
temperature control dial. When the DUAL
button or passenger’s side temperature dial
is turned, the DUAL indicator will come on.
To turn off the passenger’s side temperature
control, press the DUAL button.

Heating (A/C OFF)
The air conditioner does not activate. When you
need to heat only, use this mode.

● Not recommended if windows fog up.

Dehumidified defrosting or defogging
1. Press the
front defroster button on.
The indicator light on the button will come
on.
2. Turn the temperature control dial to set the
maximum temperature to aid in defrosting or
defogging.
● To quickly remove ice from the outside of the
windows, use the fan speed control dial to
set the fan speed to maximum.
● As soon as possible after the windshield is
clean, press the AUTO button to return to
the automatic mode.

1. Press the AUTO button.
2. Turn the temperature control dial to set the
desired temperature.
● The temperature of the passenger compartment will be maintained automatically. Air
flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically.
● Do not set the temperature lower than the
outside air temperature. Otherwise, the system may not work properly.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-41

● When the
front defroster button is
pressed, the air conditioner will automatically be turned on at outside temperatures
above 36°F (2°C). The air recirculate mode
automatically turns off, allowing outside air
to be drawn into the passenger compartment to further improve the defogging performance. When the air recirculate mode
automatically turns off, the air fresh mode will
automatically turn on.

Air recirculation
Press the
air recirculation button to recirculate interior air inside the vehicle. The
indicator light on the button will come on.
The air recirculation cannot be activated when
the air conditioner is in the
front defrosting
mode.

Fresh air intake

Remote engine start logic (if so
equipped)

Press the
fresh air intake button to draw
outside air into the passenger compartment.

Vehicles equipped with automatic climate controls and remote start function may go into automatic heating or cooling mode when remote start
is activated depending on outside and cabin temperatures. During this period, the climate control
display and buttons will be inoperable until the
ignition switch is turned on. In remote start defrosting mode, the rear defroster and heated
steering wheel (if so equipped) may be activated
automatically.

Air flow control

MANUAL OPERATION
Fan speed control
Press the
fan speed control buttons to
manually control the fan speed.
Press the AUTO button to return to automatic
control of the fan speed.

Pressing the MODE button manually controls air
flow and selects the air outlet:

— Air flows mainly from center and
side vents.
— Air flows mainly from center and
side vents and foot outlets.
— Air flows mainly from foot outlets
and partly from defroster.
— Air flows mainly from defroster
and foot outlets.

To turn system off
Press the ON-OFF button.

4-42 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

OPERATING TIPS
● When the engine coolant temperature and
outside air temperature are low, the air flow
from the foot outlets may not operate for a
maximum of 150 seconds. However, this is
not a malfunction. After the coolant temperature warms up, air flow from the foot outlets
will operate normally.
● Keep the moonroof closed while the air conditioner is in operation.
● If you feel that the air flow mode you have
selected and the outlets the air is coming out
mode.
do not match, select the
● When you change the air flow mode, you
may feel air flow from the feet vents for just a
moment. This is not a malfunction.

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER

AUDIO SYSTEM

The air conditioner system in your NISSAN vehicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with
the environment in mind.

RADIO

This refrigerant does not harm the earth’s
ozone layer.
Special charging equipment and lubricant is required when servicing your NISSAN air conditioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricants
will cause severe damage to your air conditioner
system. For additional information, refer to “Air
conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.
LHA2949

The sunload sensor, located on the top and center of the instrument panel, helps the system
maintain a constant temperature. Do not put anything on or around this sensor.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
to service your “environmentally friendly” air conditioning system.

WARNING
The air conditioner system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid personal injury, any air conditioner service
should be done only by an experienced
technician with proper equipment.

With the ignition placed in the ON position, press
the
or POWER button/VOLUME control
knob to turn the radio on.
Radio reception is affected by station signal
strength, distance from radio transmitter, buildings, bridges, mountains and other external influences. Intermittent changes in reception quality
normally are caused by these external influences.
Using a cellular phone in or near the vehicle
may influence radio reception quality.

Radio reception
Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with
state-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance radio reception. These circuits are designed to
extend reception range, and to enhance the quality of that reception.
However, there are some general characteristics
of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect
radio reception quality in a moving vehicle, even
when the finest equipment is used. These characteristics are completely normal in a given reception area and do not indicate any malfunction
in your NISSAN radio system.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-43

Reception conditions will constantly change because of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain,
signal distance and interference from other vehicles can work against ideal reception. Described below are some of the factors that can
affect your radio reception.

Static and flutter: During signal interference from
buildings, large hills or due to antenna position
(usually in conjunction with increased distance
from the station transmitter), static or flutter can
be heard. This can be reduced by adjusting the
treble control to reduce treble response.

Some cellular phones or other devices may
cause interference or a buzzing noise to come
from the audio system speakers. Storing the device in a different location may reduce or eliminate the noise.

Multipath reception: Because of the reflective
characteristics of FM signals, direct and reflected
signals reach the receiver at the same time. The
signals may cancel each other, resulting in momentary flutter or loss of sound.

FM RADIO RECEPTION

AM RADIO RECEPTION

Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 – 30 mi
(40 – 48 km), with monaural (single channel) FM
having slightly more range than stereo FM. External influences may sometimes interfere with FM
station reception even if the FM station is within
25 mi (40 km). The strength of the FM signal is
directly related to the distance between the
transmitter and receiver. FM signals follow a lineof-sight path, exhibiting many of the same characteristics as light. For example, they will reflect
off objects.

AM signals, because of their low frequency, can
bend around objects and skip along the ground.
In addition, the signals can be bounced off the
ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of
these characteristics, AM signals are also subject to interference as they travel from transmitter
to receiver.

Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away from
a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade
and/or drift.

Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing
through freeway underpasses or in areas with
many tall buildings. It can also occur for several
seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in
areas where no obstacles exist.
Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical
power lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.

4-44 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION
When the satellite radio is used for the first time
or the battery has been replaced, the satellite
radio may not work properly. This is not a malfunction. Wait more than 10 minutes with satellite
radio ON and the vehicle outside of any metal or
large building for satellite radio to receive all of
the necessary data.
No satellite radio reception is available and “NO
SAT” is displayed when the SAT band option is
selected unless optional satellite receiver and
antenna are installed and a SiriusXM® Satellite
Radio service subscription is active. Satellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.
Satellite radio performance may be affected if
cargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite radio
signal.
If possible, do not put cargo over the satellite
antenna.
A build up of ice on the satellite radio antenna can
affect satellite radio performance. Remove the
ice to restore satellite radio reception.

Compact disc (CD) player
CAUTION
● Do not force a compact disc into the CD
insert slot. This could damage the CD
and/or CD player.
● Trying to load a CD with the CD door
closed could damage the CD and/or CD
player.
● Only one CD can be loaded into the CD
player at a time.
● Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm)
round discs that have the “COMPACT
disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the disc
or packaging.
● During cold weather or rainy days, the
player may malfunction due to the humidity. If this occurs, remove the CD
and dehumidify or ventilate the player
completely.
LHA0099

AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS

● The player may skip while driving on
rough roads.
● The CD player sometimes cannot function when the compartment temperature is extremely high or low.
Decrease/increase the temperature
before use.

● Do not expose the CD to direct sunlight.
● CDs that are in poor condition or are
dirty, scratched or covered with fingerprints may not work properly.
● The following CDs may not work properly:
● Copy control compact discs (CCCD)
● Recordable compact discs (CD-R)
● Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)
● Do not use the following CDs as they
may cause the CD player to malfunction:
● 3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter
● CDs that are not round
● CDs with a paper label
● CDs that are warped, scratched, or
have abnormal edges
● This audio system can only play prerecorded CDs. It has no capability to
record or burn CDs.
● If the CD cannot be played, one of the
following messages will be displayed.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-45

CHECK DISC

Compact disc with MP3 or WMA

● Confirm that the CD is inserted correctly (the label side is facing up,
etc.).

Terms

● Confirm that the CD is not bent or
warped and it is free of scratches.
PRESS EJECT
This is an error due to excessive temperature inside the player. Remove the
CD by pressing the EJECT button. After
a short time, reinsert the CD. The CD
can be played when the temperature of
the player returns to normal.
UNPLAYABLE
The file is unplayable in this audio system (only MP3 or WMA (if so equipped)
CD).

● MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures
Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the
most well-known compressed digital audio
file format. This format allows for near “CD
quality” sound, but at a fraction of the size of
normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an
audio track from CD-ROM can reduce the
file size by approximately a 10:1 ratio with
virtually no perceptible loss in quality. MP3
compression removes the redundant and
irrelevant parts of a sound signal that the
human ear doesn’t hear.
● WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA)* is a
compressed audio format created by Microsoft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA
codec offers greater file compression than
the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more
digital audio tracks in the same amount of
space when compared to MP3s at the same
level of quality.
● Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of
bits per second used by a digital music file.
The size and quality of a compressed digital
audio file is determined by the bit rate used
when encoding the file.

4-46 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

● Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency
is the rate at which the samples of a signal
are converted from analog to digital (A/D
conversion) per second.
● Multisession — Multisession is one of the
methods for writing data to media. Writing
data once to the media is called a single
session, and writing more than once is called
a multisession.
● ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the
part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that
contains information about the digital music
file such as song title, artist, encoding bit
rate, track time duration, etc. ID3 tag information is displayed on the Artist/song title
line on the display.
* Windows® and Windows Media® are registered trademarks and trademarks in the United
States of America and other countries of Microsoft Corporation of the USA.

● If there is a file in the top level of the disc,
“Root Folder” is displayed.
● The playback order is the order in which the
files were written by the writing software.
Therefore, the files might not play in the
desired order.

WHA1078

Playback order chart
Playback order
Music playback order of a CD with MP3 or WMA
files is as illustrated.
● The names of folders not containing MP3 or
WMA files are not shown in the display.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-47

Specification chart
Supported media
Supported file systems
MP3
Supported
versions*1

WMA

Version
Sampling frequency
Bit rate
Version
Sampling frequency
Bit rate

Tag information
Folder levels
Text character number limitation
Displayable character codes*2

CD, CD-R, CD-RW
ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Apple ISO, Romeo, Joliet * ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.
MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5
8 kHz - 48 kHz
8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR
WMA7, WMA8, WMA9
32 kHz - 48 kHz
48 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR
ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3 (MP3 only)
Folder levels: 8, Max folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder)
128 characters
01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big Endian), 05:
UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian)

*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.
*2 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.

4-48 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Troubleshooting guide
Symptom

Cannot play

Poor sound quality
It takes a relatively long time
before the music starts
playing.
Music cuts off or skips
Skipping with high bit rate
files
Moves immediately to the
next song when playing
Songs do not play back in
the desired order

Cause and Countermeasure
Check if the disc was inserted correctly.
Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.
Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player.
If there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.
If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be played.
Files with extensions other than “.MP3”,“.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of characters for
folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.
Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.
Check if the disc is protected by copyright.
Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.
Bit rate may be too low.
If there are many folders or file levels on the MP3/WMA disc, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the music starts playing.

The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not match the
specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.
Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.
When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, .“mp3”or “.wma”, or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, there
will be approximately 5 seconds of no sound and then the player will skip to the next song.
The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the desired order.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-49

USB (Universal Serial Bus)
Connection Port
WARNING
Do not connect, disconnect or operate the
USB device while driving. Doing so can be
a distraction. If distracted you could lose
control of your vehicle and cause an accident or serious injury.

CAUTION
● Do not force the USB device into the
USB port. Inserting the USB device
tilted or up-side-down into the port may
damage the port. Make sure that the
USB device is connected correctly into
the USB port.
● Do not grab the USB port cover (if so
equipped) when pulling the USB device
out of the port. This could damage the
port and the cover.
● Do not leave the USB cable in a place
where it can be pulled unintentionally.
Pulling the cable may damage the port.
The vehicle is not equipped with a USB device.
USB devices should be purchased separately as
necessary.

This system cannot be used to format USB devices. To format a USB device, use a personal
computer.
In some jurisdictions, the USB device for the front
seats plays only sound without images for regulatory reasons, even when the vehicle is parked.
This system supports various USB memory devices, USB hard drives and iPod® players. Some
USB devices may not be supported by this system.
● Partitioned USB devices may not play correctly.
● Some characters used in other languages
(Chinese, Japanese, etc.) may not appear
properly in the display. Using English language characters with a USB device is recommended.
General notes for USB use
● For additional information, refer to your device manufacturer’s owner information regarding the proper use and care of the device.
Notes for iPod® use
iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries.

4-50 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

● Improperly plugging in the iPod® may cause
a checkmark to be displayed on and off
(flickering). Always make sure that the
iPod® is connected properly.
● An iPod® nano (1st Generation) may remain
in fast forward or rewind mode if it is connected during a seek operation. In this case,
please manually reset the iPod®.
● An iPod® nano (2nd Generation) will continue to fast-forward or rewind if it is disconnected during a seek operation.
● An incorrect song title may appear when the
Play Mode is changed while using an iPod®
nano (2nd Generation).
● Audiobooks may not play in the same order
as they appear on an iPod®.
● Large video files cause slow responses in an
iPod®. The vehicle center display may momentarily black out, but will soon recover.
● If an iPod® automatically selects large video
files while in the shuffle mode, the vehicle
center display may momentarily black out,
but will soon recover.

Bluetooth® streaming audio
● Some Bluetooth® audio devices may not be
recognized by the in-vehicle audio system.
● It is necessary to set up the wireless connection between a compatible Bluetooth®
audio device and the in-vehicle Bluetooth®
module before using the Bluetooth® audio.
● Operating procedure of the Bluetooth® audio will vary depending on the devices. Make
sure how to operate your audio device before using it with this system.
● The Bluetooth® audio may be stopped under the following conditions:

● While an audio device is connected through
the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the
battery power of the device may discharge
quicker than usual.
● This system supports the Bluetooth® Audio
Distribution Profile (A2DP, AVRCP).

BLUETOOTH® is a
trademark owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
and licensed to
Visteon and Bosch.

● Receiving a call on the Hands-Free
Phone System.
● Checking the connection to the handsfree phone.
● Do not place the Bluetooth® audio device in
an area surrounded by metal or far away from
the in-vehicle Bluetooth® module to prevent
tone quality degradation and wireless connection disruption.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-51

CAT button

BACK button

9. iPod MENU button
10. ENTER/SETTING button/ TUNE/SCROLL
knob
11. Station select (1 - 6) buttons
12. RDM (random) button
13. RPT (repeat) button
(power) button/ VOL (volume) control

14.
knob

15. DISP (display) button
16. MEDIA button

LHA4300

FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH
COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER (Type
A) (if so equipped)
1.

CD eject button

3. Display screen
4. CD insert slot
5.

SEEK button

6. SCAN button

2. XM button*

4-52 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

17. FM•AM button
*No satellite radio reception is available when the
XM button is pressed to access satellite radio
stations unless optional satellite receiver and antenna are installed and an SiriusXM® Satellite
Radio service subscription is active. Satellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.
For additional information, refer to “Audio operation precautions” regarding all operation precautions in this section.

Audio main operation
(power) button / VOL (volume)
control knob
Place the ignition switch in the ON position and
(power) button while the system
press the
is off to call up the mode (radio, CD, AUX,
Bluetooth® audio, USB or iPod®) that was playing immediately before the system was turned off.

(power)
To turn the system off, press the
button.
Turn the VOL (volume) control knob to adjust the
volume.
This vehicle may be equipped with Speed Sensitive Volume. When this feature is active, the
audio volume changes as the driving speed
changes.

ENTER/SETTING button
Press the ENTER/SETTING button to show the
Settings screen on the display. Turn the
TUNE/SCROLL knob to navigate the options
and then press the ENTER/SETTING button to
make a selection.

Audio
Bass
Treble
Balance
Fade
Speed Sens Vol. (Speed Sensitive Volume)

AUX Vol.
Brightness and Contrast
Clock adjust
On-Screen Clock
RDS Display
Language

Adjusts the bass to the desired level.
Adjusts the treble to the desired level.
Adjusts the balance to the desired level. Balance adjusts the sound level between the left and right speakers.
Adjusts the fade to the desired level. Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers.
Adjusts the speed sensitive volume function, which increases the volume of the audio system as the speed of
the vehicle increases. Set to “OFF” to disable the feature. The higher the setting, the more the volume increases in relation to vehicle speed.
Choose a setting from 0 to +3 to control the boost of incoming auxiliary device volume. A setting of 0 provides
no additional boost in volume. A setting of +3 provides the greatest boost in volume.
Adjust the brightness or contrast to adjust the appearance of the display screen.
Press the ENTER/SETTING button to highlight the hours or minutes and then use the TUNE/SCROLL knob to
adjust the value. Press the ENTER/SETTING button again to set the value.
Toggles ON or OFF the clock display on the upper right corner of the display screen.
Toggles ON or OFF the RDS information displayed on the screen while the radio is playing.
Select the desired language for the system from the available options.

Bass, treble, balance and fade can also be adjusted by pressing the ENTER/SETTING button and turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to select the item
to adjust. When the desired item is shown on the display, turn the tuning to adjust and then press the ENTER/SETTING button until the display returns to
the main audio screen. If the button is not pressed for approximately 10 seconds, the radio or CD display will automatically reappear.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-53

iPod® MENU button
This button can only be used for iPod® operations. For additional information, refer to “iPod®
player operation without Navigation System” in
this section regarding the function of this button.

FM/AM/SAT radio operation
FM·AM button
Press the FM·AM button to change the band as
follows:
AM → FM1 → FM2 → AM

When the XM button is pressed while the ignition
switch is in ON position, the radio will come on at
the station last played.
The last station played will also come on when
(power) control
the VOL (volume)/
knob/button is pressed on.
*When the XM button is pressed, the satellite
radio reception will not be available unless an
optional satellite receiver and antenna are installed and a SiriusXM® Satellite Radio service
subscription is active. Satellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

If another audio source is playing when the
FM·AM button is pressed, the audio source playing will automatically be turned off and the last
radio station played will begin playing.

If a compact disc is playing when the XM button
is pressed, the compact disc will automatically be
turned off and the last radio station played will
come on.

The FM stereo indicator (STEREO) is shown on
the screen during FM stereo reception. When the
stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio automatically changes from stereo to monaural reception.

TUNE/SCROLL knob (Tuning)

XM band select
Press the XM button to change the band as
follows:

Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to the left or right
for manual tuning.
SEEK tuning
Press the
or
SEEK buttons to tune
from low to high or high to low frequencies and to
stop at the next broadcasting station.

XM1* → XM2* → XM3* → XM1 (satellite, if so
equipped)

4-54 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SCAN tuning
Press the SCAN button to stop at each broadcasting station for 5 seconds. SCAN will appear
on the screen while the radio is scan tuning.
Pressing the SCAN button again during this
5 second period will stop SCAN tuning and the
radio will remain tuned to that station. If the
SCAN button is not pressed within 5 seconds,
SCAN tuning moves to the next station.
1 to 6 Station memory operations
Six stations can be set for the AM band. Twelve
stations can be set for the FM band (six for FM1,
six for FM2).
1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2
using the FM·AM button.
2. Tune to the desired station using the
SEEK button or the
TRACK button.
Press and hold any of the desired station
memory buttons (1 – 6) until the preset
number is updated on the display and a
beep is heard.
3. Programming is now complete.
4. Other buttons can be set in the same manner.
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse
opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that
case, reset the desired stations.

SEEK/CAT button

Compact disc (CD) player operation
If the radio is already operating, it automatically
turns off and the compact disc begins to play.
MEDIA button
With a CD loaded, press the MEDIA button until
the CD mode is displayed on the screen.
CD/MP3 display mode
While listening to an MP3/WMA CD, certain text
may be displayed on the screen if the CD has
been encoded with text information. Depending
on how the MP3/WMA CD is encoded, information such as Artist, Song and Folder will be displayed.
The track number and the total number of tracks
in the current folder or on the current disc are
displayed on the screen as well.
SEEK/CAT (Reverse or
Fast Forward) button
Press and hold the
or
SEEK/CAT
button for 1.5 seconds while the compact disc is
playing to reverse or fast forward the track being
played. The compact disc plays at an increased
speed while reversing or fast forwarding. When
the button is released, the compact disc returns
to normal play speed.

SEEK/CAT button while a CD or
Press the
MP3/WMA CD is playing to return to the beginning
of
the
current
track.
Press
SEEK/CAT button several times to skip
the
backward several tracks.
SEEK/CAT button while a CD or
Press the
MP3/WMA CD is playing to advance one track.
SEEK/CAT button several times
Press the
to skip forward several tracks. If the last track on
a CD is skipped, the first track on the disc is
played. If the last track in a folder of an
MP3/WMA CD is skipped, the first track of the
next folder is played.
TUNE/SCROLL knob (MP3/WMA CD only)
If a MP3/WMA CD with multiple folders is playing, turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to change
folders. Turn the knob to the left to skip back a
folder. Turn the knob to the right to skip ahead a
folder.
RPT (repeat) button
When the RPT (repeat) button is pressed while a
compact disc is playing, the play pattern can be
changed as follows:
CD:
1 Track Repeat ←→ OFF

CD with MP3 or WMA:
1 Folder Repeat → 1 Track Repeat → OFF
1 Track Repeat: the current track will be repeated.
1 Folder Repeat: the current folder will be repeated.
OFF: No repeat play pattern is applied. The indicator on the display will turn off.
The current play pattern of the CD is displayed on
the screen unless no pattern is applied.
RDM (random) button
When the RDM (random) button is pressed while
a compact disc is playing, the play pattern can be
changed as follows:
CD:
1 Disc Random ←→ OFF
CD with MP3 or WMA:
1 Disc Random → 1 Folder Random → OFF
1 Disc Random: all tracks on the disc will be
played randomly.
1 Folder Random: all tracks in the current folder
will be played randomly.
OFF: No random play pattern is applied. The
indicator on the display will turn off.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-55

The current play pattern of the CD is displayed on
the screen unless no pattern is applied.
CD EJECT button
When the
CD EJECT button is pressed
with a compact disc loaded, the compact disc
will eject and the last source will be played.
CD EJECT button is pressed
When the
twice with a compact disc loaded, the compact
disc will be ejected further for easier CD removal.
If the disc is not removed within 20 seconds, the
disc will reload.

Additional features
For additional information, refer to “iPod® player
operation without Navigation System” regarding
the iPod® player available with this system in this
section.
For additional information, refer to “USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection Port (models without
Navigation System)” regarding the USB connection port available with this system in this section.
For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth®
streaming audio without Navigation System”
about the Bluetooth® audio interface available
with this system in this section.

LHA2901

FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH
COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER (Type
B) (if so equipped)
1. FM-AM button
2.

CD eject button

4-56 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

3. CD insert slot
4.

Backward seek button

button

Forward seek button

BACK button

8. ENTER/AUDIO button/ TUNE/SCROLL
knob

Audio main operation
POWER button/ VOLUME control knob

11. AUX button

Place the ignition switch in the ON position, and
then press the POWER button while the system
is off to call up the mode (radio, CD, AUX,
Bluetooth® audio, USB or iPod) which was playing immediately before the system was turned off.

12. CD button

To turn the system off, press the POWER button.

13. SXM button*
] button launches the Smartphone
The [
Integration Mode. For additional information, refer to “NissanConnectSM Mobile Apps” in this
section.
*No satellite radio reception is available when the
SXM button is pressed to access satellite radio
stations unless optional satellite receiver and antenna are installed and an SiriusXM® Satellite
Radio service subscription is active. Satellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

Turn the VOLUME control knob to adjust the
volume.

9. Display screen
10. POWER button/ VOLUME control knob

This vehicle may be equipped with Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV) for audio. The audio volume
changes as the driving speed changes.

For additional information, refer to “Audio operation precautions” regarding all operation precautions in this section.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-57

Audio settings
1. Press the [

] button.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.
3. Touch the “Audio” key.
Use the touch-screen to adjust the following
items to the desired setting:
Audio
Bass
Treble
Balance
Fade
Speed Sensitive Vol.

AUX Volume Level/AUX Level

Bass, treble, balance and fade can also be adjusted by pressing the ENTER/AUDIO control knob and turning it to select the item to adjust. When the desired
item is shown on the display, turn the tuning to adjust and then press the ENTER/AUDIO button until the display returns to the main audio screen. If the button
is not pressed for approximately 10 seconds, the radio or CD display will automatically reappear.

4-58 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SXM settings

SXM band select

To view the SXM settings:

Pressing the SXM button will change the band as
follows:

1. Press the [

] button.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.
3. Touch the “SXM” key.
The signal strength, activation status and other
information are displayed on the screen.

FM/AM/SAT radio operation
FM·AM button
Press the FM·AM button to change the band as
follows:
AM → FM1 → FM2 → AM
If another audio source is playing when the
FM·AM button is pressed, the audio source playing will automatically be turned off and the last
radio station played will begin playing.
The FM stereo indicator (STEREO) is shown on
the screen during FM stereo reception. When the
stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio automatically changes from stereo to monaural reception.

SXM1* → SXM2* → SXM3*→ SXM1* (satellite,
if so equipped)
When the SXM button is pressed while the ignition switch is in the ON position, the radio will
come on at the last station played.
The last station played will also come on when
the POWER button is pressed.
*When the SXM button is pressed, the satellite
radio mode will be skipped unless an optional
satellite receiver and antenna are installed and a
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio service subscription is
active. Satellite radio is not available in Alaska,
Hawaii and Guam.
If a compact disc is playing when the SXM button
is pressed, the compact disc will automatically be
turned off and the last radio station played will
come on.

key to display a list of categories. Touch a category displayed on the list to display options
within that category.
Tuning with the touch-screen
When in AM or FM mode, the radio can be tuned
using the touch-screen. To bring up the visual
tuner, touch the “Tune” key on the lower right
corner of the screen. A screen appears with a bar
running from low frequencies on the left to high
frequencies on the right. Touch the screen at the
location of the frequency you wish to tune and the
station will change to that frequency. To return to
the regular radio display screen, touch the “OK”
key.
Tuning with the TUNE/SCROLL knob
The radio can also be manually tuned using the
TUNE/SCROLL knob. When in FM or AM mode,
turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to the left for lower
frequencies or to the right for higher frequencies.
When in SXM mode, turn the TUNE/SCROLL
knob to change the channel.

While the radio is in SXM mode, the operation
can be controlled through the touch-screen.
Touch the “Channels” key to display a list of
channels. Touch a channel displayed on the list to
change to that channel. Touch the “Categories”

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-59

SEEK tuning

3. The channel indicator will then come on and
the sound will resume. Programming is now
complete.

When in FM or AM mode, press the
or
seek buttons to tune from low to high or
high to low frequencies and to stop at the next
broadcasting station.

4. Other keys can be set in the same manner.
If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse
opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that
case, reset the desired stations.

or
When in SXM mode, press the
seek buttons to change the category.

Presets can also be selected by touching the
desired preset number on the screen.

LHA2899

1 to 6 Station memory operations
Twelve stations can be set for the FM band (six for
FM1, six for FM2) and six stations can be set for
the AM band. Eighteen stations can be set for the
SXM band (six for SXM1, six for SXM2, six for
SXM3).
1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2
using the FM·AM button or choose the radio
band SXM1, SXM2, SXM3 using the SXM
button.
2. Tune to the desired station using manual or
seek tuning. Touch and hold any of the desired station memory keys (1 – 6) until a
beep sound is heard.

4-60 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

To program a Smart Favorite preset:
1. Press the SXM button.
2. Touch the “Setup” key.
3. Touch the “Tune Start” key to activate (ON)
or deactivate (OFF) Smart Favorites.
4. Touch the “Add Preset” key to select an
available preset.
For additional information, refer to “1 to 6 station
memory operations” in this section regarding preset memory options.
LHA3085

Smart Favorites Preset Setup (if so
equipped)
The Smart Favorites feature allows the user to
designate presets, within the SXM1, SXM2 and
SXM3 bands, as their Smart Favorites. When any
of the Smart Favorite presets are selected, the
current track on that station will play from the
beginning of the song.

NOTE:

LHA3087

• Smart Favorites will start functioning only
after the audio unit is turned on for a few
minutes.
• Tune Start is supported for music channels only.

Replay Screen
The Replay Screen gives the user the ability to
replay, skip, pause or rewind the currently aired
track.
When the “Replay” key is touched, the Replay
Screen is prompted.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-61

REPLAY

To replay a track from the
beginning, press the
seek button. The user can
continue to press
the
seek button to
replay previous songs, but
can only go back as far as
the system permits. The
system will warn the user
when they cannot skip any
further back by displaying
“At the End” in the bottom
left corner of the screen.

SKIP

To skip a track, press
the
track button.
“Live” will appear in the
bottom left corner of the
screen indicating the difference from play time to
live audio.

PAUSE

To pause a track, press
the
pause button.

REWIND/
FAST
FORWARD

To rewind/ fast forward a
track, hold the
or
seek/track
button.

4-62 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Compact disc (CD) player operation
If the radio is already operating, it automatically
turns off and the compact disc begins to play.
CD button
When the CD button is pressed with the system
off and the compact disc loaded, the system will
turn on and the compact disc will start to play.
When the CD button is pressed with a compact
disc loaded and the radio playing, the radio will
automatically be turned off and the compact disc
will start to play.

CD/MP3 display mode
Menu item
CD/MP3

Random
Repeat

Browse

While listening to a CD or an MP3/WMA CD, certain text may be displayed (when a CD encoded with text is
being used). Depending on how the CD or MP3/WMA CD is encoded, the text is displayed listing the artist,
album and song title. There are other keys displayed on the screen when a CD is playing.
Touch the “Random” key to apply a random play pattern to the CD. If an MP3 CD is playing, touching “Random” or alternates between Random Folder, and Random All. This text will appear on the display. To cancel
Random mode, touch the “Random” key until the key is no longer highlighted.
Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat play pattern to the CD. If an MP3 CD is playing, touching “Repeat”
alternates between repeating the current song and repeating the current folder. This text will appear on the
display. To cancel Repeat mode, touch the “Repeat” key until the key is no longer highlighted
Touch the “Browse” key to display the titles on the CD in list format. Touch the title of a song in the list to begin
playing that song. If an MP3 CD is playing, touching the “Browse” key will also list the folders on the disc. Follow the procedure for selecting a song with the touch-screen to choose a folder.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-63

SEEK (Reverse or Fast
Forward) buttons
or
seek buttons
Press and hold the
for 1.5 seconds while the compact disc is playing
to reverse or fast forward the track being played.
The compact disc plays at an increased speed
while reversing or fast forwarding. When the button is released, the compact disc returns to normal play speed.
SEEK buttons
seek button while a CD or
Press the
MP3/WMA CD is playing to return to the beginseek
ning of the current track. Press the
button several times to skip backward several
tracks.
seek button while a CD or
Press the
MP3/WMA CD is playing to advance one track.
seek button several times to skip
Press the
forward several tracks. If the last track on a CD is
skipped, the first track on the disc is played. If the
last track in a folder of an MP3/WMA CD is
skipped, the first track of the next folder is played.

AUX button
The AUX IN audio input jack accepts any standard analog audio input such as from a portable
cassette tape/CD player, MP3 player or a laptop
computer. Press the AUX button to play a compatible device plugged into the AUX IN jack.
CD EJECT button
When the
CD EJECT button is pressed
with a compact disc loaded, the compact disc
will eject and the last source will be played.
If the disc is not removed within 10 seconds, the
disc will reload.

Additional features
For additional information, refer to “iPod® player
operation with Navigation System” in this section.
For additional information, refer to “USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection Port (models with
Navigation System)” in this section.
For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth®
streaming audio with Navigation System” in this
section.

LHA2929

USB (Universal Serial Bus)
CONNECTION PORT (models
without Navigation System) (if so
equipped)
Connecting a device to the USB
Connection Port
WARNING
Do not connect, disconnect, or operate the
USB device while driving. Doing so can be
a distraction. If distracted you could lose
control of your vehicle and cause an accident or serious injury.

4-64 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

CAUTION
● To avoid damage and loss of function
when using a USB device, note the following precautions.
● Do not force the USB device into the
USB port. Inserting the USB device
tilted or up-side-down into the port may
damage the port. Make sure that the
USB device is connected correctly into
the USB port.
● Do not grab the USB port cover (if so
equipped) when pulling the USB device
out of the port. This could damage the
port and the cover.
● Do not leave the USB cable in a place
where it can be pulled unintentionally.
Pulling the cable may damage the port.
Refer to your device manufacturer’s owner information regarding the proper use and care of the
device.
The USB port is located on the center console
beneath the heater and air conditioner controls.
Insert the USB device into the connection port.
When a compatible storage device is plugged
into the connection port, compatible audio files
on the storage device can be played through the

vehicle’s audio system. The port is illuminated for
better visibility when the headlight switch is in the
ON position.

warding. When the button is released, the audio
file returns to normal play speed.
SEEK/CAT buttons

Audio file operation
MEDIA button
Place the ignition switch in the ON position and
press the MEDIA button to switch to the USB
input mode. If a CD is playing or another audio
source is plugged in through the AUX IN jack
located in the center console, the MEDIA button
toggles between the three sources.
Play information
Information about the audio files being played
can be displayed on the display screen of the
vehicle’s audio system. Depending on how the
audio files are encoded, information such as
Folder, Song and Artist will be displayed.
The track number and number of total tracks in
the folder are displayed on the screen as well.
SEEK/CAT (Reverse or
Fast Forward) buttons
Press and hold the SEEK/CAT buttons
or
for 1.5 seconds while an audio file on
the USB device is playing to reverse or fast
forward the track being played. The track plays at
an increased speed while reversing or fast for-

while an auPress the SEEK/CAT button
dio file on the USB device is playing to return to
the beginning of the current track. Press the
several times to skip
SEEK/CAT button
backward several tracks.
while an auPress the SEEK/CAT button
dio file on the USB device is playing to advance
one track. Press the SEEK/CAT button
several times to skip forward several tracks. If the
last track in a folder on the USB device is
skipped, the first track of the next folder is played.
RDM (random) button
When the RDM (random) button is pressed while
an audio file on the USB device is playing, the
play pattern can be changed as follows:
All Random → 1 Folder Random → OFF
All Random: all tracks on the USB device will be
played randomly.
1 Folder Random: all tracks in the current folder
will be played randomly.
OFF: No random play pattern is applied. The
indicator on the display will turn off.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-65

The current play pattern of the USB device is
displayed on the screen unless no pattern is
applied.

CAUTION
● To avoid damage and loss of function
when using a USB device, note the following precautions.

RPT (repeat) button
When the RPT (repeat) button is pressed while
an audio file on the USB device is playing, the
play pattern can be changed as follows:

● Do not force the USB device into the
USB port. Inserting the USB device
tilted or up-side-down into the port may
damage the port. Make sure that the
USB device is connected correctly into
the USB port.

1 Folder Repeat → 1 Track Repeat → OFF
1 Track Repeat: the current track will be repeated.
1 Folder Repeat: the current folder will be repeated.
OFF: No repeat play pattern is applied. The indicator on the display will turn off.
The current play pattern of the USB device is
displayed on the screen unless no pattern is
applied.
TUNE/SCROLL knob
If there are multiple folders with audio files on the
USB device, turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to
change folders. Turn the knob to the left to skip
back a folder. Turn the knob to the right to skip
ahead a folder. If there is only one folder of audio
files on the USB device, turning the
TUNE/SCROLL knob in either direction will return to the first track on the USB device.

LHA2929

USB (Universal Serial Bus)
CONNECTION PORT (models with
Navigation System) (if so equipped)
Connecting a device to the USB
Connection Port
WARNING
Do not connect, disconnect, or operate the
USB device while driving. Doing so can be
a distraction. If distracted you could lose
control of your vehicle and cause an accident or serious injury.

4-66 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

● Do not grab the USB port cover (if so
equipped) when pulling the USB device
out of the port. This could damage the
port and the cover.
● Do not leave the USB cable in a place
where it can be pulled unintentionally.
Pulling the cable may damage the port.
Refer to your device manufacturer’s owner information regarding the proper use and care of the
device.
The USB port is located on the center console
beneath the heater and air conditioner controls.
Insert the USB device into the connection port.

When a compatible storage device is plugged
into the connection port, compatible audio files
on the storage device can be played through the
vehicle’s audio system. The port is illuminated for
better visibility when the headlight switch is in the
ON position.

while an audio file
Press the SEEKbutton
on the USB device is playing to advance one
several
track. Press the SEEK button
times to skip forward several tracks. If the last
track in a folder on the USB device is skipped, the
first track of the next folder is played.

Audio file operation

Random and repeat play mode
While files on a USB device are playing, the play
pattern can be altered so that songs are repeated
or played randomly.

AUX button
Place the ignition switch in the ON position and
press the AUX button to switch to the USB input
mode. If another audio source is playing and a
USB memory device is inserted, press the AUX
button until the center display changes to the
USB memory mode.
If the system has been turned off while the USB
memory was playing, press the POWER button
to restart the USB memory.

LHA4006

Play information
Information about the audio files being played is
shown on the display screen of the vehicle’s
audio system. Touch “Browse” to display the list
of folders and files on the USB device. Touch the
name of a song on the screen to begin playing
that song.
SEEK buttons
while an audio file
Press the SEEK button
on the USB device is playing to return to the
beginning of the current track. Press the SEEK
several times to skip backward sevbutton
eral tracks.

Random
Touch the “Random” key to apply a random play
pattern to the USB device. When the Random
mode is active, the icon will illuminate. By touching the “Random” key again, the ”Random
Folder” key appears. By touching the “Random”
key once more, the “Random All” key appears. To
cancel Random mode, touch the “Random” key
until no icons are illuminated.
Repeat
Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat play
pattern to the USB device. When the Repeat
mode is active, the icon will illuminate. By touching the “Repeat” key again, the ”Repeat Track”
key appears. By touching the “Repeat” key once
more, the “Repeat Folder” key appears. . To cancel Repeat mode, touch the “Repeat” key until no
icons are illuminated.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-67

iPod®* PLAYER OPERATION
WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if
so equipped)
Connecting iPod®
WARNING
Do not connect, disconnect, or operate the
USB device while driving. Doing so can be
a distraction. If distracted you could lose
control of your vehicle and cause an accident or serious injury.

● Do not leave the USB cable in a place
where it can be pulled unintentionally.
Pulling the cable may damage the port.
For additional information, refer to your device
manufacturer’s owner information regarding the
proper use and care of the device.
To connect an iPod® to the vehicle so that the
iPod® can be controlled with the audio system
controls and display screen, use the USB connection port located on the center console below
the heater and air conditioner controls. Connect
the iPod®-specific end of the cable to the iPod®
and the USB end of the cable to the USB connection port on the vehicle. If your iPod® supports charging via a USB connection, its battery
will be charged while connected to the vehicle
with the ignition switch in the ON position. The

4-68 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

port is illuminated for better visibility when the
headlight switch is in the ON position.
While connected to the vehicle, the iPod® can
only be operated by the vehicle audio controls.
To disconnect the iPod® from the vehicle, remove the USB end of the cable from the USB
connection port on the vehicle, then remove the
cable from the iPod®.
* iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries.

Compatibility
The following models are compatible:
● iPod® Classic - 5th Generation (firmware
version 1.3.0 or later)
● iPod® Classic - 6th Generation (firmware
version 2.0.1 or later)
● iPod® Classic - 7th Generation (firmware
version 2.0.4 or later)
● iPod® nano - 1st generation (firmware version 1.3.1 or later)
● iPod® nano - 2nd generation (firmware version 1.1.3 or later)
● iPod® nano - 3rd generation (firmware version 1.1.3 or later)

● iPod® nano - 4th generation (firmware version 1.0.4 or later)
● iPod® nano - 5th generation (firmware version 1.0.2 or later)
● iPod® nano - 6th generation (firmware version 1.1 or later)
● iPod® Touch - 2nd generation (firmware
version 4.2.1 or later)
● iPod® Touch - 3rd generation (firmware version 5.1 or later) (minimum iOS 5.0 required
for smartphone integration)
● iPod® Touch - 4th generation (firmware version 5.1 or later) (minimum iOS 5.0 required
for smartphone integration)
● iPhone® 3G (firmware version 4.2.1 or later)
● iPhone® 3GS (firmware version 5.1 or later)
(minimum iOS 5.0 required for smartphone
integration)

Audio main operation
Place the ignition switch in the ON position.
Press the MEDIA button repeatedly to switch to
the iPod® mode.
If the system has been turned off while the iPod®
button will start
was playing, pressing the
the iPod®.
SEEK/CAT buttons
Press the SEEK/CAT buttons
or
to
skip backward or forward one track.
Press and hold the SEEK/CAT buttons
or
for 1.5 seconds while a track is playing
to reverse or fast forward the track being played.
The track plays at an increased speed while
reversing or fast forwarding. When the button is
released, the track returns to normal play speed.

● iPhone® 4 (firmware version 5.1 or later)
(minimum iOS 5.0 required for smartphone
integration)

REPEAT (RPT)
When the RPT button is pressed while a track is
being played, the play pattern can be changed as
follows:

● iPhone® 4S (firmware version 5.1 or later)
(minimum iOS 5.0 required for smartphone
integration)

Repeat Off → 1 Track Repeat → All Repeat →
Repeat Off

Make sure that your iPod® firmware is updated to
the version indicated above.

All Repeat: all songs in the current list are repeated.
Repeat Off: no repeat play pattern is applied.
RANDOM (RDM)
When the RDM button is pressed while a track is
being played, the play pattern can be changed as
follows:
Shuffle Off → Track Shuffle → Album Shuffle →
Shuffle Off
Track Shuffle: the tracks in the current list will be
played randomly.
Album Shuffle: the albums in the current list will
be played randomly.
Shuffle Off: no random play pattern is applied.
BACK button
When the
BACK button is pressed, it returns to the previous menu.

1 Track Repeat: the current track will be repeated.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-69

iPod®* PLAYER OPERATION WITH
NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if so
equipped)
Connecting iPod®
WARNING
Do not connect, disconnect, or operate the
USB device while driving. Doing so can be
a distraction. If distracted you could lose
control of your vehicle and cause an accident or serious injury.

4-70 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Compatibility
The following models are compatible:
● iPod® Classic 5th generation (firmware version 1.3.0 or later)
● iPod® Classic 6th generation (firmware version 2.0.1 or later)
● iPod® Classic 7th generation (firmware version 2.0.4 or later)
● iPod® Touch 2nd generation (firmware version 4.2.1 or later)*
● iPod® Touch 3rd generation (firmware version 5.1 or later)
● iPod® Touch 4th generation (firmware version 5.1 or later)

● iPod® nano - 1st generation (firmware version 1.3.1 or later)
● iPod® nano - 2nd generation (firmware version 1.1.3 or later)
● iPod® nano - 3rd generation (firmware version 1.1.3 or later)
● iPod® nano - 4th generation (firmware version 1.0.4 or later)
● iPod® nano - 5th generation (firmware version 1.0.2 or later)
● iPod® nano - 6th generation (firmware version 1.1 or later)
● iPhone® 3G (firmware version 4.2.1 or later)
● iPhone® 3GS (firmware version 5.1 or later)
● iPhone® 4 (firmware version 5.1 or later)
● iPhone® 4S (firmware version 5.1 or later)
* Some features of this iPod® may not be fully
functional.
Make sure that your iPod® firmware is updated to
the version indicated above.

LHA4007

LHA2907

Audio main operation

Interface

AUX button

The interface for iPod® operation shown on the
vehicle’s audio system display screen is similar to
the
iPod®
interface.
Use
the
BACK button or the scrolltouch-screen,
ing knob to navigate the menus on the screen.
When the iPod® is playing, touch the “Menu” key
to bring up the iPod® interface.

When the AUX button is pressed with the system
off and the iPod® connected, the system will turn
on. If another audio source is playing and the
iPod® is connected, press the AUX button repeatedly until the center display changes to the
iPod® mode.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-71

Depending on the iPod® model, the following
items may be available on the menu list screen.
For additional information, refer to the iPod®
Owner’s Manual regarding each menu item.
● Playlists
● Artists
● Albums
● Genres
● Songs
● Composers
● Audiobooks
● Podcasts
Shuffle and repeat play mode
While the iPod® is playing, the play pattern can
be altered so that songs are repeated or played
randomly.

Repeat
Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat play
pattern to the iPod®. When the repeat mode is
active, the text is illuminated. Touching the “Repeat” key once more will display the “Repeat
song” key. To cancel Repeat mode, touch the
“Repeat” key again until the text is no longer
illuminated.
Seek buttons
Press the
or
seek button to skip
backward or forward one track.
or
seek button
Press and hold the
for 1.5 seconds while a track is playing to reverse
or fast forward the track being played. The track
plays at an increased speed while reversing or
fast forwarding. When the button is released, the
track returns to normal play speed.

Shuffle
Touch the “Shuffle” key to apply a random play
pattern to the iPod®. When the Shuffle mode is
active, the text is illuminated. Touching the
“Shuffle” key once more will display the “Shuffle
songs” key. To cancel Shuffle mode, touch the
“Shuffle” key again until the text is no longer
illuminated.

4-72 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA2279

Scrolling menus
While navigating long lists of artists, albums or
songs in the music menu, it is possible to scroll
the list by the first character in the name. To
activate character indexing, touch and hold the
“A-Z” key in the upper right corner of the screen.
Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to choose the
number or letter to jump to in the list and then
press the ENTER/AUDIO button.
If no character is selected after a few seconds,
the display returns to normal.

5. The system will display a PIN on the screen
and request confirmation that it matches the
one on the handset.

BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO
WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if
so equipped)

6. Using the menu control switch on the steering wheel, select “Yes” and then press
button. If the PIN does not match,
the
the wrong device may have been selected
on the handset.

If you have a compatible Bluetooth® audio device that is capable of playing audio files, the
device can be connected to the vehicle’s audio
system so that the audio files on the device play
through the vehicle’s speakers.

NOTE:

LHA2775

Connecting Bluetooth® audio
To connect your Bluetooth® audio device to the
vehicle, follow the procedure below:
1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.
2. Select “Bluetooth”.

The connecting procedure of the cellular
phone varies according to each cellular
phone model. For additional information,
refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual.
You
can
also
visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth
or
www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for instructions
on connecting NISSAN recommended cellular phones.

Audio main operation

3. Select “Add Phone or Device”. This same
screen can be accessed to remove, replace
or select a different Bluetooth® device.

To switch to the Bluetooth® audio mode, press
the MEDIA button repeatedly until the
Bluetooth® audio mode is displayed on the
screen.

4. The system acknowledges the command
and asks you to initiate connecting from the
phone handset.

The controls for the Bluetooth® audio are displayed on the screen. Use the Preset 3 button for
play and the Preset 4 button for pause.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-73

BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO
WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if so
equipped)
If you have a compatible Bluetooth® audio device that is capable of playing audio files, the
device can be connected to the vehicle’s audio
system so that the audio files on the device play
through the vehicle’s speakers.

LHA4360

LHA2844

Connecting Bluetooth® audio

4. Touch the “Connect New Device” key.

To connect your Bluetooth® audio device to the
vehicle, follow the procedure below:

5. The system acknowledges the command
and asks you to initiate connecting from the
phone handset.

1. Press the [

] button.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.
3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.

4-74 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

● A new disc may be rough on the inner and
outer edges. Remove the rough edges by
rubbing the inner and outer edges with the
side of a pen or pencil as illustrated.

NOTE:
The connecting procedure of the cellular
phone varies according to each cellular
phone model. For additional information,
refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual.
You
can
also
visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth
or
www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for instructions
on connecting NISSAN recommended cellular phones.

Audio main operation
To switch to the Bluetooth® audio mode, press
the AUX button repeatedly until the Bluetooth®
audio mode is displayed on the screen.
The controls for the Bluetooth® audio are displayed on the screen.

LHA0049

CD CARE AND CLEANING
● Handle a CD by its edges. Do not bend the
disc. Never touch the surface of the disc.
● Always place the discs in the storage case
when they are not being used.
● To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the
center to the outer edge using a clean, soft
cloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circular
motion.
● Do not use a conventional record cleaner or
alcohol intended for industrial use.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-75

Menu control
switch/OK button
In the vehicle information display, navigate to the
“Audio” display. Use the OK button as the source
to change the mode in the following sequence:
AM → FM1 → FM2 → (XM1 → XM2 → XM3
(satellite, if so equipped)) → (SXM1 → SXM →
SXM3 (satellite, if so equipped)) → USB/iPod®*
→ Bluetooth® Audio* → AUX* → AM.

LHA4122

STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR
AUDIO CONTROL
1.

Menu control switch / OK button

2.
3.

(back) button
Seek/Track buttons

4. Volume control button

Volume control switch
Push the volume control switch to increase or
decrease the volume.

* These modes are only available when compatible media storage is inserted into the device or
connected to the system.

SEEK/TRACK buttons
AM and FM
● Press or hold for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the preset station and
show a list of the preset stations.
● Press or hold for more than 1.5 seconds to
seek up or down to the next station.
XM (if so equipped)
● Press or hold for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the preset station.
● Press or hold for more than 1.5 seconds to
go to the next or previous channel.

4-76 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SXM (if so equipped)
● Press or hold for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the preset station.
● Press or hold for more than 1.5 seconds to
go to the next or previous channel.
iPod®
● Press or hold for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the track number.
● Press or hold for more than 1.5 seconds to
reverse or fast forward the track being
played.
CD
● Press or hold for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the track number.
● Press or hold for more than 1.5 seconds to
reverse or fast forward the track being
played.
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio
● Press or hold for less than 1.5 seconds to
skip ahead or back to the next song.

NISSANCONNECTSM MOBILE APPS
(if so equipped)
USB
● Press or hold for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the track number.
● Press or hold for more than 1.5 seconds to
reverse or fast forward the track being
played.

(back) button
Press the
(back) button to return to the
previous screen or cancel the current selection.

ANTENNA
The vehicle is equipped with a shark fin antenna
and an antenna pattern is printed inside the rear
window.

CAUTION
● Do not place metalized film near the
rear window glass or attach any metal
parts to it. This may cause poor reception or noise.
● When cleaning the inside of the rear
window, be careful not to scratch or
damage the rear window antenna.
Lightly wipe along the antenna with a
dampened soft cloth.

This vehicle is equipped with Smartphone Integration technology. This allows many compatible
smartphone applications to be displayed and
easily controlled through the vehicle’s display
screen.
NOTE:
A compatible smartphone and registration
is required to use mobile applications or to
access connected features of certain vehicle applications.

REGISTERING WITH
NISSANCONNECTSM MOBILE APPS
To use the Smartphone Integration feature, it is
necessary for the user to register. In order to
register, visit the NissanConnectSM Mobile Apps
website,
www.nissanusa.com/connect/
or
www.nissan.ca/nissanconnect or
www.nissan.ca/nissanconnect/fr and sign up or
create an account through the prompts on the
NissanConnect Mobile Apps. Once registered,
download the NissanConnect Mobile Apps from
your compatible phone’s application download
source and then log into the application. If you
already have an account created through the
App, please log in.

CONNECT PHONE
To use this feature, a compatible smartphone
must be connected via Bluetooth® or USB to the
vehicle. For additional information, refer to
“Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with
Navigation System” in this section.
NOTE:
For vehicles with navigation, Apple
iPhones® REQUIRE the phone to be
plugged in via USB for NissanConnect Mobile Apps to function.
For vehicles without Navigation, Apple
iPhones® must be paired via Bluetooth®
for NissanConnect Mobile Apps to function.
NOTE:
For Android phones, NissanConnect Mobile Apps REQUIRES the phone to be
paired via Bluetooth®.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-77

APPLICATION DOWNLOAD
Once connected, the NissanConnect App will
search your phone to determine which compatible
applications are currently installed. The user will
then choose which apps they want to bring into
their vehicle from the list of apps within the “Manage My Apps” section of the NissanConnect App
on their smartphone. The vehicle will then download the in-vehicle interface for each of these compatible applications. Once downloaded, the user
can access their selected smartphone applications
through the vehicle touch-screen. For additional
information, refer to www.nissanusa.com/connect
or
www.nissan.ca/nissanconnect
or
www.nissan.ca/nissanconnect/fr regarding application availability.

NISSANCONNECTSM SERVICES (if so
equipped)

SIRI® EYES FREE

NissanConnectSM Services is a suite of telematics tools that provide emergency preparedness,
remote access, customizable alerts and convenience services. This feature is an option on
Navigation equipped vehicles. For additional information, refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

Apple Siri® Eyes Free personal assistant can be
accessed from the vehicle. Siri Eyes Free can be
accessed in Siri Eyes Free mode to reduce user
distraction. In this mode, Siri Eyes Free is available for interaction by voice control. After connecting a compatible Apple device by using
Bluetooth®, Siri Eyes Free can be activated from
TALK switch on the steering wheel.
the
Siri® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries.
● Some Siri Eyes Free functions, such as displaying pictures or opening apps, may not
be available while driving.
● For getting best results, always update your
device to the latest software version.
● Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as
possible. Close the windows to eliminate the
surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration
sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system
from recognizing the voice commands correctly.
● For functions that can be used in Siri Eyes
Free, please refer to the Apple website.

4-78 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Models without navigation system

REQUIREMENTS
Siri is only available on the iPhone® 4S or later.
Devices released before iPhone® 4S are not
supported by the Siri Eyes Free system. Visit
www.apple.com/ios/siri for details about device
compatibility.

1. Connect a Siri Eyes Free enabled iPhone®
to the vehicle. For additional information,
refer to “Initialization” in this section.
2. After the Bluetooth® connection is established, the switch operation select screen is
displayed.

Siri must be enabled on the phone. Please check
phone settings.
If the device has a lock screen, Siri must be
accessible from the lock screen. Please check
phone settings.
For best results, always update your device to the
latest software version.

LHA4363

SIRI® ACTIVATION
Siri® Eyes Free function can be activated by
pushing
TALK switch on the steering
wheel.
Models with navigation system
1. Connect an Siri Eyes Free enabled iPhone®
to the vehicle. For additional information,
refer to “Connecting procedure” in this section.
2. After the Bluetooth® connection is estabTALK
lished, push and hold the
switch to activate the Siri Eyes Free function.

3. Select “Short Press” or “Long Press” for Siri
Eyes Free activation Switch action can also
be changed from the Bluetooth® settings
menu. For additional information, refer to
“Changing Siri® Eyes Free Settings (models without navigation system)” in this section.

OPERATING SIRI® EYES FREE
1. Push or push and hold the
switch.

TALK

2. Speak your command and then listen to the
Siri Eyes Free reply.
After starting Siri Eyes Free, push the
TALK switch again within 5 seconds of the end of
the Siri Eyes Free announcement to extend the
session.
Example 1 – Playing music
1. Push or push and hold the
switch.

TALK

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-79

2. Say “Play (artist name, song name, etc.)”.

Example 2 – Replying to text messages

3. Your vehicle will automatically change to
Bluetooth® Audio or iPod® mode* when
the music starts playing. Mode selection is
determined by the phone.

1. If a compatible iPhone® is connected and
“Show Notifications” of the iPhone® settings is enabled, the vehicle will display a
notification for new incoming text messages.

* If the iPhone® is also connected with the USB
cable.

2. After reading the message, push or push
TALK switch to reply
and hold the
using Siri Eyes Free.

If the audio track does not start playing automatically after Siri Eyes Free ends, try changing the
track or audio source to resume playback.
NOTE:
For best results, use the native music app.
Performance of music control function
while using Podcasts, Audiobook or other
3rd party music apps may vary and is controlled by the iPhone®.

3. After a beep sounds, say “Text message” or
a similar command to reply using Siri Eyes
Free.

CHANGING SIRI® EYES FREE
SETTINGS (models without navigation
system)
Settings for Siri® Eyes Free can be found in the
Bluetooth settings menu. For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth® settings” in this section.
1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.
2. Use the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select
“Bluetooth”
and
then
press
the
ENTER/SETTING button.

4-80 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

3. Use the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select
“Siri” and then press the ENTER/SETTING
button.
4. Select “Short Press” or “Long Press” using
the TUNE/SCROLL knob and then press
the ENTER/SETTING button.

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Symptom

Cause and Countermeasure
Check if a Bluetooth® connection is established between the iPhone® and the system.
Check if Siri is enabled on the device. On your phone, go to Siri setting.
Check that Siri can be accessed from the device lock screen. This can be set in the settings menu of your phone.
Cannot access Siri Eyes Free from switch
Models without navigation system:
on the steering wheel
Check the settings for Siri Eyes Free activation on the vehicle audio system. If the setting is “Long Press”, you must push and hold
the
TALK switch on the steering wheel for more than 1.5 seconds to start Siri Eyes Free. If the setting is “Short Press”, a short
push and release of the switch should start Siri Eyes Free.
For best results, use the native Music app. Performance of music control function while using Podcasts, Audiobook or other 3rd party
music apps may vary.
Audio Source does not change automatiFor best results, play media already stored on your device. Streaming music or playback from cloud storage may degrade performance.
cally to iPod® or Bluetooth® Audio mode
Switch the source manually by pressing the AUX or MEDIA button on the vehicle audio system or the SOURCE select switch on the
steering wheel.
Play, pause, next track, previous track or
For best results, use the native Music app. Performance of music control function while using Podcasts, Audiobook or other 3rd party
play timer does not work
music apps may vary and is controlled by the device.
Cannot hear any music/audio being played Check that the audio source is set to Bluetooth® Audio or iPod® mode. A USB connection is required for iPod® mode.
back from a connected iPhone®
Cannot hear map turn-by-turn direction
Check that the audio source is set to Bluetooth® Audio or iPod® mode. A USB connection is required for iPod® mode.
guidance from a connected iPhone®
Cannot receive text message notifications Check if “Send Notifications” is enabled on your phone. On the phone, go to Bluetooth® settings. Find the device name, like “My Car”.
on the vehicle audio system
Press the INFO button. Turn on “Show Notifications”.
Cannot reply to text message notifications
by Siri Eyes Free

After receiving an incoming text message, follow on-screen guidance. Push or push and hold the
wheel for Siri Eyes Free. After Siri Eyes Free starts, say “Text Message”.

TALK switch on the steering

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-81

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO
When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone in
your vehicle, be sure to observe the following
precautions; otherwise, the new equipment may
adversely affect the engine control system and
other electronic parts.

WARNING
● A cellular phone should not be used for
any purpose while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.
Some jurisdictions prohibit the use of
cellular phones while driving.
● If you must make a call while your vehicle is in motion, the hands free cellular phone operational mode is highly
recommended. Exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be
given to vehicle operation.

BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE
SYSTEM WITHOUT NAVIGATION
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
CAUTION
● Keep the antenna as far away as possible from the electronic control
modules.
● Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in
(20 cm) away from the electronic control
system harnesses. Do not route the antenna wire next to any harness.
● Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio
as recommended by the manufacturer.
● Connect the ground wire from the CB
radio chassis to the body.
● For additional information, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

● If you are unable to devote full attention
to vehicle operation while talking on
the phone, pull off the road to a safe
location and stop your vehicle.

4-82 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

WARNING
● Use a phone after stopping your vehicle
in a safe location. If you have to use a
phone while driving, exercise extreme
caution at all times so full attention may
be given to vehicle operation.
● If you are unable to devote full attention
to vehicle operation while talking on
the phone, pull off the road to a safe
location and stop your vehicle.

CAUTION
To avoid discharging the vehicle battery,
use a phone after starting the engine.

phone module when the ignition switch is placed
in the ON position with the previously connected
cellular phone turned on and carried in the vehicle.
NOTE:
Some devices require the user to accept
connections to other Bluetooth® devices. If
your phone does not connect automatic
ally to the system, consult the phone’s
Owner’s Manual for details on device operation.
You can connect up to five different Bluetooth®
cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module.
However, you can talk on only one cellular phone
at a time.
Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System, refer to the following notes.

LHA4369

Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System. If you have a compatible Bluetooth® enabled cellular phone, you
can set up the wireless connection between your
cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module.
With Bluetooth® wireless technology, you can

make or receive a hands-free telephone call with
your cellular phone in the vehicle.
Once your cellular phone is connected to the
in-vehicle phone module, no other phone connecting procedure is required. Your phone is
automatically connected with the in-vehicle

● Set up the wireless connection between a
compatible cellular phone and the in-vehicle
phone module before using the hands-free
phone system.
● Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular phones
may not be recognized or work properly.
Please visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth
or www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for a recommended phone list and connecting instructions.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-83

● You will not be able to use a hands-free
phone under the following conditions:
– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular service area.
– Your vehicle is in an area where it is
difficult to receive a cellular signal; such
as in a tunnel, in an underground parking
garage, near a tall building or in a mountainous area.
– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it
from being dialed.

● Some cellular phones or other devices may
cause interference or a buzzing noise to
come from the audio system speakers. Storing the device in a different location may
reduce or eliminate the noise.
● Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual
regarding the telephone charges, cellular
phone antenna and body, etc.
● For additional information, refer to “Troubleshooting guide” in this section. You can also
visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for
troubleshooting help if the hands-free phone
system seems to be malfunctioning.

● When the radio wave condition is not ideal
or ambient sound is too loud, it may be
difficult to hear the other person’s voice during a call.

REGULATORY INFORMATION

● Do not place the cellular phone in an area
surrounded by metal or far away from the
in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone
quality degradation and wireless connection
disruption.

– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with
FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only the
supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,
modification, or attachments could damage
the transmitter and may violate FCC regulations.

● While a cellular phone is connected through
the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the
battery power of the cellular phone may discharge quicker than usual. The Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System cannot charge
cellular phones.

– Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

FCC Regulatory information

1. This device may not cause interference and
2. this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

4-84 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

IC Regulatory information
– Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
– This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian InterferenceCausing Equipment Regulations.

BLUETOOTH® is a
trademark owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
and licensed to
Visteon.

USING THE SYSTEM
The system allows hands-free operation of the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
If the vehicle is in motion, some commands may
not be available so full attention may be given to
vehicle operation.

Initialization
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized,
button is
which takes a few seconds. If the
pressed before the initialization completes, the
system will announce “Hands-free phone system
not ready” and will not react to voice commands.

Operating tips
To get the best performance out of the NISSAN
Voice Recognition System, observe the following:
● Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as
possible. Keep all vents pointed away from
the microphone and close the windows to
eliminate surrounding noises (traffic noises,
vibration sounds, etc.), which may prevent
the system from recognizing voice commands correctly.
● Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a
command. Otherwise, the command will not
be received properly.
● Start speaking a command within 5 seconds
after the tone sounds.
● Speak in a natural voice without pausing
between words.

● For calling contacts by name, please say
both the first and last name of the contact for
better recognition.

Giving voice commands
To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, press
button located on the
and release the
steering wheel. After the tone sounds, speak a
command.
The command given is picked up by the microphone, and voice feedback is given when the
command is accepted.
● If you need to hear the available commands
for the current menu again, say “Help” and
the system will repeat them.
● If a command is not recognized, the system
announces, “Command not recognized.
Please try again.” Make sure the command is
said exactly as prompted by the system and
repeat the command in a clear voice.
● If you want to go back to the previous command, you can say “Go back” or “Correction” any time the system is waiting for a
response.

● You can cancel a command when the system is waiting for a response by saying,
“Cancel” or “Quit.” The system announces
“Cancel” and ends the Voice Recognition
session. You can also press and hold
button on the steering wheel for
the
5 seconds at any time to end the Voice
Recognition session. Whenever the Voice
Recognition session is canceled, a double
beep is played to indicate you have exited
the system.
● If you want to adjust the volume of the voice
feedback, push the volume control switches
(+ or -) on the steering wheel while being
provided with feedback. You can also use
the radio Volume control knob.
Voice Prompt Interrupt
In most cases you can interrupt the voice feedback to speak the next command by pressing
button on the steering wheel. After
the
interrupting the system, wait for a beep before
speaking your command.
One Shot Call
To use the system faster, you may speak the
second level commands with the main menu
command on the main menu. For example, press
button and after the tone say, “Call
the
Redial”.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-85

If the operation of “Siri” is set to
“Short Press” on the Bluetooth®
setting menu, pressing and holding the
button initiates a
Voice Recognition session for the
Hands-Free Phone operation. For
additional information, refer to
“Bluetooth® settings” in this
section.

LHA4370

CONTROL BUTTONS
The control buttons for the Bluetooth® HandsFree Phone System are located on the steering
wheel.

PHONE/SEND
Press the
button to initiate
a Voice Recognition session or
answer an incoming call.

You can also use the
button
to interrupt the system feedback
and give a command at once. For
additional information, refer to
“Voice Commands” and “During a
call” in this section.
PHONE/END
While the voice recognition system is active, press and hold
the
button for 5 seconds to
quit the voice recognition system
at any time.

4-86 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Tuning switch
While using the voice recognition
system, push the tuning switch
up, down, left or right to manually
control the phone system.

CONNECTING PROCEDURE

To connect a phone to the Bluetooth® HandsFree Phone System:

NOTE:

Manual Connecting Procedure

The connecting procedure must be performed when the vehicle is stationary. If the
vehicle starts moving during the procedure,
the procedure will be canceled.

1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.
2. Use the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select
“Bluetooth”
and
then
press
the
ENTER/SETTING button.

LHA2775
Menu Item
Bluetooth
On
Off
Add Phone or Device
Replace Phone

Result
Allows user to switch Bluetooth® on and off. Bluetooth® must be turned on in order to connect device.
Turns Bluetooth® functionality on.
Turns Bluetooth® functionality off.
Upon pressing this button, a message with a PIN appears on the screen. Operate the Bluetooth® phone to enter the PIN and complete the
connection process.
Replace the phone currently connected to the system. This option allows the user to keep any voicetags that were recorded using the previous phone if vehicle is equipped with voice recognition.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-87

Automatic Connecting Procedure

“Phonebook”

If no phone is connected to the system, press
button on the steering wheel. The systhe
tem will automatically begin searching for a compatible phone. If the system detects a compatible
phone a message with a PIN appears on the
screen. Operate the Bluetooth® phone to enter
the PIN and complete the connection process.

The following commands are available under
“Phonebook”:

VOICE COMMANDS
Voice commands can be used to operate the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. Press
button and say “Phone” to bring up the
the
phone command menu. The available options
are:
● Call
● Phonebook
● Recent Calls
● Messaging (if available)
● Show Applications (if so equipped)
● Select Phone or Device

“Call”
For additional information, refer to “Making a call”
in this section.

● (a name)
Say a name in the phonebook to bring up a
list of options for that phonebook entry. The
system will say the name it interpreted based
on the voice command provided. If the name
is incorrect, say “Correction” to hear another
name.
Once the correct phonebook entry is identified, say “Dial” to dial the number or “Send
Text” to send a text message to that number.
Say “Record Name” to record a name for the
phonebook entry. Say “Delete Recording” to
delete a recorded name for the phonebook
entry.
● List Names
Speak this command to have the system list
the names in the phonebook one by one
alphabetically. Say “Dial” to dial the number
of the current name or “Send Text” to send a
text message to that number. Say “Next Entry” or “Previous Entry” to move through the
list alphabetically. Say “Record Name” to
record a name for the current phonebook
entry. Say “Delete Recording” to delete a
recorded name for the current phonebook
entry.

4-88 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

● Transfer Entry
This command can be used to transfer multiple contacts at a time. To enable manual
contact transfer capability, set “Phonebook
Download” to “Off” in the Setting menu. The
ability to transfer contacts via the OPP
Bluetooth® profile depends on your mobile
phone. For additional information, refer to
your phone’s Owner’s Manual.
● Delete Entry
Speak this command to delete an entry in
the phonebook. Choose an entry to delete
by speaking the desired name or say “List
Names”.

“Recent Calls”
The following commands are available under
“Recent Calls”:
● Incoming Calls
Speak this command to list the last five
incoming calls to the vehicle. If the call is
from an entry in the phonebook, the name
will be displayed. Otherwise, the phone
number of the incoming call will be displayed.
Say “Dial” to call the number or “Send Text”
to send a text message to that number. Say
“Next Entry” or “Previous Entry” to move
through the list of incoming calls.

● Missed Calls
Speak this command to list the last five
missed calls to the vehicle. If the call is from
an entry in the phonebook, the name will be
displayed. Otherwise, the phone number of
the missed call will be displayed.
Say “Dial” to call the number or “Send Text”
to send a text message to that number. Say
“Next Entry” or “Previous Entry” to move
through the list of missed calls.

“Messaging” (if so equipped)

● Outgoing Calls
Speak this command to list the last five
outgoing calls from the vehicle. If the call
was to an entry in the phonebook, the name
will be displayed. Otherwise, the phone
number of the outgoing call will be displayed.
Say “Dial” to call the number or “Send Text”
to send a text message to that number. Say
“Next Entry” or “Previous Entry” to move
through the list of outgoing calls.

MAKING A CALL

● Redial
Speak this command to call the last number
dialed.
● Call Back
Speak this command to call the number of
the last incoming call to the vehicle.

Speak this command to access text messaging
functions. For additional information, refer to
“Text messaging” in this section.

“Select Phone or Device”
Speak this command to select a phone to use
from a list of those phones connected to the
vehicle.

To make a call from a phone connected to the
vehicle’s Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System:
1. Press the

button.

● “Number” – Speak this command to place a
call by inputting numbers.
For 7- and 10-digit phone numbers, speak
the numbers. When finished, say “Dial” to
initiate the call. Say “Correction” at any time
in the process to correct a misspoken or
misinterpreted number.
For phone numbers with more digits or special characters, say “Special Number”, then
speak the digits. Up to 24 digits can be
entered. Available special characters are
“star”, “pound”, “plus” and “pause”. When
finished, say “Dial” to initiate the call. Say
“Correction” at any time in the process to
correct a misspoken or misinterpreted number or character.

3. Select one of the available voice commands
to continue:

● “Redial” – Speak this command to dial the
number of the last outgoing call. The system
will display “Redialing ”.
The name of the phonebook entry will be
displayed if it available, otherwise the number being redialed will be displayed.

● “(a name)” – Speak the name of a phonebook entry to place a call to that entry. The
system will respond with the name it interpreted from your command and will prompt
you to confirm that the name is correct. Say
“Yes” to initiate the call or “No” to hear another name from the phonebook.

● “Call Back” – Speak this command to dial
the number of the last incoming call. The
system will display “Calling back
”. The name of the phonebook entry will be displayed if it available,
otherwise the number being called back will
be displayed.

2. The system will prompt you for a command.
Say “Call”.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-89

RECEIVING A CALL
When a call is received by the phone connected
to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System, the call information is displayed on either
the vehicle information display or both the vehicle
information display and the control panel display.
button to accept the call. Press
Press the
the
button to reject the call.

DURING A CALL
While a call is active, press the
button to
access additional options. Speak one of the following commands:
● “Send” – Speak this command followed by
the digits to enter digits during the phone
call.
● “Mute On” or “Mute Off” – Speak the command to mute or unmute the system.
● “Transfer Call” – Speak this command to
transfer the call to the handset. To transfer
the call back from the handset to the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System,
button and confirm when
press the
prompted.

If supported by the phone, the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System allows for call waiting
functionality. If a call is received while another call
is already active, a message will be displayed on
button to hold the
the screen. Press the
active call and switch to the second call. Press
button to reject the second call.
the
While the second call is active, pressing
the
button will allow the same commands
that are available during any call as well as two
additional commands:
● “Switch Call” – Speak this command to hold
the second call and switch back to the original call.
● “End Other Call” – Speak this command to
stay with the second call and end the original
call.
button to accept the call. Press
Press the
the
button to reject the call.

ENDING A CALL
To end an active call, press the

4-90 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

button.

TEXT MESSAGING (if so equipped)
WARNING
● Laws in some jurisdictions may restrict
the use of “Text-to-Speech”. Check local regulations before using this
feature.
● Laws in some jurisdictions may restrict
the use of some of the applications and
features, such as social networking and
texting. Check local regulations for any
requirements.
● Use the text messaging feature after
stopping your vehicle in a safe location.
If you have to use the feature while
driving, exercise extreme caution at all
times so full attention may be given to
vehicle operation.
● If you are unable to devote full attention
to vehicle operation while using the text
messaging feature, pull off the road to a
safe location and stop your vehicle.

NOTE:
This feature is automatically disabled if the
connected device does not support the
Message Access Profile (MAP). For additional information, refer to the phone’s
Owner’s Manual for details and instructions.
NOTE:
Many phones may require special permission to enable text messaging. Check the
phone’s screen during Bluetooth® pairing.
For some phones, you may need to enable
‘Notifications’ in the phone’s Bluetooth®
menu for text messages to appear on the
headunit. For additional information, refer
to your phone’s Owner’s manual. Text message integration requires that the phone
support MAP (Message Access Profile) for
both receiving and sending text messages.
Some phones may not support all text messaging
features.
Please
refer
to
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth
or
www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for compatibility
information, as well as your device’s Owner’s manual.
The system allows for the sending and receiving
of text messages through the vehicle interface.

Sending a text message:
button on the steering

1. Press the
wheel.

5. Once a recipient is chosen, the system
prompts for which message to send. Nine
predefined messages are available as well
as three custom messages. To choose one
of the predefined messages, speak one of
the following after the tone:
● “Driving, can’t text”
● “Call me”
● “On my way”
● “Running late”
● “Okay”
● “Yes”
● “No”
● “Where are you?”
● “When?”
● “Custom Messages”
To send one of the custom messages, say
“Custom Messages”. If more than one custom message is stored, the system will
prompt for the number of the desired custom message. For additional information on
setting and managing custom text messages, refer to “Bluetooth® settings” in this
section.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-91

Reading a received text message:
1. Press the
wheel.

button on the steering

2. Say “Phone” after the tone.
3. Say “Read Text” after the tone.
The text message, sender and delivery time are
shown on the screen. Use the tuning switch to
scroll through all text messages if more than one
button to exit the
are available. Press the
button to
text message screen. Press the
access the following options for replying to the
text message:
● Call Back
Speak this command to call the sender of
the text message using the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System.

● Next Text
Speak this command to move to the next text
message (if available).
Siri® Eyes Free
If a connected phone is equipped with Siri®, it
can also be used to create custom messages
that are sent through the phone. For additional
information, refer to “Siri® Eyes Free” in this
section.
NOTE:
Text messages are only displayed if the
vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).

LHA2274

NOTE:

BLUETOOTH® SETTINGS

For Apple iPhones®, text messages can
only be sent through Siri.

To access and adjust the settings for the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System:

● Send Text
Speak this command to send a text message
response to the sender of the text message.
● Read Text
Speak this command to read the text message again.
● Previous Text
Speak this command to move to the previous text message (if available).

4-92 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.
2. Use the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select
“Bluetooth”
and
then
press
the
ENTER/SETTING button:
● Bluetooth
Select “On” or “Off” to turn the vehicle’s
Bluetooth® system on or off.
● Add Phone or Device
For additional information, refer to “Connecting procedure” in this section.

● Delete Phone or Device
Select to delete a phone from the displayed
list. The system will ask to confirm before
deleting the phone.
● Replace Phone
Select to replace a phone from the displayed
list. When a selection is made, the system
will ask to confirm before proceeding. The
recorded phonebook for the phone being
deleted will be saved as long as the new
phone’s phonebook is the same as the old
phone’s phonebook.
● Select Phone or Device
Select to connect to a previously connected
phone from the displayed list.
● Show Incoming Calls
Select “Driver Only” to have incoming call
information displayed only in the vehicle information display. Select “Both” to have incoming call information displayed in both the
vehicle information display and the center
display screen.
● Phonebook Download
Select to turn on or off the automatic download of a connected phone’s phonebook.

● Siri ®
button operation for
Press the
Siri®Eyes Free function from “Short Press”
and “Long Press” (if available). For additional information, refer to “Siri®Eyes Free”
in this section. “Siri” is displayed only when a
Siri Eyes Free enabled iPhone®is connected to the vehicle.

● Edit Custom Messages (if so equipped)
Select to set a custom message that will be
available with the standard options when
sending a text message. To set a custom
message, send a text message to your own
phone number while the phone is connected
to the system. Three custom messages can
be set. Custom messages can only be set
while the vehicle is stationary.

● Text Message (if so equipped)
Select to turn on or off the vehicle’s text
messaging feature.

● Auto Reply (if so equipped)
Select to turn on or off the Auto Reply function. When enabled, the vehicle will automatically send a predefined text message to
the sender when a text message is received
while driving.

● New Text Sound (if so equipped)
Select to adjust the volume of the sound that
plays when a new text is received by a phone
connected to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Phone System. The setting all the way to the
left indicates that the new text sound will be
muted.
● Show Incoming Text (if so equipped)
Select “Driver Only” to have incoming text
messages displayed only in the vehicle information display. Select “Both” to have incoming text messages displayed in both the vehicle information display and the center
display screen. Select “None” to have no
display of incoming text messages.

● Auto Reply Message (if so equipped)
Select to choose the message that is sent
when the Auto Reply function is enabled.
Choose from “I’m Driving” or one of the three
custom messages stored in the system.
● Vehicle Signature On/Off (if so equipped)
Select to choose whether or not the vehicle
signature is added to outgoing text messages from the vehicle. This message cannot be changed or customized.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-93

MANUAL CONTROL

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

While using the Voice Recognition system, it is
possible to select menu options by using the
steering wheel controls instead of speaking voice
commands. To activate manual control mode,
button on the steering wheel to
press the
access the phone menu and then push either up
.
or down on the tuning switch
The manual control mode does not allow dialing a
phone number by digits. The user may select an
entry from the Phonebook or Recent Calls lists.
To reactivate Voice Recognition, exit the manual
control mode by pressing and holding the
button. At that time, pressing the
button
will start the Hands Free Phone System.

The system should respond correctly to all voice
commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, try the following solutions.

Symptom

System fails to interpret the command correctly.

The system consistently selects the wrong entry from the
phone book.

Where the solutions are listed by number, try
each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until
the problem is resolved.

Solution
1. Ensure that the command is valid. For additional information, refer to “Voice commands” in this section.
2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.
3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle.
4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is too
noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.
5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.
1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed by
using the “List Names” command. For additional information, refer to “Phonebook” in this section.
2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.
3. Please speak both first and last name of contact to improve recognition accuracy.

4-94 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE
SYSTEM WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM
(if so equipped)
WARNING
● Use a phone after stopping your vehicle
in a safe location. If you have to use a
phone while driving, exercise extreme
caution at all times so full attention may
be given to vehicle operation.
● If you are unable to devote full attention
to vehicle operation while talking on
the phone, pull off the road to a safe
location and stop your vehicle.

CAUTION
To avoid discharging the vehicle battery,
use a phone after starting the engine.

LHA4371

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-95

phone module when the ignition switch is placed
in the ON position with the connected cellular
phone turned on and carried in the vehicle.
You can register up to five different Bluetooth®
cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module.
However, you can talk on only one cellular phone
at a time.
NISSAN Voice Recognition System supports the
phone commands, so dialing a phone number
using your voice is possible. For additional information, refer to “NISSAN Voice Recognition System” in this section.
Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System, refer to the following notes.
● Set up the wireless connection between a cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module
before using the hands-free phone system.
● Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular phones
may not be recognized by the in-vehicle
phone
module.
Please
visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth
or
www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for a recommended phone list and connecting.
● You will not be able to use a hands-free
phone under the following conditions:
– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular service area.

– Your vehicle is in an area where it is
difficult to receive cellular signal; such as
in a tunnel, in an underground parking
garage, near a tall building or in a mountainous area.

– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it
from being dialed.

● Refer to the cellular phone owner’s manual
regarding the battery, battery charging and
cellular phone operations.

● When the radio wave condition is not ideal
or ambient sound is too loud, it may be
difficult to hear the other person’s voice during a call.
● Immediately after the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position, it may be impossible to receive a call for a short period of
time.
● Do not place the cellular phone in an area
surrounded by metal or far away from the
in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone
quality degradation and wireless connection
disruption.
● While a cellular phone is connected through
the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the
battery power of the cellular phone may discharge quicker than usual. The Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System cannot charge
cellular phones.

4-96 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

● The signal strength display on the monitor
will not coincide with the signal strength
display of some cellular phones.
● For additional information, refer to “Troubleshooting guide” in this section. You can also
visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or
www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for troubleshooting help if the hands-free phone system
seems to be malfunctioning.

REGULATORY INFORMATION
FCC Regulatory information
– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with
FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only the
supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,
modification, or attachments could damage
the transmitter and may violate FCC regulations.

– Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference and
2. this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
IC Regulatory information
– Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
– This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian InterferenceCausing Equipment Regulations.

BLUETOOTH® is a
trademark owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
and licensed to
Bosch.

VOICE COMMANDS
You can use voice commands to operate various
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System features
using the NISSAN Voice Recognition System.
For additional information, refer to “NISSAN
Voice Recognition System” in this section.

Voice Prompt Interrupt
While using the Voice Recognition system, the
system voice can be interrupted to allow the user
to speak commands. While the system is speakbutton on the steering
ing, press the
wheel. The system voice will stop and a tone will
be heard. After the tone, speak desired command
(displayed on the touch-screen).

One Shot Call
To use the system faster, you may speak the
second level commands with the main menu
command on the main menu. For example, press
button and after the tone say, “Call
the
Redial”.

LHA4360

CONNECTING PROCEDURE
NOTE:
The connecting procedure must be performed when the vehicle is stationary. If the
vehicle starts moving during the procedure,
the procedure will be canceled.
1. Press the [
panel.

] button on the control

2. Touch the “Settings” key.
3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.
4. Touch the “Connect New Device” key.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-97

5. Initiate the connecting process from the
handset. The system will display the message: “Is PIN XXXXXX displayed on your
Bluetooth device?”. If the PIN is displayed
on your Bluetooth® device, select “Yes” to
complete the pairing process.
For additional information, refer to
Bluetooth® device’s Owner’s Manual.

the

VEHICLE PHONEBOOK
To access the vehicle phonebook:
1. Press the

button on the control panel.

2. Touch the “Phonebook” key.
3. Choose the desired entry from the displayed
list.
4. The number of the entry will be displayed on
the screen. Touch the number to initiate dialing.

To reject the incoming call, either:

MAKING A CALL
To make a call, follow the procedure below:
1. Press the
button on the control panel.
The “Phone” screen will appear on the display.
2. Select one of the following options to make a
call:
● “Phonebook”: Select the name from an entry
stored in the vehicle phonebook.
● “Call Lists”: Select the name from the incoming, outgoing or missed.
● “Redial”: Dial the last outgoing call from the
vehicle.
”: Input the phone number manually
● “
using a keypad displayed on the screen. For
additional information, refer to “How to use
the touch-screen” in this section.

NOTE:

RECEIVING A CALL

To scroll quickly through the list, touch the
“A-Z” key in the upper right corner of the
screen. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to
choose a letter or number and then press
ENTER. The list will move to the first entry
that begins with that number or letter.

When a call is placed to the connected phone,
the display will change to phone mode.
To accept the incoming call, either:
● Press the
wheel, or
● Touch the

button on the steering
icon on the screen.

4-98 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

● Press the
wheel, or
● Touch the

button on the steering
icon on the screen.

DURING A CALL
While a call is active, the following options are
available on the screen:
● “Handset”
Select this option to switch control of the
phone call over to the handset.
● “Mute Mic.”
Select this option to mute the microphone.
Select again to unmute the microphone.
icon
● Phone
Select to end the phone call.

ENDING A CALL
To end a phone call, select the red phone
icon on the screen or press the
button on
the steering wheel.

NOTE:

Sending a text message:

This feature is automatically disabled if the
connected device does not support the
Message Access Profile (MAP). For additional information, refer to the phone’s
Owner’s Manual for details and instructions.
NOTE:
Many phones may require special permission to enable text messaging. Check the
phone’s screen during Bluetooth® pairing.
For some phones, you may need to enable
‘Notifications’ in the phone’s Bluetooth®
menu for text messages to appear on the
headunit. For additional information, refer
to your phone’s Owner’s manual. Text message integration requires that the phone
support MAP (Message Access Profile) for
both receiving and sending text messages.
Some phones may not support all text messaging features. For additional information,
please
refer
to
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth
or
www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for compatibility
information, as well as your device’s Owner’s manual.
The system allows for the sending and receiving
of text messages through the vehicle interface.

1. Press the
wheel.

button on the steering

2. Say “Phone” after the tone.
3. Say “Send Text” after the tone.
4. The system will provide a list of available
commands in order to determine the recipient of the text message. Choose from the
following:
● To (a name)
● Enter Number
● Missed Calls
● Incoming Calls
● Outgoing Calls
For additional information about these options, refer to “Voice commands” in this section.
5. Once a recipient is chosen, the system
prompts for which message to send. Nine
predefined messages are available as well
as three custom messages. To choose one
of the predefined messages, speak one of
the following after the tone:
● “Driving, can’t text”

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-99

● “Call me”

The text message, sender and delivery time are
shown on the screen. Use the tuning switch to
scroll through all text messages if more than one
button to exit the
are available. Press the
text message screen. Press the
button to
access the following options for replying to the
text message:

● “On my way”
● “Running late”
● “Okay”
● “Yes”
● “No”
● “Where are you?”
● “When?”
● “Custom Messages”
To send one of the custom messages, say
“Custom Messages”. If more than one custom message is stored, the system will
prompt for the number of the desired custom message. For additional information on
setting and managing custom text messages, refer to “Bluetooth® settings” in this
section.
Reading a received text message:
1. Press the
wheel.

button on the steering

● Call Back
Speak this command to call the sender of
the text message using the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System.
● Send Text
Speak this command to send a text message
response to the sender of the text message.
● Read Text
Speak this command to read the text message again.
● Previous Text
Speak this command to move to the previous text message (if available).
● Next Text
Speak this command to move to the next text
message (if available).

2. Say “Phone” after the tone.
3. Say “Read Text” after the tone.

4-100 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Siri® Eyes Free
If a connected phone is equipped with Siri®, it
can also be used to create custom messages
that are sent through the phone. For additional
information, refer to “Siri® Eyes Free” in this
section.
NOTE:
Text messages are only displayed if the
vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
NOTE:
For Apple iPhones®, text messages can
only be sent through Siri.

BLUETOOTH® SETTINGS
To access the phone settings:
1. Press the [

] button.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.
3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.

LHA2844
Menu Item
Phone Settings
Connect New Device
Select Connected Device
Replace Connected Device
Delete Connected Device
Bluetooth

Result
For additional information, refer to “Phone settings” in this section.
Touch to connect a new Bluetooth® device to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
Touch to choose a Bluetooth® device from a list of those devices connected to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
Touch to replace a Bluetooth® device from a list of those devices connected to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
Touch to delete a Bluetooth® device from a list of those devices connected to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
Touch to toggle Bluetooth® on and off.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-101

PHONE SETTINGS
To access the phone settings:
1. Press the [

] button.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.
3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.
4. Touch the “Phone Settings” key and adjust
the following settings as desired:
● Start Siri® by:
Touch “Short Press” or “Long Press” to set
how Siri® is operated on the steering wheel.
● Sort Phonebook By:
Touch “First Name” or “Last Name” to
choose how phonebook entries are alphabetically displayed on the screen.
● Use Phonebook From:
Touch “Handset” to use the phone’s phonebook. Touch “SIM” to use the phonebook on
the SIM card. Select “Both” to use both
sources.
● Download Phonebook Now:
Touch to download the phonebook to the
vehicle from the chosen source.

● Record Name for Phonebook Entry:
Touch to record a name for a phonebook
entry for use with the NISSAN Voice Recognition System.
● Phone Notifications for:
Touch “Driver” to have phone notifications
shown in the vehicle information display. Select “Both” to have phone notifications
shown in both the vehicle information display
and the center display screen.
● Text Messaging (if so equipped):
Touch to toggle the text message functionality on or off.
● Show Incoming Text for If so equipped):
Touch “Driver” to have incoming text notifications shown in the vehicle information display. Touch “Both” to have text notifications
shown in both the vehicle information display
and the center display screen. Touch “Off” to
turn off all text notifications.
● Auto Reply (if so equipped):
Touch to toggle the auto reply functionality
on or off.
● Auto Reply Message (if so equipped):
Touch to indicate preferred message to be
sent when “Auto Reply” function is activated.

4-102 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

● Use Vehicle’s Signature (if so equipped):
Touch to toggle on or off the addition of the
vehicle signature to outgoing messages.
● Custom Text Messages (if so equipped):
Touch this option to select a custom message to edit. There are 4 customer message
slots available.

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
The system should respond correctly to all voice
commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, try the following solutions.
Where the solutions are listed by number, try
each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until
the problem is resolved.
Symptom

System fails to interpret the command correctly.

The system consistently selects the wrong entry from the
phone book.

Solution
1. Ensure that the command is valid. For additional information, refer to “Voice commands” in this section.
2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.
3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle.
4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is too
noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.
5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.
1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. For additional information,
refer to “Vehicle phonebook” in this section.
2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.
3. Please speak both first and last name of contact to improve recognition accuracy.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-103

NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
● Press the
vious screen.

The NISSAN Voice Recognition System allows
hands-free operation of the systems equipped on
this vehicle, such as the phone and navigation
systems.

● If the command is not recognized, the system announces provides a list of available
selections.

To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, press
button located on the steering wheel.
the
When prompted, speak the command for the
system you wish to activate. The command given
is picked up by the microphone and performed
when it is properly recognized. NISSAN Voice
Recognition will provide a voice response as well
as a message in the center display to inform you
of the command results.

● If you want to cancel the command or go
back to the previous menu of commands,
button. The system will anpress the
nounce: “Cancelling voice recognition” or
“Go back” depending on the current menu
level.

USING THE SYSTEM
Initialization
When the ignition switch is in the ON position,
NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized, which
takes a few seconds. When completed, the system is ready to accept voice commands. If
button is pressed before the initializathe
tion completes, the system will announce: “Voice
Recognition System not ready. Please wait.”

button to return to the pre-

LHA4372

Giving voice commands
1. Press the

button.

2. The system announces: “Please say a category like phone or a command like points of
interest followed by a brand name”. A list of
available commands is then spoken by the
system.
3. After the tone sounds and the face icon on
the display changes, speak a command.
Available commands are discussed elsewhere in this section.
4. Voice and display feedback are provided
when the command is accepted.

4-104 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

button to move back
● Press the
through the menus displayed on the screen.
● If you want to adjust the volume of the voice
feedback, use the volume control switches
on the steering wheel or the volume knob on
the control panel.
● The voice command screen can also be
accessed using the control panel display:
1. Press the [

] button.

2. Touch the “Voice Commands” key.

Operating tips

How to say numbers

To get the best performance out of NISSAN
Voice Recognition, observe the following:

NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain
way to speak numbers in voice commands. Refer
to the following examples.

● Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as
possible. Close the windows to eliminate the
surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration
sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system
from recognizing the voice commands correctly.

General rule: Either “zero” or “oh” can be used for
“0”.
Phone numbers
Speak phone numbers according to the following
example. For 1-800-662-6200, say dial number
and then speak the phone number in any of the
following formats:

● Wait until a tone sounds before speaking a
command. Otherwise, the command will not
be received properly.
● Start speaking a command within 3.5 seconds after the tone sounds.
● Speak in a natural voice without pausing
between words.

LHA4373

SYSTEM FEATURES
NISSAN Voice Recognition can activate the following systems:
● Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
● Navigation
● Audio

● “one eight oh oh six six two six two oh oh”
● “one eight hundred six six two six two oh oh”
● “one eight zero zero six six two six two oh oh”
For the best voice recognition phone dialing results, say phone numbers as single digits. Also,
full numbers can only be spoken for “800”. For
example, you cannot say 555-6000 as “five five
five six thousand”.

● Information
● My Apps
● Help
For additional information, refer to the separate
Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-105

BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE
PHONE SYSTEM VOICE
COMMANDS
To access the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System voice commands:
1. Press the

button.

2. Say “Call” and then a name in the vehicle
phonebook to call that entry. Otherwise, say
“Phone” to access various phone commands.
If the Bluetooth® has been set to “Off”, the
system announces: “Bluetooth® is off. Would
you like to turn Bluetooth® on?”
If no phone is connected to the system and the
vehicle is stationary, the system announces:
“There is no phone connected. Would you like to
connect a phone now?” Say “Yes” to connect a
phone. All further Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System voice commands are only available if a
phone is connected.
If a phone is connected and Bluetooth® is set to
“On”, the following voice commands are available:
● Call (a name)
Speak the name of the contact in which you
are trying to call. System will confirm correct
contact. Say “Dial” to initiate dialing.

● Dial Number
Allows for up to 24 digits to be dialed. After
the number is entered, say “Dial” to initiate
dialing. Say “Correction” to correct the number entered. Say “Go Back” to return to the
main menu.
● List Phonebook
Starting with the first alphabetical entry in
the vehicle phonebook, the system prompts
for an additional command. Say “Dial” to call
the number of the phonebook entry. Say
“Send Text” to send a text message to the
number of the phonebook entry. Say “Next
Entry” to skip to the next alphabetical entry in
the vehicle phonebook, where the same options will then be available.
● Recent Calls
The system prompts for an additional command. Say “Missed Calls”, “Incoming Calls”
or “Outgoing Calls” to display a list of such
calls on the screen.
Speak the number of the entry displayed on
the screen to dial that number or say “Next
Page” to view entries on the next page (if
available).
● Redial
Redials the last called number.

4-106 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

● Read Text (if so equipped)
Reads an incoming text message. For more
information about text messaging with the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System, refer to“Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation System” in this section.
● Send Text (if so equipped)
Sends a text message. For more information
about text messaging with the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System, refer to
“Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
with Navigation System” in this section.
● Select Phone
The system replies “Please use manual controls to continue”. Use manual controls to
change the active phone from among the
listed phones connected to the vehicle.
● Siri (if so equipped)
For more information about the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System, refer to “Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation System” in this section.

NAVIGATION SYSTEM VOICE
COMMANDS
The following voice commands are available for
the Navigation System:
● Street Address (address)
● Points of Interest (name)
● POI by Category
● Home
● Address Book
● Previous Destinations
● Enter Address in Steps
● Cancel Route
For additional information, refer to the separate
Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

AUDIO SYSTEM VOICE
COMMANDS
To access the audio system voice commands:
1. Press the

button.

2. Say “Audio”
3. Speak a command from the following available commands:

● Tune AM (number)
Allows user to tune directly to a desired AM
frequency
● Tune FM (number)
Allows user to tune directly to a desired FM
frequency
● SXM channel (number)
Allows user to tune directly to a desired
SXM station (if so equipped)
● CD Track (number)
Allows user to select track to be played
● Play Song (name)
Allows user to select song name to be
played
● Play Artist (name)
Allows user to select artist to be played
● Play Album (name)
Allows user to select album name to be
played
For additional information about the audio system, refer to “Audio system” in this section.

INFORMATION VOICE COMMANDS
The following voice commands are available for
the information functions of the Navigation System:
● Traffic
● Fuel Prices
● Stocks
● Sports
● Movie Listings
● Current Weather
● Weather Map
● 5 — day Forecast
● 6 — hour Forecast
For additional information about these commands, refer to the separate Navigation System
Owner’s Manual.

MY APPS VOICE COMMANDS
Many Apps can be accessed using this voice
command. For additional information, refer to
“NissanConnectSM Mobile Apps” in this section.

● Play (AM, FM, etc.)
Allows user to select radio band

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-107

HELP VOICE COMMANDS

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

The following voice commands can be spoken to
have the system provide instructions and tips for
using the NISSAN Voice Recognition System.

The system should respond correctly to all voice
commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, follow the solutions given in this guide
for the appropriate error. Where the solutions are
listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting
with number one, until the problem is resolved.

● List Commands
● What Can I Say?
● General Help
● Quit
● Exit
Symptom/error message
The system responds “Command Not
Recognized” or the system fails to recognize the command correctly.

Solution
1. Ensure that the command format is valid. Use the “List Commands” or “What Can I Say?” command under the “Help” menu.
2. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level.
3. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, with the windows open or the defroster on).

NOTE:
If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized.
4. If optional words of the command have been omitted, then the command should be tried with these in place.

4-108 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Three-way catalyst. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). . . . . . . . . . 5-5
On-pavement and off-road driving
precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Avoiding collision and rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Off-road recovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Rapid air pressure loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Driving safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Ignition switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . 5-13
Key positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Push-Button Ignition Switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 5-14
Operating range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Push-button ignition switch positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Emergency engine shut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery discharge
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

Starting the engine (models without NISSAN
Intelligent Key® system). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Starting the engine (models with NISSAN
Intelligent Key® system). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Remote start (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . 5-20
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
SPORT mode switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
ECO mode switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Blind Spot Warning (BSW) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 5-26
BSW system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
How to enable/disable the BSW system . . . . . . . . . 5-29
BSW system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
BSW driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) (if so equipped) . . . . . 5-36
RCTA system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
How to enable/disable the RCTA system . . . . . . . . . 5-39
RCTA system limitations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43

Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
Precautions on cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
Cruise control operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (if so equipped). . . . . . 5-46
How to select the cruise control mode . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode. . . . . . . . . 5-48
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
limitations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57
System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63
Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control
mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
Forward Emergency Braking (FEB) (if so equipped) . . 5-69
FEB system operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70
Turning the FEB system on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-72
FEB system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-72
System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74
System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74
System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74

Forward Emergency Braking (FEB) with pedestrian
detection system (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76
FEB with pedestrian detection system
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77
Turning the FEB with pedestrian detection
system ON/OFF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-79
FEB with pedestrian detection system
limitations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-80
System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-82
System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-83
System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-83
Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-85
Fuel efficient driving tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-85
Increasing fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-87
All-wheel drive (AWD) (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-87
AWD Lock Switch Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-88
Parking/parking on hills. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-90
Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-91
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-92
Brake precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-92
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-92
Brake assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-93
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-94

Brake force distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-95
Chassis Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-96
Active trace control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-96
Active engine brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-97
Active ride control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-98
Hill start assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-99
Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-100
Freeing a frozen door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-100

Antifreeze. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-100
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-100
Draining of coolant water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-100
Tire equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-101
Special winter equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-101
Driving on snow or ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-101
Engine block heater (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . .5-101

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING
AND DRIVING
WARNING
● Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assistance
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets
should also not be left alone. They
could accidentally injure themselves or
others through inadvertent operation of
the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,
temperatures in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to cause
severe or possibly fatal injuries to
people or animals.
● Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding or
shifting. Do not place cargo higher than
the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause
personal injury.
● To avoid raising the center of gravity
excessively, do not exceed the rated
capacity of the roof rack (if so equipped)
and evenly distribute the load.

EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)
WARNING
● Do not breathe exhaust gases; they
contain colorless and odorless carbon
monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can cause unconsciousness or
death.
● If you suspect that exhaust fumes are
entering the vehicle, drive with all windows fully open, and have the vehicle
inspected immediately.
● Do not run the engine in closed spaces
such as a garage.
● Do not park the vehicle with the engine
running for any extended length of time.
● Keep the rear vent windows, liftgates,
doors and trunk lids (if so equipped)
closed while driving, otherwise exhaust
gases could be drawn into the passenger compartment. If you must drive with
one of these open, follow these
precautions:
1. Open all the windows.
air recirculation but2. Set the
ton to off and the fan control dial to
high to circulate the air.

5-4 Starting and driving

● If electrical wiring or other cable connections must pass to a trailer through
the seal on the liftgate or the body,
follow the manufacturer’s recommendation to prevent carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle.
● The exhaust system and body should be
inspected by a qualified mechanic
whenever:
a. The vehicle is raised for service.
b. You suspect that exhaust fumes are
entering
into
the
passenger
compartment.
c. You notice a change in the sound of
the exhaust system.
d. You have had an accident involving
damage to the exhaust system, underbody, or rear of the vehicle.

THREE-WAY CATALYST
The three-way catalyst is an emission control
device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust
gases in the three-way catalyst are burned at
high temperatures to help reduce pollutants.

WARNING
● The exhaust gas and the exhaust system are very hot. Keep people, animals
or flammable materials away from the
exhaust system components.
● Do not stop or park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry grass,
waste paper or rags. They may ignite
and cause a fire.

CAUTION
● Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits
from leaded gasoline will seriously reduce the three-way catalyst’s ability to
help reduce exhaust pollutants.
● Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunctions in the ignition, fuel injection, or
electrical systems can cause over rich
fuel flow into the three-way catalyst,
causing it to overheat. Do not keep driving if the engine misfires, or if noticeable loss of performance or other unusual
operating
conditions
are
detected. Have the vehicle inspected
promptly. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

● Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel
level. Running out of fuel could cause
the engine to misfire, damaging the
three-way catalyst.

heat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.

● Do not race the engine while warming it
up.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.

● Do not push or tow your vehicle to start
the engine.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS)
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by
the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has
tires of a different size than the size indicated on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label,
you should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale
when one or more of your tires is significantly
under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and
check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to over-

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the
system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire
pressure telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be able to detect
or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons,
including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly. Always
check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to

Starting and driving 5-5

ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
Additional information:
● Since the spare tire is not equipped with the
TPMS, the TPMS does not monitor the tire
pressure of the spare tire.
● The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle
is driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h).
Also, this system may not detect a sudden
drop in tire pressure (for example a flat tire
while driving).
● The low tire pressure warning light does not
automatically turn off when the tire pressure
is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the
recommended pressure, the vehicle must be
driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h) to
activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire
pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure
gauge to check the tire pressure.
● The “Tire Pressure Low Add Air” warning
appears each time the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position as long as the low
tire pressure warning light remains illuminated.

5-6 Starting and driving

● The “Tire Pressure Low Add Air” warning
appears in the vehicle information display
when the low tire pressure warning light is
illuminated and low tire pressure is detected.
The “Tire Pressure Low Add Air” warning
turns off when the low tire pressure warning
light turns off.
● The “Tire Pressure Low Add Air” warning
does not appear if the low tire pressure
warning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS
malfunction.
● Tire pressure rises and falls depending on
the heat caused by the vehicle’s operation
and the outside temperature. Do not reduce
the tire pressure after driving because the
tire pressure rises after driving. Low outside
temperature can lower the temperature of
the air inside the tire which can cause a
lower tire inflation pressure. This may cause
the low tire pressure warning light to illuminate. If the warning light illuminates, check
the tire pressure for all four tires.
● The Tire and Loading Information label (also
referred to as the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label) is located in the
driver’s door opening.

● You can also check the pressure of all tires
(except the spare tire) on the vehicle information display screen. The order of the tire
pressure figures displayed on the screen
corresponds with the actual order of the tire
position.
For additional information, refer to “Low tire pressure warning light” in the “Instruments and controls” section, “Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)” in the “In case of emergency” section of
this manual.

WARNING
● Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those who
use a pacemaker should contact the
electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before
use.

● If the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates while driving, avoid sudden
steering maneuvers or abrupt braking,
reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road
to a safe location and stop the vehicle
as soon as possible. Driving with underinflated tires may permanently damage
the tires and increase the likelihood of
tire failure. Serious vehicle damage
could occur and may lead to an accident
and could result in serious personal injury. Check the tire pressure for all four
tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the
recommended COLD tire pressure
shown on the Tire and Loading Information label to turn the low tire pressure
warning light OFF. If you have a flat tire,
replace it with a spare tire as soon as
possible. (For additional information,
refer to “Flat tire” in the “In case of
emergency” section for changing a flat
tire.)

CAUTION
● The TPMS may not function properly
when the wheels are equipped with tire
chains or the wheels are buried in snow.

● Do not place metalized film or any
metal parts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. This may cause poor reception of
the signals from the tire pressure sensors, and the TPMS will not function
properly.
Some devices and transmitters may temporarily
interfere with the operation of the TPMS and
cause the low tire pressure warning light to illuminate.
Some examples are:
– Facilities or electric devices using similar radio
frequencies are near the vehicle.
– If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is
being used in or near the vehicle.
– If a computer (or similar equipment) or a
DC/AC converter is being used in or near the
vehicle.
Low tire pressure warning light may illuminate in
the following cases.
● If the vehicle equipped with a wheel and tire
without TPMS.
● If the TPMS has been replaced and the ID
has not been registered.
● If the wheel is not originally specified by
NISSAN.

Starting and driving 5-7

FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may
not cause harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modification not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For Canada:
This device complies with Industry Canada
license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference, including interference that
may cause undesired operation of the device.

TPMS with Easy Fill Tire Alert
When adding air to an under-inflated tire, the
TPMS with Easy Fill Tire Alert provides visual and

5-8 Starting and driving

audible signals outside the vehicle to help you
inflate the tires to the recommended COLD tire
pressure.
Vehicle set-up

● If the hazard indicator does not flash
within approximately 15 seconds after
starting to inflate the tire, it indicates that
the Easy Fill Tire Alert is not operating.

1. Park the vehicle in a safe and level place.

● The TPMS will not activate the Easy Fill
Tire Alert under the following conditions:

2. Apply the parking brake and place the shift
lever to the P (Park) position.

– If there is interference from an external
device or transmitter.

3. Place the ignition switch to the ON position.
Do not start the engine.

– The air pressure from the inflation device
is not sufficient to inflate the tire.

Operation
1. Add air to the tire.
2. After a few seconds, the hazard indicators
will start flashing.
3. When the designated pressure is reached,
the horn beeps once and the hazard indicators stop flashing.
4. Perform the above steps for each tire.
● If the tire is over-inflated more than approximately 4 psi (30 kPa), the horn
beeps and the hazard indicators flash
three times. To correct the pressure, push
the core of the valve stem on the tire
briefly to release pressure. When the
pressure reaches the designated pressure, the horn beeps once.

– There is a malfunction in the TPMS system.
– There is a malfunction in the horn or hazard indicators.
– The identification code of the tires pressure sensor is not registered to the system.
– The battery of the tire pressure sensor is
low.
● If the Easy Fill Tire Alert does not operate
due to TPMS interference, move the vehicle about 3 ft (1 m) backward or forward
and try again.
If the Easy Fill Tire Alert is not working, use a tire
pressure gauge.

ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD
DRIVING PRECAUTIONS
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher
rollover rate than other types of vehicles.
They have higher ground clearance than passenger cars to make them capable of performing in a
variety of on-pavement and off-road applications.
This gives them a higher center of gravity than
ordinary vehicles. An advantage of higher ground
clearance is a better view of the road, allowing
you to anticipate problems. However, they are not
designed for cornering at the same speeds as
conventional 2-wheel drive vehicles any more
than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions. If at
all possible, avoid sharp turns at high speeds. As
with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate
this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control
or vehicle rollover. In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more likely to die than a
person wearing a seat belt.
For additional information, refer to “Driving safety
precautions” in this section.

AVOIDING COLLISION AND
ROLLOVER
WARNING
Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe
and prudent manner may result in loss of
control or an accident.
Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey
all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed,
high speed cornering, or sudden steering maneuvers, because these driving practices could
cause you to lose control of your vehicle.
As with any vehicle, loss of control could
result in a collision with other vehicles or
objects or cause the vehicle to roll over,
particularly if the loss of control causes the
vehicle to slide sideways.

significantly more likely to be injured or
killed than a person properly wearing a
seat belt.

OFF-ROAD RECOVERY
While driving, the right side or left side wheels
may unintentionally leave the road surface. If this
occurs, maintain control of the vehicle by following the procedure below. Please note that this
procedure is only a general guide. The vehicle
must be driven as appropriate based on the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.
1. Remain calm and do not overreact.
2. Do not apply the brakes.
3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel
with both hands and try to hold a straight
course.

Be attentive at all times, and avoid driving when
tired. Never drive when under the influence of
alcohol or drugs (including prescription or overthe-counter drugs which may cause drowsiness). Always wear your seat belt as outlined in
the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and supplemental
restraint system” section of this manual, and also
instruct your passengers to do so.

4. When appropriate, slowly release the accelerator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.

Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in collisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an
unbelted or improperly belted person is

6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn the
steering wheel until both tires return to the

5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the vehicle to follow the road while vehicle speed
is reduced. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle back onto the road surface until vehicle
speed is reduced.

Starting and driving 5-9

road surface. When all tires are on the road
surface, steer the vehicle to stay in the appropriate driving lane.
● If you decide that it is not safe to return the
vehicle to the road surface based on vehicle,
road or traffic conditions, gradually slow the
vehicle to a stop in a safe place off the road.

RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS
Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can occur
if the tire is punctured or is damaged due to
hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air pressure loss
can also be caused by driving on under-inflated
tires.
Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handling
and stability of the vehicle, especially at highway
speeds.
Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by maintaining the correct air pressure and visually inspect
the tires for wear and damage. For additional
information, refer to “Wheels and tires” in the
“Do-it-yourself” section of this manual. If a tire
rapidly loses air pressure or “blows-out” while
driving, maintain control of the vehicle by following the procedure below. Please note that this
procedure is only a general guide. The vehicle
must be driven as appropriate based on the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.

5-10 Starting and driving

WARNING
The following actions can increase the
chance of losing control of the vehicle if
there is a sudden loss of tire air pressure.
Losing control of the vehicle may cause a
collision and result in personal injury.
● The vehicle generally moves or pulls in
the direction of the flat tire.
● Do not rapidly apply the brakes.
● Do not rapidly release the accelerator
pedal.
● Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel.
1. Remain calm and do not overreact.
2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel
with both hands and try to hold a straight
course.
3. When appropriate, slowly release the accelerator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.
4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe location
off the road and away from traffic if possible.
5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradually
stop the vehicle.
6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and
contact a roadside emergency service to
change the tire. For additional information,

refer to “Changing a flat tire” in the “In case
of emergency” section of this manual.

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND
DRIVING
WARNING
Never drive under the influence of alcohol
or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream reduces coordination, delays reaction time
and impairs judgement. Driving after
drinking alcohol increases the likelihood
of being involved in an accident injuring
yourself and others. Additionally, if you
are injured in an accident, alcohol can
increase the severity of the injury.
NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However,
you must choose not to drive under the influence
of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are
injured or killed in alcohol-related collisions. Although the local laws vary on what is considered
to be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol
affects all people differently and most people
underestimate the effects of alcohol.
Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! That is
true for drugs (over-the-counter, prescription)
and illegal drugs, too. Don’t drive if your ability to
operate your vehicle is impaired by alcohol,
drugs, or some other physical condition.

DRIVING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Your NISSAN is designed for both normal and
off-road use. However, avoid driving in deep water or mud as your NISSAN is mainly designed for
leisure use, unlike a conventional off-road vehicle.
Remember that 2-wheel drive models are less
capable than all-wheel drive models for rough
road driving and extrication when stuck in deep
snow or mud, or the like.
Please observe the following precautions:

WARNING
● Spinning the front wheels on slippery
surface may cause the AWD warning
message to display and the AWD system to automatically switch from the
AWD to the 2WD mode. This could reduce the traction. Be especially careful
when towing a trailer. (AWD models)
● Drive carefully when off the road and
avoid dangerous areas. Every person
who drives or rides in this vehicle
should be seated with their seat belt
fastened. This will keep you and your
passengers in position when driving
over rough terrain.

● Do not drive across steep slopes. Instead drive either straight up or straight
down the slopes. Off-road vehicles can
tip over sideways much more easily
than they can forward or backward.

● Unsecured cargo can be thrown around
when driving over rough terrain. Properly secure all cargo so it will not be
thrown forward and cause injury to you
or your passengers.

● Many hills are too steep for any vehicle.
If you drive up them, you may stall. If
you drive down them, you may not be
able to control your speed. If you drive
across them, you may roll over.

● To avoid raising the center of gravity
excessively, do not exceed the rated
capacity of the roof rack (if so equipped)
and evenly distribute the load.

● Do not shift gears while driving on
downhill grades as this could cause
loss of control of the vehicle.
● Stay alert when driving to the top of a
hill. At the top there could be a drop-off
or other hazard that could cause an
accident.
● If your engine stalls or you cannot make
it to the top of a steep hill, never attempt to turn around. Your vehicle could
tip or roll over. Always back straight
down in R (Reverse) gear and apply
brakes to control your speed.
● Heavy braking going down a hill could
cause your brakes to overheat and fade,
resulting in loss of control and an accident. Apply brakes lightly and use a low
gear to control your speed.

● Secure heavy loads in the cargo area as
far forward and as low as possible. Do
not equip the vehicle with tires larger
than specified in this manual. This could
cause your vehicle to roll over.
● Do not grip the inside or spokes of the
steering wheel when driving off-road.
The steering wheel could move suddenly and injure your hands. Instead
drive with your fingers and thumbs on
the outside of the rim.
● Before operating the vehicle, ensure
that the driver and all passengers have
their seat belts fastened.
● Always drive with the floor mats in place
as the floor may become hot.

Starting and driving 5-11

● Lower your speed when encountering
strong crosswinds. With a higher center
of gravity, your NISSAN is more affected
by strong side winds. Slower speeds
ensure better vehicle control.
● Do not drive beyond the performance
capability of the tires, even with AWD
engaged.
● For AWD equipped vehicles, do not attempt to raise two wheels off the
ground and shift the transmission to
any drive or reverse position with the
engine running. Doing so may result in
drivetrain damage or unexpected vehicle movement which could result in
serious vehicle damage or personal
injury.

● Do not attempt to test an AWD
equipped vehicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer (such as the dynamometers
used by some states for emissions testing), or similar equipment even if the
other two wheels are raised off the
ground. Make sure you inform test facility personnel that your vehicle is
equipped with AWD before it is placed
on a dynamometer. Using the wrong
test equipment may result in drivetrain
damage or unexpected vehicle movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury.
● When a wheel is off the ground due to
an unlevel surface, do not spin the
wheel excessively.
● Accelerating quickly, sharp steering
maneuvers or sudden braking may
cause loss of control.
● If at all possible, avoid sharp turning
maneuvers, particularly at high speeds.
Your NISSAN vehicle has a higher center of gravity than a passenger car. The
vehicle is not designed for cornering at
the same speeds as passenger cars.

5-12 Starting and driving

● Failure to operate this vehicle correctly
could result in loss of control and/or a
rollover accident.
● Always use tires of the same type, size,
brand, construction (bias, bias-belted,
or radial), and tread pattern on all four
wheels. Install tire chains on the front
wheels when driving on slippery roads
and drive carefully.
● Be sure to check the brakes immediately after driving in mud or water. For
additional information, refer to “Brake
system” in this section for “Wet
brakes”.
● Avoid parking your vehicle on steep
hills. If you get out of the vehicle and it
rolls forward, backward or sideways,
you could be injured.
● Whenever you drive off-road through
sand, mud or water as deep as the
wheel hub, more frequent maintenance
may be required. For additional information, refer to “Maintenance under severe operating conditions” in the “Maintenance and schedules” section of this
manual.

IGNITION SWITCH (if so equipped)
When the ignition switch cannot be turned to the
LOCK position:

WARNING
Never remove or turn the key to the LOCK
position while driving. The steering wheel
will lock (for models with a steering lock
mechanism). This may cause the driver to
lose control of the vehicle and could result
in serious vehicle damage or personal
injury.

1. Shift the shift lever to the P (Park) position.
2. Turn the ignition switch slightly in the ON
direction.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
4. Remove the key if it is inserted in the ignition
switch.

LIC2717

If the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position, the shift lever cannot be moved from the P
(Park) position.

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE
TRANSMISSION (CVT)

The shift lever can be moved if the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position and the
foot brake pedal is depressed.

The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition
switch cannot be turned to the LOCK position
until the shift lever is moved to the P (Park)
position.

KEY POSITIONS
LOCK: Normal parking position (0)
OFF: (Not used) (1)

● When moving the ignition switch to the
LOCK position, make sure the shift lever is in
the P (Park) position.

This position activates electrical accessories
such as the radio when the engine is not running.

● When removing the key from the ignition
switch, make sure the shift lever is in the P
(Park) position.

This position turns on the ignition system and the
electrical accessories.

ON: Normal operating position (2)

Starting and driving 5-13

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH (if
so equipped)
START: (3)
This position starts the engine. As soon as the
engine has started, release the key. It automatically returns to the ON position.

5-14 Starting and driving

4. Restart the engine while holding the device
(which may have caused the interference)
separate from the registered key.
If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN recommends placing the registered key on a separate key ring to avoid interference from other
devices.

WARNING
Do not operate the push-button ignition
switch while driving the vehicle except in
an emergency. (The engine will stop when
the ignition switch is pushed 3 consecutive times in quick succession or the ignition switch is pushed and held for more
than 2 seconds.) If the engine stops while
the vehicle is being driven, this could lead
to a crash and serious injury.

When the ignition switch cannot be pushed toward the OFF position, proceed as follows:
1. Move the shift lever into the P (Park) position.
2. Push the ignition switch. The ignition switch
position will change to the ON position.
3. Push the ignition switch again to the OFF
position.
The shift lever can be moved from the P
(Park) position if the ignition switch is in
the ON position and the brake pedal is
depressed.
LSD2184

When the ignition switch is pushed without depressing the brake pedal, the ignition switch will
illuminate.
Push the ignition switch center:
● Once to change to ON.
● Two times to change to OFF.
The ignition switch will automatically return to the
LOCK position when any door is either opened or
closed with the switch in the OFF position.
The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition
switch position cannot be switched to OFF until
the shift lever is moved to the P (Park) position.

If the battery of the vehicle is discharged,
the push-button ignition switch cannot be
moved from the LOCK position.
Some indicators and warnings for operation are
displayed on the vehicle information display. For
additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and controls”
section of this manual.

LSD2020

OPERATING RANGE
The Intelligent Key functions can only be used
when the Intelligent Key is within the specified
operating range.
When the Intelligent Key battery is almost discharged or strong radio waves are present near
the operating location, the Intelligent Key system’s operating range becomes narrower and
may not function properly.
If the Intelligent Key is within the operating range,
it is possible for anyone, even someone who does
not carry the Intelligent Key, to push the ignition
switch to start the engine.

Starting and driving 5-15

The operating range of the engine start function
1 .
is inside of the vehicle 䊊
● The luggage area is not included in the operating range, but the Intelligent Key may
function.

ON has a battery saver feature that will turn the
ignition switch to the OFF position, if the vehicle
is not running, after some time under the following conditions:
● All doors are closed.
● Shift lever is in P (Park).

● If the Intelligent Key is placed on the instrument panel, inside the glove box, storage bin
or door pocket, the Intelligent Key may not
function.

The battery saver feature will be cancelled if any
of the following occur:

● If the Intelligent Key is placed near the door
or window outside the vehicle, the Intelligent
Key may function.

● Shift lever is moved out of the P (Park)
position.

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
POSITIONS
LOCK (Normal parking position):
The ignition switch can only be locked in this
position.
The ignition switch will lock when any door is
opened or closed with the ignition switched off.
ON (Normal operating position):
This position turns on the ignition system and
electrical accessories.

5-16 Starting and driving

● Any door is opened.

● Ignition switch changes position.

CAUTION
Do not leave the vehicle with the ignition
switch in the ON position when the engine
is not running for an extended period. This
can discharge the battery.
OFF:
The ignition switch is in the OFF position when
the engine is turned off using the ignition switch.
No lights will illuminate on the ignition switch.

AUTO ACC:
With the vehicle in the P (Park) position, the
Intelligent key with you and the ignition placed
from ON to OFF, the radio can still be used for a
period of time, or until the driver’s door is opened.
After a period of time, functions such as radio,
navigation, and Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System may be restarted by pressing the
“POWER button/ VOLUME control knob”. For
additional information, refer to “Monitor, climate,
audio, phone and voice recognition systems” in
this manual or the key fob unlock button up to a
total of 30 minutes.

EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF
To shut off the engine in an emergency situation
while driving, perform the following procedure:
● Rapidly push the push-button ignition
switch three consecutive times in less than
1.5 seconds, or
● Push and hold the push-button ignition
switch for more than 2 seconds.

After step 3 is performed, when the ignition
switch is pushed without depressing the
brake pedal, the ignition switch position will
change to ON.
4. Push the ignition switch while depressing
the brake pedal within ten seconds after the
chime sounds. The engine will start.
NOTE:

SSD0860

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®
BATTERY DISCHARGE (if so
equipped)
If the battery of the NISSAN Intelligent Key® is
discharged, or environmental conditions interfere
with the Intelligent Key operation, start the engine
according to the following procedure:
1. Place the shift lever in the P (Park) position.
2. Firmly apply the foot brake.
3. Touch the ignition switch with the Intelligent
Key as illustrated. (A chime will sound.)

● When the ignition switch is pushed to the
ON position or the engine is started by the
above procedure, the Intelligent Key battery
discharge indicator appears in the vehicle
information display even when the Intelligent
Key is inside the vehicle. This is not a malfunction. To turn off the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator, touch the ignition
switch with the Intelligent Key again.
● If the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator appears, replace the battery as soon
as possible. For additional information, refer
to “Battery replacement” in the “Do-ityourself” section of this manual.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM
The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not
allow the engine to start without the use of the
registered key.
If the engine fails to start using a registered key
(for example, when interference is caused by
another registered key, an automated toll road
device or automatic payment device on the key
ring), restart the engine using the following procedure:
1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position
for approximately 5 seconds.
2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or
LOCK position, and wait approximately
10 seconds.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.
4. Restart the engine while holding the device
(which may have caused the interference)
separate from the registered key.
If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN recommends placing the registered key on a separate key ring to avoid interference from other
devices.

Starting and driving 5-17

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE

STARTING THE ENGINE (models
without NISSAN Intelligent Key®
system)

● Make sure the area around the vehicle is
clear.
● Check fluid levels such as engine oil, coolant, brake fluid, and windshield-washer fluid
as frequently as possible, or at least whenever you refuel.
● Check that all windows and lights are clean.
● Visually inspect tires for their appearance
and condition. Also check tires for proper
inflation.
● Check that all doors are closed.
● Position
seat
and
restraints/headrests.

adjust

head

● Adjust inside and outside mirrors.
● Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to
do likewise.
● Check the operation of warning lights when
the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. For additional information, refer to
“Warning lights, indicator lights and audible
reminders” in the “Instruments and controls”
section of this manual.

5-18 Starting and driving

1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral). P (Park) is recommended.
The shift lever cannot be moved out of
P (Park) and into any of the other gear
positions if the ignition key is turned to
the OFF position or if the key is removed from the ignition switch.
The starter is designed not to operate if
the shift lever is in any of the driving
positions.
3. Crank the engine with your foot off the
accelerator pedal by turning the ignition
key to START. Release the key when the
engine starts. If the engine starts, but fails to
run, repeat the above procedure.
● If the engine is very hard to start in extremely cold weather or when restarting,
depress the accelerator pedal a little (approximately 1/3 to the floor) and hold it
and then crank the engine. Release the
key and the accelerator pedal when the
engine starts.

● If the engine is very hard to start because
it is flooded, depress the accelerator
pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.
Crank the engine for five to six seconds.
After cranking the engine, release the accelerator pedal. Crank the engine with
your foot off the accelerator pedal by
turning the ignition key to START. Release
the key when the engine starts. If the
engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the
above procedure.

CAUTION
Do not operate the starter for more than
15 seconds at a time. If the engine does
not start, turn the key off and wait ten
seconds before cranking again, otherwise
the starter could be damaged.
4. Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 seconds after starting. Do not race the engine
while warming it up. Drive at moderate
speed for a short distance first, especially in
cold weather.

STARTING THE ENGINE (models with
NISSAN Intelligent Key® system)
NOTE:

1. Apply the parking brake.

Care should be taken to avoid situations
that can lead to potential battery discharge
and potential no-start conditions such as:

2. Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral). P (Park) is recommended.

1. Installation or extended use of electronic
accessories that consume battery power
when the engine is not running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD players, etc.)
2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or only
driven short distances. In these cases, the
battery may need to be charged to maintain
battery health.

The starter is designed not to operate if
the shift lever is in any of the driving
positions.
3. Push the ignition switch to the ON position.
Depress the brake pedal and push the ignition switch to start the engine.
To start the engine immediately, push and
release the ignition switch while depressing
the brake pedal with the ignition switch in
any position.
● If the engine is very hard to start in extremely cold weather or when restarting,
depress the accelerator pedal a little (approximately 1/3 to the floor) and while
holding, crank the engine. Release the
accelerator pedal when the engine starts.
● If the engine is very hard to start because
it is flooded, depress the accelerator
pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.
Push the ignition switch to the ON position to start cranking the engine. After five
or six seconds, stop cranking by pushing
the ignition switch to LOCK. After cranking the engine, release the accelerator
pedal. Crank the engine with your foot off

the accelerator pedal by depressing the
brake pedal and pushing the push-button
ignition switch to start the engine. If the
engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the
above procedure.

CAUTION
Do not operate the starter for more than
15 seconds at a time. If the engine does
not start, push the ignition switch to the
OFF position and wait 10 seconds before
cranking again, otherwise the starter
could be damaged.
4. Warm-up
Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 seconds after starting. Do not race the engine
while warming it up. Drive at moderate
speed for a short distance first, especially in
cold weather. In cold weather, keep the engine running for a minimum of two to three
minutes before shutting it off. Starting and
stopping the engine over a short period of
time may make the vehicle more difficult to
start.
5. To stop the engine, shift the shift lever into
the P (Park) position and push the ignition
switch to the OFF position.

Starting and driving 5-19

DRIVING THE VEHICLE
NOTE:
Care should be taken to avoid situations
that can lead to potential battery discharge
and potential no-start conditions such as:
1. Installation or extended use of electronic
accessories that consume battery power
when the engine is not running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD players, etc.)
2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or only
driven short distances. In these cases, the
battery may need to be charged to maintain
battery health.

REMOTE START (if so equipped)
Vehicles started with the remote start require the
ignition switch to be placed in the ON position
before the shift lever can be moved from the P
(Park) position. To place the ignition switch to the
ON position, follow these steps:
1. Make sure that the Intelligent Key is on you.
2. Apply the brake.
3. Push the ignition switch once to the ON
position.
For additional information, refer to “NISSAN Intelligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks and
adjustments” section of this manual.

5-20 Starting and driving

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE
TRANSMISSION (CVT)
WARNING
● Do not depress the accelerator pedal
while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neutral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive), or (M)
Manual shift mode. Always depress the
brake pedal until shifting is completed.
Failure to do so could cause you to lose
control and have an accident.
● Cold engine idle speed is high, so use
caution when shifting into a forward or
reverse gear before the engine has
warmed up.
● Do not downshift abruptly on slippery
roads. this may cause a loss of control.
● Never shift to either the P (Park) or R
(Reverse) position while the vehicle is
moving forward and P (Park) or D
(Drive) position while the vehicle is reversing. This could cause an accident or
damage the transmission.

CAUTION
● To avoid possible damage to your vehicle; when stopping the vehicle on an
uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by
depressing the accelerator pedal. The
foot brake should be used for this
purpose.
● Except in an emergency, do not shift to
the N (Neutral) position while driving.
Coasting with the transmission in the N
(Neutral) position may cause serious
damage to the transmission.
The CVT in your vehicle is electronically controlled to produce maximum power and smooth
operation.
The recommended operating procedures for this
transmission are shown on the following pages.
Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle
performance and driving enjoyment.
Engine power may be automatically reduced to protect the CVT if the engine
speed increases quickly when driving on
slippery roads or while being tested on
some dynamometers.

Starting the vehicle
1. After starting the engine, fully depress the
foot brake pedal before moving the shift
lever out of the P (Park) position.
This CVT is designed so that the foot
brake pedal must be depressed before
shifting from P (Park) to any driving
position while the ignition switch is in
the ON position.
The shift lever cannot be moved out of
the P (Park) position and into any of
the other positions if the ignition
switch is placed in the LOCK or OFF
position.
2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and
move the shift lever to a driving position.
3. Release the parking brake and foot brake
pedal, and then gradually start the vehicle in
motion.

WARNING
● Do not depress the accelerator pedal
while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neutral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or L (Low)
position. Always depress the brake
pedal until shifting is completed. Failure to do so could cause you to lose
control and have an accident.

● Cold engine idle speed is high, so use
caution when shifting into a forward or
reverse gear before the engine has
warmed up.
● Do not downshift abruptly on slippery
roads. This may cause a loss of control.
● Never shift to either the P (Park) or R
(Reverse) position while vehicle is moving forward and P (Park) or D (Drive)
position while the vehicle is reversing.
This could cause an accident or damage
the transmission.
LSD2691

CAUTION
● To avoid possible damage to your vehicle, when stopping the vehicle on an
uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by
depressing the accelerator pedal. The
foot brake should be used for this
purpose.
● Except in an emergency, do not shift to
the N (Neutral) position while driving.
Coasting with the transmission in the N
(Neutral) position may cause serious
damage to the transmission.

Shifting
After starting the engine, fully depress the brake
pedal, push and press the shift lever button and
move the shift lever from the P (Park) position to
any of the desired shift positions.

WARNING
Apply the parking brake if the shift lever is
in any position while the engine is not
running. Failure to do so could cause the
vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away
and result in serious personal injury or
property damage.

Starting and driving 5-21

CAUTION
Use the P (Park) or R (Reverse) position
only when the vehicle is completely
stopped.
P (Park)

CAUTION
To prevent transmission damage, use the
P (Park) position only when the vehicle is
completely stopped
Use the P (Park) shift lever position when the
vehicle is parked or when starting the engine.
Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped.
The brake pedal must be depressed and
the shift lever button pushed in to move the
shift lever from N (Neutral) or any drive
position to P (Park). Apply the parking brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake
first, then move the shift lever into the P (Park)
position.
R (Reverse)

CAUTION
To prevent transmission damage, use the
R (Reverse) position only when the vehicle
is completely stopped.

5-22 Starting and driving

Use the R (Reverse) position to back up. Make
sure the vehicle is completely stopped before
selecting the R (Reverse) position. The brake
pedal must be depressed and the shift lever
button pushed in to move the shift lever
from P (Park), N (Neutral) or any drive position to R (Reverse).

displayed on the position indicator in the meter.
When shifting the shift lever to the manual shift
gate, the position indicator displays 1 (1st) up to
7 (7th) depending on vehicle speed.

N (Neutral)

7 (7th)

Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. The
engine can be started in this position. You may
shift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled engine
while the vehicle is moving.

Use this position for all normal forward driving at
highway speeds.

D (Drive)
Use this position for all normal forward driving.

Manual shift mode
When the shift lever is in the manual shift gate,
the transmission is ready for the manual shift
mode. Shift ranges can be selected manually by
moving the shift lever up or down. To cancel
manual shift mode, return the shift lever to the D
(Drive) position. The transmission returns to automatic driving mode.
When the shift lever is shifted from D (Drive) to
the manual shift gate with the vehicle stopped or
while driving, the transmission enters the manual
shift mode. Shift ranges can be selected manually. In the manual shift mode, the shift range is

Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows:
1⇔ 2 ⇔ 3 ⇔ 4 ⇔ 5 ⇔ 6 ⇔ 7

6 (6th) and 5 (5th)
Use this position when driving up long slopes, or
for engine braking when driving down long
slopes.
4 (4th), 3 (3rd) and 2 (2nd)
Use these positions for hill climbing or engine
braking on downhill grades.
1 (1st)
Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly
or when driving slowly, or for maximum engine
braking on steep downhill grades.
● Remember not to drive at high speeds for
extended periods of time in lower than 7th
gear. This reduces fuel economy.

When shifting up
Move the shift lever to the + (up) side. (Shifts to
higher range.)
When shifting down
Move the shift lever to the ⫺ (down) side. (Shifts
to lower range.)
● The transmission will automatically downshift the gears. (For example, if you select the
3rd range, the transmission will shift down
between the 3rd and 1st gears.)
● Moving the shift lever rapidly to the same
side twice will shift the ranges in succession.
When canceling the manual shift mode
Return the shift lever to the D (Drive) position to
return the transmission to the normal driving
mode.
● In the manual shift mode, the transmission may not shift to the selected gear.
This helps maintain driving performance and reduces the chance of vehicle damage or loss of control.
● When this situation occurs, the CVT
position indicator light will blink and
the chime will sound.

● In the manual shift mode, the transmission may shift up automatically to a
higher range than selected if the engine speed is too high. When the vehicle speed decreases, the transmission automatically shifts down and
shifts to 1st gear before the vehicle
comes to a stop.
● CVT operation is limited to automatic drive
mode when CVT fluid temperature is extremely low even if manual shift mode is
selected. This is not a malfunction. When
CVT fluid warms up, manual mode can be
selected.
● When the CVT fluid temperature is high, the
shift range may upshift in lower rpm than
usual. This is not a malfunction.

LSD2179

Shift lock release
If the battery charge is low or discharged, the
shift lever may not be moved from the P (Park)
position even with the brake pedal depressed
and the shift lever button pushed. To move the
shift lever, perform the following procedure:
1. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or
LOCK position.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Remove the shift lock release cover using a
suitable tool.
4. Push down the shift lock release using a
suitable tool.

Starting and driving 5-23

5. Press the shift lever button and move the
shift lever to the N (Neutral) position while
holding down the shift lock release. The
vehicle may be moved to the desired location. Replace the removed shift lock release
cover after the operation. If the shift lever
cannot be moved out of the P (Park) position, have the CVT system checked as soon
as possible. It is recommended that you visit
a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING
If the shift lever cannot be moved from the
P (Park) position while the engine is running and the brake pedal is depressed, the
stop lights may not work. Malfunctioning
stop lights could cause an accident injuring yourself and others.

Accelerator downshift
— in D (Drive) position —
For passing or hill climbing, depress the accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmission down into a lower gear, depending on the
vehicle speed.

5-24 Starting and driving

High fluid temperature protection
mode
This transmission has a high fluid temperature
protection mode. If the fluid temperature becomes too high (for example, when climbing
steep grades in high temperatures with heavy
loads, such as when towing a trailer), engine
power and, under some conditions, vehicle
speed will be decreased automatically to reduce
the chance of transmission damage. Vehicle
speed can be controlled with the accelerator
pedal, but the engine and vehicle speed may be
limited.

Fail-safe
When the fail-safe operation occurs, the CVT will
not be shifted into the selected driving position.
If the vehicle is driven under extreme conditions, such as excessive wheel spinning
and subsequent hard braking, the fail-safe
system may be activated. The Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) may come on to indicate the fail-safe mode is activated. For
additional information, refer to “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.
This will occur even if all electrical circuits
are functioning properly. In this case, place
the ignition switch in the OFF position and

wait for 10 seconds. Then place the ignition
switch back in the ON position. The vehicle
should return to its normal operating condition. If it does not return to its normal
operating condition, have the transmission
checked and repaired, if necessary. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

WARNING
When the high fluid temperature protection mode or fail-safe operation occurs,
vehicle speed may be gradually reduced.
The reduced speed may be lower than
other traffic, which could increase the
chance of a collision. Be especially careful
when driving. If necessary, pull to the side
of the road at a safe place and allow the
transmission to return to normal operation, or have it repaired if necessary.

PARKING BRAKE

SPORT MODE SWITCH

WARNING
● Be sure the parking brake is fully released before driving. Failure to do so
can cause brake failure and lead to an
accident.
● Do not release the parking brake from
outside the vehicle.
● Do not use the shift lever in place of the
parking brake. When parking, be sure
the parking brake is fully engaged.
● To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and /or its systems, do not leave
children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in
your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm
day can quickly become high enough to
cause a significant risk of injury or
death to people and pets.

LSD0158

To engage: Firmly depress the parking brake.
To release:
1. Firmly apply the foot brake.
2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.
3. Firmly depress the parking brake pedal and it
will release.
4. Before driving, be sure the brake warning
light goes out.

LIC2417

The SPORT mode switch adjusts the engine and
transmission points to enhance performance.
Push the SPORT mode switch on the instrument
panel to activate. The SPORT mode indicator
light appears in the meter.
NOTE:
In the SPORT mode, fuel economy may be
reduced.

Starting and driving 5-25

ECO MODE SWITCH

BLIND SPOT WARNING (BSW) (if so
equipped)
The ECO mode will turn off automatically if a
malfunction occurs in the system.
Turn off the ECO mode or depress the accelerator pedal fully when:
● driving with a heavy load of passengers or
cargo in the vehicle
● driving on a steep uphill slope
● ECO mode may affect air conditioner performance
NOTE:
LIC2416

The ECO mode helps to enhance the fuel
economy by controlling the throttle sensitivity and
transmission points.
To turn on the ECO mode, push the ECO mode
switch. The ECO mode indicator light (on the
meter) will remain lit while the mode is active.
To turn off the ECO mode, push the ECO mode
switch again. The ECO mode indicator light (on
the meter) will turn off.
The ECO mode cannot be turned off while the
accelerator pedal is depressed, even if the ECO
mode switch is pushed to OFF. Release the
accelerator pedal to turn off the ECO mode.

5-26 Starting and driving

Selecting this drive mode will not necessarily improve fuel economy as many driving
factors influence its effectiveness.

WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the BSW system
could result in serious injury or death.
● The BSW system is not a replacement
for proper driving procedures and is not
designed to prevent contact with vehicles or objects. When changing lanes,
always use the side and rear mirrors
and turn and look in the direction your
vehicle will move to ensure it is safe to
change lanes. Never rely solely on the
BSW system.
The BSW system helps alert the driver of other
vehicles in adjacent lanes when changing lanes.

LSD2439

The BSW system uses radar sensors 䊊 installed near the rear bumper to detect other vehicles in an adjacent lane.
1

SSD1030

Detection zone
The radar sensors can detect vehicles on either
side of your vehicle within the detection zone
shown as illustrated. This detection zone starts
from the outside mirror of your vehicle and extends approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) behind the rear
bumper, and approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) sideways.

Starting and driving 5-27

1. Side BSW/RCTA Indicator Light

BSW SYSTEM OPERATION
The BSW system operates above approximately
20 mph (32 km/h).
If the radar sensors detect a vehicle in the detection zone, the side BSW/RCTA indicator light (1)
illuminates. If the turn signal is then activated, the
system chimes (twice), the side BSW/RCTA indicator light flashes, and the BSW/RCTA indicator illuminates (yellow) in the vehicle information
display. The side BSW/RCTA indicator light continues to flash until the detected vehicle leaves
the detection zone.
The side BSW/RCTA indicator light illuminates
for a few seconds when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position.
The brightness of the side BSW/RCTA indicator
light is adjusted automatically depending on the
brightness of the ambient light.
If a vehicle comes into the detection zone after
the driver activates the turn signal, then only the
side BSW/RCTA indicator light flashes and no
chime sounds. For additional information, refer to
“BSW driving situations” in this section.

LSD2734

5-28 Starting and driving

The BSW system automatically turns on every
time the engine is started, as long as it is activated using the settings menu on the vehicle
information display.

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE
BSW SYSTEM
Perform the following steps to enable or disable
the BSW system.
button until “Settings” dis1. Press the
plays in the vehicle information display and
button to
then press OK. Use the
select “Driver Assistance.” Then press the
OK button.
Use the button to select “Driving Aids,” then
press the OK button.
2. Select “Blind Spot” and press the OK button.
– To turn on the warning system, use the
OK button to check the box for “Warning.”

LSD2678

Starting and driving 5-29

NOTE:
When enabling/disabling the system, the
system will retain current settings even if
the engine is restarted.

BSW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for
the BSW system. Failure to operate the
vehicle in accordance with these system
limitations could result in serious injury or
death.
● The BSW system cannot detect all vehicles under all conditions.
● The radar sensors may not be able to
detect and activate BSW when certain
objects are present such as:
– Pedestrian, bicycles, animals.
– Vehicles such as motorcycles, low
height vehicles, or high ground clearance vehicles.
– Oncoming vehicles.
– Vehicles remaining in the detection
zone when you accelerate from a
stop.

5-30 Starting and driving

– A vehicle merging into an adjacent
lane at a speed approximately the
same as your vehicle.
– A vehicle approaching rapidly from
behind.
– A vehicle which your vehicle overtakes rapidly.
– A vehicle that passes through the detection zone quickly.
– When overtaking several vehicles in
a row, the vehicles after the first vehicle may not be detected if they are
traveling close together.
● The radar sensors’ detection zone is
designed based on a standard lane
width. When driving in a wider lane, the
radar sensors may not detect vehicles in
an adjacent lane. When driving in a narrow lane, the radar sensors may detect
vehicles driving two lanes away.
● The radar sensors are designed to ignore most stationary objects, however
objects such as guardrails, walls, foliage and parked vehicles may occasionally be detected. This is a normal operation condition.

● The following conditions may reduce
the ability of the radar to detect other
vehicles:
– Severe weather
– Road spray
– Ice/frost/snow
vehicle

build-up

the

– Dirt build-up on the vehicle
● Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or
apply additional paint near the radar
sensors. These conditions may reduce
the ability of the radar to detect other
vehicles.
● Excessive noise (for example, audio
system volume, open vehicle window)
will interfere with the chime sound, and
it may not be heard.

Another vehicle approaching from
behind
Illustration 1: The side indicator light illuminates if a vehicle enters the detection zone from
behind in an adjacent lane.

LSD2299

Illustration 1 – Approaching from behind

LSD2300

Indicator
on

Illustration 2 – Approaching from behind
Illustration 2: If the driver activates the turn
signal when another vehicle is in the detection
zone, then the system chimes (twice) and the
side indicator light flashes.

Indicator
off

NOTE:

BSW DRIVING SITUATIONS

Indicator
flashing

● The radar sensors may not detect vehicles
which are approaching rapidly from behind.
● If the driver activates the turn signal before a
vehicle enters the detection zone, the side
indicator light will flash but no chime will
sound when the other vehicle is detected.

Starting and driving 5-31

● If the driver activates the turn signal before a
vehicle enters the detection zone, the side
indicator light will flash but no chime will
sound when the other vehicle is detected. .

LSD2302

Illustration 3 – Overtaking another vehicle

Overtaking another vehicle
Illustration 3: The side indicator light illuminates if you overtake a vehicle and that vehicle
stays in the detection zone for approximately
2 seconds.

LSD2303

Illustration 4 – Overtaking another vehicle
Illustration 4: If the driver activates the turn
signal while another vehicle is in the detection
zone, then the system chimes (twice) and the
side indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
● When overtaking several vehicles in a row,
the vehicles after the first vehicle may not be
detected if they are traveling close together.
● The radar sensors may not detect slower
moving vehicles if they are passed quickly.

5-32 Starting and driving

● The radar sensors may not detect a vehicle
which is traveling at about the same speed
as your vehicle when it enters the detection
zone.

LSD2305

Illustration 5 – Entering from the side

Entering from the side
Illustration 5:The side indicator light illuminates
if a vehicle enters the detection zone from either
side.

LSD2308

Illustration 6 – Entering from the side
Illustration 6:If the driver activates the turn signal while another vehicle is in the detection zone,
then the system chimes (twice) and the side
indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
● If the driver activates the turn signal before a
vehicle enters the detection zone, the side
indicator light will flash but no chime will
sound when the other vehicle is detected.

Starting and driving 5-33

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE
When radar blockage is detected, the system will
be deactivated automatically. The “Side Radar
Obstruction” warning message will appear in the
vehicle information display.
The system is not available until the conditions no
longer exist.
The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary
ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist
or fog. The blocked condition may also be caused
by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing
the radar sensors.
NOTE:
If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA
system (if so equipped) will also stop working.
Action to take:
When the above conditions no longer exist, the
system will resume automatically.

Malfunction

LSD2735

5-34 Starting and driving

If the BSW system malfunctions, it will turn off
automatically. The system malfunction warning
message will appear in the vehicle information
display.

NOTE:

Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply additional
paint near the radar sensors.

If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA
system (if so equipped) will also stop working.

Do not strike or damage the area around the
radar sensors. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer if the area around the radar sensors is damaged due to a collision.

Action to take:
Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the
vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the engine off
and restart the engine. If the message continues
to appear, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.

Radio frequency statement
For USA
FCC : OAYSRR3B
LSD2439

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
1 for the BSW and
The two radar sensors 䊊
RCTA systems is located near the rear bumper.
Always keep the area near the radar sensors
clean.

The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary
ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist
or fog.
The blocked condition may also be caused by
objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the
radar sensors.

This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC Warning
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment

Check for and remove objects obstructing the
area around the radar sensors.

Starting and driving 5-35

REAR CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT (RCTA)
(if so equipped)
For Canada
Applicable law: Canada 310
This device complies with Industry Canada
licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference, including interference that
may cause undesired operation of the device.
Frequency bands: 24.05 – 24.25GHz
Output power: less than 20 milliwatts

WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the RCTA system
could result in serious injury or death.
● The RCTA system is not a replacement
for proper driving procedures and is not
designed to prevent contact with vehicles or objects. When backing out of a
parking space, always use the side and
rear mirrors and turn and look in the
direction your vehicle will move. Never
rely solely on the RCTA system.
The RCTA system will assist you when backing
out from a parking space. When the vehicle is in
reverse, the system is designed to detect other
vehicles approaching from the right or left of the
vehicle. If the system detects cross traffic, it will
alert you.

5-36 Starting and driving

1. Side BSW/RCTA Indicator Light

RCTA SYSTEM OPERATION
The RCTA system can help alert the driver of an
approaching vehicle when the driver is backing
out of a parking space.
When the shift position is in R (Reverse) and the
vehicle speed is less than approximately 5 mph
(8 km/h), the RCTA system is operational.
If the radar detects an approaching vehicle from
either side, the system chimes (once) and the
side BSW/RCTA indicator light flashes on the
side the vehicle is approaching from.

LSD2734

Starting and driving 5-37

LSD2216

LSD2439
1 inThe RCTA system uses radar sensors 䊊
stalled on both sides near the rear bumper to
detect an approaching vehicle.
1 can detect an approaching
The radar sensors 䊊
vehicle from up to approximately 66 ft (20 m)
away.

5-38 Starting and driving

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE
RCTA SYSTEM
Perform the following steps to enable or disable
the RCTA system.
button until “Settings” dis1. Press the
plays in the vehicle information display and
button to
then press OK. Use the
select “Driver Assistance.” Then press the
OK button.
2. Select “Parking Aids” and press the OK
button.
3. Select “Cross Traffic” and press the OK
button.
4. Use the OK button to enable or disable the
system.
NOTE:
When enabling/disabling the system, the
system setting will be retained even if the
engine is restarted.

LSD2678

Starting and driving 5-39

WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for
the RCTA system. Failure to operate the
vehicle in accordance with these system
limitations could result in serious injury or
death.
● Always check surroundings and turn to
check what is behind you before backing up. The radar sensors detect approaching (moving) vehicles. The radar
sensors cannot detect every object such
as:
– Pedestrians, bicycles, motorcycles,
animals or child-operated toy
vehicles
– A vehicle that is passing at speeds
greater than approximately 19 mph
(30 km/h)

LSD2173

RCTA SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

– A vehicle that is passing at speeds
lower than approximately 5 mph
(8 km/h)
● The radar sensors may not detect approaching vehicles in certain situations:
– Illustration a: When a vehicle parked
next to you obstructs the beam of the
radar sensor.

5-40 Starting and driving

– Illustration b: When the vehicle is
parked in an angled parking space.
– Illustration c: When the vehicle is
parked on inclined ground.

● Excessive noise (e.g. audio system volume, open vehicle window) will interfere with the chime sound, and it may
not be heard.

– Illustration d: When an approaching
vehicle turns into your vehicle’s parking lot aisle.
– Illustration e: When the angle formed
by your vehicle and approaching vehicle is small
● The following conditions may reduce
the ability of the radar to detect other
vehicles:
– Severe weather

NOTE:

– Road spray
– Ice/frost/snow
vehicle

LSD2043

Illustration 1

build-up

the

In the case of several vehicles approaching
in a row (Illustration 1) or in the opposite
direction (Illustration 2), a chime may not
be sounded by the RCTA system after the
first vehicle passes the sensors.

Starting and driving 5-41

LSD2044

Illustration 2

LSD2735

5-42 Starting and driving

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE
When radar blockage is detected, the system will
be deactivated automatically. The “Side Radar
Obstruction” warning message will appear in the
vehicle information display.
The systems are not available until the conditions
no longer exist.
The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary
ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist
or fog.
The blocked condition may also be caused by
objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the
radar sensors.

NOTE:
If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA
system (if so equipped) will also stop working.
Action to take
Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the
vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the engine off
and restart the engine. If the message continues
to appear, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.

LSD2439

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA
system will also stop working.

1 for the BSW and
The two radar sensors 䊊
RCTA systems are located near the rear bumper.
Always keep the area near the radar sensors
clean.

Action to take
When the above conditions no longer exist, the
system will resume automatically.

The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary
ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist
or fog.

Malfunction

The blocked condition may also be caused by
objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the
radar sensors.

NOTE:

When the RCTA system malfunctions, it will turn
off automatically. The system malfunction warning message will appear in the vehicle information
display.

Check for and remove objects obstructing the
area around the radar sensors.

Starting and driving 5-43

CRUISE CONTROL
Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply additional
paint near the radar sensors.

For Canada
Applicable law: Canada 310

For USA

This device complies with Industry Canada
licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference, including interference that
may cause undesired operation of the device.

FCC : OAYSRR3B

Frequency bands: 24.05 – 24.25GHz

This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

Output power: less than 20 milliwatts

Do not strike or damage the area around the
radar sensors. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer if the area around the radar sensors is damaged due to a collision.

Radio frequency statement

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC Warning
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment

5-44 Starting and driving

LSD2722

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE
CONTROL
1. CANCEL switch
2. RES/+ switch
3. SET/- switch
4. CRUISE ON/OFF switch
● If the cruise control system malfunctions, it
cancels automatically. The CRUISE indicator light in the vehicle information display
then blinks to warn the driver.

● If the CRUISE indicator light blinks, turn the
cruise control switch off and have the system checked. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
● The CRUISE indicator light may blink when
the cruise control switch is turned ON while
pushing the RES/+, SET/-, or CANCEL
switch. To properly set the cruise control
system, use the following procedures.

WARNING
Do not use the cruise control when driving
under the following conditions:
● When it is not possible to keep the
vehicle at a set speed.
● In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in
speed.
● On winding or hilly roads.
● On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.).
● In very windy areas.
Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle
control and result in an accident.

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS
The cruise control allows driving at a speed between 25 - 89 mph (40 - 144 km/h) without
keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.
To turn on the cruise control, push the
CRUISE ON/OFF switch ON. The CRUISE indicator light in the vehicle information display will
illuminate.
To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle to
the desired speed, push the SET/- switch and
release it. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Your vehicle maintains the set speed.
● To pass another vehicle, depress the accelerator pedal. When you release the
pedal, the vehicle returns to the previously
set speed.
● The vehicle may not maintain the set speed
when going up or down steep hills. If this
happens, drive without the cruise control.
To cancel the preset speed, use one of the
following three methods.

The cruise control is automatically canceled if:
● You depress the brake pedal while pushing
the RES/+ or SET/- switch. The preset
speed is deleted from memory.
● The vehicle slows down more than 8 mph
(13 km/h) below the set speed.
● You move the shift lever to N (Neutral).
To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of
the following three methods.
● Depress the accelerator pedal. When the
vehicle attains the desired speed, push and
release the SET/- switch.
● Push and hold the RES/+ switch. When the
vehicle attains the speed you desire, release
the switch.
● Push and release the RES/+ switch. Each
time you do this, the set speed increases by
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one
of the following three methods.

● Tap the brake pedal.

● Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push the
SET/- switch and release it.

● Push the CRUISE ON/OFF switch off. The
CRUISE indicator light in the vehicle information display goes out.

● Push and hold the SET/- switch. Release the
switch when the vehicle slows to the desired
speed.

● Push the CANCEL switch.

Starting and driving 5-45

INTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL (ICC)
(if so equipped)
● Push and release the SET/- switch. Each
time you do this, the set speed decreases by
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
To resume the preset speed, push and release the RES/+ switch. The vehicle returns to
the last set cruising speed when the vehicle
speed is over 25 mph (40 km/h).
To turn off the cruise control, use one of the
following three methods.
● Push the CANCEL switch.
● Tap the brake pedal.
● Push the CRUISE ON/OFF switch off. The
CRUISE indicator light in the vehicle information display goes out.

WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the ICC system
could result in serious injury or death.
● ICC is not a collision avoidance or warning device. It is for highway use only and
it is not intended for congested areas or
city driving. Failure to apply the brakes
could result in an accident.
● The ICC system is only an aid to assist
the driver and is not a collision warning
or avoidance device. It is the driver’s
responsibility to stay alert, drive safely,
and be in control of the vehicle at all
times.
● Always observe posted speed limits
and do not set the speed over them.
● Always drive carefully and attentively
when using the ICC system. Read and
understand the Owner’s Manual thoroughly before using the ICC system. To
avoid serious injury or death, do not rely
on the system to prevent accidents or to
control the vehicle’s speed in emergency situations. Do not use the ICC
system except in appropriate road and
traffic conditions.

5-46 Starting and driving

● In the conventional (fixed speed) cruise
control mode, a warning chime will not
sound to warn you if you are too close
to the vehicle ahead. Pay special attention to the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you or a
collision could occur.
The ICC system maintains a selected distance
from the vehicle in front of you within the speed
range of 0 to 90 mph (0 to 144 km/h) up to the
set speed. The set speed can be selected by the
driver between 20 to 90 mph (32 to 144 km/h).
The vehicle travels at a set speed when the road
ahead is clear.
The ICC system can be set to one of two cruise
control modes:
● Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode: For maintaining a selected distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
of you up to the preset speed
● Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode: For cruising at a preset speed

A to choose the cruise
Push the MAIN switch 䊊
control mode between the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode and the conventional (fixed
speed) cruise control mode.

Once a control mode is activated, it cannot be
changed to the other cruise control mode. To
A
change the mode, push the MAIN switch 䊊
once to turn the system off. Then push the MAIN
A again to turn the system back on and
switch 䊊
select the desired cruise control mode.
Always confirm the setting in the ICC system
display.
For the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode,
refer to “Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode” in this section.
For the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control
mode, refer to “Conventional (fixed speed) cruise
control mode” in this section.

A
䊊

LSD2728

MAIN (ON/OFF) switch

Starting and driving 5-47

LSD2727

LSD2731

HOW TO SELECT THE CRUISE
CONTROL MODE

VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE
CONTROL MODE

Selecting the vehicle-to-vehicle distance
control mode: To choose the vehicle-to-vehicle
1 , quickly push and redistance control mode 䊊
A.
lease the MAIN switch 䊊

In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode,
the ICC system automatically maintains a selected distance from the vehicle traveling in front
of you according to that vehicle’s speed (up to
the set speed), or at the set speed when the road
ahead is clear.

Selecting the conventional (fixed speed)
cruise control mode: To choose the conven2 , push
tional (fixed speed) cruise control mode 䊊
A for longer than
and hold the MAIN switch 䊊
approximately 1.5 seconds. For additional information, refer to “Conventional (fixed speed)
cruise control mode” in this section.

5-48 Starting and driving

The ICC system is intended to enhance the operation of the vehicle when following a vehicle
traveling in the same lane and direction.

B detects a slower moving
If the radar sensor 䊊
vehicle ahead, the system will reduce the vehicle
speed so that your vehicle follows the vehicle in
front at the selected distance.

The system automatically controls the throttle
and applies the brakes (up to approximately 40%
of vehicle braking power) if necessary.
The detection range of the sensor is approximately 650 ft (200 m) ahead.

LSD2679

Starting and driving 5-49

VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE
CONTROL MODE OPERATION
The vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is
designed to maintain a selected distance from
the vehicle in front of you and can reduce the
speed to match a slower vehicle ahead. The
system will decelerate the vehicle as necessary
and if the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the
vehicle decelerates to a standstill. However, the
ICC system can only apply up to 40% of the
vehicle’s total braking power.
This system should only be used when traffic
conditions allow vehicle speeds to remain fairly
constant or when vehicle speeds change gradually. If a vehicle moves into the traveling lane
ahead or if a vehicle traveling ahead rapidly decelerates, the distance between vehicles may
become closer because the ICC system cannot
decelerate the vehicle quickly enough. If this occurs, the ICC system will sound a warning chime
and blink the system display to notify the driver to
take necessary action.
The system will cancel and a warning chime will
sound if the speed is below approximately
15 mph (24 km/h) and a vehicle is not detected
ahead. The system will also disengage when the
vehicle goes above the maximum set speed.

5-50 Starting and driving

For additional information, refer to “Approach
warning” in this section.
The following items are controlled in the Vehicleto-vehicle distance control mode:
● When there are no vehicles traveling ahead,
the Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode maintains the speed set by the driver.
The set speed range is between approximately 20 and 90 mph (32 and 144 km/h).
● When there is a vehicle traveling ahead, the
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
adjusts the speed to maintain the distance,
selected by the driver, from the vehicle
ahead. If the vehicle ahead comes to a stop,
the vehicle decelerates to a standstill within
the limitations of the system. The system will
cancel once it judges a standstill with a
warning chime.
● When the vehicle traveling ahead has moved
out from its lane of travel, the Vehicle-tovehicle distance control mode accelerates
and maintains vehicle speed up to the set
speed.

The ICC system does not control vehicle speed
or warn you when you approach stationary and
slow moving vehicles. You must pay attention to
vehicle operation to maintain proper distance
from vehicles ahead when approaching toll gates
or traffic congestion.

Normally when controlling the distance to a vehicle ahead, this system automatically accelerates or decelerates your vehicle according to the
speed of the vehicle ahead. Depress the accelerator to properly accelerate your vehicle when
acceleration is required for a lane change. Depress the brake pedal when deceleration is required to maintain a safe distance to the vehicle
ahead due to its sudden braking or if a vehicle
cuts in. Always stay alert when using the ICC
system.

SSD0254

When driving on the freeway at a set speed and
approaching a slower traveling vehicle ahead, the
ICC system will adjust the speed to maintain the
distance, selected by the driver, from the vehicle
ahead. If the vehicle ahead changes lanes or exits
the freeway, the ICC system will accelerate and
maintain the speed up to the set speed. Pay
attention to the driving operation to maintain control of the vehicle as it accelerates to the set
speed.
The vehicle may not maintain the set speed on
winding or hilly roads. If this occurs, you will have
to manually control the vehicle speed.

LSD2680

VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE
CONTROL MODE SWITCHES
The system is operated by the CRUISE ON/OFF
switch and four control switches, all mounted on
the steering wheel.
1. CANCEL switch:
Deactivates the system without erasing the
set speed.
2. RES/+ switch:
Resumes set speed or increases speed incrementally.

Starting and driving 5-51

● ICC system warning (yellow): Indicates that if there is a malfunction in the
ICC system.

3. SET/- switch:
Sets desired cruise speed or reduces speed
incrementally.
4. DISTANCE

2. Set vehicle speed indicator:

switch:

Indicates the set vehicle speed.

Changes the vehicle’s following distance:

For Canadian models, the speed is displayed in km/h.

● Long
● Middle

3. Set distance indicator:

● Short

Displays the selected distance between vehicles set with the distance switch.

5. CRUISE ON/OFF switch:

4. Vehicle ahead detection indicator:

Master switch to activate the system.
LSD2718

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode display and indicator
The display is located between the speedometer
and tachometer.
1. This indicator indicates the ICC system status depending on a color:
● ICC system ON indicator (gray): Indicates that the CRUISE ON/OFF switch is
ON.
● ICC system SET indicator (green):
Indicates that the cruising speed is set.

5-52 Starting and driving

Indicates whether it detects a vehicle in front
of you.

● When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive) or
Manual mode
● When the parking brake is applied
● When the brakes are operated by the driver
When the SET/– switch is pushed under the
following conditions, the system cannot be set.
A warning chime will sound and a message will
pop up:

LSD2681

Operating vehicle-to-vehicle distance
control mode
To turn on the cruise control: quickly push
A . The
and release the CRUISE ON/OFF switch 䊊
ICC system ON indicator (gray), set distance
B
indicator and set vehicle speed indicator 䊊
come on in a standby state for setting.

LSD2682

To set cruising speed: accelerate your vehicle
C
to the desired speed, push the SET/– switch 䊊
and release it. The ICC system set indicator
(green), vehicle ahead detection indicator, set
distance indicator and set vehicle speed indicaB will come on. Take your foot off the acceltor 䊊
erator pedal. Your vehicle will maintain the set
speed.

● When the VDC system is off (To use the ICC
system, turn on the VDC system. Push the
CRUISE ON/OFF switch to turn off the ICC
system and reset the ICC switch by pushing
the CRUISE ON/OFF switch again.)
For additional information about the VDC
sytem, refer to “Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) system” in this section.
● When ABS or VDC is operating
● When a wheel is slipping (To use the ICC
system, make sure the wheels are no longer
slipping.

When the SET/– switch is pushed under the
following conditions, the system cannot be set
and the ICC indicators will blink for approximately
2 seconds:
● When traveling below 20 mph (32 km/h)
and a vehicle ahead is not detected

Starting and driving 5-53

then controls the vehicle speed based on the
speed of the vehicle ahead to maintain the driver
selected distance.
NOTE:
● The stoplights of the vehicle come on
when braking is performed by the ICC
system.
● When the brake operates, a noise may
be heard. This is not a malfunction.

System set display with vehicle ahead

When a vehicle ahead is detected, the vehicle
ahead detection indicator comes on. The ICC
system will also display the set speed and selected distance.

System set display without vehicle ahead

Vehicle ahead not detected

LSD2719
1
䊊
2
䊊

The driver sets the desired vehicle speed based
on the road conditions. The ICC system maintains the set vehicle speed, similar to standard
cruise control, as long as no vehicle is detected in
the lane ahead. The ICC system displays the set
speed.

When a vehicle is no longer detected ahead, the
ICC system gradually accelerates your vehicle to
resume the previously set vehicle speed. The ICC
system then maintains the set speed.

Vehicle detected ahead

If a vehicle ahead appears during acceleration to
the set vehicle speed or any time the ICC system
is in operation, the system controls the distance
to that vehicle.

When a vehicle is detected in the lane ahead, the
ICC system decelerates the vehicle by controlling the throttle and applying the brakes to match
the speed of a slower vehicle ahead. The system

5-54 Starting and driving

When a vehicle is no longer detected, the vehicle
ahead detection indicator turns off.

When a vehicle is no longer detected under
approximately 15 mph (24 km/h), the system will
be canceled.

How to change the set vehicle speed
To cancel the preset speed: use one of the
following methods:
● Push the CANCEL switch. The set vehicle
speed indicator will go out.
● Tap the brake pedal. The set vehicle speed
indicator will go out.
● Turn the CRUISE ON/OFF switch off. The
ICC indicators will go out.
To reset at a faster cruising speed: use one
of the following methods:
LSD2720

When passing another vehicle, the set speed
B will flash when the vehicle speed
indicator 䊊
exceeds the set speed. The vehicle detect indicator will turn off when the area ahead of the
vehicle is open. When the pedal is released, the
vehicle will return to the previously set speed.
Even though your vehicle speed is set in the ICC
system, you can depress the accelerator pedal
when it is necessary to accelerate your vehicle
rapidly.

● Depress the accelerator pedal. When the
vehicle attains the desired speed, push and
release the SET/– switch.

To reset at a slower cruising speed: use one
of the following methods:
● Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push the
SET/– switch and release it.
● Push and hold the SET/– switch. The set
vehicle speed will decrease by approximately 5 mph (5 km/h).
● Push, then quickly release the SET/– switch.
Each time you do this, the set speed will
decrease by approximately 1 mph (1 km/h).
To resume the preset speed: push and release the RES/+ switch. The vehicle will resume
the last set cruising speed when the vehicle
speed is over 20 mph (32 km/h).

● Push and hold the RES/+ switch. The set
vehicle speed will increase by approximately
5 mph (5 km/h).
● Push, then quickly release the RES/+
switch. Each time you do this, the set speed
will increase by approximately 1 mph
(1 km/h).

Starting and driving 5-55

Approach warning
If your vehicle comes closer to the vehicle ahead
due to rapid deceleration of that vehicle or if
another vehicle cuts in, the system warns the
driver with the chime and ICC system display.
Decelerate by depressing the brake pedal to
maintain a safe vehicle distance if:
● The chime sounds.
● The vehicle ahead detection indicator blinks.

LSD2683

LSD2429

How to change the set distance to the
vehicle ahead
The distance to the vehicle ahead can be selected at any time depending on the traffic conditions.
A is
switch 䊊
Each time the distance
pushed, the set distance will change to long,
middle, short and back to long again, in that
sequence.

Distance

Approximate distance at
60 mph (100 km/h) [ft (m)]

Long

200 (60)

Middle

150 (45)

Short

100 (30)

● The distance to the vehicle ahead will
change according to the vehicle speed. The
higher the vehicle speed, the longer the distance.
● If the engine is stopped, the set distance
becomes “long”. (Each time the engine is
started, the initial setting becomes “long”.)

5-56 Starting and driving

The warning chime may not sound in some cases
when there is a short distance between vehicles.
Some examples are:
● When the vehicles are traveling at the same
speed and the distance between vehicles is
not changing.
● When the vehicle ahead is traveling faster
and the distance between vehicles is increasing.
● When a vehicle cuts in near your vehicle.
The warning chime will not sound when:
● The vehicle approaches other vehicles that
are parked or moving slowly.
● The accelerator pedal is depressed, overriding the system.

NOTE:
The approach warning chime may sound
and the system display may blink when the
ICC sensor detects objects on the side of
the vehicle or on the side of the road. This
may cause the ICC system to decelerate or
accelerate the vehicle. The ICC sensor may
detect these objects when the vehicle is
driven on winding roads, narrow roads, hilly
roads, or when entering or exiting a curve.
In these cases you will have to manually
control the proper distance ahead of your
vehicle.
Also, the sensor sensitivity can be affected by
vehicle operation (steering maneuver or driving
position in the lane) or traffic or vehicle condition
(for example, if a vehicle is being driven with some
damage).

Automatic cancellation
A chime sounds under the following conditions
and the control is automatically canceled:
● When the vehicle ahead is not detected and
your vehicle is traveling below the speed of
15 mph (24 km/h)
● When the system judges the vehicle is at a
standstill

● When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive)
position or Manual mode
● When the parking brake system is applied
● When the VDC system is turned off
● When ABS or VDC operates
● When distance measurement becomes impaired due to adhesion of dirt or obstruction
to the sensor
● When a wheel slips
● When the radar signal is temporarily interrupted

VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE
CONTROL MODE LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for
the ICC system. Failure to operate the
vehicle in accordance with these system
limitations could result in serious injury or
death.
● The ICC system is primarily intended for
use on straight, dry, open roads with
light traffic. It is not advisable to use the
ICC system in city traffic or congested
areas.

● The ICC system will not adapt automatically to road conditions. This system
should be used in evenly flowing traffic.
Do not use the system on roads with
sharp curves, or on icy roads, in heavy
rain or in fog.
● As there is a performance limit to the
distance control function, never rely
solely on the ICC system. This system
does not correct careless, inattentive or
absentminded driving, or overcome
poor visibility in rain, fog, or other bad
weather. Decelerate the vehicle speed
by depressing the brake pedal, depending on the distance to the vehicle ahead
and the surrounding circumstances in
order to maintain a safe distance between vehicles.
● If the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the
vehicle decelerates to a standstill
within the limitations of the system. The
system will cancel once it judges that
the vehicle has come to a standstill and
sound a warning chime. To prevent the
vehicle from moving, the driver must
depress the brake pedal.

Starting and driving 5-57

● Always pay attention to the operation of
the vehicle and be ready to manually
control the proper following distance.
The ICC system may not be able to
maintain the selected distance between
vehicles (following distance) or selected vehicle speed under some
circumstances.
● The system may not detect the vehicle
in front of you in certain road or weather
conditions. To avoid accidents, never
use the ICC system under the following
conditions:
– On roads where the traffic is heavy or
there are sharp curves
– On slippery road surfaces such as on
ice or snow, etc.
– During bad weather (rain, fog, snow,
etc.)
– When rain, snow or dirt adhere to the
bumper around the distance sensor
– On steep downhill roads (the vehicle
may go beyond the set vehicle speed
and frequent braking may result in
overheating the brakes)
– On repeated uphill and downhill
roads

5-58 Starting and driving

– When traffic conditions make it difficult to keep a proper distance between vehicles because of frequent
acceleration or deceleration
– Interference by other radar sources.
● Do not use the ICC system if you are
towing a trailer. The system may not
detect a vehicle ahead.
● In some road or traffic conditions, a
vehicle or object can unexpectedly
come into the sensor detection zone
and cause automatic braking. Always
stay alert and avoid using the ICC system where not recommended in this
warning section.
The radar sensor will not detect the following
objects:
● Stationary and slow moving vehicles
● Pedestrians or objects in the roadway
● Oncoming vehicles in the same lane
● Motorcycles traveling offset in the travel lane
The sensor generally detects the signals returned
from the vehicle ahead. Therefore, if the sensor
cannot detect the reflection from the vehicle
ahead, the ICC system may not maintain the
selected distance.

The following are some conditions in which the
sensor cannot properly detect a vehicle ahead
and the system may not operate properly:
● When snow or road spray from traveling
vehicles reduces the sensor’s detection.
● When your vehicle is towing a trailer, etc.
● When excessively heavy baggage is loaded
in the rear seat or cargo area of your vehicle.
The ICC system is designed to automatically
check the sensor’s operation within the limitations of the system.
When the sensor is covered with dirt or is obstructed, the system will automatically be canceled. If the sensor is covered with ice, a transparent or translucent vinyl bag, etc., the ICC
system may not detect them. In these instances,
the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode may
not cancel and may not be able to maintain the
selected following distance from the vehicle
ahead. Be sure to check and clean the sensor
regularly.
The detection zone of the radar sensor is limited.
A vehicle ahead must be in the detection zone for
the vehicle-to-vehicle distance detection mode
to maintain the selected distance from the vehicle
ahead.

A vehicle ahead may move outside of the detection zone due to its position within the same lane
of travel. Motorcycles may not be detected in the
same lane ahead if they are traveling offset from
the centerline of the lane. A vehicle that is entering the lane ahead may not be detected until the
vehicle has completely moved into the lane.
If this occurs, the ICC system may warn you
by blinking the system indicator and
sounding the chime. The driver may have to
manually control the proper distance away
from vehicle traveling ahead.
SSD0252

Starting and driving 5-59

SSD0253

When driving on some roads, such as winding,
hilly, curved, narrow roads, or roads which are
under construction, the radar sensor may detect
vehicles in a different lane, or may temporarily not
detect a vehicle traveling ahead. This may cause
the radar system to decelerate or accelerate the
vehicle.
The detection of vehicles may also be affected by
vehicle operation (steering maneuver or traveling
position in the lane, etc.) or vehicle condition.

5-60 Starting and driving

If this occurs, the ICC system may warn you
by blinking the system indicator and
sounding the chime unexpectedly. You will
have to manually control the proper distance away from the vehicle traveling
ahead.

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE
The following are conditions in which the ICC
system may be temporarily unavailable. In these
instances, the ICC system may not cancel and
may not be able to maintain the selected following distance from the vehicle ahead.
Condition A
Under the following conditions, the ICC system is
automatically canceled. A chime will sound and
the system will not be able to be set:
● When the VDC system is turned off
● When the VDC or ABS operates
● When a vehicle ahead is not detected and
your vehicle is traveling below the speed of
15 mph (24 km/h)
● When the system judges the vehicle is at a
standstill
● When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive) or
Manual mode
● When the parking brake is applied
● When a wheel slips
LSD2684

● When the radar signal is temporarily interrupted

Starting and driving 5-61

Action to take
When the conditions listed above are no longer
present, turn the system off using the ICC
CRUISE ON/OFF switch. Turn the ICC system
back on to use the system.
Condition B
When the radar sensor area of the front bumper
is covered with dirt or is obstructed, the ICC
system will automatically be canceled.
The chime will sound and the “Unavailable: Front
Radar Obstruction” warning message will appear
in the vehicle information display.
LSD2685

Action to take

If the warning message appears, stop the vehicle
in a safe place, place the shift lever in the P (Park)
position, and turn the engine off. When the radar
signal is temporarily interrupted, clean the sensor
area of the front bumper and restart the engine. If
the “Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction” warning message continues to be displayed, it is
recommended that you have the ICC system
checked by a NISSAN dealer.

If the warning light comes on, park the vehicle in a
safe place. Turn the engine off, restart the engine,
resume driving and set the ICC system again.

Condition C
When the ICC system is not operating properly, a
chime sounds and the ICC system warning light
(orange) will come on.

5-62 Starting and driving

LSD2721

Action to take

If it is not possible to set the system or the
indicator stays on, it may indicate that the
system is malfunctioning. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have the vehicle checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.

● Do not attach metallic objects near the sensor area (brush guard, etc.) This could cause
failure or malfunction.

For Canada

● Do not alter, remove, or paint the front bumper. Before customizing or restoring the
front bumper, it is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer.

IC: 4135A-ARS4B

Radio frequency statement
For USA

LSD2690

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
A is located on
The sensor for the ICC system 䊊
the front of the vehicle.

To keep the ICC system operating properly, be
sure to observe the following:

Model: ARS4–B
FCC ID: OAYARS4B
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada licence-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:

FCC ID OAYARS4B

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:

2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:

2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.

● Always keep the sensor area clean.

FCC Warning

1. L’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage,
et

● Do not strike or damage the areas around
the sensor.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.

2. L’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.

● Do not attach a sticker (including transparent material) or install an accessory near the
sensor. This could cause failure or malfunction.

Starting and driving 5-63

Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure Information:
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.
This equipment should be installed and operated
with minimum distance of 30 cm between the
radiator and your body.
The transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or
transmitter.
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites
d’exposition aux rayonnements IC établies pour
un environnement non contrôlé. Cet équipement
doit être installé et utilisé avec un minimum de
30 cm de distance entre la source de rayonnement et votre corps.
FCC Notice
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.

CONVENTIONAL (fixed speed)
CRUISE CONTROL MODE
This mode allows driving at a speed between 25
to 90 mph (40 to 144 km/h) without keeping your
foot on the accelerator pedal.

WARNING
● In the conventional (fixed speed) cruise
control mode, a warning chime does not
sound to warn you if you are too close
to the vehicle ahead, as neither the
presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected.
● Pay special attention to the distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle
ahead of you or a collision could occur.
● Always confirm the setting in the ICC
system display.
● Do not use the conventional (fixed
speed) cruise control mode when driving under the following conditions:
– When it is not possible to keep the
vehicle at a set speed
– In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies
in speed
– On winding or hilly roads

5-64 Starting and driving

– On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice,
etc.)
– In very windy areas
● Doing so could cause a lose of vehicle
control and result in an accident.

● Cruise control warning (yellow): Indicates
that there is a malfunction in the ICC
system
2. Set vehicle speed indicator:
This indicator indicates the set vehicle
speed. For Canadian models, the speed is
displayed in km/h.

LSD2723

Conventional (fixed speed) cruise
control switches
1. CANCEL switch:
Deactivates the system without erasing the
set speed
2. RES/+ switch:
Resumes set speed or increases speed incrementally
3. SET/- switch:
Sets desired cruise speed or reduces speed
incrementally
4. CRUISE ON/OFF switch:
Master switch to activate the system

LSD2724

Conventional (fixed speed) cruise
control mode display and indicators
The display is located in the vehicle information
display.
1. Cruise indicator:
This indicator indicates the condition of the
ICC system depending on a color.
● Cruise control ON indicator (gray): Indicates that the CRUISE ON/OFF switch is
ON
● Cruise control SET indicator (green): Indicates that the cruising speed is set

Starting and driving 5-65

CRUISE ON/OFF switch again will turn the system completely off. When the ignition switch is
placed in the OFF position, the system is also
automatically turned off.
To use the ICC system again, quickly push and
release the CRUISE ON/OFF switch (vehicle-to
vehicle distance control mode) or push and hold
it (conventional cruise control mode) again to turn
it on.

CAUTION

LSD2725

Operating conventional (fixed speed)
cruise control mode
To turn on the conventional (fixed speed) cruise
control mode, push and hold the CRUISE
A for longer than about
ON/OFF switch 䊊
1.5 seconds.
When pushing CRUISE ON/OFF switch on, the
conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode
B are displayed in the
display and indicators 䊊
vehicle information display. After you hold the
CRUISE ON/OFF switch on for longer than
about 1.5 seconds, the ICC system display turns
off. The cruise indicator appears. You can now
set your desired cruising speed. Pushing the

5-66 Starting and driving

To avoid accidentally engaging cruise control, make sure to turn the CRUISE
ON/OFF switch off when not using the ICC
system.

LSD2726

To set cruising speed, accelerate your vehicle to
C switch and
the desired speed, push the SET/- 䊊
release it. (The color of the cruise indicator
changes to green and set vehicle speed indicator
comes on.) Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal. Your vehicle will maintain the set speed.
● To pass another vehicle, depress the accelerator pedal. When you release the pedal,
the vehicle will return to the previously set
speed.
● The vehicle may not maintain the set speed
when going up or down steep hills. If this
happens, manually maintain vehicle speed.

To cancel the preset speed, use any of the following methods:

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one of
the following three methods:

1. Push the CANCEL switch. The vehicle
speed indicator will turn off.

1. Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push the
SET/- switch and release it.

2. Tap the brake pedal. The vehicle speed indicator will turn off.
3. Turn the CRUISE ON/OFF off. Both the
cruise indicator and vehicle speed indicator
will turn off.
To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of the
following three methods:
1. Depress the accelerator pedal. When the
vehicle attains the desired speed, push and
release the SET/- switch.

2. Push and hold the SET/- switch. Release the
switch when the vehicle slows down to the
desired speed.
3. Push, then quickly release the SET/- switch.
Each time you do this, the set speed will
decrease by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
To resume the preset speed, push and release
the SET/+ switch. The vehicle will resume the
last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is
over 25 mph (40 km/h).

2. Push and hold the SET/+ switch. When the
vehicle attains the desired speed, release
the switch.
3. Push, then quickly release the SET/+
switch. Each time you do this, the set speed
will increase by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Starting and driving 5-67

System temporarily unavailable
A chime sounds under the following conditions
and the control is automatically canceled:
● When the vehicle slows down more than
8 mph (13 km/h) below the set speed
● When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive) or
manual shift mode
● When the parking brake is applied
● When the VDC operates (including the traction control system)
● When a wheel slips
When the system is not operating properly, the
chime sounds and the color of the cruise indicator will change to orange.
Action to take
If the color of the cruise indicator changes to
orange, stop the vehicle in a safe place and place
the shift lever in the P (Park) position. Turn the
engine off, restart the engine, resume driving, and
then perform the setting again.

LSD2684

5-68 Starting and driving

If it is not possible to set or the indicator
stays on, it may indicate that the system is
malfunctioning. Although the vehicle is still
driveable under normal conditions, have the
vehicle checked. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING
(FEB) (if so equipped)
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the FEB system
could result in serious injury or death.
● The FEB system is a supplemental aid
to the driver. It is not a replacement for
the driver’s attention to traffic conditions or responsibility to drive safely. It
cannot prevent accidents due to carelessness
or
dangerous
driving
techniques.
● The FEB system does not function in all
driving, traffic, weather and road
conditions.
The FEB system can assist the driver when there
is a risk of a forward collision with the vehicle
ahead in the traveling lane.

LSD2690
A located
The FEB system uses a radar sensor 䊊
behind the front bumper to measure the distance
to the vehicle ahead in the same lane.

Starting and driving 5-69

1. Vehicle ahead detection indicator
2. FEB emergency warning indicator
3. FEB warning light

FEB SYSTEM OPERATION
The FEB system will function when your vehicle is
driven at speeds above approximately 3 mph
(5 km/h).
If a risk of a forward collision is detected, the FEB
system will provide an initial warning to the driver
by both a visual and audible alert.
If the driver applies the brakes quickly and forcefully after the warning, and the FEB system detects that there is still the possibility of a forward
collision, the system will automatically increase
the braking force. If the driver does not take
action, the FEB system issues the second visual
warning (red) and audible warning and also applies partial braking.
If the risk of a collision becomes imminent, the
FEB system applies harder braking automatically.

LSD2687

5-70 Starting and driving

NOTE:
The vehicle’s brake lights come on when
braking is performed by the forward emergency braking system.
Depending on vehicle speed and distance to the
vehicle ahead, as well as driving and roadway
conditions, the system may help the driver avoid a
forward collision or may help mitigate the consequences of a collision, should one be unavoidable. If the driver is handling the steering wheel,
accelerating or braking, the FEB system will function later or will not function.
The automatic braking will cease under the following conditions:
● When the steering wheel is turned as far as
necessary to avoid a collision.
● When the accelerator pedal is depressed.
● When there is no longer a vehicle detected
ahead.
If the FEB system has stopped the vehicle, the
vehicle will remain at a standstill for approximately
2 seconds before the brakes are released.

LSD2716

Starting and driving 5-71

TURNING THE FEB SYSTEM
ON/OFF
Perform the following steps to turn the FEB systems ON or OFF.
button until “Settings” dis1. Press the
plays in the vehicle information display and
button
then press OK button. Use the
to select “Driver Assistance”. Then press the
OK button.
2. Select “Driving Aids” and press the OK button.
3. Select “Emergency Brake” and press the
OK button.
When the FEB system is turned off, the FEB
system warning light illuminates.

NOTE:
● The FEB system will be automatically turned
on when the engine is restarted.

FEB SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

– Dirt, ice, snow or other material covering the radar sensor.
– Interference by other radar sources.

WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for
the FEB system. Failure to operate the
vehicle in accordance with these system
limitations could result in serious injury or
death.
● The FEB system cannot detect all vehicles under all conditions.
● The radar sensor does not detect the
following objects:
– Pedestrians, animals or obstacles in
the roadway.
– Oncoming vehicles.
– Crossing vehicles.
● The radar sensor has some performance limitations. If a stationary vehicle is in the vehicles’s path, the FEB
system will not function when the vehicle is driven at speeds over approximately 50 mph (80 km/h).

5-72 Starting and driving

● The radar sensor may not detect a vehicle ahead in the following conditions:

– Snow or road spray from traveling
vehicles.
– If the vehicle ahead is narrow (e.g.
motorcycle).
– When driving on a steep downhill
slope or roads with sharp curves.
● In some road or traffic conditions, the
FEB system may unexpectedly apply
partial braking. When acceleration is
necessary, continue to depress the accelerator pedal to override the system.
● Braking distances increase on slippery
surfaces.

● The system is designed to automatically
check the sensor’s functionality, within
certain limitations. The system may not
detect some forms of obstructions of
the sensor area such as ice, snow, stickers, etc. In these cases, the system may
not be able to worn the driver properly.
Be sure that you check, clean and clear
the sensor area regularly.
● Excessive noise will interfere with the
warning chime sound, and the chime
may not be heard.

LSD2717

Starting and driving 5-73

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE
Condition A
When the radar sensor picks up interference
from another radar source, making it impossible
to detect a vehicle ahead, the FEB system is
automatically turned off.
The FEB system warning light (orange) will illuminate.
Action to take
When the above conditions no longer exist, the
FEB system will resume automatically.
Condition B
When the sensor area of the front bumper is
covered with dirt or is obstructed, making it impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the FEB system is automatically turned off.
The FEB system warning light (orange) will illuminate and the “Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction” warning message will appear in the
vehicle information display.
When driving on roads with limited road structures or buildings (for example, long bridges,
deserts, snow fields, driving next to long walls),
the system may illuminate the system warning

5-74 Starting and driving

light (orange) and display the “Unavailable: Front
Radar Obstruction” message.
Action to take
If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop the
vehicle in a safe place, place the shift lever in the
P (Park) position and turn the engine off. Clean
the radar cover on the lower grille with a soft
cloth, and restart the engine. If the warning light
continues to illuminate, have the FEB system
checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If the FEB system malfunctions, it will be turned
off automatically, a chime will sound, the FEB
warning light (orange) will illuminate and the
warning message [Malfunction] will appear in the
vehicle information display.
Action to take
If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop the
vehicle in a safe location, turn the engine off and
restart the engine. If the warning light continues
to illuminate, have the FEB system checked. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.

LSD2690

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
A is located behind the front bumThe sensor 䊊
per.

To keep the system operating properly, be sure to
observe the following:
● Always keep the sensor area of the front
bumper clean.
● Do not strike or damage the areas around
the sensor.
● Do not cover or attach stickers or similar
objects on the front bumper near the sensor
area. This could cause failure or malfunction.

● Do not attach metallic objects near the sensor area (brush guard, etc.). This could
cause failure or malfunction.

For Canada

● Do not alter, remove or paint the front bumper. Before customizing or restoring the
front bumper, it is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer.

IC: 4135A-ARS4B

Radio frequency statement
For USA
FCC ID OAYARS4B
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
FCC Warning
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

Model: ARS4–B

FCC ID: OAYARS4B
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Industry Canada
licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference,
and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation of
the device.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils
radio
exempts
de
licence.
L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. L’appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et

Radio frequency radiation exposure information:
This equipment complies with FCC and IC
radiation exposure limits set forth for an
uncontrolled environment.
This equipment should be installed and
operated with minimum distance of 30 cm
between the radiator and your body.
This transmitter must not be co-located or
operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites
d’exposition aux rayonnements IC établies
pour un environnement non contrôlé.
Cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé
avec un minimum de 30 cm de distance
entre la source de rayonnement et votre
corps.
FCC Notice
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

2. L’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter
tout brouillage radioélectrique subi,
même si le brouillage est susceptible
d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.

Starting and driving 5-75

FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING
(FEB) WITH PEDESTRIAN DETECTION
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the FEB with pedestrian detection system could result in
serious injury or death.
● The FEB with pedestrian detection system is a supplemental aid to the driver.
It is not a replacement for the driver’s
attention to traffic conditions or responsibility to drive safely. It cannot
prevent accidents due to carelessness
or dangerous driving techniques.
● The FEB with pedestrian detection system does not function in all driving,
traffic, weather and road conditions.
The FEB with pedestrian detection system can
assist the driver when there is a risk of a forward
collision with the vehicle ahead in the traveling
lane or with a pedestrian.

5-76 Starting and driving

LSD2711

The FEB with pedestrian detection system uses a
radar sensor located behind the lower grille of the
front bumper to measure the distance to the
vehicle ahead in the same lane. For pedestrians,
A installed bethe FEB system uses a camera 䊊
hind the windshield in addition to the radar sensor.

1. Vehicle ahead detection indicator
2. FEB with pedestrian detection emergency
warning indicator
3. FEB with pedestrian detection system warning light

FEB WITH PEDESTRIAN
DETECTION SYSTEM OPERATION
The FEB with pedestrian detection system operates at speeds above approximately 3 mph
(5 km/h). For the pedestrian detection function,
the FEB with pedestrian detection system operates at speeds between 6 – 37 mph (10 –
60 km/h).
If a risk of a forward collision with a vehicle is
detected, the FEB with pedestrian detection system will first provide a warning to the driver by
flashing the vehicle ahead detection indicator
and providing an audible alert. In addition, the
FEB with pedestrian detection system applies
partial braking. If the driver applies the brakes
quickly and forcefully, but the FEB with pedestrian detection system detects that there is still
the possibility of a forward collision, the system
will automatically increase the braking force.

LSD2687

Starting and driving 5-77

If the risk of a collision becomes imminent and the
driver does not take action, the FEB with pedestrian detection system issues the second warning
to the driver by flashing the FEB with pedestrian
detection emergency warning indicator (red),
providing an audible warning, and then automatically applies harder braking.
If a risk of a forward impact with a pedestrian is
detected, the FEB with pedestrian detection system will provide a warning to the driver by flashing
the FEB with pedestrian detection emergency
warning indicator (red), provides an audible alert
and the system will apply partial baking. If the
driver applies the brakes quickly and forcefully
but the FEB with pedestrian detection system
detects that there is still the possibility of a forward impact with a pedestrian, the system will
automatically increase the braking force. If the
risk of collision becomes imminent and the driver
does not take action, the FEB with pedestrian
detection system automatically applies harder
braking.
NOTE:
The vehicle’s brake lights come on when
any braking is performed by the FEB with
pedestrian detection system.

5-78 Starting and driving

Depending on vehicle speed and distance to the
vehicle or pedestrian ahead, as well as driving
and roadway conditions, the system may help the
driver avoid a forward collision or may help mitigate the consequences if a collision should be
unavoidable. If the driver is handling the steering
wheel, accelerating or braking, the FEB with pedestrian detection system will function later or
will not function.
The automatic braking will cease under the following conditions:
● When the steering wheel is turned to avoid a
collision.
● When the accelerator pedal is depressed.
● When there is no longer a vehicle or a pedestrian detected ahead.
If the FEB with pedestrian detection system has
stopped the vehicle, the vehicle will remain at a
standstill for approximately 2 seconds before the
brakes are released.

TURNING THE FEB WITH
PEDESTRIAN DETECTION SYSTEM
ON/OFF
Perform the following steps to enable or disable
the FEB with pedestrian detection system.
button until “Settings” dis1. Press the
plays in the vehicle information display and
then press the OK button. Use the
button to select “Driver Assistance”. Then
press the OK button.
2. Select “Driving Aids” and press the OK button.
3. Select “Emergency Brake” and press the
OK button.
When the FEB with pedestrian detection system
is turned off, the FEB with pedestrian detection
system warning light illuminates.
NOTE:
● The FEB with pedestrian detection system
will be automatically turned on when the
engine is restarted.

LSD2716

Starting and driving 5-79

FEB WITH PEDESTRIAN
DETECTION SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for
the FEB with pedestrian detection system.
Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could
result in serious injury or death.
● The FEB with pedestrian detection system cannot detect all vehicles or pedestrians under all conditions.
● The FEB with pedestrian detection system does not detect the following
objects:
– Small pedestrians (including small
children), animals and cyclists.
– Pedestrians in wheelchairs or using
mobile transport such as scooters,
child-operated toys, or skateboards.
– Pedestrians who are seated or otherwise not in a full upright standing or
walking position.
– Oncoming vehicles
– Crossing vehicles
– Obstacles on the roadside

5-80 Starting and driving

● The FEB with pedestrian detection system has some performance limitations.
– If a stationary vehicle is in the vehicle’s path, the FEB with pedestrian
detection system will not function
when the vehicle is driven at speeds
over
approximately
50
mph
(80 km/h).
– For pedestrian detection, the FEB
with pedestrian detection system will
not function when the vehicle is
driven at speeds over approximately
37 mph (60 km/h) or below approximately 6 mph (10km/h).
● The FEB with pedestrian detection system will not function for pedestrians in
darkness or in tunnels, even if there is
street lighting in the area.
● For pedestrians, the FEB with pedestrian detection system will not issue the
first warning and will not push the accelerator pedal up.
● The FEB with pedestrian detection system may not function if the vehicle
ahead is narrow (for example a
motorcycle).

● The FEB with pedestrian detection system may not function if speed difference between the two vehicles is too
small.
● The radar sensor FEB with pedestrian
detection system may not function
properly or detect a vehicle ahead in the
following conditions:
o Poor visibility (conditions such as
rain, snow, fog, dust storms, sandstorms, and road spray from other
vehicles)
o Driving on a steep downhill slope or
roads with sharp curves.
o Driving on a bumpy road surface,
such as an uneven dirt road.
o If dirt, ice, snow or other material is
covering the radar sensor area.
o Interference by other radar sources.
o The camera area of windshield is
fogged up, or covered with dirt, water
drops, ice, snow, etc.

o Strong light (for example, sunlight or
high beams from oncoming vehicles)
enters the front camera. Strong light
causes the area around the pedestrian to be cast in a shadow, making
it difficult to see.
o A sudden change in brightness occurs. (For example, when the vehicle
enters or exits a tunnel or a shaded
area or lightning flashes.)
o The poor contrast of a person to the
background, such as having clothing
color or pattern which is similar to
the background.
o The pedestrian’s profile is partially
obscured or unidentifiable due to the
pedestrian transporting luggage,
wearing bulky or very loose-fitting
clothing or accessories.

● The system is designed to automatically
check the sensor (radar and camera)’s
functionality, within certain limitations.
The system may not detect blockage of
sensor areas covered by ice, snow or
stickers, for example. In these cases,
the system may not be able to warn the
driver properly. Be sure that you check,
clean and clear sensor areas regularly.
● In some road and traffic conditions, the
FEB with pedestrian detection system
may unexpectedly apply partial braking.
When acceleration is necessary, depress the accelerator pedal to override
the system.
● Excessive noise will interfere with the
warning chime sound, and the chime
may not be heard.

● The system performance may degrade
in the following conditions:
o The vehicle is driven on a slippery
road.
o The vehicle is driven on a slope.
o Excessively heavy baggage is loaded
in the rear seat or the trunk room of
your vehicle.

Starting and driving 5-81

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE
Condition A:
In the following conditions, the FEB with pedestrian detection system warning light blinks and
the system will be turned off automatically.
● The radar sensor picks up interference from
another radar source.
● The camera area of windshield is misted or
frozen.
● Strong light is shining from the front.
● The cabin temperature is over approximately
104°F [40°C] in direct sunlight.
● The camera area of windshield glass is continuously covered with dirt, etc.
Action to take
When the above conditions no longer exist, the
FEB with pedestrian detection system will resume automatically.

LSD2717

5-82 Starting and driving

NOTE:

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION

When the inside of the windshield on camera area is misted or frozen, it will take a
period of time to remove it after the A/C
turns on. If dirt appears on this area, it is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer.

If the FEB with pedestrian detection system malfunctions, it will be turned off automatically, a
chime will sound, the FEB system warning light
(orange) will illuminate and the warning message
[Malfunction] will appear in the vehicle information display.

Condition B:

Action to take

In the following conditions, the FEB system warning light will illuminate and the system will be
turned off automatically and the “Unavailable:
Front Radar Obstruction” warning message will
appear in the vehicle information display.

If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop the
vehicle in a safe location, turn the engine off and
restart the engine. If the warning light continues
to illuminate, have the FEB with pedestrian detection system checked. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

● The sensor area of the front bumper is covered with dirt or is obstructed.
Action to take
If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop the
vehicle in a safe place, place the shift lever in the
P (Park) position and turn the engine off. Clean
the radar sensor area of front bumper or the
camera area of windshield with a soft cloth, and
restart the engine. If the warning light continues
to illuminate, have the FEB system checked. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.

LSD2711

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The radar sensor is located behind the lower
A is
grille of the front bumper. The camera 䊊
located on the upper side of the windshield.
To keep the FEB with pedestrian detection system operating properly, be sure to observe the
following:
● Always keep sensor areas of the front bumper and windshield clean.
● Do not strike or damage the areas around
the sensors (ex. Bumper, windshield).

Starting and driving 5-83

● Do not cover or attach stickers, or install any
accessory near the sensors. This could
block sensor signals, and/or cause failure or
malfunction.
● Do not attach metallic objects near the radar
sensor (brush guard, etc.). This could cause
failure or malfunction.
● Do not place reflective materials, such as
white paper or a mirror, on the instrument
panel. The reflection of sunlight may adversely affect the camera unit’s detection
capability.
● Do not alter, remove or paint the front bumper. Before customizing or restoring the
front bumper, it is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer.

5-84 Starting and driving

2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
FCC Warning
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For Canada
Model: ARS4–B
IC: 4135A-ARS4B
FCC ID: OAYARS4B
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Industry Canada
licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference,
and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation of
the device.

Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils
radio
exempts
de
licence.
L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. L’appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. L’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter
tout brouillage radioélectrique subi,
même si le brouillage est susceptible
d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.
Radio frequency radiation exposure information:
This equipment complies with FCC and IC
radiation exposure limits set forth for an
uncontrolled environment.
This equipment should be installed and
operated with minimum distance of 30 cm
between the radiator and your body.
This transmitter must not be co-located or
operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites
d’exposition aux rayonnements IC établies
pour un environnement non contrôlé.

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE
Cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé
avec un minimum de 30 cm de distance
entre la source de rayonnement et votre
corps.
FCC Notice
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

CAUTION
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),
follow these recommendations to obtain
maximum engine performance and ensure
the future reliability and economy of your
new vehicle. Failure to follow these recommendations may result in shortened
engine
life
and
reduced
engine
performance.
● Avoid driving for long periods at constant
speed, either fast or slow, and do not run the
engine over 4,000 RPM.
● Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.
● Avoid quick starts.
● Avoid hard braking as much as possible.
● Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 mi
(805 km). Your engine, axle or other parts
could be damaged.

FUEL EFFICIENT DRIVING TIPS
Follow these easy-to-use Fuel Efficient Driving
Tips to help you achieve the most fuel economy
from your vehicle.
1. Use Smooth Accelerator and Brake
Pedal Application
● Avoid rapid starts and stops.
● Use smooth, gentle accelerator and
brake application whenever possible.
● Maintain constant speed while commuting and coast whenever possible.
2. Maintain Constant Speed
● Look ahead to try and anticipate and minimize stops.
● Synchronizing your speed with traffic
lights allows you to reduce your number
of stops.
● Maintaining a steady speed can minimize
red light stops and improve fuel efficiency.

Starting and driving 5-85

3. Use Air Conditioning (A/C) at Higher
Vehicle Speeds
● Below 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more efficient to open windows to cool the vehicle
due to reduced engine load.
● Above 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more efficient to use A/C to cool the vehicle due to
increased aerodynamic drag.
● Recirculating the cool air in the cabin
when the A/C is on reduces cooling load.
4. Drive at Economical Speeds and Distances
● Observing the speed limit and not exceeding 60 mph (97 km/h) (where legally
allowed) can improve fuel efficiency due
to reduced aerodynamic drag.
● Maintaining a safe following distance behind other vehicles reduces unnecessary
braking.
● Safely monitoring traffic to anticipate
changes in speed permits reduced braking and smooth acceleration changes.
● Select a gear range suitable to road conditions.

5-86 Starting and driving

5. Use Cruise Control
● Using cruise control during highway driving helps maintain a steady speed.
● Cruise control is particularly effective in
providing fuel savings when driving on flat
terrains.
6. Plan for the Shortest Route
● Utilize a map or navigation system to determine the best route to save time.
7. Avoid Idling
● Shutting off your engine when safe for
stops exceeding 30–60 seconds saves
fuel and reduces emissions.
8. Buy an Automated Pass for Toll Roads
● Automated passes permit drivers to use
special lanes to maintain cruising speed
through the toll and avoid stopping and
starting.
9. Winter Warm Up
● Limit idling time to minimize impact to fuel
economy.
● Vehicles typically need no more than
30 seconds of idling at start-up to effectively circulate the engine oil before driving.

● Your vehicle will reach its ideal operating
temperature more quickly while driving
versus idling.
10. Keeping your Vehicle Cool
● Park your vehicle in a covered parking
area or in the shade whenever possible.
● When entering a hot vehicle, opening the
windows will help to reduce the inside
temperature faster, resulting in reduced
demand on your A/C system.

INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY
● Keep your engine tuned up.
● Follow the recommended scheduled maintenance.
● Keep the tires inflated to the correct pressure. Low tire pressure increases tire wear
and lowers fuel economy.
● Keep all the wheels in correct alignment.
Improper alignment increases tire wear and
lowers fuel economy.
● Use the recommended viscosity engine oil.
For additional information, refer to “Engine
oil and oil filter recommendations” in the
“Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.

ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) (if so
equipped)
If any malfunction occurs in the AWD system
while the engine is running, the master warning
light will come on.
The master warning light may illuminate while
trying to free a stuck vehicle due to high powertrain oil temperature. The driving mode may
change to 2WD. AUTO mode may change to
LOCK mode before the warning light illuminates.
If the master warning light illuminates during operation, stop the vehicle with the engine idling in a
safe place immediately.
Then if the light turns off after a while, you can
continue driving.
A large difference between the diameters of the
front and rear wheels will make the warning light
illuminate. Pull off the road in a safe area and idle
the engine. Check that all tire sizes are the same,
tire pressure is correct, and the tires are not worn.

CAUTION
● If the warning light remains on after the
above operation, have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

● If the warning light comes on while driving, there may be a malfunction in the
AWD system.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible. It
is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
● The powertrain may be damaged if you
continue driving with the warning light
illuminated.
● Never drive on dry, hard surface roads in
the LOCK mode, as this will overload
the powertrain and may cause a serious
malfunction.

WARNING
● For AWD equipped vehicles, do not attempt to raise two wheels off the
ground and shift the transmission to
any drive or reverse position with the
engine running. Doing so may result in
drivetrain damage or unexpected vehicle movement which could result in
serious vehicle damage or personal
injury.

Starting and driving 5-87

● Do not attempt to test an AWD
equipped vehicle on a 2–wheel dynamometer (such as the dynamometers
used by some states for emissions testing) or similar equipment even if the
other two wheels are raised off the
ground. Make sure that you inform the
test facility personnel that your vehicle
is equipped with AWD before it is
placed on a dynamometer. Using the
wrong test equipment may result in
drive train damage or unexpected vehicle movement which could result in
serious vehicle damage or personal
injury.

LOCK mode:
The AWD LOCK indicator light will illuminate.
AUTO mode:
The AWD LOCK indicator light will turn off.

LIC2645

AWD LOCK SWITCH OPERATIONS
The AWD LOCK switch is located on the lower
side of the instrument panel. This switch is used
to select the AUTO or LOCK mode depending on
the driving conditions.

5-88 Starting and driving

AWD mode

Wheels driven

AUTO

Distribution of torque to
the front and rear wheels
changes automatically,
depending on road conditions encountered [100:0]
←→ [50:50]. This results
in improved driving
stability. *1

For driving on paved or
slippery roads.

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) *2,
*3

For driving on rough
roads.

LOCK

AWD LOCK indicator light

Use conditions

*1 When the rotation difference between the front and rear wheels is large, the AWD mode may change
from AUTO to LOCK for a while, however, this is not a malfunction.
*2 The LOCK mode will change to AUTO mode automatically when the vehicle has been driven at a
high speed. The AWD LOCK indicator light turns off.
*3 LOCK mode will automatically be canceled when the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position.

● The AWD torque distribution between the
front and rear wheels can be displayed in the
video information display.
● If the AWD LOCK switch is operated while
accelerating or decelerating, or if the ignition
switch is turned off, you may feel a jolt. This
is normal.
● The oil temperature of the powertrain parts
will increase if the vehicle is continuously
operated under conditions where the difference in rotation between the front and rear
wheels is large (wheel slip), such as when
driving the vehicle on rough roads, through
sand or mud, or freeing a stuck vehicle. In
these cases, the master warning light illuminates and the AWD mode changes to 2WD
to protect the powertrain parts. Stop driving
with the engine idling and wait until the
warning light turns off and the AWD returns
to the AUTO mode. If the warning light remains on, have your vehicle checked as
soon as possible. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Starting and driving 5-89

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS

WARNING
● When driving straight, shift the AWD
LOCK switch to AUTO. Do not operate
the AWD LOCK switch when making a
turn or backing up.
● Do not operate the AWD LOCK switch
with the front wheel spinning.
● Engine idling speed is high while warming up the engine. Be especially careful
when starting or driving on slippery
surfaces.
● When turning the vehicle in LOCK mode
on paved roads, you may feel a braking
effect. This is a normal condition of the
AWD model.

WSD0050

WARNING
● Do not stop or park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry grass,
waste paper or rags. They may ignite
and cause a fire.
● Safe parking procedures require that
both the parking brake be set and the
transmission placed into P (Park). Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to
move unexpectedly or roll away and result in an accident. Make sure the shift
lever has been pushed as far forward as
it can go and cannot be moved without
depressing the foot brake pedal.

5-90 Starting and driving

● Never leave the engine running while
the vehicle is unattended.
● To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave
children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in
your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm
day can quickly become high enough to
cause a significant risk of injury or
death to people and pets.

POWER STEERING
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.
3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into
traffic when parked on an incline, it is a good
practice to turn the wheels as illustrated.
A:
● HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB 䊊

Turn the wheels into the curb and move the
vehicle forward until the curb side wheel
gently touches the curb.
B:
● HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB 䊊

Turn the wheels away from the curb and
move the vehicle back until the curb side
wheel gently touches the curb.
● HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO
C:
CURB 䊊
Turn the wheels toward the side of the road
so the vehicle will move away from the center of the road if it moves.
4. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK position.

WARNING
● If the engine is not running or is turned
off while driving, the power assist for
the steering will not work. Steering will
be harder to operate.
● When the power steering warning light
illuminates with the engine running,
there will be no power assist for the
steering. You will still have control of
the vehicle, but the steering will be
much harder to operate. Have the power
steering system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
The power steering system is designed to provide power assistance while driving to operate
the steering wheel with light force.
When the steering wheel is operated repeatedly
or continuously while parking or driving at a very
low speed, the power assist for the steering
wheel will be reduced. This is to prevent overheating of the power steering system and protect
it from getting damaged. While the power assist
is reduced, steering wheel operation will become
heavy. If the steering wheel operation is still performed, the power steering may stop and the
power steering warning light will illuminate. In a
safe location, stop the engine and push the igni-

tion switch to the OFF position. The temperature
of the power steering system will go down after a
period of time and the power assist level will
return to normal after starting the engine. The
power steering warning light will go off. Avoid
repeating such steering wheel operations that
could cause the power steering system to overheat.
You may hear a noise from the front of the vehicle
when the steering wheel is operated. This is a
normal operational noise and is not a malfunction.
If the power steering warning light illuminates
while the engine is running, it may indicate the
power steering system is not functioning properly
and may need servicing. Have the power steering
system checked. It is recommended that you visit
a NISSAN dealer for this service.
When the power steering warning light illuminates with the engine running, the power assist
for the steering will cease operation but you will
still have control of the vehicle. At this time,
greater steering efforts are required to operate
the steering wheel, especially in sharp turns and
at low speeds.

Starting and driving 5-91

BRAKE SYSTEM
The brake system has two separate hydraulic
circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still
have braking at two wheels.

BRAKE PRECAUTIONS
Vacuum assisted brakes
The brake booster aids braking by using engine
vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the
vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However,
greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be
required to stop the vehicle and stopping distance will be longer.

Using the brakes
Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while
driving. This will overheat the brakes, wear out the
brake pads faster, and reduce gas mileage.
To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the
brakes from overheating, reduce speed and
downshift to a lower gear before going down a
slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may
reduce braking performance and could result in
loss of vehicle control.

WARNING
● While driving on a slippery surface, be
careful when braking, accelerating or
downshifting. Abrupt braking or accelerating could cause the wheels to skid
and result in an accident.
● If the engine is not running or is turned
off while driving, the power assist for
the brakes will not work. Braking will be
harder.

Wet brakes
When the vehicle is washed or driven through
water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your
braking distance will be longer and the vehicle
may pull to one side during braking.
To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe
speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to
heat up the brakes. Do this until the brakes return
to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high
speeds until the brakes function correctly.

Parking brake break-in
Break in the parking brake shoes whenever the
stopping effect of the parking brake is weakened
or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or
drums/rotors are replaced, in order to assure the
best braking performance.

5-92 Starting and driving

This procedure is described in the vehicle service
manual. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM
(ABS)
WARNING
● The ABS is a sophisticated device, but it
cannot prevent accidents resulting from
careless or dangerous driving techniques. It can help maintain vehicle control during braking on slippery surfaces.
Remember that stopping distances on
slippery surfaces will be longer than on
normal surfaces even with ABS. Stopping distances may also be longer on
rough, gravel or snow covered roads, or
if you are using tire chains. Always
maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you. Ultimately, the
driver is responsible for safety.
● Tire type and condition may also affect
braking effectiveness.
– When replacing tires, install the
specified size of tires on all four
wheels.

– When installing a spare tire, make
sure that it is the proper size and type
as specified on the Tire and Loading
Information label. For additional information, refer to “Tire and Loading
Information label” in the “Technical
and consumer information” section
of this manual.
– For additional information, refer to
“Wheels and tires” in the “Do-ityourself” section of this manual.
The ABS controls the brakes so the wheels do
not lock during hard braking or when braking on
slippery surfaces. The system detects the rotation speed at each wheel and varies the brake
fluid pressure to prevent each wheel from locking
and sliding. By preventing each wheel from locking, the system helps the driver maintain steering
control and helps to minimize swerving and spinning on slippery surfaces.

Using the system
Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. Depress the brake pedal with firm steady pressure,
but do not pump the brakes. The ABS will operate to prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer
the vehicle to avoid obstacles.

WARNING
Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so
may result in increased stopping
distances.

Self-test feature
The ABS includes electronic sensors, electric
pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The
computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that
tests the system each time you start the engine
and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or
reverse. When the self-test occurs, you may hear
a “clunk” noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal. This is normal and does not indicate a
malfunction. If the computer senses a malfunction, it switches the ABS off and illuminates the
ABS warning light on the instrument panel. The
brake system then operates normally but without
anti-lock assistance.
If the ABS warning light illuminates during the
self-test or while driving, have the vehicle
checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.

When the ABS senses that one or more wheels
are close to locking up, the actuator rapidly applies and releases hydraulic pressure. This action
is similar to pumping the brakes very quickly. You
may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a
noise from under the hood or feel a vibration from
the actuator when it is operating. This is normal
and indicates that the ABS is operating properly.
However, the pulsation may indicate that road
conditions are hazardous and extra care is required while driving.

BRAKE ASSIST
When the force applied to the brake pedal exceeds a certain level, the brake assist is activated
generating greater braking force than a conventional brake booster even with light pedal force.

WARNING
The brake assist is only an aid to assist
braking operation and is not a collision
warning or avoidance device. It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive
safely and be in control of the vehicle at all
times.

Normal operation
The ABS operates at speeds above 3 - 6 mph (5
- 10 km/h). The speed varies according to road
conditions.

Starting and driving 5-93

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
SYSTEM
The VDC system uses various sensors to monitor
driver inputs and vehicle motion. Under certain
driving conditions, the VDC system helps to perform the following functions:
● Controls brake pressure to reduce wheel
slip on one slipping drive wheel so power is
transferred to a non slipping drive wheel on
the same axle.
● Controls brake pressure and engine output
to reduce drive wheel slip based on vehicle
speed (traction control function).
● Controls brake pressure at individual wheels
and engine output to help the driver maintain
control of the vehicle in the following conditions:
– understeer (vehicle tends to not follow
the steered path despite increased steering input)
– oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due to
certain road or driving conditions)
The VDC system can help the driver to maintain
control of the vehicle, but it cannot prevent loss of
vehicle control in all driving situations.

5-94 Starting and driving

indiWhen the VDC system operates, the
cator in the instrument panel flashes so note the
following:
● The road may be slippery or the system may
determine some action is required to help
keep the vehicle on the steered path.
● You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal
and hear a noise or vibration from under the
hood. This is normal and indicates that the
VDC system is working properly.
● Adjust your speed and driving to the road
conditions.
For additional information, refer to “Slip indicator
light” and “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF
indicator light” in the “Instruments and controls”
section of this manual.
If a malfunction occurs in the system, the
and
indicator lights come on in the instrument panel. The VDC system automatically turns
off when these indicator lights are on.
The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the VDC
indicator illuminates to indisystem. The
cate the VDC system is off.
When the VDC switch is used to turn off the
system, the VDC system still operates to prevent
one drive wheel from slipping by transferring
power to a non slipping drive wheel. The

indicator flashes if this occurs. All other VDC
indicator will not
functions are off and the
flash.
The VDC system is automatically reset to on
when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position then back to the ON position.
The computer has a built in diagnostic feature
that tests the system each time you start the
engine and move the vehicle forward or in reverse
at a slow speed. When the self-test occurs, you
may hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in
the brake pedal. This is normal and is not an
indication of a malfunction.

WARNING
● The VDC system is designed to help the
driver maintain stability but does not
prevent accidents due to abrupt steering operation at high speeds or by careless or dangerous driving techniques.
Reduce vehicle speed and be especially
careful when driving and cornering on
slippery surfaces and always drive
carefully.

● Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.
If suspension parts such as shock absorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars,
bushings and wheels are not NISSAN
recommended for your vehicle or are
extremely deteriorated, the VDC system
may not operate properly. This could
adversely affect vehicle handling perindicator may
formance, and the
and
indicaflash or both the
tor lights may illuminate.
● If brake related parts such as brake
pads, rotors and calipers are not
NISSAN recommended or are extremely
deteriorated, the VDC system may not
operate properly and both the
and the
indicator lights may
illuminate.
● If engine control related parts are not
NISSAN recommended or are extremely
and
deteriorated, both the
indicator lights may illuminate.

● When driving on extremely inclined surfaces such as higher banked corners,
the VDC system may not operate propindicator may flash or
erly and the
and
indicator
both the
lights may illuminate. Do not drive on
these types of roads.

BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION

● When driving on an unstable surface
such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or
indicator may flash or
ramp, the
and
indicator
both the
lights may illuminate. This is not a malfunction. Restart the engine after driving onto a stable surface.

● The VDC system is designed to help the
driver maintain stability but does not
prevent accidents due to abrupt steering operation at high speeds or by careless or dangerous driving techniques.
Reduce vehicle speed and be especially
careful when driving and cornering on
slippery surfaces and always drive
carefully.

● If wheels or tires other than the NISSAN
recommended ones are used, the VDC
system may not operate properly and
indicator may flash or both
the
and
indicator lights may
the
illuminate.
● The VDC system is not a substitute for
winter tires or tire chains on a snow
covered road.

During braking while driving through turns, the
system optimizes the distribution of force to each
of the front and rear wheels depending on the
radius of the turn.

WARNING

Starting and driving 5-95

CHASSIS CONTROL
● If brake related parts such as brake
pads, rotors and calipers are not
NISSAN recommended or are extremely
deteriorated, the VDC system may not
indicaoperate properly and the
tor light may illuminate.
● If engine control related parts are not
NISSAN recommended or are extremely
indicator light
deteriorated, the
may illuminate.
● When driving on extremely inclined surfaces such as higher banked corners,
the VDC system may not operate propindicator may flash or
erly and the
the
indicator light may illuminate.
Do not drive on these types of roads.
● When driving on an unstable surface
such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or
indicator may flash or
ramp, the
the
indicator light may illuminate.
This is not a malfunction. Restart the
engine after driving onto a stable
surface.

5-96 Starting and driving

● If wheels or tires other than the NISSAN
recommended ones are used, the VDC
system may not operate properly and
indicator may flash or
the
the
indicator light may illuminate.
● The VDC system is not a substitute for
winter tires or tire chains on a snow
covered road.

The chassis control is an electric control module
that includes the following functions:
● Active Trace Control
● Active Engine Brake
● Active Ride Control

ACTIVE TRACE CONTROL
This system senses driving based on the driver’s
steering and acceleration/braking patterns, and
controls brake pressure at individual wheels to
aid tracing at corners and help smooth vehicle
response.
The Active Trace Control can be set to ON (enabled) or OFF (disabled) through the vehicle
information display “Settings” page. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information
display” in the “Instruments and controls” section
of this manual.
When the VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the
VDC system, the Active Trace Control is also
turned off.

ACTIVE ENGINE BRAKE
The Active Engine Brake function adds subtle
deceleration by controlling CVT gear ratio, depending on the cornering condition calculated
from driver’s steering input and plural sensors.
This benefit is for easier traceability and less
workload of adjusting speed with braking at corners.
The Active Engine Brake also enhances braking
feel by adding subtle deceleration with CVT gear
ratio control according to driver’s brake pedal
operation
LSD2185

When the Active Trace Control is operated and
the “Chassis Control” mode is selected in the
vehicle information display, the Active Trace Control graphics are shown in the vehicle information
display. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and
controls” section of this manual.
If the chassis control warning message appears
in the vehicle information display, it may indicate
that the Active Trace Control is not functioning
properly. Have the system checked as soon as
possible. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING
The active trace control may not be effective depending on the driving condition.
Always drive carefully and attentively.

The Active Engine Brake can be set to ON (enabled) or OFF (disabled) through the vehicle
information display “Settings” page. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information
display” in the “Instruments and controls” section
of this manual.

When the Active Trace Control is operating, you
may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a
noise. This is normal and indicates that the active
trace control is operating properly.
Even if the Active Trace Control is set to OFF,
some functions will remain on to assist the driver
(for example: avoidance scenes).

Starting and driving 5-97

ACTIVE RIDE CONTROL
This system senses upper body motion (based
on wheel speed information) and controls engine
torque and four wheel brake pressure. This will
enhance ride comfort in effort to restrain uncomfortable upper body movement when passing
over undulated road surfaces. This system
comes into effect above 25 mph (40 km/h).
When the VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the
VDC system, the Active Ride Control is also
turned off.
LSD2185

When the Active Engine Brake is operated at
corners and the “Chassis Control” mode is selected in the vehicle information display, the Active Engine Brake graphics are shown in the
vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in
the “Instruments and controls” section of this
manual.
If the chassis control warning message appears
in the vehicle information display, it may indicate
that the Active Engine Brake is not functioning
properly. Have the system checked as soon as
possible. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.

5-98 Starting and driving

WARNING
The Active Engine Brake may not be effective depending on the driving condition.
Always drive carefully and attentively.
When the Active Engine Brake is operating, the
needle of the tachometer will rise up and you may
hear an engine noise. This is normal and indicates
that the active engine brake is operating properly.

HILL START ASSIST SYSTEM
When the Active Ride Control is operating, you
may hear noise and sense slight deceleration.
This is normal and indicates that the Active Ride
Control is operating properly.

LSD2186

When brake control of Active Ride Control is
operated and the “Chassis Control” mode is selected in the vehicle information display, the Active Ride Control graphics are shown in the vehicle information display. For additional
information, refer to “Vehicle information display”
in the “Instruments and controls” section of this
manual.
If the chassis control warning message appears
in the vehicle information display, it may indicate
that the Active Ride Control is not functioning
properly. Have the system checked as soon as
possible. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.

LSD2441

WARNING
● Never rely solely on the hill start assist
system to prevent the vehicle from moving backward on a hill. Always drive
carefully and attentively. Depress the
brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped
on a steep hill. Be especially careful
when stopped on a hill on frozen or
muddy roads. Failure to prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards may result
in a loss of control of the vehicle and
possible serious injury or death.

Starting and driving 5-99

COLD WEATHER DRIVING
● The hill start assist system is not designed to hold the vehicle at a standstill
on a hill. Depress the brake pedal when
the vehicle is stopped on a steep hill.
Failure to do so may cause the vehicle
to roll backwards and may result in a
collision or serious personal injury.
● The hill start assist may not prevent the
vehicle from rolling backwards on a hill
under all load or road conditions. Always be prepared to depress the brake
pedal to prevent the vehicle from rolling
backwards. Failure to do so may result
in a collision or serious personal injury.
When the vehicle is stopped on a hill, the hill start
assist system automatically keeps the brakes applied. This helps prevent the vehicle from rolling
backward in the time it takes the driver to release
the brake pedal and apply the accelerator.
Hill start assist will operate automatically under
the following conditions:
● The shift lever is shifted to a forward or
reverse gear.
● The vehicle is stopped completely on a hill
by applying the brake.

5-100 Starting and driving

The maximum holding time is two seconds. After
two seconds the vehicle will begin to roll back
and hill start assist will stop operating completely.
Hill start assist will not operate when the shift
lever is shifted into N (Neutral) or P (Park) or on a
flat and level road.

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK
To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply deicer through the key hole. If the lock becomes
frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the key
hole, or use the NISSAN Intelligent Key®.

ANTIFREEZE
In the winter when it is anticipated that the temperature will drop below 32°F (0°C), check the
antifreeze to assure proper winter protection. For
additional information, refer to “Engine cooling
system” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.

BATTERY
If the battery is not fully charged during extremely
cold weather conditions, the battery fluid may
freeze and damage the battery. To maintain maximum efficiency, the battery should be checked
regularly. For additional information, refer to “Battery” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER
If the vehicle is to be left outside without antifreeze, drain the cooling system, including the
engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle.
For additional information, refer to “Changing
engine coolant” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of
this manual.

TIRE EQUIPMENT
1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to
provide superior performance on dry pavement. However, the performance of these
tires will be substantially reduced in snowy
and icy conditions. If you operate your vehicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recommends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALL
SEASON TIRES on all four wheels. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for the tire type, size, speed rating and
availability information.
2. For additional traction on icy roads, studded
tires may be used. However, some U.S.
states and Canadian provinces prohibit their
use. Check local, state and provincial laws
before installing studded tires.
Skid and traction capabilities of studded
snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.
3. Tire chains may be used. For additional information, refer to “Tire chains” in the “Do-ityourself” section of this manual.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT
It is recommended that the following items be
carried in the vehicle during winter:
● A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove
ice and snow from the windows and wiper
blades.
● A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the
jack to give it firm support.
● A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts.
● Extra washer fluid to refill the windshieldwasher fluid reservoir.

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE
WARNING
● Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),
very cold snow or ice can be slick and
very hard to drive on. The vehicle will
have much less traction or “grip” under
these conditions. Try to avoid driving on
wet ice until the road is salted or
sanded.
● Whatever the condition, drive with caution. Accelerate and slow down with
care. If accelerating or downshifting too
fast, the drive wheels will lose even
more traction.

● Allow more stopping distance under
these conditions. Braking should be
started sooner than on dry pavement.
● Allow greater following distances on
slippery roads.
● Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).
These may appear on an otherwise
clear road in shaded areas. If a patch of
ice is seen ahead, brake before reaching it. Try not to brake while on the ice,
and avoid any sudden steering
maneuvers.
● Do not use the cruise control on slippery roads.
● Snow can trap dangerous exhaust
gases under your vehicle. Keep snow
clear of the exhaust pipe and from
around your vehicle.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so
equipped)
Engine block heaters are used to assist with cold
temperature starting.
The engine block heater should be used when
the outside temperature is 20°F (-7°C) or lower.

Starting and driving 5-101

WARNING
● Do not use your engine block heater
with an ungrounded electrical system or
a 2-pronged adapter. You can be seriously injured by an electrical shock if
you use an ungrounded connection.
● Disconnect and properly store the engine block heater cord before starting
the engine. Damage to the cord could
result in an electrical shock and can
cause serious injury.
● Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged extension cord rated for at least 10 A. Plug
the extension cord into a Ground Fault
Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded
110-VAC outlet. Failure to use the
proper extension cord or a grounded
outlet can result in a fire or electrical
shock and cause serious personal
injury.

5-102 Starting and driving

To use the engine block heater:
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine block
heater cord.
3. Plug the engine block heater cord into a
grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged extension
cord.
4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault
Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110volt AC (VAC) outlet.
5. The engine block heater must be plugged in
for at least two to four hours, depending on
outside temperatures, to properly warm the
engine coolant. Use an appropriate timer to
turn the engine block heater on.
6. Before starting the engine, unplug and properly store the cord to keep it away from
moving parts.

6 In case of emergency

Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Emergency engine shut off (Push-button ignition
models only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Run-flat tires (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Changing a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Push starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Towing recommended by NISSAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) . . . . . . . . . 6-15

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
SWITCH

EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF
(Push-button ignition models only)
The flashers will operate with the ignition switch
placed in any position.

To shut off the engine in an emergency situation
while driving, perform the following procedure:

Some jurisdictions may prohibit the use of
the hazard warning flasher switch while
driving.

– Rapidly push the push-button ignition switch
three consecutive times in less than 1.5 seconds, or
– Push and hold the push-button ignition switch
for more than 2 seconds.

LIC0394

Push the switch on to warn other drivers when
you must stop or park under emergency conditions. All turn signal lights flash.

WARNING
● If stopping for an emergency, be sure to
move the vehicle well off the road.
● Do not use the hazard warning flashers
while moving on the highway unless
unusual circumstances force you to
drive so slowly that your vehicle might
become a hazard to other traffic.
● Turn signals do not work when the hazard warning flasher lights are on.

6-2 In case of emergency

FLAT TIRE
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS)
This vehicle is equipped with TPMS. It monitors
tire pressure of all tires except the spare. When
the low tire pressure warning light is lit, and the
“Tire Pressure Low — Add Air” (“Tire Pressure
Low — Visit Dealer” for vehicles equipped with
run-flat tires) warning appears in the vehicle information display, one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. If equipped, the system also displays pressure of all tires (except the
spare tire) on the display screen by sending a
signal from a sensor that is installed in each
wheel. If the vehicle is being driven with low tire
pressure, the TPMS will activate and warn you of
it by the low tire pressure warning light. This
system will activate only when the vehicle is
driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h). For
additional information, refer to “Warning lights,
indicator lights and audible reminders” in the
“Instruments and controls” section and “Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the
“Starting and driving” section of this manual.

WARNING
● Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a
pacemaker should contact the electric
medical equipment manufacturer for the
possible influences before use.
● If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates while driving, avoid sudden
steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to a
safe location and stop the vehicle as soon
as possible. Driving with under-inflated
tires may permanently damage the tires
and increase the likelihood of tire failure.
Serious vehicle damage could occur and
may lead to an accident and could result
in serious personal injury. Check the tire
pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire
pressure to the recommended COLD tire
pressure shown on the Tire and Loading
Information label to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF. If the light still
illuminates while driving after adjusting
the tire pressure, a tire may be flat or the
TPMS may be malfunctioning. If you have
a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as
soon as possible. If no tire is flat and all
tires are properly inflated, have the vehicle checked. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

● Since the spare tire is not equipped with
the TPMS, when mounted or a wheel is
replaced, tire pressure will not be indicated, the TPMS will not function and
the low tire pressure warning light will
flash for approximately 1 minute. The
light will remain on after 1 minute. Have
your tires replaced and/or TPMS system reset as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for these services.
● Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by NISSAN could affect the
proper operation of the TPMS.
● Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol
tire sealant into the tires, as this may
cause a malfunction of the tire pressure
sensors.

RUN-FLAT TIRES (if so equipped)
Run-flat tires are those tires that can be used
temporarily if they are punctured. For additional
information, refer to “Run-flat tires” in “Do-ityourself” section of this manual.
For additional information, refer to the tire safety
information in the Warranty Information Booklet.

In case of emergency 6-3

WARNING
● Although you can continue driving with
a punctured run-flat tire, remember that
vehicle handling stability is reduced,
which could lead to an accident and
personal injury. Also, driving a long distance at high speeds may damage the
tires.
● Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not drive more than
approximately 93 miles (150 km) with a
punctured run-flat tire. The actual distance the vehicle can be driven on a flat
tire depends on outside temperature,
vehicle load, road conditions and other
factors.
● Drive safely at reduced speeds. Avoid
hard cornering or braking, which may
cause you to lose control of the vehicle.
● If you detect any unusual sounds or
vibrations while driving with a punctured run-flat tire, pull off the road to a
safe location and stop the vehicle as
soon as possible. The tire may be seriously damaged and need to be
replaced.

CAUTION
● Never install tire chains on a punctured
run-flat tire, as this could damage your
vehicle.

5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and to
signal professional road assistance personnel that you need assistance.

● Avoid diving over any projection or pothole, as the clearance between the vehicle and the ground is smaller than
normal.

6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle
and stand in a safe place, away from traffic
and clear of the vehicle.

● Do not enter an automated car wash
with a punctured run-flat tire.
● Have the punctured tire inspected by a
NISSAN dealer or other authorized repair shop. Replace the tire as soon as
possible if the tire is seriously
damaged.

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE
If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions below:

Stopping the vehicle
1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and
away from traffic.
2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking
brake. Move the shift lever to P (Park).

6-4 In case of emergency

4. Turn off the engine.

WARNING
● Make sure the parking brake is securely
applied and the shift lever is shifted into
P (Park).
● Never change tires when the vehicle is
on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is
hazardous.
● Never change tires if oncoming traffic is
close to your vehicle. Wait for professional road assistance.

LCE2142

Blocks

Flat tire

Blocking wheels
Place suitable blocks at both the front and back
of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire to
prevent the vehicle from moving when it is jacked
up.

LCE2111

LIC2640

Getting the spare tire and tools (if so
equipped)

1. The jack and tool kit are located in the storage compartment to the left.

Open the rear liftgate. Remove the Divide-nHide® floor. For additional information, refer to
“Divide-n-Hide® adjustable floor” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.

2. Remove the storage door by pressing the
A simultaneously.
two release tabs 䊊

Lift the floorboard.

WARNING
Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle
may move and result in personal injury.

In case of emergency 6-5

LCE2112

LCE2247

B restraining the jack and
3. Unhook the clip 䊊
tool kit.

C
5. Remove the jack by turning the spindle 䊊
counterclockwise, relieving the pressure on
the jack.

4. Remove the tool kit.

WCE0188

6. To loosen the bolt, turn counterclockwise.
7. Once loosened, remove the bolt.
8. Remove the spare tire.
9. Once the flat tire is exchanged with the
spare tire, store the flat tire where the spare
tire was located.
10. Turn the bolt clockwise to tighten.

6-6 In case of emergency

LCE2109

Changing the spare tire with BOSE®
sub-woofer (if so equipped)
1. To loosen the bolt, turn counterclockwise.
2. Once loosened, remove the bolt.

LCE2110

3. Place the sub-woofer in the upper right corner of the cargo space, leaning against the
2nd row passenger side seat.
4. Remove the spare tire.
5. Once the flat tire is exchanged with the
spare tire, store the flat tire where the spare
was located.
6. Place the sub-woofer inside the flat tire.
7. Turn the bolt clockwise to tighten.

SCE0630

Removing wheel cover (if so
equipped)
CAUTION
Do not use your hands to pry off wheel
caps or wheel covers. Doing so could result in personal injury.
1
To remove the wheel cover, use the jack rod 䊊
as illustrated.
2 between the wheel and jack rod to
Apply cloth 䊊
prevent damaging the wheel and wheel cover.

Use caution not to scratch the wheel cover or
wheel surface.

In case of emergency 6-7

Jacking up vehicle and removing the
damaged tire
WARNING

LCE2106

● Never get under the vehicle while it is
supported only by the jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support it with safety stands.
● Use only the jack provided with your
vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use the
jack provided with your vehicle on other
vehicles. The jack is designed for lifting
only your vehicle during a tire change.
● Use the correct jack-up points. Never
use any other part of the vehicle for jack
support.
● Never jack up the vehicle more than
necessary.
● Never use blocks on or under the jack.
● Do not start or run the engine while vehicle is on the jack. It may cause the
vehicle to move. This is especially true for
vehicles with limited slip differentials.
● Do not allow passengers to stay in the
vehicle while it is on the jack.
● Never run the engine with a wheel(s) off
the ground. It may cause the vehicle to
move.

6-8 In case of emergency

SCE0002

Always refer to the proper illustrations for the
correct placement and jack-up points for your
specific vehicle model and jack type.
Carefully read the caution label attached to
the jack body and the following instructions.
1. Loosen each wheel nut 1 or 2 turns by
turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut
wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts
until the tire is off the ground.

2. Place the jack directly under the jack-up
point as illustrated so the top of the jack
contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point.
Align the jack head between the 2 notches in
the front or the rear as shown. Also fit the
groove of the jack head between the
notches as shown.

WCE0056

Installing the spare tire (if so
equipped)
The spare tire is designed for emergency
use. For additional information, refer to
“Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself”
section of this manual.

The jack should be used on firm and
level ground.

1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface between the wheel and hub.

3. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever
and rod with both hands. Carefully raise the
vehicle until the tire clears the ground. Remove the wheel nuts, and then remove the
tire.

2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten
the wheel nuts finger tight.

In case of emergency 6-9

JUMP STARTING
3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel
nuts alternately and evenly in the sequence
A ,䊊
B ,䊊
C ,䊊
D,
illustrated until they are tight (䊊
E ).
䊊
4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire
touches the ground. Then, with the wheel
nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely
A,䊊
B,䊊
C,䊊
D,
in the sequence illustrated (䊊
E
).
Lower
the
vehicle
completely.
䊊
5. Securely store the jacking equipment in the
vehicle. When storing the tool kit, it is requested to tighten the bag securely with the
attached band to prevent movement of the
tools, otherwise noise may occur.

WARNING
● Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly
tightened wheel nuts can cause the
wheel to become loose or come off.
This could cause an accident.
● Do not use oil or grease on the wheel
studs or nuts. This could cause the nuts
to become loose.
● Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven for 600 miles
(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,
etc.).

6-10 In case of emergency

As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts
to the specified torque with a torque
wrench.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
83 ft-lb (113 N·m)
The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to
specification at all times. It is recommended that wheel nuts be tightened to
specifications at each lubrication interval.
Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.
COLD pressure: After vehicle has been
parked for 3 hours or more or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km).
COLD tire pressures are shown on the tire
and loading information label affixed to the
driver side center pillar.

To start your engine with a booster battery, the
instructions and precautions below must be followed.

WARNING
● If done incorrectly, jump starting can
lead to a battery explosion, resulting in
severe injury or death. It could also
damage your vehicle.
● Explosive hydrogen gas is always present in the vicinity of the battery. Keep all
sparks and flames away from the
battery.
● Do not allow battery fluid to come into
contact with eyes, skin, clothing or
painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a corrosive sulfuric acid solution which can
cause severe burns. If the fluid should
come into contact with anything, immediately flush the contacted area with
water.
● Keep battery out of the reach of
children.
● The booster battery must be rated at
12 volts. Use of an improperly rated
battery can damage your vehicle.

● Whenever working on or near a battery,
always wear suitable eye protectors (for
example, goggles or industrial safety
spectacles) and remove rings, metal
bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean
over the battery when jump starting.
● Do not attempt to jump start a frozen
battery. It could explode and cause serious injury.
● Your vehicle has an automatic engine
cooling fan. It could come on at any
time. Keep hands and other objects
away from it.
LCE2223

WARNING
Always follow the instructions below. Failure to do so could result in damage to the
charging system and cause personal
injury.
1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle,
position the two vehicles to bring their batteries near each other.
Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.
2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift lever
to P (Park). Switch off all unnecessary electrical systems (lights, heater, air conditioner,
etc.).

3. Ensure the vent caps are level and tight.
4. Connect the jumper cables in the sequence
A,䊊
B,䊊
C,䊊
D ).
illustrated (䊊

CAUTION
● Always connect positive (⫹) to positive
(⫹) and negative (⫺) to body ground (for
example, strut mounting bolt, engine
lift bracket, etc.) — not to the battery.
● Make sure the jumper cables do not
touch moving parts in the engine compartment and that the cable clamps do
not contact any other metal.

In case of emergency 6-11

PUSH STARTING
5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and
let it run for a few minutes.
6. Keep the engine speed of the booster vehicle at about 2,000 rpm and start the engine of the vehicle being jump started.

CAUTION
Do not keep the starter motor engaged for
more than 10 seconds. If the engine does
not start right away, place the ignition
switch in the OFF position and wait 3 to
4 seconds before trying again.
7. After starting the engine, carefully disconnect the negative cable and then the positive
cable.

CAUTION

IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS

WARNING

● CVT models cannot be push-started or
tow-started. Attempting to do so may
cause transmission damage.

● Do not continue to drive if your vehicle
overheats. Doing so could cause engine
damage or a vehicle fire.

● Do not push start this vehicle. The
three-way catalyst may be damaged.

● To avoid the danger of being scalded,
never remove the radiator or coolant
reservoir cap while the engine is still
hot. When the radiator or coolant reservoir cap is removed, pressurized hot
water will spurt out, possibly causing
serious injury.
● Do not open the hood if steam is coming out.
If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an
extremely high temperature gauge reading), or if
you feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal
noise, etc. take the following steps:
1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply
the parking brake and move the shift lever to
P (Park).
Do not stop the engine.
2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all the
windows, move the heater or air conditioner
temperature control to maximum hot and fan
control to high speed.

6-12 In case of emergency

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for
steam or coolant escaping from the radiator
before opening the hood. If steam or coolant
is escaping, turn off the engine. Do not open
the hood further until no steam or coolant
can be seen.
4. Open the engine hood.

WARNING
If steam or water is coming from the engine, stand clear to prevent getting
burned.
5. Visually check drive belts for damage or
looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is
running. The radiator hoses and radiator
should not leak water. If coolant is leaking,
the water pump belt is missing or loose, or
the cooling fan does not run, stop the engine.

6. After the engine cools down, check the coolant level in the engine coolant reservoir tank
with the engine running. Add coolant to the
engine coolant reservoir tank if necessary.
Have your vehicle repaired. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.

When towing your vehicle, all jurisdictional and
local regulations for towing must be followed.
Incorrect towing equipment could damage your
vehicle. Towing instructions are available from a
NISSAN dealer. Local service operators are generally familiar with the applicable laws and procedures for towing. To assure proper towing and to
prevent accidental damage to your vehicle,
NISSAN recommends having a service operator
tow your vehicle. It is advisable to have the service operator carefully read the following precautions:

WARNING
● Never ride in a vehicle that is being
towed.
● Never get under your vehicle after it has
been lifted by a tow truck.

CAUTION
WARNING
Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,
jewelry or clothing to come into contact
with, or get caught in, engine belts or the
engine cooling fan. The engine cooling fan
can start at any time.

● When towing, make sure that the transmission, axles, steering system and
powertrain are in working condition. If
any of these conditions apply, dollies or
a flatbed tow truck must be used.
● Always attach safety chains before
towing.

In case of emergency 6-13

For additional information about towing your vehicle behind a Recreational Vehicle (RV), refer to
“Flat towing for All-Wheel drive vehicle” or “Flat
towing for front wheel drive vehicle” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this
manual.

TOWING RECOMMENDED BY
NISSAN
NISSAN recommends towing your vehicle based
upon the type of drivetrain. Please refer to the
diagrams in this section to ensure that your vehicle is properly towed.
LCE2238

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) models

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) models
NISSAN recommends that towing dollies be
used when towing your vehicle or the vehicle be
placed on a flatbed truck as illustrated.

CAUTION
DO NOT tow AWD models with any of the
wheels on the ground as this may cause
serious and expensive damage to the
powertrain.

6-14 In case of emergency

● When towing with the rear wheels on
the ground or on towing dollies, place
the ignition switch in the ON position,
and secure the steering wheel in the
straight-ahead position with a rope or
similar device.

VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck
vehicle)
WARNING

LCE2239

Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) models

Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) models
NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towed
with the driving wheels (front) off the ground or
place the vehicle on a flatbed truck as illustrated.

WARNING
● Never tow your vehicle with the front
wheels on the ground or four wheels on
the ground (forward or backward), as
this may cause serious and expensive
damage to the transmission. If it is necessary to tow the vehicle with the rear
wheels raised always use towing dollies
under the front wheels.

To avoid vehicle damage, serious personal
injury or death when recovering a stuck
vehicle:
● Contact a professional towing service
to recover the vehicle if you have any
questions regarding the recovery
procedure.
● Tow chains or cables must be attached
only to main structural members of the
vehicle.
● Do not use the vehicle tie-downs to tow
or free a stuck vehicle.
● Only use devices specifically designed
for vehicle recovery and follow the
manufacturer’s instructions.

In case of emergency 6-15

● Always pull the recovery device straight
out from the front of the vehicle. Never
pull at an angle.
● Route recovery devices so they do not
touch any part of the vehicle except the
attachment point.
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,
use a tow strap or other device designed specifically for vehicle recovery. Always follow the
manufacturer’s instructions for the recovery device.

Rocking a stuck vehicle
WARNING
● Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.
● Do not spin your tires at high speed.
This could cause them to explode and
result in serious injury. Parts of your
vehicle could also overheat and be
damaged.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,
use the following procedure:
1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)
system.
2. Make sure the area in front and behind the
vehicle is clear of obstructions.
3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear
an area around the front tires.
4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and backward.
● Shift back and forth between R (Reverse)
and D (Drive).
● Apply the accelerator as little as possible
to maintain the rocking motion.
● Release the accelerator pedal before
shifting between R (Reverse) and D
(Drive).
● Do not spin the tires above 35 mph
(55 km/h).
5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a few
tries, contact a professional towing service
to remove the vehicle.

6-16 In case of emergency

7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Removing spots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Aluminum alloy wheels (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Tire dressings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Cleaning interior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Air fresheners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Cleaning the seat tracks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Most common factors contributing to vehicle
corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Environmental factors influence the rate of
corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Protect your vehicle from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

CLEANING EXTERIOR
In order to maintain the appearance of your vehicle, it is important to take proper care of it.
To protect the paint surfaces, please wash your
vehicle as soon as you can:
● After a rainfall to prevent possible damage
from acid rain.
● After driving on coastal roads.
● When contaminants such as soot, bird droppings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs get
on the paint surface.
● When dust or mud builds up on the surface.
Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle
inside a garage or in a covered area.
When it is necessary to park outside, park in a
shady area or protect the vehicle with a body
cover.
Be careful not to scratch the paint surface
when putting on or removing the body
cover.

WASHING
Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of
water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild
soap, a special vehicle soap or general purpose
dishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm
(never hot) water.

7-2 Appearance and care

CAUTION
● Do not use car washes that use acid in
the detergent. Some car washes, especially brushless ones, use some acid for
cleaning. The acid may react with some
plastic vehicle components, causing
them to crack. This could affect their
appearance, and also could cause them
not to function properly. Always check
with your car wash to confirm that acid
is not used.
● Do not wash the vehicle with strong
household soap, strong chemical detergents, gasoline or solvents.
● Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight or while the vehicle body is hot, as
the surface may become water-spotted.
● Avoid using tight-napped or rough
cloths, such as washing mitts. Care
must be taken when removing
caked-on dirt or other foreign substances so the paint surface is not
scratched or damaged.
Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of clean
water.
Inside edges, seams and folds on the doors,
hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to

the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas
must be cleaned regularly. Take care that the
drain holes in the lower edge of the door are
open. Spray water under the body and in the
wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away
road salt.
A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle to
avoid water spots.

WAXING
Regular waxing protects the paint surface and
helps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing is
recommended to remove built-up wax residue
and to avoid a weathered appearance before
re-applying wax.
A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the
proper product.
● Wax your vehicle only after a thorough washing. Follow the instructions supplied with the
wax.
● Do not use a wax containing any abrasives,
cutting compounds or cleaners that may
damage the vehicle finish.
Machine compounding or aggressive polishing
on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the
finish or leave swirl marks.

REMOVING SPOTS
Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects,
and tree sap as quickly as possible from the
surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage or
staining. Special cleaning products are available
at a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessory
store. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for these products.

UNDERBODY
In areas where road salt is used in winter, it is
necessary to clean the underbody regularly in
order to prevent dirt and salt from building up and
causing the acceleration of corrosion on the underbody and suspension. Before the winter period and again in the spring, the underseal must
be checked and, if necessary, re-treated.

GLASS
Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film
from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to
become coated with a film after the vehicle is
parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft
cloth will easily remove this film.

CAUTION
When cleaning the inside of the windows,
do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive
cleaners or chlorine-based disinfectant
cleaners. They could damage the electrical
conductors, radio antenna elements or
rear window defroster elements.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS (if so
equipped)
Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution, especially during
winter months in areas where road salt is used. If
not removed, road salt can discolor the wheels.

CAUTION
Follow the directions below to avoid
staining or discoloring the wheels:
● Do not use a cleaner that uses strong acid
or alkali contents to clean the wheels.
● Do not apply wheel cleaners to the
wheels when they are hot. The wheel
temperature should be the same as ambient temperature.
● Rinse the wheel to completely remove
the cleaner within 15 minutes after the
cleaner is applied.

CHROME PARTS
Clean all chrome parts regularly with a nonabrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.

TIRE DRESSINGS
NISSAN does not recommend the use of tire
dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating to
the tires to help reduce discoloration of the rubber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it may
react with the coating and form a compound. This
compound may come off the tire while driving and
stain the vehicle paint.
If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the
following precautions:
● Use a water-based tire dressing. The coating on the tire dissolves more easily than
with an oil-based tire dressing.
● Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help
prevent it from entering the tire
tread/grooves (where it would be difficult to
remove).
● Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry
towel. Make sure the tire dressing is completely removed from the tire tread/grooves.
● Allow the tire dressing to dry as recommended by the tire dressing manufacturer.

Appearance and care 7-3

CLEANING INTERIOR
Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior
trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum
cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl and
leather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth dampened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a
dry, soft cloth.
Regular care and cleaning is required in order to
maintain the appearance of the leather.
Before using any fabric protector, read the manufacturer’s recommendations. Some fabric protectors contain chemicals that may stain or
bleach the seat material.
Use a cloth dampened only with water to clean
the meter and gauge lens.

WARNING
Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot
steam cleaners) on the seat. This can damage the seat or occupant classification
sensor. This can also affect the operation
of the air bag system and result in serious
personal injury.

CAUTION
● Never use benzine, thinner or any similar material.
● Small dirt particles can be abrasive and
damaging to leather surfaces and
should be removed promptly. Do not
use saddle soap, car waxes, polishes,
oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents or ammonia-based cleaners as
they may damage the leather’s natural
finish.
● Never use fabric protectors unless recommended by the manufacturer.
● Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on
meter or gauge lens covers. It may damage the lens cover.

AIR FRESHENERS
Most air fresheners use a solvent that could affect
the vehicle interior. If you use an air freshener,
take the following precautions:
● Hanging-type air fresheners can cause permanent discoloration when they contact vehicle interior surfaces. Place the air freshener in a location that allows it to hang free
and not contact an interior surface.

7-4 Appearance and care

● Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip on
the vents. These products can cause immediate damage and discoloration when
spilled on interior surfaces.
Carefully read and follow the manufacturer’s instructions before using the air fresheners.

● Properly position the mats in the floorwell using the floor mat positioning
hook. For additional information, refer
to ⴖFloor mat installationⴖ in this
section.
● Make sure the floor mat does not interfere with pedal operation.
● Periodically check the floor mats to
make sure they are properly installed.

Floor mat installation
Your vehicle is equipped with floor mat positioning hook(s). The number and shape of the floor
mat positioning hooks for each seating position
varies depending on the vehicle.
When installing Genuine NISSAN floor mats,
follow the installation instructions provided with
the mat and the following:

● After cleaning the vehicle interior,
check the floor mats to make sure they
are properly installed.
LAI2007

FLOOR MATS
WARNING

The use of Genuine NISSAN floor mats can
extend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it
easier to clean the interior. Mats should be maintained with regular cleaning and replaced if they
become excessively worn.

To avoid potential pedal interference that
may result in a collision, injury or death:
● NEVER place a floor mat on top of another floor mat in the driver front position or install them upside down or
backwards.
● Use only Genuine NISSAN floor mats, or
equivalent floor mats, that are specifically designed for use in your vehicle
model and model year.

Appearance and care 7-5

1. Position the floor mat in the floorwell so that
the floor mat grommet holes are aligned with
the hook(s).

WARNING
Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the
retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or
chemical solvents to clean the seat belts,
since these materials may severely
weaken the seat belt webbing.

2. Secure the grommet holes into the hook(s)
and ensure that the floor mat is properly
positioned.
3. Make sure the floor mat does not interfere
with pedal operation. With the ignition in the
OFF position, the selector lever in the P
(Park) position (Automatic Transmission
models) or the shift lever in the N (Neutral)
position (Manual Transmission models) fully
apply and release all pedals. The floor mat
must not interfere with pedal operation or
prevent the pedal from returning to its normal position.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for details about installing the floor mats in your
vehicle.

CLEANING THE SEAT TRACKS
CAUTION
Periodically clean the seat tracks to prevent reduction of ability to move the seats.
LAI2046

Positioning hooks
The illustration shows the location of the floor mat
positioning hooks.

SEAT BELTS
The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them
with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution.
Allow the belts to dry completely in the shade
before using them. For additional information,
refer to “Seat belt maintenance” in the “Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint
system” section of this manual.

7-6 Appearance and care

Clean periodically with a high-powered vacuum
cleaner. Dirt and debris may reduce the ability to
adjust the seat. A wet cleansing agent may be
used if necessary.

CORROSION PROTECTION
MOST COMMON FACTORS
CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE
CORROSION

Temperature

Most vehicle corrosion is caused by:

Air pollution

● NEVER remove dirt, sand or other debris from the passenger compartment
by washing it out with a hose. Remove
dirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom.

Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air
in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use accelerates the corrosion process. Road salt also accelerates the disintegration of paint surfaces.

● Never allow water or other liquids to
come in contact with electronic components inside the vehicle as this may
damage them.

● The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt
and debris in body panel sections, cavities,
and other areas.
● Damage to paint and other protective coatings caused by gravel and stone chips or
minor traffic collisions.

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS
INFLUENCE THE RATE OF
CORROSION
Moisture
Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the vehicle body underside can accelerate corrosion.
Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside
the vehicle and should be removed for drying to
avoid floor panel corrosion.

High temperatures accelerate the rate of corrosion to those parts which are not well ventilated.

PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM
CORROSION
● Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the
vehicle clean.
● Always check for minor damage to the paint
and repair it as soon as possible.
● Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors
open to avoid water accumulation.
● Check the underbody for accumulation of
sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water
as soon as possible.

CAUTION

Chemicals used for road surface de-icing are
extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion
and deterioration of underbody components
such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines,
brake cables, floor pan and fenders.
In winter, the underbody must be cleaned
periodically.
For additional protection against rust and corrosion, which may be required in some areas, it is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

Relative humidity
Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high
relative humidity, especially those areas where
the temperatures stay above freezing and where
atmospheric pollution exists and road salt is
used.

Appearance and care 7-7

MEMO

7-8 Appearance and care

8 Do-it-yourself

Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid . . . . . . . 8-9
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Windshield-washer fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Windshield-washer fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Variable voltage control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Spark plugs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Replacing spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
In-cabin microfilter (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15

Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Key fob (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
NISSAN jackknife key (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
NISSAN Intelligent Key® (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 8-24
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Fog lights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Exterior and interior lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
Tire pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
Tire labeling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
Types of tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
Changing wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS
When performing any inspection or maintenance
work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent
serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to
the vehicle. The following are general precautions which should be closely observed.

WARNING
● Park the vehicle on a level surface, apply the parking brake securely and
block the wheels to prevent the vehicle
from moving. Move the shift lever to P
(Park).
● Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF
or LOCK position when performing any
parts replacement or repairs.
● If you must work with the engine running, keep your hands, clothing, hair
and tools away from moving fans, belts
and any other moving parts.
● It is advisable to secure or remove any
loose clothing and remove any jewelry,
such as rings, watches, etc. before
working on your vehicle.
● Always wear eye protection whenever
you work on your vehicle.

8-2 Do-it-yourself

● Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic engine cooling fan. It may come
on at any time without warning, even if
the ignition switch is in the OFF position and the engine is not running. To
avoid injury, always disconnect the
negative battery cable before working
near the fan.
● If you must run the engine in an enclosed space such as a garage, be sure
there is proper ventilation for exhaust
gases to escape.
● Never get under the vehicle while it is
supported only by a jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support
it with safety stands.
● Keep smoking materials, flame and
sparks away from the fuel tank and
battery.
● Because the fuel lines on gasoline engine models are under high pressure
even when the engine is off, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for service of the fuel filter or fuel lines.

CAUTION
● Do not work under the hood while the
engine is hot. Turn the engine off and
wait until it cools down.
● Avoid contact with used engine oil and
coolant. Improperly disposed engine
oil, engine coolant and/or other vehicle
fluids can damage the environment. Always conform to local regulations for
disposal of vehicle fluid.
● Never leave the engine or Continuously
Variable Transmission (CVT) related
component harnesses disconnected
while the ignition switch is in the ON
position.
● Never connect or disconnect the battery
or any transistorized component while
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
This “ Do-it-yourself” section gives instructions
regarding only those items which are relatively
easy for an owner to perform.
You should be aware that incomplete or improper
servicing may result in operating difficulties or
excessive emissions, and could affect warranty
coverage. If in doubt about any servicing, it
is recommended that you have it done by a
NISSAN dealer.

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS
QR25DE engine

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.

Engine coolant reservoir
Engine oil filler cap
Brake fluid reservoir
Battery
Air cleaner
Fuse/Fusible link box
Radiator cap
Engine oil dipstick
Drive belt location
Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

* Engine cover removed for clarity.

LDI2809

Do-it-yourself 8-3

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
The engine cooling system is filled at the factory
with a pre-diluted mixture of 50% Genuine
NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) and
50% water to provide year-round antifreeze and
coolant protection. The antifreeze solution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Additional engine cooling system additives are not necessary.

WARNING
● Never remove the radiator or coolant
reservoir cap when the engine is hot.
Wait until the engine and radiator cool
down. Serious burns could be caused
by high pressure fluid escaping from
the radiator. For additional information
on precautions, refer to “If your vehicle
overheats” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual.
● The radiator is equipped with a pressure type radiator cap. To prevent engine damage, use only a Genuine
NISSAN radiator cap.

8-4 Do-it-yourself

CAUTION
● Never use any cooling system additives
such as radiator sealer. Additives may
clog the cooling system and cause damage to the engine, transmission and/or
cooling system.
● When adding or replacing coolant, be
sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long
Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or
equivalent. Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is pre-diluted
to provide antifreeze protection to -34°
F (-37° C). If additional freeze protection
is needed due to weather where you
operate your vehicle, add Genuine
NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant
(blue) concentrate following the directions on the container. If an equivalent
coolant other than Genuine NISSAN
Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is
used, follow the coolant manufacturer’s
instructions to maintain minimum antifreeze protection to -34° F (-37° C). The
use of other types of coolant solutions
other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent
may damage the engine cooling
system.

● The life expectancy of the factory-fill
coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or
7 years. Mixing any other type of coolant other than Genuine NISSAN Long
Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue), including Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (green), or the use
of non-distilled water will reduce the
life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant. For additional information, refer to
the ⴖMaintenance and schedulesⴖ section of this manual.

LDI2810

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT
LEVEL
Check the coolant level in the reservoir when
the engine is cold. If the coolant level is below
B , add coolant to the MAX level
the MIN level 䊊
A . If the reservoir is empty, check the coolant
䊊
level in the radiator when the engine is cold. If
there is insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the
radiator with coolant up to the filler opening and
A.
also add it to the reservoir up to the MAX level 䊊

This vehicle contains Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue). The life expectancy of
the factory-fill coolant is 105,000 miles
(168,000 km) or 7 years. Mixing any other type of
coolant or the use of non-distilled water will reduce the life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant.
For additional information, refer to the ⬙Maintenance and schedules⬙ section of this manual.

Improper servicing can result in reduced
heater performance and engine overheating.

If the cooling system frequently requires
coolant, have it checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.

● Never remove the radiator or engine
coolant reservoir cap when the engine
is hot. Serious burns could be caused by
high pressure fluid escaping from the
radiator.

For additional information on the location of the
engine coolant reservoir, refer to “Engine compartment check locations” in this section.

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT
A NISSAN dealer can change the engine coolant.
The service procedure can be found in the
NISSAN Service Manual.

WARNING
● To avoid the danger of being scalded,
never change the coolant when the engine is hot.

● Avoid direct skin contact with used
coolant. If skin contact is made, wash
thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as
soon as possible.
● Keep coolant out of the reach of children and pets.
Engine coolant must be disposed of properly.
Check your local regulations.

Do-it-yourself 8-5

ENGINE OIL

CAUTION
Oil level should be checked regularly. Operating the engine with an insufficient
amount of oil can damage the engine, and
such damage is not covered by warranty.

LDI2811

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply
the parking brake.
2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches
operating temperature.
3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than
10 minutes for the oil to drain back into
the oil pan.
4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Reinsert it all the way.

8-6 Do-it-yourself

LDI2812

5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil
level. It should be between the H (High) and
B . This is the normal operL (Low) marks 䊊
ating oil level range. If the oil level is below
A , remove the oil filler cap
the L (Low) mark 䊊
and pour recommended oil through the
C.
opening. Do not overfill 䊊
6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.
It is normal to add some oil between oil
maintenance intervals or during the
break-in period, depending on the severity
of operating conditions.

A by turning it
3. Remove the oil filler cap 䊊
counterclockwise.

4. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug
B.
䊊

B with a wrench by
5. Remove the drain plug 䊊
turning it counterclockwise and completely
drain the oil.

If the oil filter is to be changed, remove and
replace it at this time. For additional information, refer to “Changing engine oil filter” in
this section.
● Waste oil must be disposed of properly.
● Check your local regulations.

WARNING
● Prolonged and repeated contact with
used engine oil may cause skin cancer.
LDI2813

CHANGING ENGINE OIL
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply
the parking brake.
2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches
operating temperature, then turn it off.

● Try to avoid direct skin contact with
used oil. If skin contact is made, wash
thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as
soon as possible.
● Keep used engine oil out of reach of
children.

CAUTION
Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine
oil may be hot.
6. Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a new
washer. Securely tighten the drain plug with
a wrench. Do not use excessive force.
Drain plug tightening torque:
25 ft-lb (34 N·m)
7. Refill engine with recommended oil through
the oil filler opening, then install the oil filler
cap securely.
For additional information on drain and refill
capacity,
refer
to
“Recommended
fluids/lubricants and capacities” in the
“Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.
The drain and refill capacity depends on the
oil temperature and drain time. Use these
specifications for reference only. Always use
the dipstick to determine when the proper
amount of oil is in the engine.
8. Start the engine. Check for leakage around
the drain plug and oil filter. Correct as required.
9. Turn the engine off and wait more than
10 minutes. Check the oil level with the
dipstick. Add engine oil if necessary.

Do-it-yourself 8-7

A from the right engine pro4. Remove pins 䊊
tector located inside right wheel well, reB with an
move protector. Remove oil filter 䊊
oil filter wrench by turning it counterclockwise. Then remove the oil filter by turning it
by hand.

CAUTION
Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine
oil may be hot.
5. Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface with
a clean rag.

CAUTION
● Be sure to remove any old gasket
material remaining on the sealing
surface of the engine. Failure to do
so could lead to an oil leak and engine damage.

LDI2814

CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply
the parking brake.
2. Turn the engine off.
B.
3. Place a large drain pan under the oil filter 䊊

8-8 Do-it-yourself

● The dipstick must be inserted in
place to prevent oil spillage from the
dipstick hole when filling the engine
with oil.

6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean
engine oil.
7. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resistance
is felt, then tighten an additional 2/3 turn.
8. Start the engine and check for leakage
around the oil filter. Correct as required.
9. Turn the engine off and wait more than
10 minutes. Check the oil level. Add engine
oil if necessary.

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE
TRANSMISSION (CVT) FLUID

BRAKE FLUID

CAUTION

● NISSAN recommends using Genuine
NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 (or equivalent)
ONLY in NISSAN CVTs. Do not mix with
other fluids.

Do not spill the fluid on any painted surfaces. This will damage the paint. If fluid is
spilled, immediately wash the surface with
water.

● Do not use Automatic Transmission
Fluid (ATF) or Manual transmission
fluid in a NISSAN CVT, as it may damage
the CVT. Damage caused by the use of
fluids other than as recommended is
not covered under NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the brake
B , the brake warning
fluid is below the MIN line 䊊
light will illuminate. Add brake fluid up to the MAX
A . For additional information on brake fluid
line 䊊
type, refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricants
and capacities” in the “Technical and consumer
information” section of this manual.

● Using fluids that are not equivalent to
Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 may
also damage the CVT. Damage caused
by the use of fluids other than as recommended is not covered under NISSAN’s
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
When checking or replacement of CVT fluid is
required, it is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.

LDI2815

WARNING
● Use only new fluid from a sealed container. Old, inferior or contaminated
fluid may damage the brake system.
The use of improper fluids can damage
the brake system and affect the vehicle’s stopping ability.

If the brake fluid must be added frequently, the
brake system should be thoroughly checked. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.

● Clean the filler cap before removing.
● Brake fluid is poisonous and should be
stored carefully in marked containers
out of reach of children.

Do-it-yourself 8-9

WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID

BATTERY
Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving
conditions require an increased amount of
windshield-washer fluid.

● Keep the battery surface clean and dry.
Clean the battery with a solution of baking
soda and water.

Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze or equivalent.

● Make certain the terminal connections are
clean and securely tightened.

CAUTION

LDI2816

WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID
RESERVOIR
Fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir periodically. Add windshield-washer fluid when the low
windshield-washer fluid warning light comes on.
To fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir, lift
the cap off the reservoir and pour the windshieldwasher fluid into the reservoir opening.
Add a washer solvent to the washer for better
cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshieldwasher antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for the mixture ratio.

8-10 Do-it-yourself

● If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or
longer, disconnect the negative (-) battery
terminal cable to prevent discharge.

● Do not substitute engine antifreeze
coolant for windshield-washer fluid.
This may result in damage to the paint.

NOTE:

● Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid
reservoir with washer fluid concentrates at full strength. Some methyl alcohol based washer fluid concentrates
may permanently stain the grille if
spilled while filling the windshieldwasher reservoir.

Care should be taken to avoid situations
that can lead to potential battery discharge
and potential no-start conditions such as:
1. Installation or extended use of electronic
accessories that consume battery power
when the engine is not running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD players, etc.)

● Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with
water to the manufacturer’s recommended levels before pouring the fluid
into the windshield-washer fluid reservoir. Do not use the windshield-washer
fluid reservoir to mix the washer fluid
concentrate and water.

2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or only
driven short distances. In these cases, the
battery may need to be charged to maintain
battery health.

WARNING
● Do not expose the battery to flames, an
electrical spark or a cigarette. Hydrogen
gas generated by the battery is explosive. Explosive gases can cause blindness or injury. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics or
painted surfaces. Sulfuric acid can
cause blindness or injury. After touching a battery or battery cap, do not
touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly
wash your hands. If the acid contacts
your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately
flush with water for at least 15 minutes
and seek medical attention.
● Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in
the battery is low. Low battery fluid can
cause a higher load on the battery
which can generate heat, reduce battery
life, and in some cases lead to an
explosion.

● Keep battery out of the reach of
children.
● Do not tip the battery. Keep the vent
caps tight and the battery level.

WDI0224

Battery (Type A) (if so equipped)
1. Remove the vent caps with a screwdriver as
shown. Use a cloth to protect the battery
case.

● When working on or near a battery, always wear suitable eye protection and
remove all jewelry.
● Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.

Do-it-yourself 8-11

Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under
severe conditions require frequent checks of the
battery fluid level.

LDI2817

Battery (Type B) (if so equipped)
NOTE:
Do not try to open the top of the battery.
The Type B battery is not equipped with removable vent caps.

JUMP STARTING
LDI0302

2. Check the fluid level in each cell. If it is
necessary to add fluid, add only distilled
water to bring the level up to the bottom of
the filler opening. Do not overfill. Reinstall
the vent caps.

8-12 Do-it-yourself

If jump starting is necessary, refer to “Jump starting” in the “In case of emergency” section of this
manual. If the engine does not start by jump
starting, the battery may have to be replaced. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.

VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL
SYSTEM

DRIVE BELT
Your vehicle is equipped with a variable voltage
control system. This system measures the
amount of electrical discharge from the battery
and controls voltage generated by the generator.
The current sensor is located near the battery
along the negative battery cable. If you add electrical accessories to your vehicle, be sure to
ground them to a suitable body ground such as
the frame or engine block area.

LDI2130

LDI2132

CAUTION
● Do not ground accessories directly to
the battery terminal. Doing so will bypass the variable voltage control system and the vehicle battery may not
charge completely.
● Use electrical accessories with the engine running to avoid discharging the
vehicle battery.

QR25DE engine

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Crankshaft pulley
Drive belt automatic tensioner pulley
Water pump pulley
Generator pulley
Air conditioner compressor pulley
WARNING

Be sure the ignition switch is placed in the
OFF or LOCK position before servicing
drive belt. The engine could rotate
unexpectedly.

Do-it-yourself 8-13

SPARK PLUGS
1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusual
wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If the belt is
in poor condition or is loose, have it replaced
or adjusted. It is recommended that you visit
a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING
Be sure the engine and ignition switch are
off and that the parking brake is engaged
securely.

2. Have the belt checked regularly for condition and tension in accordance with the
maintenance schedule found in the ⬙Maintenance and schedules⬙ section of this
manual.

CAUTION
Be sure to use the correct socket to remove the spark plugs. An incorrect socket
can damage the spark plugs.
If replacement is required, it is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
SDI1895

REPLACING SPARK PLUGS
Iridium-tipped spark plugs
A
It is not necessary to replace iridium-tipped 䊊
spark plugs as frequently as conventional type
spark plugs because they last much longer. Follow the maintenance log shown in the ⬙Maintenance and schedules⬙ section of this manual. Do
not service iridium-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or regapping.

● Always replace spark plugs with recommended or equivalent ones.

8-14 Do-it-yourself

AIR CLEANER

WARNING
● Operating the engine with the air
cleaner removed can cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner not
only cleans the air, it stops the flame if
the engine backfires. If it isn’t there, and
the engine backfires, you could be
burned. Do not drive with the air cleaner
removed, and be careful when working
on the engine with the air cleaner
removed.

LDI2818

The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned and
reused. Replace it according to the maintenance
log shown in the ⬙Maintenance and schedules⬙
section of this manual.
To remove the air cleaner filter:
A and pull air
1. Push the retaining clips 䊊
B straight up to remove.
cleaner duct 䊊

LDI2819
C and move air
2. Unlatch the retaining clips 䊊
D forward.
cleaner cover 䊊

3. Remove air cleaner filter.
Follow the removal instruction in reverse order to
install air cleaner filter, air cleaner cover and air
cleaner duct.
NOTE:

● Never pour fuel into the throttle body or
attempt to start the engine with the air
cleaner removed. Doing so could result
in serious injury.

IN-CABIN MICROFILTER (if so
equipped)
The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry of airborne dust and pollen particles and reduces
some objectionable outside odors. The filter is
located behind the glove box. For additional in-

After installing a new air cleaner, make
sure the air cleaner cover and air cleaner
duct are seated correctly and all the retaining clips are latched.

Do-it-yourself 8-15

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
formation, refer to the ⬙Maintenance and Schedules⬙ section of this manual for change intervals.
If replacement is required, it is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

CLEANING
If your windshield is not clear after using the
windshield-washer or if a wiper blade chatters
when running, wax or other material may be on
the blade or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a washer
solution or a mild detergent. Your windshield is
clean if beads do not form when rinsing with clear
water.
Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked
in a washer solution or a mild detergent. Then
rinse the blades with clear water. If your windshield is still not clear after cleaning the blades
and using the wiper, replace the blades.

CAUTION
Worn windshield wiper blades can damage the windshield and impair driver
vision.

LDI2476

REPLACING
Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.
To replace the windshield wiper blades, follow
the procedure below:
1. When ignition switch is ON or within
60 seconds after placing the ignition switch
from the ON to OFF position, place the
windshield wiper and washer lever into the
OFF position.
2. Rapidly lift the windshield wiper and washer
A upwards twice within 0.5 seconds.
lever 䊊
This action will cause the wipers to automatically take the service position.

8-16 Do-it-yourself

LDI2785

LDI2477

3. Once the wipers are in the service position,
C.
push the release tab 䊊

7. Finally, lift the windshield wiper and washer
D once and relever to the mist position 䊊
lease. This action will cause the wipers to
resume the set position.

B and remove.
4. Move the wiper blade down 䊊

5. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper
arm until it clicks into place.
6. Rotate the wiper blade so the dimple is in the
groove.

CAUTION
● After wiper blade replacement, return
the wiper arm to its original position;
otherwise it may be damaged when the
hood is opened.
● Make sure the wiper blades contact the
glass; otherwise the arms may be damaged from wind pressure.

LDI2820

If you wax the surface of the hood, be careful not
F . This may
to let wax get into the washer nozzle 䊊
cause clogging or improper windshield-washer
operation. If wax gets into the nozzle, remove it
E .
with a needle or small pin 䊊

Do-it-yourself 8-17

BRAKES
Rear window wiper blade
If checking or replacement is required, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.

If the brakes do not operate properly, have the
brakes checked. It is recommended that you visit
a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Self-adjusting brakes
Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting
brakes.
The front and rear disc-type brakes self-adjust
every time the brake pedal is applied.

WARNING
Have your brake system checked if the
brake pedal height does not return to normal. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.

Brake pad wear indicators
The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audible
wear indicators. When a brake pad requires replacement, a high pitched scraping or screeching sound will be heard when the vehicle is in
motion. The noise will be heard whether or not the
brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes
checked as soon as possible if the wear indicator
sound is heard.

8-18 Do-it-yourself

Under some driving or climate conditions, occasional brake squeak, squeal or other noise may
be heard. Occasional brake noise during light to
moderate stops is normal and does not affect the
function or performance of the brake system.
Proper brake inspection intervals should
be followed. For additional information regarding brake inspections, refer to the appropriate
maintenance schedule information in the ⬙Maintenance and Schedules⬙ section of this manual.

FUSES

LDI0455

LDI0457

A is used in
Two types of fuses are used. Type 䊊
the fuse boxes in the engine compartment. Type
B is used in the passenger compartment fuse
䊊
box.

A fuse is used to replace a type 䊊
B fuse,
If a type 䊊
A fuse will not be level with the fuse
the type 䊊
pocket as shown in the illustration. This will not
affect the performance of the fuse. Make sure the
fuse is installed in the fuse box securely.

A fuses are provided as spare fuses. They
Type 䊊
are stored in the passenger compartment fuse
box.
A fuses can be installed in the engine
Type 䊊
compartment and passenger compartment fuse
boxes.

B fuses cannot be installed in the underType 䊊
A fuses in the
hood fuse boxes. Only use type 䊊
underhood fuse boxes.

LDI2840

ENGINE COMPARTMENT
WARNING
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower
amperage rating than specified on the
fuse box cover. This could damage the
electrical system or electronic control
units or cause a fire
If any electrical equipment does not come on,
check for an open fuse.
For checking and replacing fuses, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.

Do-it-yourself 8-19

Fusible links
If the electrical equipment does not operate and
fuses are in good condition, check the fusible
links. If any of these fusible links are melted,
replace with only Genuine NISSAN parts.

LDI2821

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
WARNING

8-20 Do-it-yourself

NOTE:
The fuse box is located on the driver’s side
of the instrument panel.

Never use a fuse of a higher or lower
amperage rating than specified on the
fuse box cover. This could damage the
electrical system or electronic control
units or cause a fire.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight
switch are OFF.

If any electrical equipment does not operate,
check for an open fuse.

3. Locate the fuse that needs to be replaced.

2. Remove the fuse box cover with a suitable
tool. Use a cloth to avoid damaging the trim.
A.
4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller 䊊

BATTERY REPLACEMENT

CAUTION
Be careful not to allow children to swallow
the battery or removed parts.

LDI2760
B , replace it with an
5. If the fuse is open 䊊
C.
equivalent good fuse 䊊

6. Push the fuse box cover to install.
If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical
system checked and repaired, It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
LDI2219

KEY FOB (if so equipped)
Replace the battery in the key fob as follows:
A.
1. Remove the screw 䊊

Do-it-yourself 8-21

2. Insert a small screwdriver into the slit of the
B and twist it to separate the upper
corner 䊊
part from the lower part. Use a cloth to
protect the casing.
3. Replace the battery with a new one.
● Do not touch the internal circuit and electric terminals as doing so could cause a
malfunction.
● Make sure that the + side faces the botC.
tom of the case 䊊
Recommended battery: CR1620 or equivalent.
4. Close the lid and install the screw securely.
5. Operate the buttons to check its operation.
If you need assistance with replacement, it is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
If the battery is removed for any reason
other than replacement, perform step 5.
● An improperly disposed battery can
hurt the environment. Always confirm
local regulations for battery disposal.
● The key fob is water-resistant; however, if it does get wet, immediately
wipe completely dry.

8-22 Do-it-yourself

● The operational range of the key fob
extends to approximately 33 ft (10 m)
from the vehicle. This range may vary
with conditions.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may
not cause harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Note:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

For Canada:
This devise complies with Industry Canada
licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference, including interference that
may cause undesired operation of the device.

3
䊊

Replace the battery with a now one.
Recommended battery: CR2032 or equivalent.
● Do not touch the internal circuit and electric terminals as doing so could cause a
malfunction.
● Hold the battery by the edges. Holding
the battery across the contact points will
seriously deplete the storage capacity.

4
䊊

Close lid securely as illustrated.

Operate the buttons to check the operation.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
if you need assistance for replacement.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
LDI2354

NISSAN JACKKNIFE KEY (if so
equipped)

1
䊊

Replace the battery in the jackknife key as follows:
2
䊊

Hold jackknife key button side up. Insert a
small screwdriver into the slit of the corner
and twist it to separate the upper part from
the lower part. Use a cloth to protect the
casing.
Remove old battery.

Do-it-yourself 8-23

FCC Notice:

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® (if so
equipped)

Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as follows:
1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelligent Key.
A into
2. Insert a small flathead screwdriver 䊊
B of the corner and twist it to sepathe slit 䊊
rate the upper part from the lower part. Place
a cloth over the screwdriver to protect the
casing.

For Canada:
This device complies with Industry Canada
licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference, including interference that
may cause undesired operation of the device.

LDI2001

8-24 Do-it-yourself

3. Replace the battery with a new one.
Recommended battery: CR2032 or equivalent.
● Do not touch the internal circuit and electric terminals as doing so could cause a
malfunction.
● Hold the battery by the edges. Holding
the battery across the contact points will
seriously deplete the storage capacity.
● Make sure that the + side faces the bottom of the lower part.
C
4. Close the lid securely as illustrated with 䊊
D.
and 䊊

Note:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For Canada:
This device complies with Industry Canada
licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference, including interference that
may cause undesired operation of the device.

5. Operate the buttons to check the operation.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
if you need assistance for replacement.
FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may
not cause harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
LDI2637

Do-it-yourself 8-25

LIGHTS
HEADLIGHTS
For additional information on headlight bulb replacement, refer to the instructions outlined in
this section.

Replacing the halogen headlight bulb
(if so equipped)
The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type which
uses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb.
They can be replaced from inside the engine
compartment without removing the headlight assembly.
If headlight bulb replacement is required, it is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.

CAUTION
● Aiming is not necessary after replacing
the bulb. When aiming adjustment is
necessary, it is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
● Do not leave the headlight assembly
open without a bulb installed for a long
period of time. Dust, moisture, smoke,
etc. entering the headlight body may
affect bulb performance. Remove the
bulb from the headlight assembly just
before a replacement bulb is installed.

8-26 Do-it-yourself

● Only touch the base when handling the
bulb. Never touch the glass envelope.
Touching the glass could significantly
affect bulb life and/or headlight
performance.

FOG LIGHTS (if so equipped)

● High pressure halogen gas is sealed
inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may
break if the glass envelope is scratched
or the bulb is dropped.

Replacing the fog light bulb

● Use the same number and wattage as
shown in the chart.
Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the
exterior lights in the rain or in a car wash. A
temperature difference between the inside and
the outside of the lens causes the fog. This is not
a malfunction. If large drops of water collect
inside the lens, it is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for servicing.

Replacing the LED headlight bulb (if
so equipped)
If LED headlight bulb replacement is required, it is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.

For additional information on fog light bulb replacement, refer to the instructions outlined in
this section.

If bulb replacement is required, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.

CAUTION
● High pressure halogen gas is sealed
inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may
break if the glass envelope is scratched
or the bulb is dropped.
● When handling the bulb, do not touch
the glass envelope.
● Use the same number and wattage as
originally installed as shown in the
chart.
● Do not leave the bulb out of the fog light
for a long period of time as dust, moisture and smoke may enter the fog light
body and affect the performance of the
fog light.

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS
Item
Headlight assembly (Type A) (if so equipped)*
High
Low
Turn
Side marker
Headlight assembly (Type B) (if so equipped)*
High
Low
Turn
Side marker
Daytime running lights*
Front fog lights (if so equipped)*
Door mirror turn signal light
Map light*
Vanity mirror light
Room light (if so equipped)
Personal lights (if so equipped)
Cargo light*
High-mounted stop light*
Rear combination light*
Stop
Turn
Side marker
Backup (reversing) assembly*
Backup
Tail
License plate light*

Wattage (W)

Bulb No.

65
55
28/8
5

H9
H11
7444NR
W5W

—
—
28/8
—
—
35
—
—
1.8
8
8
5
—

—
—
7444NR
—
—
H8
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

5/21
21
5

W21W
WY21W
168

16
—
5

921
—
W5W

* It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for replacement.
Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information.

Do-it-yourself 8-27

1.
2
3
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.

Headlight assembly
Map light
Personal light (if so equipped)
Door mirror turn signal light
Fog light (if so equipped)
Daytime running light
Room light (if so equipped)
High mounted stoplight
License plate light
Backup (reversing) assembly
Rear combination light

WDI0263

Replacement procedures

LDI2822

8-28 Do-it-yourself

All other lights are either type A, B, C or D. When
replacing a bulb, first remove the lens, lamp
and/or cover.
Indicates bulb removal
Indicates bulb installation

WHEELS AND TIRES
If you have a flat tire, refer to “Flat tire” in
the “In case of emergency” section of this
manual.

TIRE PRESSURE
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)
WARNING
Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those
who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment
manufacturer for the possible influences before use.
This vehicle is equipped with the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). It
monitors tire pressure of all tires except
the spare. When the low tire pressure
warning light is lit and the Tire Pressure
Low - Add Air warning appears in the
vehicle information display, one or more of
your tires is significantly under-inflated. If
equipped, the system also displays pressure of all tires (except the spare tire) on

the display screen by sending a signal
from a sensor that is installed in each
wheel.

affixed to the driver side center pillar. Tire
pressures should be checked regularly
because:

The TPMS will activate only when the
vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 mph
(25 km/h). Also, this system may not detect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for
example a flat tire while driving).

● Most tires naturally lose air over time.

For additional information, refer to “Low
tire pressure warning light” in the “Instruments and controls” section, “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the
“Starting and driving” section and “Flat
tire” in the “In case of emergency” section
of this manual.

The tire pressures should be checked
when the tires are cold. The tires are
considered COLD after the vehicle has
been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate
speeds.

Tire inflation pressure
Check the tire pressures (including the
spare) often and always prior to long distance trips. The recommended tire pressure specifications are shown on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label
or the Tire and Loading Information label
under the “Cold Tire Pressure” heading.
The Tire and Loading Information label is

● Tires can lose air suddenly when
driven over potholes or other objects
or if the vehicle strikes a curb while
parking.

The TPMS with Easy Fill Tire Alert provides visual and audible signals outside
the vehicle for inflating the tires to the
recommended COLD tire pressure. For
additional information, refer to “TPMS
with Easy Fill Tire Alert” in the “Starting
and driving” section of this manual.
Incorrect tire pressure, including under inflation, may adversely affect
tire life and vehicle handling.
Do-it-yourself 8-29

WARNING
● Improperly inflated tires can fail
suddenly and cause an accident.
● The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) is located on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. The vehicle weight capacity is indicated on the Tire and
Loading Information label. Do
not load your vehicle beyond this
capacity. Overloading your vehicle may result in reduced tire
life, unsafe operating conditions
due to premature tire failure, or
unfavorable handling characteristics and could also lead to a
serious accident. Loading beyond
the specified capacity may also
result in failure of other vehicle
components.
● Before taking a long trip, or
whenever you heavily load your
vehicle, use a tire pressure gauge
to ensure that the tire pressures
are at the specified level.

8-30 Do-it-yourself

● For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important
Tire Safety Information” (US) or
“Tire
Safety
Information”
(Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

4
䊊
5
䊊
6
䊊

Original tire size: The size of the tires
originally installed on the vehicle at
the factory.
Spare tire size (if so equipped).
Vehicle load limit: Refer to “Vehicle
loading information” in the “Technical
and consumer information” section of
this manual.

LDI2737

Tire and loading information label
1
䊊

2
䊊

Seating capacity: The maximum number of occupants that can be seated
in the vehicle.
Tire size - refer to “Tire labeling” in
this section.

3
䊊

Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires to
this pressure when the tires are cold.
Tires are considered COLD after the
vehicle has been parked for 3 or more
hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) at moderate speeds. The
recommended cold tire inflation is set
by the manufacturer to provide the
best balance of tire wear, vehicle
handling, drivability, tire noise, etc.,
up to the vehicle’s GVWR.

Do-it-yourself 8-31

3. Remove the gauge.
4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge
stem and compare to the specification shown on the Tire and Loading
Information label.
5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too
much air is added, press the core of
the valve stem briefly with the tip of
the gauge stem to release pressure.
Recheck the pressure and add or
release air as needed.
LDI0393

Checking tire pressure
1. Remove the valve stem cap from the
tire.
2. Press the pressure gauge squarely
onto the valve stem. Do not press too
hard or force the valve stem sideways, or air will escape. If the hissing
sound of air escaping from the tire is
heard while checking the pressure,
reposition the gauge to eliminate this
leakage.
8-32 Do-it-yourself

6. Install the valve stem cap.
7. Check the pressure of all other tires,
including the spare.

Size
Front and Rear
Original Tire:
225/65R17 102H
Front and Rear
Original Tire:
225/65RF17
100H
Front and Rear
Original Tire:
225/60R18 100H
Spare Tire:
T155/90D17
101M
Spare Tire:
T145/90D16
106M

Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
33 psi, 230 kPa

33 psi, 230 kPa

60 psi, 420 kPa

WDI0394

Example

TIRE LABELING
Federal law requires tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This information identifies and describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also provides the tire identification number (TIN)
for safety standard certification. The TIN
can be used to identify the tire in case of a
recall.

WDI0395

Example

1 Tire size (example: P215/65R15 95H)
䊊

1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is designed for passenger vehicles (not all
tires have this information).
2. Three-digit number (215): This number gives the width in millimeters of
the tire from sidewall edge to sidewall edge.
3. Two-digit number (65): This number,
known as the aspect ratio, gives the
tire’s ratio of height to width.

4. R: The “R” stands for radial.
5. Two-digit number (15): This number
is the wheel or rim diameter in inches.
6. Two- or three-digit number (95): This
number is the tire’s load index. It is a
measurement of how much weight
each tire can support. You may not
find this information on all tires because it is not required by law.
7. H: Tire speed rating. You should not
drive the vehicle faster than the tire
speed rating.
Do-it-yourself 8-33

ers also must indicate the materials in the
tire, which include steel, nylon, polyester
and others.
4 Maximum permissible inflation pressure
䊊

This number is the greatest amount of air
pressure that should be put in the tire. Do
not exceed the maximum permissible inflation pressure.
5 Maximum load rating
䊊
LDI2786

Example

2 TIN (Tire Identification Number) for a
䊊

new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX
XXXX)

1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Department Of Transportation”. The symbol
can be placed above, below or to the
left or right of the Tire Identification
Number.
2. Two-digit code:
identification mark.

Manufacturer’s

3. Two-digit code: Tire size.
8-34 Do-it-yourself

4. Three-digit code: Tire type code
(Optional).
5. Four numbers represent the week
and year the tire was built. For example, the numbers 3103 means the
31st week of 2003. If these numbers
are missing then look on the other
sidewall of the tire.
3 Tire ply composition and material
䊊

The number of layers or plies of rubbercoated fabric in the tire. Tire manufactur-

This number indicates the maximum load
in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire. When replacing the tires
on the vehicle, always use a tire that has
the same load rating as the factory installed tire.
6 Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”
䊊

Indicates whether the tire requires an inner tube (“tube type”) or not (“tubeless”).
7 The word “radial”
䊊

The word “radial” is shown if the tire has
radial structure.
8 Manufacturer or brand name
䊊

Manufacturer or brand name is shown.

Other Tire-related Terminology

In addition to the many terms that are
defined throughout this section, Intended
Outboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall that
contains a whitewall, bears white lettering
or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or
model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same molding on the
other sidewall of the tire, or (2) the outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical
tire that has a particular side that must
always face outward when mounted on a
vehicle.

TYPES OF TIRES
WARNING
● When changing or replacing tires, be
sure all four tires are of the same type
(i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) and
construction. A NISSAN dealer may be
able to help you with information about
tire type, size, speed rating and
availability.

● Replacement tires may have a lower
speed rating than the factory equipped
tires, and may not match the potential
maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed
the maximum speed rating of the tire.
● Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by NISSAN could affect the
proper operation of the low tire pressure warning system.
● For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.
● Always use tires of the same type, size,
brand, construction and tread pattern
on all four wheels. Failure to do so may
result in a circumference difference between tires on the front and rear axles
which can cause the Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC) system to malfunction resulting in personal injury or death, excessive tire wear and may damage the
transmission, transfer case and differential gears.

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) models

CAUTION
● ONLY use spare tires specified for the
AWD model.
If excessive tire wear is found, it is recommended
that all four tires be replaced with tires of the
same size, brand, construction and tread pattern.
The tire pressure and wheel alignment should
also be checked and corrected as necessary. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.

All season tires
NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some models to provide good performance all year, including snowy and icy road conditions. All Season
tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&S
on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snow
traction than All Season tires and may be more
appropriate in some areas.

Summer tires
NISSAN specifies summer tires on some models
to provide superior performance on dry roads.
Summer tire performance is substantially reduced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not have
the tire traction rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall.

Do-it-yourself 8-35

If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy
conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of
SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four
wheels.

Snow tires
If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select
tires equivalent in size and load rating to the
original equipment tires. If you do not, it can
adversely affect the safety and handling of your
vehicle.
Generally, snow tires have lower speed ratings
than factory equipped tires and may not match
the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.
If you install snow tires, they must be the same
size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all
four wheels.
For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires
may be used. However, some U.S. states and
Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check
local, state and provincial laws before installing
studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of
studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

Run–Flat Tires (if so equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with run-flat tires and is
not equipped with a spare tire, or a jack and tool

8-36 Do-it-yourself

kit. The jack and tool kit may be purchased at the
dealer. Please consult a NISSAN dealer for additional information. You can continue driving to a
safe location even if the run-flat tires are punctured. Always use run-flat tires of the specified
size on all four wheels. Mixing tire sizes or construction may reduce vehicle handling stability. If
necessary, it is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
Frequently check the tire pressure and adjust
pressure of each tire properly. The tire pressure
can be also checked in the vehicle information
display.
It can be difficult to tell if a run-flat tire is underinflated or flat. Check the tire pressures as described in this section. If the tire becomes underinflated while driving, the low tire pressure
warning light will illuminate and the “Tire Pressure
Low- Add Air” warning appears in the vehicle
information display. If the tire becomes flat while
driving, the low tire pressure warning light and the
“Flat Tire- Visit Dealer⬙ warning will appear.
Low tire pressure:
If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the low tire pressure warning light will illuminate and the Tire Pressure Low - Add Air
warning appears in the vehicle information display.

Flat tire:
If the vehicle is being driven with one or more flat
tires, the low tire pressure warning light will illuminate continuously and a chime will sound for
10 seconds. A “Flat-Tire- Visit Dealer⬙ warning
also appears in the vehicle information display.
The chime will only sound at the first indication of
a flat tire and the warning light will illuminate
continuously. When the flat tire warning is activated, have the system reset and the tire checked
and replaced if necessary by a NISSAN dealer.
Even if the tire is inflated to the specified COLD
tire pressure, the warning light will continue to
illuminate until the system is reset by a NISSAN
dealer.
If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates
continuously and the “Flat Tire- Visit Dealer⬙
warning appears in the vehicle information display:
● Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
● Increase your following distance to allow for
increased stopping distances.
● Avoid sudden maneuvers, hard cornering
and hard braking.

WARNING
● Although you can continue driving with
a punctured run-flat tire, remember that
vehicle handling stability is reduced,
which could lead to an accident and
personal injury. Also, driving a long distance at high speeds may damage the
tire.
● Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not drive more than
approximately 93 miles (150 km) with a
punctured run-flat tire. The actual distance the vehicle can be driven on a flat
tire depends on outside temperature,
vehicle load, read conditions and other
factors.
● Drive safely at reduced speeds. Avoid
hard cornering or braking, which may
cause you to lose control of the vehicle.
● If you detect any unusual sounds or
vibrations while driving with a punctured run-flat tire, pull off the road to a
safe location and stop the vehicle as
soon as possible. The tire may be seriously damaged and need to be
replaced.

CAUTION
● Never install tire chains on a punctured
run-flat tire, as this could damage your
vehicle.
● Avoid driving over any projection or pothole, as the clearance between the vehicle and the ground is smaller than
normal.
● Do not enter an automated car wash
with a punctured run-flat tire.
● Have the punctured tire inspected by a
NISSAN dealer or other authorized repair shop. Replace the tire as soon as
possible if the tire is seriously
damaged.
● Always use tires of the same type, size,
brand, construction (bias, bias-belted
or radial), and tread pattern on all four
wheels. Failure to do so may result in a
circumference difference between tires
on the front and rear axles which will
cause excessive tire wear and may damage the transmission, transfer case and
differential gears (AWD models).
● ONLY use spare tires specified for the
AWD model.

● If excessive tire wear is found, it is recommended that all four tires be replaced with tires of the same size,
brand, construction and tread pattern.
The tire pressure and wheel alignment
should also be checked and corrected
as necessary. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.

TIRE CHAINS
Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to
location. Check the local laws before installing
tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure
they are the proper size for the tires on your
vehicle and are installed according to the chain
manufacturer’s suggestions. Use only SAE
class “S” chains. Class “S” chains are used on
vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance.
Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains are designed to meet the minimum clearances between
the tire and the closest vehicle suspension or
body component required to accommodate the
use of a winter traction device (tire chains or
cables). The minimum clearances are determined
using the factory equipped tire size. Other types
may damage your vehicle. Use chain tensioners
when recommended by the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the
tire chain must be secured or removed to prevent

Do-it-yourself 8-37

the possibility of whipping action damage to the
fenders or underbody. If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle when using tire chains. In addition, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your
vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle handling
and performance may be adversely affected.

Wheel nut tightening torque:
83 ft-lb (113 N·m)
The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to specifications at all times. It
is recommended that wheel nuts be
tightened to specification at each
tire rotation interval.

Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving with
chains in such conditions can cause damage to
the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to
some overstress.

WARNING
● After rotating the tires, check and
adjust the tire pressure.

Tire rotation

● Retighten the wheel nuts when
the vehicle has been driven for
600 miles (1,000 km) (also in
cases of a flat tire, etc.).

NISSAN recommends rotating the tires
every 5,000 miles (8,000 km).

● Do not include the spare tire in
the tire rotation.

For additional information on tire replacing procedures, refer to “Flat tire” in the “In
case of emergency” section in this
manual.

● For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important
Tire Safety Information” (US) or
“Tire
Safety
Information”
(Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

WDI0258

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES

As soon as possible, tighten the
wheel nuts to the specified torque
with a torque wrench.
8-38 Do-it-yourself

● The original tires have built-in
tread wear indicators. When the
wear indicators are visible, the
tire(s) should be replaced.
● Tires degrade with age and use.
Have tires, including the spare,
over 6 years old checked by a
qualified technician because
some tire damage may not be obvious. Replace the tires as necessary to prevent tire failure and
possible personal injury.
WDI0259

Tire wear and damage
1. Wear indicator
2. Location mark
WARNING
● Tires should be periodically inspected for wear, cracking, bulging or objects caught in the tread.
If excessive wear, cracks, bulging
or deep cuts are found, the tire(s)
should be replaced.

● Improper service of the spare tire
may result in serious personal injury. If it is necessary to repair the
spare tire, it is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
● For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important
Tire Safety Information” (US) or
“Tire
Safety
Information”
(Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

Replacing wheels and tires
When replacing a tire, use the same size, tread
design, speed rating and load carrying capacity
as originally equipped. Recommended types and
sizes are shown in “Wheels and tires” in the
“Technical and consumer information” section of
this manual.

WARNING
● The use of tires other than those recommended or the mixed use of tires of
different brands, construction (bias,
bias-belted or radial), or tread patterns
can adversely affect the ride, braking,
handling, VDC system, ground clearance, body-to-tire clearance, tire chain
clearance, speedometer calibration,
headlight aim and bumper height.
Some of these effects may lead to accidents and could result in serious personal injury.

Do-it-yourself 8-39

● For 2WD models, if your vehicle was
originally equipped with four tires that
were the same size and you are only
replacing two of the four tires, install
the new tires on the rear axle. Placing
new tires on the front axle may cause
loss of vehicle control in some driving
conditions and cause an accident and
personal injury
● If the wheels are changed for any reason, always replace with wheels which
have the same off-set dimension.
Wheels of a different off-set could
cause premature tire wear, degrade vehicle handling characteristics, affect the
VDC system and/or interference with
the brake discs/drums. Such interference can lead to decreased braking efficiency and/or early brake pad/shoe
wear. For additional information on
wheel off-set dimensions, refer to
“Wheels and tires” in the “Technical and
consumer information” section of this
manual.

● Since the spare tire is not equipped with
the TPMS, when a spare tire is mounted
or a wheel is replaced, tire pressure will
not be indicated, the TPMS will not
function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately
1 minute. The light will remain on after
1 minute. Have your tires replaced
and/or TPMS system reset as soon as
possible. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
● Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by NISSAN could affect the
proper operation of the TPMS.
● The TPMS sensor may be damaged if it
is not handled correctly. Be careful
when handling the TPMS sensor.
● When replacing the TPMS sensor, the
ID registration may be required. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for ID registration.
● Do not use a valve stem cap that is not
specified by NISSAN. The valve stem
cap may become stuck.
● Be sure that the valve stem caps are
correctly fitted. Otherwise the valve may
be clogged up with dirt and cause a
malfunction or loss of pressure.

8-40 Do-it-yourself

● Do not install a damaged or deformed
wheel or tire even if it has been repaired. Such wheels or tires could have
structural damage and could fail without warning.
● The use of retread
recommended.

tires

not

● For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

CAUTION
Always use tires of the same type, size,
brand, construction (bias, bias-belted or
radial), and tread pattern on all four
wheels. Failure to do so may result in a
circumference difference between tires on
the front and rear axles which will cause
excessive tire wear and may damage the
transmission, transfer case and differential gears (AWD models).

If excessive tire wear is found, it is recommended
that all four tires be replaced with tires of the
same size, brand, construction and tread pattern.
The tire pressure and wheel alignment should
also be checked and corrected as necessary. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.

Wheel balance
Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling
and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can get
out of balance. Therefore, they should be balanced as required.
Wheel balance service should be performed with the wheels off the vehicle.
Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle
could lead to mechanical damage.
● For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety
Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

Care of wheels
● Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle
to maintain their appearance.
● Clean the inner side of the wheels when the
wheel is changed or the underside of the
vehicle is washed.

● Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing
the wheels.
● Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or
corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of
pressure or poor seal at the tire bead.
● NISSAN recommends waxing the road
wheels to protect against road salt in areas
where it is used during winter.

Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLY
spare tire) (if so equipped)
Since the spare tire is not equipped with the
TPMS, when a spare tire is mounted (TEMPORARY USE ONLY or conventional), the TPMS
will not function.
Observe the following precautions if the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be used.
Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged or
involved in an accident:

WARNING
● The spare tire should be used for emergency use only. It should be replaced
with the standard tire at the first opportunity to avoid possible tire or differential damage.

● Drive carefully while the TEMPORARY
USE ONLY spare tire is installed. Avoid
sharp turns and abrupt braking while
driving.
● Periodically check spare tire inflation
pressure. Always keep the pressure of
the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire
at 420 kPa, 4.2 bar (60 psi).
● With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare
tire installed do not drive the vehicle at
speeds faster than 80 km/h (50 mph).
● When driving on roads covered with
snow or ice, the TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire should be used on the
rear wheels and the original tire used
on the front wheels (drive wheels).
● Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster rate
than the standard tire. Replace the
spare tire as soon as the tread wear
indicators appear.
● Do not use the spare tire on other
vehicles.
● Do not use more than one spare tire at
the same time.
● Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed.

Do-it-yourself 8-41

CAUTION
● Do not use tire chains on a TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire chains
will not fit properly and may cause damage to the vehicle.
● Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLY
spare tire is smaller than the original
tire, ground clearance is reduced. To
avoid damage to the vehicle, do not
drive over obstacles. Also, do not drive
the vehicle through an automatic car
wash since it may get caught.

8-42 Do-it-yourself

9 Maintenance and schedules

Maintenance requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Scheduled maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Where to go for service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Explanation of general maintenance items . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Emission Control System Maintenance: . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Chassis and Body Maintenance: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

Maintenance schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Additional Maintenance Items for severe
operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Standard maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Emission control system maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Chassis & body maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Maintenance under severe operating conditions. . . . . . 9-12
Severe driving conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Maintenance log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
Some day-to-day and regular maintenance is essential to maintain your vehicle good mechanical
condition, as well as its emissions and engine
performance.
It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that
the scheduled maintenance, as well as general
maintenance, is performed.

GENERAL MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
The maintenance items listed in this section are
required to be serviced at regular intervals. However under severe driving conditions, additional
or more frequent maintenance will be required.

WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICE

As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who
can ensure that your vehicle receives proper
maintenance. You are a vital link in the maintenance chain.

If maintenance service is required or your vehicle
appears to malfunction, have the systems
checked and serviced. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

GENERAL MAINTENANCE

NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists
and are kept up-to-date with the latest service
information through technical bulletins, service
tips and training programs. They are completely
qualified to work on NISSAN vehicles before
work begins.

General maintenance includes those items which
should be checked during normal day-to-day operation. They are essential for proper vehicle operation. It is your responsibility to perform these
procedures regularly as prescribed.
Performing general maintenance checks requires
minimal mechanical skill and only a few general
automotive tools.
These checks or inspections can be done by
yourself, a qualified technician or, if you prefer, a
NISSAN dealer.

9-2 Maintenance and schedules

You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer’s
service department can perform the service
needed to meet the maintenance requirements
on your vehicle.

During the normal day-to-day operation of the
vehicle, general maintenance should be performed regularly as prescribed in this section. If
you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or
smells, be sure to check for the cause or have a
NISSAN dealer do it promptly. In addition, it is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer if
you think that repairs are required.
When performing any checks or maintenance
work, closely observe the “Maintenance precautions” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.

EXPLANATION OF GENERAL
MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Additional information on the following
items with “ * ” is found in the “Do-ityourself” section of this manual.

Outside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should be
performed from time to time, unless otherwise
specified.
Doors and engine hood: Check that the doors
and engine hood operate properly. Also ensure
that all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges,
latches, latch pins, rollers and links if necessary.

Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the
hood from opening when the primary latch is
released.
When driving in areas using road salt or other
corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.
Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular basis.
Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail
lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all
operating properly and installed securely. Also
check headlight aim.
Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When checking
the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are missing,
and check for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten if
necessary.
Tire rotation*: Tires should be rotated every
5,000 miles (8,000 km).
Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge often
and always prior to long distance trips. If necessary, adjust the pressure in all tires, including the
spare, to the pressure specified. Check carefully
for damage, cuts or excessive wear.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
transmitter components: Replace the TPMS
transmitter grommet seal, valve core and cap
when the tires are replaced due to wear or age.

Wheel alignment and balance: If the vehicle
should pull to either side while driving on a
straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or
abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel
alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at
normal highway speeds, wheel balancing may be
needed.

Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smooth operation. If the brake pedal suddenly goes down
further than normal, the pedal feels spongy or the
vehicle seems to take longer to stop, have your
vehicle checked immediately. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Keep the floor mat away from the pedal.

For additional information regarding tires, refer to
“Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire
Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull the
vehicle to one side when applied.

Windshield: Clean the windshield on a regular
basis. Check the windshield at least every six
months for cracks or other damage. Have a damaged windshield repaired by a qualified repair
facility.
Windshield wiper blades*: Check for cracks
or wear if they do not wipe properly.

Inside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should be
checked on a regular basis, such as when performing scheduled maintenance, cleaning the vehicle, etc.
Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for smooth
operation and make sure the pedal does not
catch or require uneven effort. Keep the floor mat
away from the pedal.

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
P (Park) position mechanism: On a fairly
steep hill check that the vehicle is held securely
with the shift lever in the P (Park) position without
applying any brakes.
Parking brake: Check the parking brake operation regularly. The vehicle should be securely held
on a fairly steep hill with only the parking brake
applied. If the parking brake needs adjustment, it
is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
Seats: Check seat position controls such as
seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc., to ensure
they operate smoothly and all latches lock securely in every position. Check that the head
restraints/headrests move up and down
smoothly and the locks (if so equipped) hold
securely in all latched positions.

Maintenance and schedules 9-3

Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat belt
system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjusters
and retractors) operate properly and smoothly,
and are installed securely. Check the belt webbing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.
Steering wheel: Check for changes in the
steering system, such as excessive free play,
hard steering or strange noises.
Warning lights and chimes: Make sure all
warning lights and chimes are operating properly.
Windshield defroster: Check that the air
comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in
sufficient quantity when operating the heater or
air conditioner.
Windshield wiper and washer*: Check that
the wipers and washer operate properly and that
the wipers do not streak.

Under the hood and vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should be
checked periodically (for example, each time you
check the engine oil or refuel).
Battery*: Check the fluid level in each cell. The
fluid should be at the bottom of the filler opening.
Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under
severe conditions require frequent checks of the
battery fluid level.

9-4 Maintenance and schedules

NOTE:
Care should be taken to avoid situations
that can lead to potential battery discharge
and potential no-start conditions such as:
1. Installation or extended use of electronic accessories that consume battery power when the engine is not running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD
players, etc.).
2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or
only driven short distances.
In these cases, the battery may need to be
charged to maintain battery health.
Brake fluid level*: Make sure that the brake
fluid level is between the MAX and MIN lines on
the reservoir.
Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant level
when the engine is cold.
Engine drive belts*: Make sure the drive belts
are not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.
Engine oil level*: Check the level after parking
the vehicle on a level spot and turning off the
engine. Wait more than 15 minutes for the oil to
drain back into the oil pan.

Exhaust system: Make sure there are no loose
supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the
exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of
exhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaust
system inspected. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. For additional information, refer to “Exhaust gas (carbon
monoxide)” in the “Starting and driving” section of
this manual.
Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil,
water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has
been parked for a while. Water dripping from the
air conditioner after use is normal. If you should
notice any leaks or if fuel fumes are evident,
check for the cause and have it corrected immediately.
Power steering fluid level* and lines: Check
the level when the fluid is cold, with the engine
off. Check the lines for proper attachment, leaks,
cracks, etc.
Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the
radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves,
etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the
hoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or loose
connections.

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Underbody: The underbody is frequently exposed to corrosive substances such as those
used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very
important to remove these substances, otherwise rust may form on the floor pan, frame, fuel
lines and around the exhaust system. At the end
of winter, the underbody should be thoroughly
flushed with plain water, being careful to clean
those areas where mud and dirt may accumulate.
For additional information, refer to the “Appearance and care” section of this manual.
Windshield-washer fluid*: Check that there is
adequate fluid in the reservoir.

The following descriptions are provided to give
you a better understanding of the scheduled
maintenance items that should be regularly
checked or replaced. The maintenance schedule
indicates at which mileage/time intervals each
item requires service.
In addition to scheduled maintenance, your vehicle requires that some items be checked during
normal day-to-day operation. For additional information, refer to “General maintenance” in this
section.
Items marked with “*” are recommended by
NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. You are
not required to perform maintenance on these
items in order to maintain the warranties which
come with your NISSAN. Other maintenance
items and intervals are required.
When applicable, additional information can be
found in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.

NOTE:
NISSAN does not advocate the use of nonOEM approved aftermarket flushing systems and strongly advises against performing these services on a NISSAN product.
Many of the aftermarket flushing systems
use non-OEM approved chemicals or solvents, the use of which has not been validated by NISSAN.
For recommended fuel, lubricants, fluids,
grease, and refrigerant, refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities”
in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
MAINTENANCE:
Drive belts*:
Check engine drive belts for wear, fraying or
cracking and for proper tension. Replace any
damaged drive belts.
Engine air filter:
Replace at specified intervals. When driving for
prolonged periods in dusty conditions,
check/replace the filter more frequently.

Maintenance and schedules 9-5

Engine coolant*:

Fuel filter*:

Replace coolant at the specified interval. When
adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only
Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant
(blue) or equivalent with the proper mixture. (For
additional information on the proper mixture for
your area, refer to “Engine cooling system” in the
“Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.)

Periodic maintenance is not required. (in-tank
type filter)

NOTE: Mixing any other type of coolant or
the use of non-distilled water may reduce
the recommended service interval of the
coolant.

Spark plugs:

Engine oil and oil filter:

CHASSIS AND BODY
MAINTENANCE:

Replace engine oil and oil filter at the specified
intervals. For recommended oil grade and viscosity refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and
capacities” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.
Engine valve clearance*:
Inspect only if valve noise increase. Adjust valve
clearance if necessary.
Evaporative emissions control vapor lines*:
Check vapor lines for leaks or looseness. Tighten
connections or replace parts as necessary.

9-6 Maintenance and schedules

Fuel lines*:
Check the fuel hoses, piping and connections for
leaks, looseness, or deterioration. Tighten connections or replace parts as necessary.

Replace at specified intervals. Install new plugs
of the same type as originally equipped.

Brake lines and cables: Visually inspect for
proper installation. Check for chafing, cracks,
deterioration, and signs of leaking. Replace any
deteriorated or damaged parts immediately.
Brake pads and rotors: Check for wear, deterioration and fluid leaks. Replace any deteriorated
or damaged parts immediately.
Exhaust system: Visually inspect the exhaust
pipes, muffler and hangers for leaks, cracks, deterioration, and damage. Tighten connections or
replace parts as necessary.

In-cabin microfilter: Replace at specified intervals. When driving for prolonged periods in
dusty conditions, replace the filter more frequently.
Propeller shaft(s): Check for damage, looseness, and grease leakage. (AWD)
Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension parts, drive shaft boots: Check for
damage, looseness, and leakage of oil or grease.
Under severe driving conditions, inspect more
frequently.
Tire rotation: Tires should be rotated every
5,000 miles (8,000 km) according to the instructions under “Explanation of general maintenance
items” in this section. When rotating tires, check
for damage and uneven wear. Replace if necessary.
Transmission fluid/oil, differential oil,
transfer case oil: Visually inspect for signs of
leakage at specified intervals.
If towing a trailer, using a camper or car-top
carrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads:
● Replace the fluid/oil every 20,000 miles
(32,000 km) or 24 months.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
● Replace the CVT fluid every 60,000 miles
(96,000 km) or request the dealer to inspect
the fluid deterioration data using a CONSULT. If the deterioration data is more than
210000, replace the CVT fluid.
Off-Road Maintenance Check the following
items frequently whenever you drive off-road
through deep sand, mud or water:
● Brake pads and rotors
● Brake linings and drums
● Differential, transmission and transfer case
oil
● Steering linkage
● Propeller shaft(s) and front drive shafts
● Engine air filter

To help ensure smooth, safe and economical
driving, NISSAN provides two maintenance
schedules that may be used, depending upon the
conditions in which you usually drive. These
schedules contain both distance and time intervals,
up
to
120,000
miles
(192,000 km)/144 months. For most people, the
odometer reading will indicate when service is
needed. However, if you drive very little, your
vehicle should be serviced at the regular time
intervals shown in the schedule.
After
120,000
miles
(192,000 km)/144 months, continue maintenance at the same mileage/time intervals.

ADDITIONAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS
FOR SEVERE OPERATING
CONDITIONS

● Repeated short trips of less than 10 miles
(16 km) with outside temperatures remaining below freezing.
● Operating in hot weather in stop-an-go
“rush hour” traffic.
● Extensive idling and/or low speed driving for
long distances, such as police, taxi or doorto-door delivery use.
● Driving in dusty conditions.
● Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread
roads.
● Towing a trailer, using a camper or using a
car-top carrier.
NOTE:
For vehicles operated in Canada, both
standard and severe maintenance items
should be performed at every interval.

Additional maintenance items for severe
operating conditions should be performed on
vehicles that are driven under especially demanding conditions. Additional maintenance
items should be performed if you primarily operate your vehicle under the following conditions:
● Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles
(8 km).

Maintenance and schedules 9-7

STANDARD MAINTENANCE
The following tables show the standard maintenance schedule. Depending upon weather and
atmospheric conditions, varying road surfaces,
individual driving habits and vehicle usage, additional or more frequent maintenance may be required.
After
120,000
miles
(192,000 km)/144 months, continue maintenance at the same mileage/time interval.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months,
whichever comes first.
Drive belts
Air cleaner filter
EVAP vapor lines
Fuel lines
Fuel filter
Engine coolant*
Engine oil
Engine oil filter
Spark plugs
Intake and exhaust valve clearances*

9-8 Maintenance and schedules

miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months
See NOTE (1)
See NOTE (2)

5
(8)
6

10
(16)
12

15
(24)
18

20
(32)
24

I*
I*

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
25
30
35
40
(40)
(48)
(56)
(64)
30
36
42
48
I*
R
I*
I*

45
(72)
54

50
(80)
60
I*

55
(88)
66

60
(96)
72
I*
R
I*
I*

R
R

See NOTE (3)
See NOTE (4)(5)
R
R
See NOTE (6)
See NOTE (7)

R
R

R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km)

MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months,
whichever comes first.
Drive belts
Air cleaner filter
EVAP vapor lines
Fuel lines
Fuel filter
Engine coolant*
Engine oil
Engine oil filter
Spark plugs
Intake and exhaust valve clearances*

miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months
See NOTE (1)
See NOTE (2)

65
(104)
78

70
(112)
84
I*

75
(120)
90

80
(128)
96
I*
I*
I*

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
85
90
95
100
(136)
(144)
(152)
(160)
102
108
114
120
I*
I*
R
I*
I*

105
(168)
126

110
(176)
132
I*

115
(184)
138

120
(192)
144
I*
R
I*
I*

R
R

See NOTE (3)
See NOTE (4)(5)
R
R
See NOTE (6)
See NOTE (7)

R
R

R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km)

NOTE:
(1) After 40,000 miles (64,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 months. Replace the drive belts if found
damaged.
(2) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required.
(3) Periodic maintenance is not required.
(4) First replacement interval is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 84 months. After first replacement, replace every 75,000 miles (120,000 km)
or 60 months.
(5) Use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent with proper mixture ration of 50% antifreeze and 50%
demineralized or distilled water. Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of non-distilled water may reduce the life expectancy of the
factory fill coolant.
(6) Replace spark plug when the plug gap exceeds 0.055 in (1.4 mm) even if within specified periodic replacement mileage.
(7) Periodic maintenance is not required. However, if valve noise increased, inspect valve clearance.
* Maintenance items and intervals with “*” are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such
maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.

Maintenance and schedules 9-9

CHASSIS & BODY MAINTENANCE
Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace,
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months,
whichever comes first.
Brake lines and cables
Brake pads and rotors夝
Brake fluid夝
CVT fluid
Transfer fluid & differential gear oil
Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension parts夝
Tire rotation
Propeller shaft & drive shaft boots (AWD models)夝
Exhaust system夝
In-cabin microfilter
Intelligent key battery

9-10 Maintenance and schedules

miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months

See NOTE (1)
See NOTE (2)

5
(8)
6

10
(16)
12
I
I

15
(24)
18

I
I

20
(32)
24
I
I
R
I
I
I

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
25
30
35
40
(40)
(48)
(56)
(64)
30
36
42
48
I
I
I
I
R
I
I
I
I
I

45
(72)
54

50
(80)
60
I
I
I
I

55
(88)
66

60
(96)
72
I
I
R
I
I
I

See NOTE (3)
I

I
I
R
R

I
R
R

I
I

I
R
R

I
I
R
R

MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months,
whichever comes first.
Brake lines and cables
Brake pads and rotors夝
Brake fluid夝
CVT fluid
Transfer fluid & differential gear oil
Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension parts夝
Tire rotation
Propeller shaft & drive shaft boots (AWD models)夝
Exhaust system夝
In-cabin microfilter
Intelligent key battery

miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months

See NOTE (1)
See NOTE (2)

65
(104)
78

70
(112)
84
I
I

75
(120)
90

I
I

80
(128)
96
I
I
R
I
I
I

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
85
90
95
100
(136) (144) (152) (160)
102
108
114
120
I
I
I
I
R
I
I
I
I
I

105
(168)
126

110
(176)
132
I
I
I
I

115
(184)
138

120
(192)
144
I
I
R
I
I
I

See NOTE (3)
I

I
I
R
R

I
R
R

I
I

I
R
R

I
I
R
R

NOTE:
Maintenance items with “夝” should be performed more frequently according to “Maintenance under severe driving conditions”.
(1) If towing a trailer, using a camper or a car-top carrier or driving on rough or muddy roads, inspect CVT fluid deterioration at NISSAN
dealers every 60,000 miles (96,000 km), then change CVT fluid if necessary. And if the inspection is not performed, change (not just inspect)
CVT fluid every 60,000 miles (96,000 km).
(2) If towing a trailer, using a camper or a car-top, or driving on rough or muddy roads, change (not just inspect) oil at every 20,000 miles
(32,000 km) or 24 months.
(3) For additional information on tire rotation, refer to “General maintenance” in this section.

Maintenance and schedules 9-11

MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE
OPERATING CONDITIONS
The maintenance intervals shown on the preceding pages are for normal operating conditions. If
the vehicle is mainly operated under severe driving conditions as shown below, more frequent
maintenance must be performed on the following
items as shown in the table.

SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS
● Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles
(8 km).
● Repeated short trips of less than 10 miles
(16 km) with outside temperatures remaining below freezing.

● Operating in hot weather in stop-and-go
“rush hour” traffic.
Maintenance operation: Inspect = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary.
Maintenance item
Brake fluid
Brake pads & rotors
Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts
Propeller shaft & drive shaft boots (AWD models)
Exhaust system

9-12 Maintenance and schedules

Maintenance operation
Replace
Inspect
Inspect
Inspect
Inspect

● Extensive idling and/or low speed driving for
long distance, such as police, taxi or doorto-door delivery use.
● Driving in dusty conditions.
● Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread
roads.
● Towing a trailer, using a camper or using a
car-top carrier.
Maintenance interval
Every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 months
Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months
Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months
Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months
Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

MAINTENANCE LOG

5,000 Miles (8,000 km) or 6 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

10,000 Miles (16,000 km) or
12 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

15,000 Miles (24,000 km) or
18 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

20,000 Miles (32,000 km) or
24 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

25,000 Miles (40,000 km) or
30 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

30,000 Miles (48,000 km) or
36 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

35,000 Miles (56,000 km) or
42 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

40,000 Miles (64,000 km) or
48 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

45,000 Miles (72,000 km) or
54 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

Maintenance and schedules 9-13

50,000 Miles (80,000 km) or
60 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

55,000 Miles (88,000 km) or
66 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

60,000 Miles (96,000 km) or
72 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

65,000 Miles (104,000 km) or
78 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

70,000 Miles (112,000 km) or
84 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

75,000 Miles (120,000 km) or
90 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

80,000 Miles (128,000 km) or
96 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

85,000 Miles (136,000 km) or
102 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

90,000 Miles (144,000 km) or
108 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

9-14 Maintenance and schedules

95,000 Miles (152,000 km) or
114 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

100,000 Miles (160,000 km) or
120 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

105,000 Miles (168,000 km) or
126 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

110,000 Miles (176,000 km) or
132 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

115,000 Miles (184,000 km) or
138 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

120,000 Miles (192,000 km) or
144 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

Maintenance and schedules 9-15

MEMO

9-16 Maintenance and schedules

10 Technical and consumer information

Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities . . . . . . 10-2
Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Engine oil and oil filter recommendations . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil
recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
When traveling or registering in another country. . . . .10-10
Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10
Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . . . . . .10-10
Vehicle identification number
(chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10
Engine serial number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . .10-11
Emission control information label . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Tire and Loading Information label . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-12
Air conditioner specification label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-12
Installing front license plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-12

Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-13
Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-13
Vehicle load capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-14
Securing the load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-15
Loading tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-16
Measurement of weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-16
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-17
Maximum load limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-17
Towing load/specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-20
Towing safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-21
Flat towing for All–Wheel drive vehicle
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-25
Flat towing for front wheel drive vehicle
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-25
Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-26
Emission control system warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-27
Reporting safety defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-27
Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test . . . .10-28
Event Data Recorders (EDR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-29
Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order information . .10-30

RECOMMENDED FLUIDS/
LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES
The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be slightly different. When refilling, follow the procedure
described in the “Do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.
Fluid type

Capacity (approximate)
Metric
US
Imperial
Measure
Measure
Measure

Fuel

55 L

14-1/2 gal

12-1/8 gal

With oil filter change

4.6 L

4-7/8 qt

4 qt

Without oil filter
change

4.3 L

4-1/2 qt

3-3/4 qt

8.1 L

2-1/8 gal

1-3/4 gal

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid

—

Differential gear oil
Transfer oil

—
—

Brake fluid

—

Multi-purpose grease

—

Air conditioning system refrigerant

—

Engine oil*1
Drain and refill
*1: For additional information,
refer to “Engine oil” in the “Doit-yourself” section of this
manual.
Engine coolant
with reservoir

10-2 Technical and consumer information

Recommended Fluids/Lubricants

• For additional information, refer to “Fuel recommendation” in this
section.
• Genuine “Nissan Motor Oil 0W-20 SN” is recommended.
• If the above motor is not available, use an equivalent motor oil that
matches the above grade and viscosity. For additional information, refer
to “Engine oil and oil filter recommendations” in this section.
• Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or
equivalent
• Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3
• NISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 (or
equivalent) ONLY in NISSAN CVTs. Do not mix with other fluids. Using
fluids that are not equivalent to Genuine NISSAN CVT NS-3 may damage the CVT. Damage caused by the use of fluids other than as recommended is not covered under NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super GL-5 80W-90 or
equivalent conventional (non-synthetic) oil
• Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid*2 or equivalent DOT 3
*2: Available in mainland USA through a NISSAN dealer.
• NLGI No. 2 (Lithium Soap base)
• HFC-134a (R-134a)
• For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner system refrigerant
and oil recommendations” in this section.

Fluid type

Capacity (approximate)
Metric
US
Imperial
Measure
Measure
Measure

Air conditioning system oil

—

Windshield-washer fluid

1-3/8 gal

1-1/8 gal

FUEL RECOMMENDATION
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane
rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 91).

Recommended Fluids/Lubricants

• NISSAN A/C System Oil Type ND-OIL8 or exact equivalents
• For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner system refrigerant
and oil recommendations” in this section.
• Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze or equivalent

● Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your
vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed to
run on E-15 or E-85 fuel. Using E-15 or
E-85 fuel in a vehicle not specifically
designed for E-15 or E-85 fuel can adversely affect the emission control devices and systems of the vehicle. Damage caused by such fuel is not covered
by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
● Do not use fuel that contains the octane
booster methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using fuel
containing MMT may adversely affect
vehicle performance and vehicle emissions. Not all fuel dispensers are labeled to indicate MMT content, so you
may have to consult your gasoline retailer for more details. Note that Federal and California laws prohibit the use
of MMT in reformulated gasoline.

● U.S. government regulations require
ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange and
black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for
that region.

Gasoline specifications
NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meets
the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) specifications where it is available. Many of the automobile manufacturers developed this specification
to improve emission control system and vehicle
performance. Ask your service station manager if
the gasoline meets the WWFC specifications.

Reformulated gasoline
Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformulated gasolines. These gasolines are specially
designed to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSAN

Technical and consumer information 10-3

supports efforts towards cleaner air and suggests that you use reformulated gasoline when
available.

Gasoline containing oxygenates
Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxygenates such as ethanol, Methyl Tert-butyl Ether
(MTBE) and methanol with or without advertising
their presence. NISSAN does not recommend
the use of fuels of which the oxygenate content
and the fuel compatibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily determined. If in doubt, ask your
service station manager.

● E-15 fuel contains more than 10% oxygenate. E-15 fuel will adversely affect
the emission control devices and systems of the vehicle and should not be
used. Damage caused by such fuel is
not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

● The fuel should be unleaded and have
an octane rating no lower than that
recommended for unleaded gasoline.

● If a methanol blend is used, it should
contain no more than 5% methanol
(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It
should also contain a suitable amount
of appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors. If not properly formulated with appropriate cosolvents and
corrosion inhibitors, such methanol
blends may cause fuel system damage
and/or vehicle performance problems.
At this time, sufficient data is not available to ensure that all methanol blends
are suitable for use in NISSAN vehicles.

● If an oxygenate-blend other than
methanol blend is used, it should contain no more than 10% oxygenate.
(MTBE may, however, be added up to
15%.)

If any driveability problems such as engine stalling and difficult hot-starting are experienced after
using oxygenate-blend fuels, immediately
change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a
low blend of MTBE.

If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please take
the following precautions as the usage of such
fuels may cause vehicle performance problems
and/or fuel system damage.

Take care not to spill gasoline during refueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates can
cause paint damage.

10-4 Technical and consumer information

E–15 fuel
E-15 fuel is a mixture of approximately 15% fuel
ethanol and 85% unleaded gasoline. E-15 can
only be used in vehicles designed to run on E-15
fuel. Do not use E-15 in your vehicle. U.S. government regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified with small, square,
orange and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that
region.

E–85 fuel
E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel
ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-85 can
only be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do
not use E-85 in your vehicle. U.S. government
regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing
pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange
and black label with the common abbreviation or
the appropriate percentage for that region.

Fuel containing MMT
MMT, or methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl, is an octane boosting additive. NISSAN
does not recommend the use of fuel containing
MMT. Such fuel may adversely affect vehicle performance, including the emissions control system. Note that while some fuel pumps label MMT
content, not all do, so you may have to consult
your gasoline retailer for more details.

Aftermarket fuel additives
NISSAN does not recommend the use of any
aftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel injector cleaner, octane booster, intake valve deposit
removers, etc.) which are sold commercially.
Many of these additives intended for gum, varnish
or deposit removal may contain active solvents or
similar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuel
system and engine.

Octane rating tips
Using unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating lower than recommended can cause
persistent, heavy “spark knock.” (“Spark
knock” is a metallic rapping noise.) If severe, this can lead to engine damage. If you
detect a persistent heavy spark knock even
when using gasoline of the stated octane
rating, or if you hear steady spark knock
while holding a steady speed on level
roads, it is recommended that you have a
NISSAN dealer correct the condition. Failure to correct the condition is misuse of the
vehicle, for which NISSAN is not responsible.

Incorrect ignition timing may result in spark
knock, after-run and/or overheating, which may
cause excessive fuel consumption or engine
damage. If any of the above symptoms are encountered, have your vehicle checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
servicing.
However, now and then you may notice
light spark knock for a short time while
accelerating or driving up hills. This is not a
cause for concern, because you get the
greatest fuel benefit when there is light
spark knock for a short time under heavy
engine load.

Technical and consumer information 10-5

Oil viscosity
The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes
with temperature. Because of this, it is important
to select the engine oil viscosity based on the
temperatures at which the vehicle will be operated before the next oil change. Choosing an oil
viscosity other than that recommended could
cause serious engine damage.

Selecting the correct oil filter

LTI2051

ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER
RECOMMENDATIONS
Selecting the correct oil
It is essential to choose the correct grade, quality
and viscosity engine oil to ensure satisfactory
engine life and performance. For additional information, refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricants
and capacities” in this section. NISSAN recommends the use of an energy conserving oil in
order to improve fuel economy.
Select only engine oils that meet the American
Petroleum Institute (API) certification or International Lubricant Standardization and Approval

10-6 Technical and consumer information

Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE viscosity standard. These oils have the API certification mark on the front of the container. Oils which
do not have the specified quality label should not
be used as they could cause engine damage.

Oil additives
NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil
additives. The use of an oil additive is not necessary when the proper oil type is used and maintenance intervals are followed.
Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been
previously used should not be used.

Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a
high-quality Genuine NISSAN oil filter. When
replacing, use a Genuine NISSAN oil filter or its
equivalent for the reason described in “Change
intervals.”

Change intervals
The oil and oil filter change intervals for your
engine are based on the use of the specified
quality oils and filters. Using engine oil and filters
that are not of the specified quality, or exceeding
recommended oil and filter change intervals
could reduce engine life. Damage to the engine
caused by improper maintenance or use of incorrect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is not
covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.

Your engine was filled with a high-quality engine
oil when it was built. You do not have to change
the oil before the first recommended change
interval. Oil and filter change intervals depend
upon how you use your vehicle.
Operation under the following conditions may
require more frequent oil and filter changes:
● repeated short distance driving at cold outside temperatures
● driving in dusty conditions
● extensive idling
● towing a trailer
● stop and go commuting
For additional information, refer to the “Maintenance and schedules” section of this manual.

CAUTION
The use of any other refrigerant or oil will
cause severe damage to the air conditioning system and will require the replacement of all air conditioner system
components.
The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your
NISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth’s ozone
layer. Although this refrigerant does not affect the
earth’s atmosphere, certain government regulations require the recovery and recycling of any
refrigerant during automotive air conditioner system service. A NISSAN dealer has the trained
technicians and equipment needed to recover
and recycle your air conditioner system refrigerant.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
when servicing your air conditioner system.

AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
REFRIGERANT AND OIL
RECOMMENDATIONS
The air conditioner system in your NISSAN
vehicle must be charged with the refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) and NISSAN A/C
system oil Type ND-OIL8 or the exact
equivalents.

Technical and consumer information 10-7

SPECIFICATIONS
ENGINE
Model
Type
Cylinder arrangement
Bore x Stroke
Displacement
Firing order

QR25DE
Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC
4-cylinder
in (mm) 3.5 x 3.9 (89.0 x 100.0)
cu in (cm3) 151.82 (2,488)
1-3-4-2

Idle speed
CVT (in N position)
Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle speed)
CO % at idle
Spark plug
Spark plug gap (Nominal)
Camshaft operation
This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.

10-8 Technical and consumer information

No adjustment is necessary.

FXE20HE-11C
in (mm) 0.043 (1.1)
Timing chain

WHEELS AND TIRES

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Wheel type

Size

Steel

17 x 7J

Aluminum

17 x 7J
18 x 7J
19 x 7J

Tires

Size

Non Run Flat

225/65R17

Overall length
Overall width
Overall height
with All-wheel drive
with front wheel drive
Front and Rear Track
Wheelbase
Gross vehicle weight rating
Gross axle weight rating
Front
Rear

in (mm)
in (mm)

184.5 (4,686)
72.4 (1,840)

in (mm)
in (mm)
in (mm)
in (mm)

68.4 (1,738)
68.1 (1,729)
62.8 (1,595)
106.5 (2,706)

lb (kg)

Refer to the “F.M.V.S.S./C.M.
V.S.S. certification label” on
the center pillar between the
driver’s side front and rear
doors.

lb (kg)
lb (kg)

225/60R18
225/55R19
Run Flat

225/65RF17

Spare tires

Size

Spare Wheel - Steel

T145/90D16

Spare Wheel - Steel

T155/90D17

Technical and consumer information 10-9

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING
IN ANOTHER COUNTRY

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

When planning to drive your NISSAN vehicle in another country, you should first find
out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehicle’s engine.
Using fuel with an octane rating that is too low
may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles
must be operated with unleaded gasoline. Therefore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas where
appropriate fuel is not available.
When transferring the registration of your
vehicle to another country, state, province
or district, it may be necessary to modify the
vehicle to meet local laws and regulations.
The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emission control and safety standards vary according
to the country, state, province or district; therefore, vehicle specifications may differ.
When any vehicle is to be taken into another country, state, province or district and
registered, its modifications, transportation and registration are the responsibility
of the user. NISSAN is not responsible for
any inconvenience that may result.

TI1050M

LTI2270

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
(VIN) PLATE

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
(chassis number)

The vehicle identification number (VIN) plate is
located as shown. This number is the identification for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle
registration.

The vehicle identification number is located as
shown.

The VIN number is also available through the
center display screen. For additional information,
refer to your “Navigation System Owner’s
Manual”.

10-10 Technical and consumer information

WTI0096

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER
The number is stamped on the engine as shown.

WTI0099

LTI2072

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
CERTIFICATION LABEL

EMISSION CONTROL
INFORMATION LABEL

The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certification label is affixed as shown. This label contains valuable vehicle information, such as: (GVWR),
(GAWR), month and year of manufacture, (VIN),
etc. Review it carefully.

The emission control information label is attached to the underside of the hood as shown.

Technical and consumer information 10-11

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE

LTI2251

LTI2271

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION
LABEL

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION
LABEL

The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label. The label is located as
shown.

The air conditioner specification label is affixed to
the underside of the hood as shown.

10-12 Technical and consumer information

LTI2265

To mount the front license plate, attach the license plate bracket to the bumper fascia at the
location marks (small dimples) using the two
A.
provided screws 䊊

VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION

WARNING
● It is extremely dangerous to ride
in a cargo area inside a vehicle. In
a collision, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
● Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and seat
belts.
● Be sure everyone in your vehicle
is in a seat and using a seat belt
properly.

TERMS
It is important to familiarize yourself with
the following terms before loading your
vehicle:
● Curb Weight (actual weight of your
vehicle) - vehicle weight including:
standard and optional equipment, fluids, emergency tools, and spare tire
assembly. This weight does not include passengers and cargo.

● GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb
weight plus the combined weight of
passengers and cargo.
● GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) - maximum total combined
weight of the unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer
tongue load and any other optional
equipment. This information is located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
certification label.
● GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) maximum weight (load) limit specified
for the front or rear axle. This information
is
located
on
the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification
label.

● Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit,
Total load capacity - maximum total
weight limit specified of the load
(passengers and cargo) for the vehicle. This is the maximum combined
weight of occupants and cargo that
can be loaded into the vehicle. If the
vehicle is used to tow a trailer, the
trailer tongue weight must be included as part of the cargo load. This
information is located on the Tire and
Loading Information label.
● Cargo capacity - permissible weight
of cargo, the subtracted weight of
occupants from the load limit.

● GCWR (Gross Combined Weight
rating) - The maximum total weight
rating of the vehicle, passengers,
cargo, and trailer.

Technical and consumer information 10-13

VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY
Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm
that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle.
Both the GVWR and GAWR are located
on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification
label. For additional information, refer to
“Measurement of weights” in this section.
Do not exceed the load limit of your vehicle shown as “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo” on the Tire and
Loading Information label. Do not exceed
the number of occupants shown as
“Seating Capacity” on the Tire and Loading Information label.
To get “the combined weight of occupants and cargo”, add the weight of all
occupants, then add the total luggage
weight. Examples are shown in the following illustration.

LTI0152

Example

10-14 Technical and consumer information

Steps for determining correct load
limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX
kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX lbs
or XXX kg.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if the
XXX amount equals 1,400 lbs. and
there will be five 150 lb. passengers
in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400-750 (5 X 150)
= 650 lbs) or (640-340 (5 X 70) =
300 kg.)

5. Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculated in
step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm
that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle.
For additional information, refer to “Measurement of weights” in this section.
Also check tires for proper inflation pressures. For additional information, refer to
the “Tire and loading information label” in
this section.

LIC2629

Cargo area luggage hooks

SECURING THE LOAD
There are luggage hooks located in the cargo
area as shown. The hooks can be used to secure
cargo with ropes or other types of straps.
Do not apply a total load of more than
6.5 lbs. (29 N) to a single metal floor hook
when securing cargo.

Technical and consumer information 10-15

● Do not load the front and rear axle to
the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the
GVWR.

WARNING
● Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding or
shifting. Do not place cargo higher than
the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause
personal injury.
● The child restraint top tether strap may
be damaged by contact with items in
the cargo area. Secure any items in the
cargo area. Your child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision if
the top tether strap is damaged.
● Do not load your vehicle any heavier
than the GVWR or the maximum front
and rear GAWRs. If you do, parts of your
vehicle can break, tire damage could
occur, or it can change the way your
vehicle handles. This could result in loss
of control and cause personal injury.

LOADING TIPS

WARNING
● Properly secure all cargo with
ropes or straps to help prevent it
from sliding or shifting. Do not
place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could
cause personal injury.
● Do not load your vehicle any
heavier than the GVWR or the
maximum front and rear GAWRs.
If you do, parts of your vehicle can
break, tire damage could occur,
or it can change the way your
vehicle handles. This could result
in loss of control and cause personal injury.

● The GVW must not exceed GVWR
or GAWR as specified on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification
label.

10-16 Technical and consumer information

● Overloading not only can shorten
the life of your vehicle and the
tire, but can also cause unsafe
vehicle handling and longer braking distances. This may cause a
premature tire failure which
could result in a serious accident
and personal injury. Failures
caused by overloading are not
covered by the vehicle’s warranty.

MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS
Secure loose items to prevent weight
shifts that could affect the balance of your
vehicle. When the vehicle is loaded, drive
to a scale and weigh the front and the rear
wheels separately to determine axle
loads. Individual axle loads should not exceed either of the GAWR. The total of the
axle loads should not exceed the GVWR.
These ratings are given on the vehicle
certification label. If weight ratings are
exceeded, move or remove items to bring
all weights below the ratings.

TOWING A TRAILER

WARNING
Overloading or improper loading of a
trailer and its cargo can adversely affect
vehicle handling, braking and performance and may lead to accidents.

CAUTION
● Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy load
for the first 500 miles (805 km). Your
engine, axle or other parts could be
damaged.
● For the first 500 miles (805 km) that you
tow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full
throttle. This helps the engine and other
parts of your vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
Your new vehicle was designed to be used primarily to carry passengers and cargo. Remember
that towing a trailer places additional loads on
your vehicle’s engine, drive train, steering, braking and other systems.
A NISSAN Towing Guide (U.S. only) is available
on the website at www.nissanusa.com. This
guide includes information on trailer towing capability and the special equipment required for
proper towing.

MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS
Maximum trailer loads
Never allow the total trailer load to exceed the
value
specified
in
the
“Towing
Load/Specification” chart found in this section.
The total trailer load equals trailer weight plus its
cargo weight.
The maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating
(GCWR) should not exceed the value specified
in the following Towing Load/Specification Chart.

LTI2030

The Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR)
equals the combined weight of the towing vehicle
(including passengers and cargo) plus the total
trailer load. Towing loads greater than these or
using improper towing equipment could adversely affect vehicle handling, braking and performance.
The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is not
only related to the maximum trailer loads, but also
the places you plan to tow. Tow weights appropriate for level highway driving may have to be
reduced for low traction situations (for example,
on slippery boat ramps).

Technical and consumer information 10-17

Temperature conditions can also affect towing.
For example, towing a heavy trailer in high outside
temperatures on graded roads can affect engine
performance and cause overheating. The engine
protection mode, which helps reduce the chance
of engine damage, could activate and automatically decrease engine power. Vehicle speed may
decrease under high load. Plan your trip carefully
to account for trailer and vehicle load, weather
and road conditions.

WARNING
Overheating can result in reduced engine
power and vehicle speed. The reduced
speed may be lower than other traffic,
which could increase the chance of a collision. Be especially careful when driving.
If the vehicle cannot maintain a safe driving speed, pull to the side of the road in a
safe area. Allow the engine to cool and
return to normal operation. For additional
information, refer to “If your vehicle overheats” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual.

CAUTION

WTI0160

Tongue load
When using a weight carrying or a weight distributing hitch, keep the tongue load between 10 15% of the total trailer load or use the trailer
tongue load specified by the trailer manufacturer.
The tongue load must be within the maximum
tongue load limits shown in the following “Towing
Load/Specification” chart. If the tongue load becomes excessive, rearrange cargo to allow for
proper tongue load.

Vehicle damage resulting from improper
towing procedures is not covered by
NISSAN warranties.

10-18 Technical and consumer information

LTI2031

Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight
(GVW)/maximum Gross Axle Weight
(GAW)
The GVW of the towing vehicle must not exceed
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification
label. The GVW equals the combined weight of
the unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage,
hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional
equipment. In addition, front or rear GAW must
not exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
certification label.

Towing capacities are calculated assuming a
base vehicle with driver and any options required
to achieve the rating. Additional passengers,
cargo and/or optional equipment, such as the
trailer hitch, will add weight to the vehicle and
reduce your vehicle’s maximum towing capacity
and trailer tongue load.
The vehicle and trailer need to be weighed to
confirm the vehicle is within the GVWR, Front
GAWR, Rear GAWR, Gross Combined Weight
Rating (GCWR) and Towing capacity.
All vehicle and trailer weights can be measured
using platform type scales commonly found at
truck stops, highway weigh stations, building
supply centers or salvage yards.
To determine the available payload capacity for
tongue/king pin load, use the following procedure.
1. Locate
the
GVWR
on
the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.
2. Weigh your vehicle on the scale with all of
the passengers and cargo that are normally
in the vehicle when towing a trailer.
3. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the
GVWR. The remaining amount is the available maximum tongue/king pin load.

To determine the available towing capacity, use
the following procedure.
1. Find the GCWR for your vehicle on the
⬙Towing Load/Specification⬙ chart found in
this section.
2. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the
GCWR. The remaining amount is the available maximum towing capacity.
To determine the Gross Trailer Weight, weigh
your trailer on a scale with all equipment and
cargo, that are normally in the trailer when it is
towed. Make sure the Gross trailer weight is not
more than the Gross Trailer Weight Rating shown
on the trailer and is not more than the calculated
available maximum towing capacity.
Also weigh the front and rear axles on the scale to
make sure the Front Gross Axle Weight and Rear
Gross Axle Weight are not more than Front
Gross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight
on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.
The cargo in the trailer and vehicle may need to
be moved or removed to meet the specified ratings.
Example:

● Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) from
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label 7,250 lb. (3,289 kg).
● Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR)
from “Towing Load/Specification⬙ chart 15,100 lb. (6,849 kg).
● Maximum Trailer towing capacity from “Towing Load/Specification⬙ chart - 9,100 lb.
(4,128 kg).
7,250 lb. (3,289 kg)
– 6,350 lb. (2,880 kg)
= 900 lb. (409 kg)

GVWR
GVW
Available for tongue
weight

15,100 lb. (6,849 kg)

GCWR

– 6,350 lb. (2,880 kg)

GVW

= 9,123 lb. (4,138 kg)

Capacity available for
towing

900 lb. (409 kg) Available tongue weight
/ 8,750 lb. (3,969 kg)
=

Available capacity
10 % tongue weight

● Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) as weighed
on a scale - including passengers, cargo and
hitch - 6,350 lb. (2,880 kg).

Technical and consumer information 10-19

The available towing capacity may be less than
the maximum towing capacity due to the passenger and cargo load in the vehicle.
Remember to keep trailer tongue weight between 10 - 15% of the trailer weight or within the
trailer tongue load specification recommended
by the trailer manufacturer. If the tongue load
becomes excessive, rearrange the cargo to obtain the proper tongue load. Do not exceed the
maximum tongue weight specification shown in
the “Towing load/specification” chart even if the
calculated available tongue weight is greater
than 15%. If the calculated tongue weight is less
than 10%, reduce the total trailer weight to match
the available tongue weight.

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION
TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION CHART
U.S. and Canada
Maximum Towing Capacity*1

1,100 lb.

Maximum Tongue Load

110 lb.

Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating

5,291 lb.

(500 kg)
(50 kg)
(2,400 kg)
*1: The towing capacity values are calculated assuming a base vehicle with driver and any options required to achieve
the rating. Additional passengers, cargo and/or optional equipment will add weight to the vehicle and reduce your vehicle’s maximum towing capacity.

Always verify that available capacities are within
the required ratings.

10-20 Technical and consumer information

TOWING SAFETY
Trailer hitch
Your vehicle may be equipped with an optional
trailer tow package. The trailer tow package includes a receiver-type frame mounted hitch. This
hitch is rated for the maximum towing capacity of
this vehicle when the proper towing equipment is
used. Choose a proper ball mount and hitch ball
that is rated for the trailer to be towed. Genuine
NISSAN ball mounts and hitch balls are available
from a NISSAN dealer.
If your vehicle is not equipped with the optional
trailer tow package, check the towing capacity of
your bumper hitch or receiver-type frame
mounted hitch. Choose a proper hitch for your
vehicle and trailer. A Genuine NISSAN trailer
hitch is available from a NISSAN dealer. Make
sure the trailer hitch is securely attached to the
vehicle to help avoid personal injury or property
damage due to sway caused by crosswinds,
rough road surfaces or passing trucks.

Ball mount

WARNING
Trailer hitch components have specific
weight ratings. Your vehicle may be capable of towing a trailer heavier than the
weight rating of the hitch components.
Never exceed the weight rating of the
hitch components. Doing so can cause
serious personal injury or property
damage.

The hitch ball is attached to the ball mount and the
ball mount is inserted into the hitch receiver.
Choose a proper class ball mount based on the
trailer weight. Additionally, the ball mount should be
chosen to keep the trailer tongue level with the
ground.

Hitch ball

A weight carrying or “dead weight” ball mount is
one that is designed to carry the whole amount of
tongue weight and gross weight directly on the
ball mount and on the receiver.

Choose a hitch ball of the proper size and weight
rating for your trailer:
● The required hitch ball size is stamped on
most trailer couplers. Most hitch balls also
have the size printed on the top of the ball.
● Choose the proper class hitch ball based on
the trailer weight.
● The diameter of the threaded shank of the
hitch ball must be matched to the ball mount
hole diameter. The hitch ball shank should
be no more than 1/16” smaller than the hole
in the ball mount.
● The threaded shank of the hitch ball must be
long enough to be properly secured to the
ball mount. There should be at least 2
threads showing beyond the lock washer
and nut.

Weight carrying hitches

Weight distribution hitch
This type of hitch is also called a “load-leveling” or
“equalizing” hitch. A set of bars attach to the ball
mount and to the trailer to distribute the tongue
weight (hitch weight) of your trailer. Many vehicles
can’t carry the full tongue weight of a given trailer,
and need some of the tongue weight transferred
through the frame and pushing down on the front
wheels. This gives stability to the tow vehicle.
A weight-distributing hitch system (Class IV) is
recommended if you plan to tow trailers with a
maximum weight over 5,000 lbs (2,268 kg).
Check with the trailer and towing equipment
manufacturers to determine if they recommend
the use of a weight-distributing hitch system.

Technical and consumer information 10-21

NOTE:
A weight-distributing hitch system may affect the operation of trailer surge brakes. If
you are considering use of a weightdistributing hitch system with a surge
brake-equipped trailer, check with the
surge brake, hitch or trailer manufacturer
to determine if and how this can be done.
Follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer for installing and using the weightdistributing hitch system.
General set-up instructions are as follows:
1. Park unloaded vehicle on a level surface.
With the ignition on and the doors closed,
allow the vehicle to stand for several minutes
so that it can level.
2. Measure the height of a reference point on
the front and rear bumpers at the center of
the vehicle.
3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle and adjust
the hitch equalizers so that the front bumper
height is within 0 - .5 inches (0 – 13 mm) of
the reference height measured in step 2. The
rear bumper should be no higher than the
reference height measured in step 2.

WARNING
Properly adjust the weight distributing
hitch so the rear of the bumper is no
higher than the measured reference
height when the trailer is attached. If the
rear bumper is higher than the measured
reference height when loaded, the vehicle
may handle unpredictably which could
cause a loss of vehicle control and cause
serious personal injury or property
damage.

Tire pressures
● When towing a trailer, inflate the vehicle tires to the recommended cold
tire pressure indicated on the Tire
and Loading Information label.
● Trailer tire condition, size, load rating
and proper inflation pressure should
be in accordance with the trailer and
tire manufacturer’s specifications.

Sway control device

Safety chains

Sudden maneuvers, wind gusts, and buffeting
caused by other vehicles can affect trailer handling. Sway control devices may be used to help
control these affects. If you choose to use one,
contact a reputable trailer hitch supplier to make
sure the sway control device will work with the
vehicle, hitch, trailer and the trailer’s brake system. Follow the instructions provided by the
manufacturer for installing and using the sway
control device.

Always use suitable safety chains between your
vehicle and the trailer. The safety chains should
be crossed and should be attached to the hitch,
not to the vehicle bumper or axle. The safety
chains can be attached to the bumper if the hitch
ball is mounted to the bumper. Be sure to leave
enough slack in the chains to permit turning
corners.

Class I hitch
Class I trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball
mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers
of a maximum weight of 2,000 lb (907 kg).

10-22 Technical and consumer information

Trailer lights

Pre-towing tips
CAUTION

When splicing into the vehicle electrical
system, a commercially available powertype module/converter must be used to
provide power for all trailer lighting. This
unit uses the vehicle battery as a direct
power source for all trailer lights while
using the vehicle tail light, stoplight and
turn signal circuits as a signal source. The
module/converter must draw no more that
15 milliamps from the stop and tail lamp
circuits. Using a module/converter that
exceeds these power requirements may
damage the vehicle’s electrical system.
See a reputable trailer retailer to obtain
the proper equipment and to have it
installed.
Trailer lights should comply with federal and/or
local regulations. For assistance in hooking up
trailer lights, contact a NISSAN dealer or reputable trailer retailer. Vehicles equipped with the
optional trailer tow package are equipped with a
7-pin trailer harness connector. If your trailer is
equipped with a flat 4-pin connector, an adapter
will be needed to connect the trailer lights to the
vehicle. Adapters are available at auto parts
stores and hitch retailers.

● Be certain your vehicle maintains a level
position when a loaded and/or unloaded
trailer is hitched. Do not drive the vehicle if it
has an abnormal nose-up or nose-down
condition; check for improper tongue load,
overload, worn suspension or other possible
causes of either condition.
● Always secure items in the trailer to prevent
load shift while driving.
● Keep the cargo load as low as possible in
the trailer to keep the trailer center of gravity
low.
● Load the trailer so approximately 60% of the
trailer load is in the front half and 40% is in
the back half. Also make sure the load is
balanced side to side.
● Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure, vehicle tire pressure, trailer light operation, and
trailer wheel lug nuts every time you attach a
trailer to the vehicle.
● Be certain your rearview mirrors conform to
all federal, state or local regulations. If not,
install any mirrors required for towing before
driving the vehicle.

● Determine the overall height of the vehicle
and trailer so the required clearance is
known.

Trailer towing tips
In order to gain skill and an understanding of the
vehicle’s behavior, you should practice turning,
stopping and backing up in an area which is free
from traffic. Steering stability and braking performance will be somewhat different than under
normal driving conditions.
● Always secure items in the trailer to prevent
load shift while driving.
● Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a pin or
lock to prevent the coupler from inadvertently becoming unlatched.
● Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops.
● Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.
● Always drive your vehicle at a moderate
speed.
● When backing up, hold the bottom of the
steering wheel with one hand. Move your
hand in the direction in which you want the
trailer to go. Make small corrections and
back up slowly. If possible, have someone
guide you when you are backing up.

Technical and consumer information 10-23

Always block the wheels on both vehicle and
trailer when parking. Parking on a slope is not
recommended; however, if you must do so:

CAUTION
If you move the shift lever to the P (Park)
position before blocking the wheels and
applying the parking brake, transmission
damage could occur.
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
2. Have someone place blocks on the downhill
side of the vehicle and trailer wheels.
3. After the wheel blocks are in place, slowly
release the brake pedal until the blocks absorb the vehicle load.
4. Apply the parking brake.
5. Shift the transmission into P (Park).
6. Turn off the engine.
To drive away:
1. Start the vehicle.
2. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the transmission into gear.
4. Release the parking brake.

10-24 Technical and consumer information

5. Drive slowly until the vehicle and trailer are
clear from the blocks.
6. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
7. Have someone retrieve and store the blocks.
● While going downhill, the weight of the
trailer pushing on the tow vehicle may decrease overall stability. Therefore, to maintain adequate control, reduce your speed
and shift to a lower gear. Avoid long or
repeated use of the brakes when descending a hill, as this reduces their effectiveness
and could cause overheating. Shifting to a
lower gear instead provides “engine braking” and reduces the need to brake as frequently.
● If the engine coolant temperature rises to a
high temperature, refer to “If your vehicle
overheats” in the “In case of emergency”
section of this owner’s manual.
● Trailer towing requires more fuel than normal
circumstances.

● Have your vehicle serviced more often than
at intervals specified in the recommended
Maintenance Schedule in the “Maintenance
and schedules” section of this manual.
● When making a turn, your trailer wheels will
be closer to the inside of the turn than your
vehicle wheels. To compensate for this,
make a larger than normal turning radius
during the turn.
● Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely
affect vehicle/trailer handling, possibly causing vehicle sway. When being passed by
larger vehicles, be prepared for possible
changes in crosswinds that could affect vehicle handling.
Do the following if the trailer begins to sway:
1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal to
allow the vehicle to coast and steer as
straight ahead as the road conditions allow.
This combination will help stabilize the vehicle

● Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle’s first
500 miles (805 km).

– Do not correct trailer sway by steering or
applying the brakes.

● For the first 500 miles (805 km) that you do
tow, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h).

2. When the trailer sway stops, gently apply the
brakes and pull to the side of the road in a
safe area.

3. Try to rearrange the trailer load so it is balanced as described in this section.
● Be careful when passing other vehicles.
Passing while towing a trailer requires considerably more distance than normal passing. Remember, the length of the trailer must
also pass the other vehicle before you can
safely change lanes.
● Downshift the transmission to a lower gear
for engine braking when driving down steep
or long hills. This will help slow the vehicle
without applying the brakes.
● Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long
or too frequently. This could cause the
brakes to overheat, resulting in reduced
braking efficiency.
● Increase your following distance to allow for
greater stopping distances while towing a
trailer. Anticipate stops and brake gradually.
● NISSAN recommends that the cruise control not be used while towing a trailer.

● Check your hitch, trailer wiring harness connections, and trailer wheel lug nuts after
50 miles (80 km) of travel and at every break.
● When launching a boat, don’t allow the water level to go over the exhaust tail pipe or
rear bumper.
● Make sure you disconnect the trailer lights
before backing the trailer into the water or
the trailer lights may burn out.
When towing a trailer, final drive gear oil
should be replaced and transmission
oil/fluid should be changed more frequently. For additional information, refer to
the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

CAUTION
● Failure to follow these guidelines can
result in severe transmission damage.
● Never flat tow your All-wheel drive
(AWD) vehicle.
● DO NOT tow your All-wheel drive (AWD)
vehicle with any wheels on the ground.
Doing so may cause serious and expensive damage to the powertrain.
● For emergency towing procedures refer
to “Towing recommended by NISSAN”
in the “In case of emergency” section of
this manual.

FLAT TOWING FOR ALL–WHEEL
DRIVE VEHICLE (if so equipped)

FLAT TOWING FOR FRONT WHEEL
DRIVE VEHICLE (if so equipped)

Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the
ground is sometimes called flat towing. This
method is sometimes used when towing a vehicle
behind a recreational vehicle, such as a motor
home.

● Some states or provinces have specific
regulations and speed limits for vehicles that
are towing trailers. Obey the local speed
limits.

Technical and consumer information 10-25

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING

CAUTION
● Failure to follow these guidelines can
result in severe transmission damage.
● Whenever flat towing your vehicle, always tow forward, never backward.
● Never tow your front wheel drive vehicle
with the front tires on the ground. Doing
so may cause serious and expensive
damage to the powertrain.
● DO NOT tow your front wheel drive continuously variable transmission vehicle
with all four wheels on the ground (flat
towing). Doing so WILL DAMAGE internal transmission parts due to lack of
transmission lubrication.
● For emergency towing procedures refer
to “Towing recommended by NISSAN”
in the “In case of emergency” section of
this manual.

DOT (Department of Transportation) Quality
Grades: All passenger car tires must conform to
federal safety requirements in addition to these
grades.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times
as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, however,
and may depart significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.

Continuously Variable Transmission

Traction AA, A, B and C

To tow a vehicle equipped with a continuously
variable transmission, an appropriate vehicle
dolly MUST be placed under the towed vehicle’s
drive wheels. Always follow the dolly manufacturer’s recommendations when using their product.

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the
tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.

10-26 Technical and consumer information

WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
Temperature A, B and C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the
generation of heat, and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the
tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than
the minimum required by law.

WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can
cause heat build-up and possible tire
failure.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
WARRANTY

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the following
emission warranties:

For USA

For USA
1. Emission Defects Warranty
2. Emissions Performance Warranty
Details of this warranty may be found with other
vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information
Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle.
If you did not receive a Warranty Information
Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replacement by writing to:
● Nissan North America, Inc.
Consumer Affairs Department
P.O. Box 685003
Franklin, TN 37068-5003
For Canada
Emission Control System Warranty
Details of this warranty may be found with other
vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information
Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle.
If you did not receive a Warranty Information
Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replacement by writing to:
● Nissan Canada Inc.
5290 Orbitor Drive
Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could
cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying NISSAN.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or NISSAN.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go
to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh
Street, SW., Washington, D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other information
about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.

Technical and consumer information 10-27

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/
MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST
You may notify NISSAN by contacting our
Consumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at
1-800-NISSAN-1.

https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/
7/PCDB-BDPP/fc-cp.aspx?lang=fra
(French speakers)

For Canada

Additional information concerning motor
vehicle safety may be obtained from Transport Canada’s Road Safety Information
Centre at 1-800-333-0371 or online at
www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety (English speakers) or www.tc.gc.ca/securiteroutiere
(French speakers).

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could
cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport Canada in addition
to notifying NISSAN.
If Transport Canada receives complaints,
it may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may request that NISSAN conduct a recall campaign. However, Transport Canada cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your
dealer, or NISSAN.

To notify NISSAN of any safety concerns
please contact our Consumer Information
Centre toll free at 1-800-387-0122.

You may contact Transport Canada’s Defect Investigations and Recalls Division
toll free at 1-800-333-0510. You may
also report safety defects online at:
https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/
7/PCDB-BDPP/fc-cp.aspx?lang=eng
(English speakers) or
10-28 Technical and consumer information

WARNING
A vehicle equipped with All -Wheel Drive
(AWD) should never be tested using a two
wheel dynamometer (such as the dynamometers used by some states for emissions testing), or similar equipment. Make
sure you inform the test facility personnel
that your vehicle is equipped with AWD
before it is placed on a dynamometer.
Using the wrong test equipment may result in drivetrain damage or unexpected
vehicle movement which could result in
serious vehicle damage or personal injury.
Due to legal requirements in some states and
Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may be required to be in what is called the “ready condition” for an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of
the emission control system.
The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” when it
is driven through certain driving patterns. Usually,
the ready condition can be obtained by ordinary
usage of the vehicle.
If a powertrain system component is repaired or
the battery is disconnected, the vehicle may be
reset to a “not ready” condition. Before taking the
I/M
test,
check
the
vehicle’s
inspection/maintenance test readiness condition. Place the ignition switch in the ON position

EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR)
without starting the engine. If the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds , the I/M test
condition is “not ready”. If the MIL does not blink
after 20 seconds, the I/M test condition is
“ready”. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer to set the “ready condition” or to
prepare the vehicle for testing.

This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR
is designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this
vehicle is designed to record such data as:
● How various systems in your vehicle were
operating;
● Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened;
● How far (if at all) the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
● How fast the vehicle was traveling.
● Sounds are not recorded.

These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and
injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by
your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation
occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under
normal driving conditions and no personal data
(e.g. name, gender, age and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with
the type of personally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the
EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer and NISSAN dealer, other parties, such
as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will only
be accessed with the consent of the vehicle
owner or lessee or as otherwise required or permitted by law.

Technical and consumer information 10-29

OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE
MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION
Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for this model
year and prior can be purchased. A Genuine
NISSAN Service Manual is the best source of
service and repair information for your vehicle.
This manual is the same one used by the factorytrained technicians working at NISSAN dealerships. Genuine NISSAN Owner’s Manuals can
also be purchased.
For USA
For current pricing and availability of Genuine
NISSAN Service Manuals, contact:
www.nissan-techinfo.com
For current pricing and availability of Genuine
NISSAN Owner’s Manuals, contact:
1-800-247-5321
For Canada
To purchase a copy of a Genuine NISSAN Service Manual or Owner’s Manual, for this model
year and prior, please contact the nearest
NISSAN dealer. For the phone number and location of a NISSAN dealer in your area, call the
NISSAN Information Center at 1-800-387-0122
and a bilingual NISSAN representative will assist
you.

10-30 Technical and consumer information

11 Index
2nd row bench seat adjustment. . . . . . . . .1-6
A
Aiming control, headlights . . . . . . . . . . .2-41
Air bag (See supplemental restraint
system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-47
Air bag system
Front (See supplemental front impact
air bag system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-54
Air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-65
Air bag warning light. . . . . . . . . . .1-65, 2-15
Air bag warning light, supplemental . .1-65, 2-15
Air cleaner housing filter . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15
Air conditioner
Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . .4-35
Air conditioner specification label . . . .10-12
Air conditioner system refrigerant and
oil recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7
Air conditioner system refrigerant
recommendations. . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7
Heater and air conditioner
controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-33, 4-41
Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . .4-43
Air flow charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37
Alarm system
(See vehicle security system) . . . . . . . . .2-33
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-87
Anchor point locations . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-30
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-77
Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-100
Anti-lock brake warning light. . . . . . . . . .2-11

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . . . .5-92
Apps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-77
Armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6
Around View® Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-17
Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-43
AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-44
Bluetooth® audio . . . . . . . . . .4-73, 4-74
Bluetooth® streaming audio . . . .4-73, 4-74
Compact disc (CD) player . . . . .4-55, 4-62
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)
player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-52, 4-56
FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-44
iPod® Player . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-68, 4-70
iPod® player operation . . . . . . .4-68, 4-70
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-43
USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . .4-64, 4-66
USB (Universal Serial Bus)
Connection Port . . . . . . . . . . .4-64, 4-66
Autolight switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39
Automatic
Automatic drive positioner . . . . .3-41, 3-43
Automatic power window switch . . . . .2-59
Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . . . . . . .3-39
Automatic door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7
Automatic drive positioner . . . . . . .3-41, 3-43
AUX jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-64
AWD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-87
B
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-100, 8-10

Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21
Key fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21
NISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . .8-23, 8-24
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Belt (See drive belt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13
Blind Spot Warning (BSW) warning
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Block heater
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-101
Bluetooth® audio . . . . . . . . . . . .4-73, 4-74
Bluetooth® hands-free phone
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-82, 4-95
Bluetooth® streaming audio with Navigation
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-74
Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-44
Brake
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . .5-92
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Brake light (See stop light). . . . . . . . .8-27
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-92
Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11
Brake wear indicators . . . . . . . .2-18, 8-18
Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18
Brake assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-93
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-92
Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-85
Brightness/contrast button. . . . . . . . . . .4-10
Brightness control
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42

Bulb check/instrument panel . . . . . . . . . .2-11
Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27
C
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Cargo area storage bin . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-53
Cargo cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-55
Cargo (See vehicle loading information) . . .10-13
Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-82
CD care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-75
CD player (See audio system) . . . . . .4-55, 4-62
Checking bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11
Check tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31
Child restraints . . . . . . .1-23, 1-24, 1-25, 1-27
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-27
Precautions on child
restraints. . . . . . . . .1-25, 1-32, 1-39, 1-44
Top tether strap anchor point locations . .1-30
Child restraint with top tether strap. . . . . . .1-30
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7
Chimes, audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Cleaning exterior and interior . . . . . . . .7-2, 7-4
Clock setting
(models with Navigation System) . . . . . . . .4-7
Clock setting
(models without Navigation System) . . . . . .4-53
C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . .10-11
Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-100
Compact disc (CD) player . . . . . . . .4-55, 4-62
Connect phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-77
Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50
Console light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-62

11-2

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT). . .5-20
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Driving with Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Control panel buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
Brightness/contrast button . . . . . . . . .4-10
Enter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
Setting button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
Controls
Heater and air conditioner
controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-33, 4-41
Coolant
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . .8-5
Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . .8-5
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-6
Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-7
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51
D
Daytime running light system (Canada only) . .2-41
Defroster switch
Rear window and outside mirror defroster
switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38
Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9
Dimmer switch for instrument panel . . . . . .2-42
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Display controls (see control panel buttons) . .4-4
Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
Doors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13

Drive positioner, Automatic. . . . . . . .3-41, 3-43
Driving
Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . .5-100
Driving with Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Precautions when starting and
driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4, 5-11
Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
E
ECO mode switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Economy - fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-87
Emergency engine shutoff. . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Emission control information label . . . . . .10-11
Emission control system warranty. . . . . . .10-27
Engine
Before starting the engine. . . . . . . . . .5-18
Block heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-101
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . .8-5
Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . . .8-8
Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . .8-5
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . .8-6
Engine compartment check locations . . . .8-3
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-6
Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6
Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . .10-6
Engine oil viscosity. . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6
Engine serial number. . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18

Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . .2-6
Enter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
Event Data recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-29
Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . .5-4
Explanation of maintenance items . . . . . . . .9-2
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . .9-5
Extended storage switch . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48
Eyeglass case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50

Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Fuel octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-5
Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Loose fuel cap warning . . . . . . . . . . .2-31
Fuel efficient driving tips. . . . . . . . . . . . .5-85
Fuel-filler door. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34, 3-34
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19
Fusible links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20

Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44
Heated steering wheel switch . . . . . . . . .2-45
Heater
Heater and air conditioner
controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-33, 4-41
Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . .4-34, 4-42
Hill start assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-99
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26
Hook
Luggage hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-54
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43

G
Flashers (See hazard warning flasher switch) . .6-2
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3
Floor mat positioning aid . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5
Fluid
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Engine coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6
Windshield-washer fluid. . . . . . . . . . .8-10
F.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43
Forward Emergency Braking (FEB). . . . . . .2-12
Front air bag system
(See supplemental restraint system) . . . . . .1-54
Front power seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Fuel
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-87
Fuel-filler door and cap . . . . . . . . . . .3-35

Gas cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gauge
Engine coolant temperature gauge
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . .
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . .
Glove box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . .3-35
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. .2-6
. .2-6
. .2-5
. .2-4
. .2-5
. .2-5
. .9-2
.2-50

H
Hands-free phone system,
Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-82, 4-95
Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . .6-2
Headlight aiming control . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41
Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . . . .2-39
Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26
Headlights, aiming control. . . . . . . . . . . .2-41
Head restraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10

I
Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Ignition Switch
Push-Button Ignition Switch . . . . . . . .5-14
Immobilizer system. . . . . . . . .2-34, 5-14, 5-17
Important vehicle information label . . . . . .10-11
In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15
Increasing fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . . . .5-87
Indicator lights and audible reminders
(See warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11, 2-16
Information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Inside automatic anti-glare mirror . . . . . . . .3-39
Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . .2-42
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0-6, 2-2
Instrument panel dimmer switch . . . . . . . .2-42
Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC). . . . . . . . .5-46
Intelligent Key system
Key operating range . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12
Key operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14
Mechanical key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
Remote keyless entry operation. . . . . . .3-17

11-3

Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21
Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-62, 2-63
iPod® Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-68, 4-70
ISOFIX child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-27
J
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10, 8-12
K
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
Key fob battery replacement . . . . . . . . . .8-21
Keyless entry
With Intelligent Key system
(See Intelligent Key system). . . . . . . . .3-17
Without Intelligent Key system
(See remote keyless entry
system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2, 3-7, 3-8
Keys
NISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . . .3-3, 3-11
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys. .3-4
L
Label
Tire and Loading Information label
Labels
Air conditioner specification label .
C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . .
Emission control information label
Engine serial number. . . . . . . .

11-4

. . . .10-12
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.10-12
.10-11
.10-11
.10-11

F.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . .10-11
Tire and Loading Information label . . . .10-12
Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . .10-10
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10
Warning labels (for SRS) . . . . . . . . . .1-65
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-27
License plate
Installing the license plate . . . . . . . . .10-12
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27
Liftgate release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33
Light
Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-65, 2-15
Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . . . .8-27
Bulb check/instrument panel . . . . . . . .2-11
Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27
Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Console light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-62
Exterior and Interior lights . . . . . . . . . .8-27
Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43
Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . .2-39
Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . .2-39
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-62, 2-63
Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . .2-12
Low windshield-washer fluid warning
light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14, 2-31
Passenger air bag and status light . . . . .1-57
Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-63
Security indicator light. . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Spotlights (See map light) . . . . . . . . .2-63
Warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11, 2-16

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26
Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-63
Lock
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-7
Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
Liftgate release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33
Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6
Loose fuel cap warning. . . . . . . . . .2-31, 3-36
Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . . .2-14, 2-31
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . . . .2-12
Low windshield-washer fluid warning
light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14, 2-31
Luggage hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-54
Luggage rack (see roof rack) . . . . . . . . . .2-56
Luggage (See vehicle loading information). .10-13
Luggage storage
(see vehicle loading information) . . . . . . . .2-53
M
Maintenance
General maintenance . . . . . . .
Inside the vehicle . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance precautions . . . . .
Outside the vehicle . . . . . . . .
Seat belt maintenance. . . . . . .
Under the hood and vehicle . . .
Maintenance log . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance requirements . . . . . .
Maintenance schedules . . . . . . . .
Maintenance under severe operation
conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Malfunction indicator light . . . . . . .
Manual front seat adjustment . . . . .
Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. .9-2
. .9-3
. .8-2
. .9-2
.1-23
. .9-4
.9-13
. .9-2
. .9-7

.
.
.
.

.9-12
.2-16
. .1-3
.2-63

Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-41, 3-43
Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . .2-42
Mirror
Automatic anti-glare inside mirror. . . . . .3-39
Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-40
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-39
Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-39
Mobile apps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-77
Moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-59, 2-60
Moving Object Detection (MOD) . . . . . . . .4-28
N
NissanConnectSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-77
NissanConnectSM Services . . . . . . . . . . .4-78
NISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . . . . .3-3, 3-11
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34, 5-14, 5-17
NISSAN voice recognition system . . . . . .4-104
O
Octane rating (See fuel octane rating) . . . .
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oil
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . .
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . .
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine oil and oil filter recommendation .

.10-5
. .2-5
.10-2
. .8-7
. .8-8
. .8-6
. .8-6
.10-6

Engine oil viscosity. . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6
One shot call . . . . . . . . . . . .4-85, 4-85, 4-97
Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-40
Overheat
If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . .6-12
Owner’s manual order form . . . . . . . . . .10-30
Owner’s manual/service manual order
information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-30

Precautions on child
restraints. . . . . . . . .1-25, 1-32, 1-39, 1-44
Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . . .1-15
Precautions on supplemental restraint
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-47
Precautions when starting and
driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4, 5-11
Programmable features . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12

P
R
Parking
Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . . . .5-91
Parking brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-63
Phone, Bluetooth® hands-free
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-82, 4-95
Power
Front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6
Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46
Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-58
Power steering system . . . . . . . . . . .5-91
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-57
Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-58
Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46
Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-91
Precautions
Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
On-pavement and off-road driving
precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9
Precautions on booster
seats . . . . . . . . . . .1-25, 1-32, 1-39, 1-44

Radio
Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . .4-82
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)
player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-52, 4-56
Readiness for inspection maintenance (I/M)
test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-28
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) . . . . . . . .5-36
Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-58
Rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-39
RearView Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11
Rear window and outside mirror defroster
switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38
Rear window wiper and washer switches . . .2-37
Recommended Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Recorders
Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-29
Refrigerant recommendation . . . . . . . . . .10-7
Registering a vehicle in another country . . .10-10
Remote keyless entry system . . . . .3-2, 3-7, 3-8
Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23, 5-20
Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . . . .10-27
Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-56

11-5

S
Safety
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-7
Child seat belts . . . . .1-25, 1-32, 1-39, 1-44
Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . .10-27
Seat adjustment
Front manual seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-3
Front power seat adjustment . . . . . . . . .1-4
Second row bench seats . . . . . . . . . . .1-6
Seatback pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49
Seat belt
Child safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23
Infants and small children . . . . . . . . . .1-24
Injured Person . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18
Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24
Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . . .1-15
Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18
Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-22
Seat belt maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . .1-23
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15, 7-6
Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . .1-21
Three-point type with retractor . . . . . . .1-18
Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-22
Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . .1-18, 2-15
Seats
2nd row bench seat adjustment . . . . . . .1-6
Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6
Automatic drive positioner . . . . . .3-41, 3-43
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44
Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . .1-3
Security indicator light. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17

11-6

Security system (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer
System), engine start . . . . . . .2-34, 5-14, 5-17
Security systems
Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . . .2-33
Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18
Service manual order form. . . . . . . . . . .10-30
Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . . . .4-43
Setting button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . . . .1-21
Siri® Eyes-Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-78
Smartphone connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . .4-77
Spark plug replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14
Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
SPORT mode switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Spotlights (See map light) . . . . . . . . . . .2-63
SRS warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-65
Standard maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8
Starting
Before starting the engine. . . . . . . . . .5-18
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10, 8-12
Precautions when starting and
driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4, 5-11
Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Starting the engine (models with NISSAN
Intelligent Key® system). . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Steering
Power steering system . . . . . . . . . . .5-91
Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37
Stop light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49

Storage bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-53
Sunglasses case. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50
Sunglasses holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-60
Sunroof (see Moonroof) . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-59
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37
Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . .1-65
Supplemental air bag warning light . . .1-65, 2-15
Supplemental front impact air bag system . . .1-54
Supplemental restraint system
Information and warning labels . . . . . . .1-65
Precautions on supplemental restraint
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-47
Supplemental restraint system
(Supplemental air bag system) . . . . . . . . .1-47
Switch
Autolight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39
Automatic power window switch . . . . . .2-59
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43
Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . .6-2
Headlight aiming control . . . . . . . . . .2-41
Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . .2-39
Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . .2-39
Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . .2-42
Power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6
Rear window and outside mirror defroster
switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38
Rear window wiper and washer
switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37
Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off
switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45

T
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
Temperature gauge
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-6
Theft (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System),
engine start. . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34, 5-14, 5-17
Three-way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4
Tire
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3
Spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5, 8-41
Tire and Loading Information label . . . .10-12
Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-37
Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29
Tire rotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-38
Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-35
Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . .10-26
Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29
Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9
Tire pressure
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . .2-12
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . .5-5
Top tether strap child restraint . . . . . . . . .1-30
Towing
Flat towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-25
Towing load/specification . . . . . . . . .10-20
Tow truck towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-17
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-17
Transmission
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Driving with Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20

Travel (See registering a vehicle in another
country) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10
Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
Troubleshooting guide
(NISSAN voice recognition system) . . . . .4-108
Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42
U
Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . .10-26
USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-64, 4-66
Audio file operation . . . . . . . . . .4-65, 4-67
V
Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38
Variable voltage control system . . . . . . . . .8-13
Vehicle dimensions and weights . . . . . . . .10-9
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch . . .2-45
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . . . .5-94
Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10
Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . . . .10-10
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
(Chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10
Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . .10-10
Vehicle immobilizer system . . . .2-34, 5-14, 5-17
Vehicle Information Display . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . .10-13
Vehicle recovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-15, 6-16
Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33
Vehicle security system (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System), engine start . . . . .2-34, 5-14, 5-17
Ventilators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-32
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37

Voice Prompt Interrupt . . . . . . . . . .4-85, 4-97
Voice recognition system . . . . . . . . . . .4-104
W
Warning
Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-65, 2-15
Anti-lock brake warning light . . . . . . . .2-11
Battery charge warning light . . . . . . . .2-12
Blind Spot Warning (BSW) warning
light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11
Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . .6-2
Loose fuel cap warning. . . . . . . .2-31, 3-36
Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . .2-14, 2-31
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . .2-12
Low windshield-washer fluid warning
light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14, 2-31
Passenger air bag and status light . . . . .1-57
Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . .1-18, 2-15
Supplemental air bag warning
light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-65, 2-15
TPMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . . .2-33
Warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11, 2-16
Warning labels (for SRS) . . . . . . . . . .1-65
Warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11, 2-16
Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . .2-11, 2-16
Checking bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11
Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11, 2-16
Warning lights. . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11, 2-16
Warning lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11, 2-16

11-7

Warning lights, indicator lights and audible
reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Washer switch
Rear window wiper and washer
switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Weights (See dimensions and weights) . .
Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
When traveling or registering in another
country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Locking passengers’ windows . . . . .
Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . .
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield-washer fluid. . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . .
Wiper
Rear window wiper and washer
switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiper blades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . .

11-8

. .2-10
.
.
.
.

.2-37
.10-9
.8-29
.10-9

.10-10
. .2-57
. .2-58
. .2-58
. .2-57
. .2-58
. .8-10
. .8-16
. .2-37
. .8-16
. .2-36

GAS STATION INFORMATION
FUEL RECOMMENDATION:
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane
rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 91).

CAUTION
● Using a fuel other than that specified
could adversely affect the emission
control system, and may also affect the
warranty coverage.
● Under no circumstances should a
leaded gasoline be used, because this
will damage the three-way catalyst.
● Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your
vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed to
run on E-15 or E-85 fuel. Using E-15 or
E-85 fuel in a vehicle not specifically
designed for E-15 or E-85 fuel can adversely affect the emission control devices and systems of the vehicle. Damage caused by such fuel is not covered
by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.

● Do not use fuel that contains the octane
booster methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using fuel
containing MMT may adversely affect
vehicle performance and vehicle emissions. Not all fuel dispensers are labeled to indicate MMT content, so you
may have to consult your gasoline retailer for more details. Note that Federal and California laws prohibit the use
of MMT in reformulated gasoline.
● U.S. government regulations require
ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange and
black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for
that region.
For additional information, refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities” in the
“Technical and consumer information” section of
this manual.

ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION:
• Genuine “Nissan Motor Oil 0W-20 SN”
For additional information, refer to “Engine oil and
oil filter recommendations” in the “Technical and
consumer information” section of this manual.

COLD TIRE PRESSURE:
For additional information, refer to “Tire and
Loading Information label” in the “Technical and
consumer information” section of this manual.
The label is typically located on the driver side
center pillar or on the driver’s door. For additional
information, refer to “Wheels and tires” in the
“Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLE
BREAK-IN PROCEDURE:
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of vehicle
use, follow the break-in procedure recommendations for the future reliability and economy of your
new vehicle. For additional information, refer to
“Break-in schedule” in the “Starting and driving”
section of this manual. Failure to follow these
recommendations may result in vehicle damage
or shortened engine life.

46325 2c Cover Tweddle Group • PDF Supplied 8/10/2016

GRACOL PROOF on PRODUCTION PAPER

Black + PMS 200

2017 NISSAN ROGUE

2017

ROGUE

OWNER’S MANUAL
and MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

Back Cover

T32-D

Printing : August 2016 (08)
Publication No.: OM0E
0L32U2
OM17EA
0T32U0
Printed in U.S.A.
T00UM-JM03D

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

Front Cover

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : Yes
Create Date                     : 2016:08:31 11:51:42Z
Keywords                        : nissan;, rogue;, 2017;, owner, manual;, owner, guide;, owner’s, manual;, pdf;, vehicle, manual;, service;, maintenance
Modify Date                     : 2016:12:01 10:47:24-06:00
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.4-c005 78.147326, 2012/08/23-13:03:03
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 8.0.0 (Windows)
Creator Tool                    : XPP
Metadata Date                   : 2016:12:01 10:47:24-06:00
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : 2017 Nissan Rogue | Owner's Manual and Maintenance Information | Nissan USA
Description                     : Download the 2017 Nissan Rogue Owner's Manual at the official Nissan USA website.
Creator                         : 
Subject                         : nissan, rogue, 2017, owner manual, owner guide, owner’s manual, pdf, vehicle manual, service, maintenance
Document ID                     : uuid:26d6c720-e609-42cc-8b99-1c4ce0de31ac
Instance ID                     : uuid:c9c07cee-b84b-4346-bb89-801d4573fd7c
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 529

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

2017 Nissan Rogue | Owner's Manual And Maintenance Information USA

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation